Shipyard Safety PDF

Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt.
1915
(2) Except as provided in paragraph occasion that OSHA intends to either

(m)(3) of this section, the Assistant transfer personally identifiable em-
Secretary shall not approve a request ployee medical information to another
for an inter-agency transfer of person- agency or disclose it to a member of
ally identifiable employee medical in- the public other than to an affected
formation, which has not been con- employee. When feasible, the OSHA
sented to by the affected employees, Medical Records Officer shall take rea-
unless the request is by a public health sonable steps to assure that advance
agency which: notice is provided to affected employ-
(i) Needs the requested information ees when the employee medical infor-
in a personally identifiable form for a mation to be transferred or disclosed
substantial public health purpose, contains direct personal identifiers.
(ii) Will not use the requested infor- [45 FR 35294, May 23, 1980; 45 FR 54334, Aug.
mation to make individual determina- 15, 1980, as amended at 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3,
tions concerning affected employees 2006]
which could be to their detriment,
(iii) Has regulations or established PART 1915OCCUPATIONAL SAFE-
written procedures providing protec- TY AND HEALTH STANDARDS FOR
tion for personally identifiable medical
information substantially equivalent
SHIPYARD EMPLOYMENT
to that of this section, and Subpart AGeneral Provisions
(iv) Satisfies an exemption to the
Privacy Act to the extent that the Pri- Sec.
vacy Act applies to the requested infor- 1915.1 Purpose and authority.
mation (See, 5 U.S.C. 552a(b); 29 CFR 1915.2 Scope and application.
1915.3 Responsibility.
70a.3). 1915.4 Definitions.
(3) Upon the approval of the Assist- 1915.5 Incorporation by reference.
ant Secretary, personally identifiable 1915.6 Commercial diving operations.
employee medical information may be 1915.7 Competent person.
transferred to: 1915.8 OMB control numbers under the Pa-
(i) The National Institute for Occupa- perwork Reduction Act.
tional Safety and Health (NIOSH) and
Subpart BConfined and Enclosed Spaces
(ii) The Department of Justice when
and Other Dangerous Atmospheres in
necessary with respect to a specific ac-
Shipyard Employment
tion under the Occupational Safety and
Health Act. 1915.11 Scope, application, and definitions
(4) The Assistant Secretary shall not applicable to this subpart.
approve a request for public disclosure 1915.12 Precautions and the order of testing
of employee medical information con- before entering confined and enclosed
spaces and other dangerous atmospheres.
taining direct personal identifiers un-
1915.13 Cleaning and other cold work.
less there are compelling cir- 1915.14 Hot work.
cumstances affecting the health or 1915.15 Maintenance of safe conditions.
safety of an individual. 1915.16 Warning signs and labels.
(5) The Assistant Secretary shall not APPENDIX A TO SUBPART BCOMPLIANCE AS-
approve a request for public disclosure SISTANCE GUIDELINES FOR CONFINED AND
of employee medical information which ENCLOSED SPACES AND OTHER DANGEROUS
contains information which could rea- ATMOSPHERES
sonably be used indirectly to identify APPENDIX B TO SUBPART BREPRINT OF U.S.
COAST GUARD REGULATIONS REFERENCED
specific employees when the disclosure
IN SUBPART B, FOR DETERMINATION OF
would constitute a clearly unwarranted COAST GUARD AUTHORIZED PERSONS
invasion of personal privacy (See, 5
U.S.C. 552(b)(6); 29 CFR 70.26). Subpart CSurface Preparation and
(6) Except as to inter-agency trans- Preservation
fers to NIOSH or the Department of
Justice, the OSHA Medical Records Of- 1915.31 Scope and application of subpart.
1915.32 Toxic cleaning solvents.
ficer shall assure that advance notice 1915.33 Chemical paint and preservative re-
is provided to any collective bar- movers.
gaining agent representing affected 1915.34 Mechanical paint removers.
employees and to the employer on each 1915.35 Painting.
27
VerDate Aug<31>2005 12:49 Jul 31, 2007 Jkt 211114 PO 00000 Frm 00037 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\211114.XXX 211114
Pt. 1915 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7107 Edition)
1915.36 Flammable liquids. Subpart IPersonal Protective Equipment
(PPE)
Subpart DWelding, Cutting and Heating
1915.151 Scope, application and definitions.
1915.51 Ventilation and protection in weld- 1915.152 General requirements.
ing, cutting and heating. 1915.153 Eye and face protection.
1915.53 Welding, cutting and heating in way 1915.154 Respiratory protection.
of preservative coatings. 1915.155 Head protection.
1915.54 Welding, cutting and heating of hol- 1915.156 Foot protection.
low metal containers and structures not
1915.157 Hand and body protection.
covered by 1915.12.
1915.158 Lifesaving equipment.
1915.55 Gas welding and cutting.
1915.159 Personal fall arrest systems
1915.56 Arc welding and cutting.
(PFAS).
1915.57 Uses of fissionable material in ship
1915.160 Positioning device systems.
repairing and shipbuilding.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART INON-MANDATORY
Subpart EScaffolds, Ladders and Other GUIDELINES FOR HAZARD ASSESSMENT,
Working Surfaces PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)
SELECTION, AND PPE TRAINING PROGRAM
1915.71 Scaffolds or staging. APPENDIX B TO SUBPART IGENERAL TESTING
1915.72 Ladders. CONDITIONS AND ADDITIONAL GUIDELINES
1915.73 Guarding of deck openings and FOR PERSONAL FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS
edges. (NON-MANDATORY)
1915.74 Access to vessels.
1915.75 Access to and guarding of dry docks Subpart JShips Machinery and Piping
and marine railways. Systems
1915.76 Access to cargo spaces and confined
spaces. 1915.161 Scope and application of subpart.
1915.77 Working surfaces. 1915.162 Ships boilers.
1915.163 Ships piping systems.
Subpart FGeneral Working Conditions 1915.164 Ships propulsion machinery.
1915.165 Ships deck machinery.
1915.91 Housekeeping.
1915.92 Illumination. Subpart KPortable, Unfired Pressure Ves-
1915.93 Utilities.
sels, Drums and Containers, Other
1915.94 Work in confined or isolated spaces.
1915.95 Ship repairing and shipbuilding Than Ships Equipment
work on or in the vicinity of radar and 1915.171 Scope and application of subpart.
radio. 1915.172 Portable air receivers and other
1915.96 Work in or on lifeboats. unfired pressure vessels.
1915.97 Health and sanitation. 1915.173 Drums and containers.
1915.98 First aid.
1915.100 Retention of DOT markings, plac-
Subpart LElectrical Machinery
ards and labels.
1915.181 Electrical circuits and distribution
Subpart GGear and Equipment for boards.
Rigging and Materials Handling
Subparts MO [Reserved]
1915.111 Inspection.
1915.112 Ropes, chains and slings. Subpart PFire Protection in Shipyard
1915.113 Shackles and hooks.
1915.114 Chain falls and pull-lifts.
Employment
1915.115 Hoisting and hauling equipment. 1915.501 General provisions.
1915.116 Use of gear. 1915.502 Fire safety plan.
1915.117 Qualifications of operators. 1915.503 Precautions for hot work.
1915.118 Tables. 1915.504 Fire watches.
1915.120 Powered industrial truck operator 1915.505 Fire response.
training. 1915.506 Hazards of fixed extinguishing sys-
tems on board vessels and vessel sec-
Subpart HTools and Related Equipment tions.
1915.131 General precautions. 1915.507 Land-side fire protection systems.
1915.132 Portable electric tools. 1915.508 Training.
1915.133 Hand tools. 1915.509 Definitions applicable to this sub-
1915.134 Abrasive wheels. part.
1915.135 Powder actuated fastening tools. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART P OF PART 1915
1915.136 Internal combustion engines, other MODEL FIRE SAFETY PLAN (NON-MANDA-
than ships equipment. TORY)
28
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor 1915.3
Subparts QY [Reserved] ers Compensation Act, as amended (33

U.S.C. 941) and occupational safety and
Subpart ZToxic and Hazardous health standards issued by the Sec-
Substances retary pursuant to section 6 of the Oc-
1915.1000 Air contaminants. cupational Safety and Health Act of
1915.1001 Asbestos. 1970 (29 U.S.C. 655).
1915.1002 Coal tar pitch volatiles; interpre-
tation of term. 1915.2 Scope and application.
1915.1003 13 carcinogens (4Nitrobiphenyl, (a) Except where otherwise provided,
etc.). the provisions of this part shall apply
1915.1004 alpha-Naphthylamine. to all ship repairing, shipbuilding and
1915.1005 [Reserved]
shipbreaking employments and related
1915.1006 Methyl chloromethyl ether.
1915.1007 3,3-Dichlorobenzidiene (and its employments.
salts). (b) This part does not apply to mat-
1915.1008 bis-Chloromethyl ether. ters under the control of the United
1915.1009 beta-Naphthylamine. States Coast Guard within the scope of
1915.1010 Benzidine. Title 52 of the Revised Statutes and
1915.1011 4-Aminodiphenyl. acts supplementary or amendatory
1915.1012 Ethyleneimine. thereto (46 U.S.C. secs. 11388 passim)
1915.1013 beta-Propiolactone.
including, but not restricted to, the
1915.1014 2-Acetylaminofluorene.
1915.1015 4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene. master, ships officer, crew members,
1915.1016 N-Nitrosodimethylamine. design, construction and maintenance
1915.1017 Vinyl chloride. of the vessel, its gear and equipment;
1915.1018 Inorganic arsenic. to matters within the regulatory au-
1915.1020 Access to employee exposure and thority of the United States Coast
medical records. Guard to safeguard vessels, harbors,
1915.1025 Lead. ports and waterfront facilities under
1915.1026 Chromium (VI).
the provisions of the Espionage Act of
1915.1027 Cadmium.
1915.1028 Benzene. June 17, 1917, as amended (50 U.S.C. 191
1915.1030 Bloodborne pathogens. et seq.; 22 U.S.C. 401 et seq.); including
1915.1044 1,2-dibromo-3-chloropropane. the provisions of Executive Order 10173,
1915.1045 Acrylonitrile. as amended by Executive Orders 10277
1915.1047 Ethylene oxide. and 10352 (3 CFR, 19491953 Comp., pp.
1915.1048 Formaldehyde. 356, 778 and 873); or to matters within
1915.1050 Methylenedianiline. the regulatory authority of the United
1915.1052 Methylene chloride.
States Coast Guard with respect to
1915.1200 Hazard communication.
1915.1450 Occupational exposure to haz- lights, warning devices, safety equip-
ardous chemicals in laboratories. ment and other matters relating to the
promotion of safety of lives and prop-
AUTHORITY: Section 41, Longshore and Har-
erty under section 4(e) of the Outer
bor Workers Compensation Act (33 U.S.C.
941); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Continental Shelf Lands Act (43 U.S.C.
Safety and Health Act of 1970 (20 U.S.C. 653, 1333).
655, and 687); and Secretary of Labors Order
No. 1271 (36 FR 8754), 876 (41 FR 25059), 983 1915.3 Responsibility.
(48 FR 35736), 190 (55 FR 9033), 696 (62 FR (a) The responsibility for compliance
111), 32000 (62 FR 50017), or 52002 (67 FR with the regulations of this part is
65008) as applicable. placed upon employers as defined in
Sections 1915.120 and 1915.152 of 29 CFR also
issued under 29 CFR part 1911.
1915.4.
(b) This part does not apply to own-
SOURCE: 47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, unless ers, operators, agents or masters of
otherwise noted. vessels unless such persons are acting
as employers. However, this part is
Subpart AGeneral Provisions not intended to relieve owners, opera-
tors, agents or masters of vessels who
1915.1 Purpose and authority. are not employers from responsibil-
The provisions in this part constitute ities or duties now placed upon them
safety and health regulations issued by by law, regulation or custom.
the Secretary pursuant to section 41 of (c) The responsibilities placed upon
the Longshoremens and Harbor Work- the competent person herein shall be
29
1915.4 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7107 Edition)
deemed to be the responsibilities of the ations, conversions, installations,

employer. cleaning, painting, and maintenance
work.
1915.4 Definitions. (k) The term shipbuilding means the
(a) The term SHALL indicates provi- construction of a vessel including the
sions which are mandatory. installation of machinery and equip-
(b) The term Secretary means the Sec- ment.
retary of Labor. (l) The term shipbreaking means any
(c) The term employer means an em- breaking down of a vessels structure
ployer, any of whose employees are em- for the purpose of scrapping the vessel,
ployed, in whole or in part, in ship re- including the removal of gear, equip-
pairing, shipbuilding, shipbreaking or ment or any component part of a ves-
related employments as defined in this sel.
section on the navigable waters of the (m) The term related employment
United States, including dry docks, means any employment performed as
graving docks and marine railways. an incident to or in conjunction with
(d) The term employee means any per- ship repairing, shipbuilding or
son engaged in ship repairing, ship- shipbreaking work, including, but not
building, shipbreaking or related em- restricted to, inspection, testing, and
ployments on the navigable waters of employment as a watchman.
the United States, including dry docks, (n) The term hazardous substance
graving docks and marine railways, means a substance which by reason of
other than the master, ships officers, being explosive, flammable, poisonous,
crew of the vessel, or any person en- corrosive, oxidizing, irritant, or other-
gaged by the master to repair any ves- wise harmful is likely to cause injury.
sel under 18 net tons. (o) The term competent person for pur-
(e) The term gangway means any poses of this part means a person who
ramp-like or stair-like means of access is capable of recognizing and evalu-
provided to enable personnel to board ating employee exposure to hazardous
or leave a vessel including accommoda- substances or to other unsafe condi-
tion ladders, gangplanks and brows. tions and is capable of specifying the
(f) The term vessel includes every de- necessary protection and precautions
scription of watercraft or other artifi- to be taken to ensure the safety of em-
cial contrivance used, or capable of ployees as required by the particular
being used, as a means of transpor- regulation under the condition to
tation on water, including special pur- which it applies. For the purposes of
pose floating structures not primarily subparts B, C, and D of this part, ex-
designed for or used as a means of cept for 1915.35(b)(8) and 1915.36(a)(5),
transportation on water. to which the above definition applies,
(g) For purposes of 1915.74, the term the competent person must also meet
barge means an unpowered, flat bot- the additional requirements of 1915.7.
tom, shallow draft vessel including (p) The term confined space means a
scows, carfloats and lighters. For pur- compartment of small size and limited
poses of this section, the term does not access such as a double bottom tank,
include ship shaped or deep draft cofferdam, or other space which by its
barges. small size and confined nature can
(h) For purposes of 1915.74, the term readily create or aggravate a hazardous
river tow boat means a shallow draft, exposure.
low free board, self-propelled vessel de- (q) The term enclosed space means
signed to tow river barges by pushing any space, other than a confined space,
ahead. For purposes of this section, the which is enclosed by bulkheads and
term does not include other towing overhead. It includes cargo holds,
vessels. tanks, quarters, and machinery and
(i) The term shipyard employment boiler spaces.
means ship repairing, shipbuilding, (r) The term hot work means riveting,
shipbreaking and related employments. welding, burning or other fire or spark
(j) The terms ship repair and ship re- producing operations.
pairing mean any repair of a vessel in- (s) The term cold work means any
cluding, but not restricted to, alter- work which does not involve riveting,
30
welding, burning or other fire or spark reference in the corresponding sections

producing operations. noted as they exist on the date of the
(t) The term portable unfired pressure approval, and a notice of any change in
vessel means any pressure container or these materials will be published in the
vessel used aboard ship, other than the FEDERAL REGISTER. These
ships equipment, containing liquids or incorporations by reference were ap-
gases under pressure, excepting pres- proved by the Director of the Federal
sure vessels built to Department of Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C.
Transportation regulations under 49 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51.
CFR part 178, subparts C and H. (c) Copies of the following standards
(u) The term powder actuated fas- that are issued by the respective pri-
tening tool means a tool or machine vate standards organizations may be
which drives a stud, pin, or fastener by obtained from the issuing organiza-
means of an explosive charge. tions. The materials are available for
(v) For purposes of 1915.97, the term purchase at the corresponding address-
hazardous material means a material es of the private standards organiza-
which has one or more of the following
tions noted below. In addition, all are
characteristics:
available for inspection through the
(1) Has a flash point below 140 F.,
OSHA Docket Office, room N2625, U.S.
closed cup, or is subject to spontaneous
Department of Labor, 200 Constitution
heating;
Ave., NW., Washington, DC 20210, or
(2) Has a threshold limit value below
any of its regional offices or at the Na-
500 p.p.m. in the case of a gas or vapor,
tional Archives and Records Adminis-
below 500 mg./m.3 for fumes, and below
tration (NARA). For information on
25 m.p.p.c.f. in case of a dust;
(3) Has a single dose oral LD50 below the availability of this material at
500 mg./kg.; NARA, call 2027416030, or go to: http://
(4) Is subject to polymerization with www.archives.gov/federallregister/
the release of large amounts of energy; codeloflfederallregulations/
(5) Is a strong oxidizing or reducing ibrllocations.html.
agent; (d)(1) The following material is avail-
(6) Causes first degree burns to skin able for purchase from the American
in short time exposure, or is system- National Standards Institute, 11 West
ically toxic by skin contact; or 42nd Street, New York, NY 10036.
(7) In the course of normal oper- (i) ANSI A14.11975 Safety Require-
ations, may produce dusts, gases, ments for Portable Wood Ladders, IBR
fumes, vapors, mists, or smokes which approved for 1915.72(a)(6).
have one or more of the above charac- (ii) ANSI A14.21972 Safety Require-
teristics. ments for Portable Metal Ladders, IBR
approved for 1915.72(a)(4).
[47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 67
FR 44541, July 3, 2002] (iii) ANSI B7.11964 Safety Code for
the Use, Care, and Protection of Abra-
1915.5 Incorporation by reference. sive Wheels, IBR approval for
(a) Specifications, standards, and 1915.134(c)
codes of agencies of the U.S. Govern- (iv) ANSI Z87.11989 Practice for Oc-
ment, to the extent specified in the cupational and Educational Eye and
text, form a part of the regulations of Face Protection, IBR approved for
this part. In addition, under the au- 1915.153(b)(1).
thority vested in the Secretary under (v) ANSI Z87.11979 Practice for Occu-
the Act, the specifications, standards, pational and Educational Eye and Face
and codes of organizations which are Protection, IBR approved for
not agencies of the U.S. Government, 1915.153(b)(2).
in effect on the date of the promulga- (vi) ANSI Z89.11986 Personnel Pro-
tion of the regulations of this part as tectionProtective Headgear for In-
listed below, to the extent specified in dustrial Workers Requirements, IBR
the text, form a part of the regulations approved for 1915.155(b)(1)
of this part. (vii) ANSI Z89.11969 Safety Require-
(b) The materials listed in paragraph ment for Industrial Head Protection,
(d) of this section are incorporated by IBR approved for 1915.155(b)(2).
31
(viii) ANSI Z411991 Personal Protec- (ix) NFPA 132002 Standard for the
tionProtective Footwear, IBR ap- Installation of Sprinkler Systems, IBR
proved for 1915.156(b)(1) approved for 1915.507(d)(2).
(ix) ANSI Z411983 Personal Protec- (x) NFPA 7502003 Standard on Water
tionProtective Footwear, IBR ap- Mist Fire Protection Systems, IBR ap-
proved for 1915.156(b)(2). proved for 1915.507(d)(2).
(2) The following material is avail- (xi) NFPA 252002, Inspection, Test-
able for purchase from the American ing, and Maintenance of Water-Based
Society of Mechanical Engineers, 345 Fire Protection Systems, IBR approved
East 47th Street, New York, New York for 1915.507(d)(2).
10017: (xii) NFPA 152001, Standard for
(i) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire
Code, Section VIII, Rules for Construc- Protection, IBR approved for
tion of Unfired Pressure Vessels, 1963, 1915.507(d)(3).
IBR approved for 1915.172(a). (xiii) NFPA 112005 Standard for Low-
(3) The following material is avail- , Medium-, and High-Expansion Foam,
able for purchase from the American IBR approved for 1915.507(d)(3).
Conference of Governmental Industrial (xiv) NFPA 172002, Standard for Dry
Hygienists (ACGIH), 1014 Broadway, Chemical Extinguishing Systems, IBR
approved for 1915.507(d)(4).
Cincinnati, OH 45202:
(xv) NFPA 122005, Standard on Car-
(i) Threshold limit values, 1970, IBR
bon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems,
approved for 1915.12(b) and 1915.1000,
IBR approved for 1915.507(d)(5).
table Z.
(xvi) NFPA 12A2004, Standard on
(4) The following material is avail- Halon 1301 Fire Extinguishing Systems,
able for purchase from the National IBR approved for 1915.507(d)(5).
Fire Protection Association, 1 (xvii) NFPA 20012004, Standard on
Batterymarch Park, PO Box 9101, Quin- Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Sys-
cy, MA 022699101: tems, IBR approved for 1915.507(d)(5).
(i) NFPA 19812002 Standard on Open- (xviii) NFPA 14032002, Standard on
Circuit Self-Contained Breathing Appa- Live Fire Training Evolutions, IBR ap-
ratus for Fire and Emergency Services, proved for 1915.508(d)(8).
IBR approved for 1915.505(e)(3)(v).
(ii) NFPA 19712000, Standard on Pro- [61 FR 26359, May 24, 1996, as amended at 67
FR 44541, July 3, 2002; 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9,
tective Ensemble for Structural Fire 2004; 69 FR 55702, Sept. 15, 2004; 71 FR 60846,
Fighting, IBR approved for Oct. 17, 2006]
1915.505(e)(4)(ii).
(iii) NFPA 19762000, Standard on 1915.6 Commerical diving operations.
Protective Ensemble for Proximity Commerical diving operations shall
Fire Fighting, IBR approved for be subject to subpart T of part 1910,
1915.505(e)(5). 1910.4011910.441 of this chapter.
(iv) NFPA 19821998, Standard on Per-
sonal Alert Safety Systems (PASS), 1915.7 Competent person.
IBR approved for 1915.505(e)(6)(ii). (a) Application. This section applies
(v) NFPA 19832001, Standard on Fire to shipyard employment.
Service Life Safety Rope and System (b) Designation. (1) One or more com-
Components, IBR approved for petent persons shall be designated by
1915.505(e)(7)(i). the employer in accordance with the
(vi) NFPA 102002 Standard for Port- applicable requirements of this section,
able Fire Extinguishers, IBR approved unless the requirements of subparts B,
for 1915.507(b)(1) and (b)(2). C, D and H of this part are always car-
(vii) NFPA 142003 Standard for the ried out by a Marine Chemist. Excep-
Installation of Standpipe and Hose Sys- tion: The employer may designate any
tems, IBR approved for 1915.507(b)(2) person who meets the applicable por-
and (d)(1). tions of the criteria set forth in para-
(viii) NFPA 722002 National Fire graph (c) of this section as a competent
Alarm Code, IBR approved for person who is limited to performing
1915.507(c)(6). testing to the following situations:
32
(i) Repair work on small craft in boat (6) Ability to inspect, test, and evalu-
yards where only combustible gas indi- ate spaces to determine the need for
cator tests are required for fuel tank further testing by a Marine Chemist or
leaks or when using flammable paints a Certified Industrial Hygienist; and
below decks; (7) Ability to maintain records re-
(ii) Building of wooden vessels where quired by this section.
only knowledge of the precautions to (d) Recordkeeping. (1) When tests and
be taken when using flammable paints inspections are performed by a com-
is required; petent person, Marine Chemist, or Cer-
(iii) The breaking of vessels where tified Industrial Hygienist as required
there is no fuel oil or other flammable by any provisions of subparts B, C, D,
hazard; and or H of this part, the employer shall
(iv) Tests and inspections performed ensure that the person performing the
to comply with 1915.35(b)(8) and test and inspection records the loca-
1915.36(a)(5). tion, time, date, location of inspected
(2)(i) The employer shall maintain ei- spaces, and the operations performed,
ther a roster of designated competent as well as the test results and any in-
persons or a statement that a Marine structions.
Chemist will perform the tests or in- (2) The employer shall ensure that
spections which require a competent the records are posted in the imme-
person. diate vicinity of the affected oper-
(ii) The employer shall make the ros- ations while work in the spaces is in
ter of designated persons or the state- progress. The records shall be kept on
ment available to employees, the em- file for a period of at least three
ployees representative, the Director or months from the completion date of
the Assistant Secretary upon request. the specific job for which they were
(iii) The roster shall contain, as a generated.
minimum, the following: (3) The employer shall ensure that
(A) The employers name, the records are available for inspection
(B) The designated competent per- by the Assistant Secretary, Director,
sons name(s), and and employees and their representa-
(C) The date the employee was tives.
trained as a competent person. [59 FR 37856, July 25, 1994]
(c) Criteria. The employer shall en-
sure that each designated competent 1915.8 OMB control numbers under
person has the following skills and the Paperwork Reduction Act.
knowledge: The following sections or paragraphs
(1) Ability to understand and carry contain a collection of information re-
out written or oral information or in- quirement which has been approved by
structions left by Marine Chemist, the Office of Management and Budget
Coast Guard authorized persons and under the control number listed.
Certified Industrial Hygienists;
(2) Knowledge of subparts B, C, D and 29 CFR citation OMB con-
trol No.
H of this part;
(3) Knowledge of the structure, loca- 1915.111915.16 ................................................. 12180011
tion, and designation of spaces where 1915.113 .............................................................. 12180220
1915.152(b) ......................................................... 12180215
work is done; 1915.152(e) ......................................................... 12180215
(4) Ability to calibrate and use test- 1915.159(d) ......................................................... 12180215
ing equipment including but not lim- 1915.160(d) ......................................................... 12180215
1915.172 .............................................................. 12180220
ited to, oxygen indicators, combustible 1915.501(d) ......................................................... 12180248
gas indicators, carbon monoxide indi- 1915.502(a) ......................................................... 12180248
cators, and carbon dioxide indicators, 1915.502(b) ......................................................... 12180248
and to interpret accurately the test re- 1915.502(c) .......................................................... 12180248
1915.502(d) ......................................................... 12180248
sults of that equipment; 1915.504(a) ......................................................... 12180248
(5) Ability to perform all required 1915.505(a) ......................................................... 12180248
tests and inspections which are or may 1915.505(b) ......................................................... 12180248
1915.505(d) ......................................................... 12180248
be performed by a competent person as 1915.506(b) ......................................................... 12180248
set forth in subparts B, C, D and H of 1915.507(c) .......................................................... 12180248
this part. 1915.508(a) ......................................................... 12180248
33
29 CFR citation OMB con- Assistant Secretary means the Assist-

trol No. ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa-
1915.508(b) ......................................................... 12180248 tional Safety and Health, or designated
1915.508(c) .......................................................... 12180248 representative.
1915.508(d) ......................................................... 12180248
1915.508(e) ......................................................... 12180248
Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH)
1915.508(f) .......................................................... 12180248 means an industrial hygienist who is
1915.1001 ............................................................ 12180195 certified by the American Board of In-
1915.1003 ............................................................ 12180085 dustrial Hygiene.
1915.1004 ............................................................ 12180084
1915.1006 ............................................................ 12180086 Coast Guard authorized person means
1915.1007 ............................................................ 12180083 an individual who meets the require-
1915.1008 ............................................................ 12180087 ment of appendix B to subpart B of this
1915.1009 ............................................................ 12180089 part 1915 for tank vessels, for passenger
1915.1010 ............................................................ 12180082
1915.1011 ............................................................ 12180090 vessels, and for cargo and miscella-
1915.1012 ............................................................ 12180080 neous vessels.
1915.1013 ............................................................ 12180079 Dangerous atmosphere means an at-
1915.1014 ............................................................ 12180088
1915.1015 ............................................................ 12180044 mosphere that may expose employees
1915.1016 ............................................................ 12180081 to the risk of death, incapacitation,
1915.1017 ............................................................ 12180010 impairment of ability to self-rescue
1915.1018 ............................................................ 12180104
1915.1025 ............................................................ 12180092
(i.e., escape unaided from a confined or
1915.1026 ............................................................ 12180252 enclosed space), injury, or acute ill-
1915.1027 ............................................................ 12180185 ness.
1915.1028 ............................................................ 12180129 Director means the Director of the
1915.1030 ............................................................ 12180180
1915.1044 ............................................................ 12180101 National Institute for Occupational
1915.1045 ............................................................ 12180126 Safety and Health, U.S. Department of
1915.1047 ............................................................ 12180108 Health and Human Services, or des-
1915.1048 ............................................................ 12180145
1915.1050 ............................................................ 12180184
ignated representative.
1915.1120 ............................................................ 12180065 Enter with Restrictions denotes a space
1915.1200 ............................................................ 12180072 where entry for work is permitted only
1915.1450 ............................................................ 12180131
if engineering controls, personal pro-
tective equipment, clothing, and time
[61 FR 5509, Feb. 13, 1996, as amended at 62 limitations are as specified by the Ma-
FR 33547, June 20, 1997; 63 FR 13340, Mar. 19, rine Chemist, Certified Industrial Hy-
1998; 70 FR 13371, Mar. 21, 2005; 71 FR 38086, gienist, or the shipyard competent per-
July 5, 2006]
son.
Entry means the action by which a
Subpart BConfined and En- person passes through an opening into
closed Spaces and Other a space. Entry includes ensuing work
Dangerous Atmospheres in activities in that space and is consid-
Shipyard Employment ered to have occurred as soon as any
part of the entrants body breaks the
SOURCE: 59 FR 37857, July 25, 1994, unless plane of an opening into the space.
otherwise noted. Hot work means any activity involv-
ing riveting, welding, burning, the use
1915.11 Scope, application and defi- of powder-actuated tools or similar
nitions applicable to this subpart. fire-producing operations. Grinding,
(a) Scope and application. This sub- drilling, abrasive blasting, or similar
part applies to work in confined and spark-producing operations are also
enclosed spaces and other dangerous considered hot work except when such
atmospheres in shipyard employment, operations are isolated physically from
including vessels, vessel sections, and any atmosphere containing more than
on land-side operations regardless of 10 percent of the lower explosive limit
geographic location. of a flammable or combustible sub-
(b) Definitions applicable to this substance.
part. Adjacent spaces means those Immediately dangerous to life or health
spaces bordering a subject space in all (IDLH) means an atmosphere that
directions, including all points of con- poses an immediate threat to life or
tact, corners, diagonals, decks, tank that is likely to result in acute or im-
tops, and bulkheads. mediate severe health effects.
34
Inert or inerted atmosphere means an (2) The concentration of flammable

atmospheric condition where: vapors in the atmosphere is less than
(1) The oxygen content of the atmos- 10 percent of the lower explosive limit;
phere in the space is maintained at a (3) The residues or materials in the
level equal to or less than 8.0 percent space are not capable of producing a
by volume or at a level at or below 50 higher concentration than permitted in
percent of the amount required to sup- paragraph (1) or (2) of the above, under
port combustion, whichever is less; or existing atmospheric conditions in the
(2) The space is flooded with water presence of hot work and while main-
and the vapor concentration of flam- tained as directed by the Marine Chem-
mable or combustible materials in the ist or competent person, and
free space atmosphere above the water (4) All adjacent spaces have been
line is less than 10 percent of the lower cleaned, or inerted, or treated suffi-
explosive limit for the flammable or ciently to prevent the spread of fire.
combustible material. Safe for Workers denotes a space that
Labeled means identified with a sign, meets the following criteria:
placard, or other form of written com- (1) The oxygen content of the atmos-
munication, including pictograms, that phere is at least 19.5 percent and below
provides information on the status or 22 percent by volume;
condition of the work space to which it (2) The concentration of flammable
is attached. vapors is below 10 percent of the lower
Lower explosive limit (LEL) means the explosive limit (LEL);
minimum concentration of vapor in air (3) Any toxic materials in the atmos-
below which propagation of a flame phere associated with cargo, fuel, tank
does not occur in the presence of an ig- coatings, or inerting media are within
nition source. permissible concentrations at the time
of the inspection; and
Marine Chemist means an individual
(4) Any residues or materials associ-
who possesses a current Marine Chem-
ated with the work authorized by the
ist Certificate issued by the National
Marine Chemist, Certified Industrial
Fire Protection Association.
Hygienist, or competent person will
Not Safe for Hot Work denotes a space
not produce uncontrolled release of
where hot work may not be performed
toxic materials under existing atmos-
because the conditions do not meet the
pheric conditions while maintained as
criteria for Safe for Hot Work.
directed.
Nationally Recognized Testing Labora- Space means an area on a vessel or
tory (NRTL) means an organization vessel section or within a shipyard
recognized by OSHA, in accordance such as, but not limited to: cargo tanks
with appendix A of 29 CFR 1910.7, which or holds; pump or engine rooms; stor-
tests for safety and lists or labels or age lockers; tanks containing flam-
accepts equipment and materials that mable or combustible liquids, gases, or
meet all the criteria found in solids; rooms within buildings; crawl
1910.7(b)(1) through (b)(4)(ii). spaces; tunnels; or accessways. The at-
Not Safe for Workers denotes a space mosphere within a space is the entire
where an employee may not enter be- area within its bounds.
cause the conditions do not meet the Upper explosive limit (UEL) means the
criteria for Safe for Workers. maximum concentration of flammable
Oxygen-deficient atmosphere means an vapor in air above which propagation
atmosphere having an oxygen con- of flame does not occur on contact with
centration of less than 19.5 percent by a source of ignition.
volume. Vessel section means a sub-assembly,
Oxygen-enriched atmosphere means module, or other component of a vessel
an atmosphere that contains 22.0 per- being built, repaired, or broken.
cent or more oxygen by volume. Visual inspection means the physical
Safe for Hot Work denotes a space survey of the space, its surroundings
that meets all of the following criteria: and contents to identify hazards such
(1) The oxygen content of the atmos- as, but not limited to, restricted acces-
phere does not exceed 22.0 percent by sibility, residues, unguarded machin-
volume; ery, and piping or electrical systems.
35
1915.12 Precautions and the order of (ii) Respiratory protection and other
testing before entering confined appropriate personal protective equip-
and enclosed spaces and other dan- ment and clothing are provided in ac-
gerous atmospheres. cordance with subpart I of this part.
The employer shall ensure that NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): Other provisions
atmosphereic testing is performed in for work in IDLH atmospheres are located in
the following sequence: oxygen con- subpart I of this part.
tent, flammability, toxicity.
(a) Oxygen content. (1) The employer (b) Flammable atmospheres. (1) The
shall ensure that the following spaces employer shall ensure that spaces and
are visually inspected and tested by a adjacent spaces that contain or have
competent person to determine the contained combustible or flammable
atmospheres oxygen content prior to liquids or gases are:
initial entry into the space by an em- (i) Inspected visually by the com-
ployee: petent person to determine the pres-
(i) Spaces that have been sealed, such ence of combustible or flammable liq-
as, but not limited to, spaces that have uids; and
been coated and closed up, and non- (ii) Tested by a competent person
ventilated spaces that have been fresh- prior to entry by an employee to deter-
ly painted; mine the concentration of flammable
(ii) Spaces and adjacent spaces that vapors and gases within the space.
contain or have contained combustible (2) If the concentration of flammable
or flammable liquids or gases; vapors or gases in the space to be en-
(iii) Spaces and adjacent spaces that tered is equal to or greater than 10 per-
contain or have contained liquids, cent of the lower explosive limit, the
gases, or solids that are toxic, corro- space shall be labeled Not Safe for
sive, or irritant; Workers and Not Safe for Hot
(iv) Spaces and adjacent spaces that Work. Ventilation shall be provided
have been fumigated; and at volumes and flow rates sufficient to
ensure that the concentration of flam-
(v) Spaces containing materials or
mable vapors is maintained below 10
residues of materials that create an ox-
percent of the lower explosive limit.
ygen-deficient atmosphere.
The warning labels may be removed
(2) If the space to be entered contains when the concentration of flammable
an oxygen deficient atmosphere, the vapors is below 10 percent of the lower
space shall be labeled Not Safe for explosive limit.
Workers or, if oxygen-enriched, Not
(3) An employee may not enter a
Safe for WorkersNot Safe for Hot
space where the concentration of flam-
Work. If an oxygen-deficient or oxy-
mable vapors or gases is equal to or
gen-enriched atmosphere is found, ven-
greater than 10 percent of the lower ex-
tilation shall be provided at volumes
plosive limit. Exception: An employee
and flow rates sufficient to ensure that
may enter for emergency rescue or for
the oxygen content is maintained at or
a short duration for installation of ven-
above 19.5 percent and below 22.0 per-
tilation equipment necessary to start
cent by volume. The warning label may
work in the space, provided:
be removed when the oxygen content is
equal to or greater than 19.5 and less (i) No ignition sources are present;
than 22.0 percent by volume. (ii) The atmosphere in the space is
(3) An employee may not enter a monitored continuously;
space where the oxygen content, by (iii) Atmospheres at or above the
volume, is below 19.5 percent or above upper explosive limit are maintained;
22.0 percent. Exception: An employee and
may enter for emergency rescue or for (iv) Respiratory protection and other
a short duration for installation of ven- appropriate personal protective equip-
tilation equipment necessary to start ment and clothing are provided in ac-
work in the space provided: cordance with subpart I of this part.
(i) The atmosphere in the space is NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (b): Additional provi-
monitored for oxygen content, by vol- sions for work in IDLH atmospheres are lo-
ume, continuously; and cated in subpart I of this part.
36
NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (b): Additional provi- shall ensure that each employee that
sions for work in spaces containing a flam- enters a confined or enclosed space and
mable substance which also has a permis- other areas with dangerous
sible exposure limit, are located in subpart Z
of 29 CFR part 1915, and 1915.12(c).
atmospheres is trained to perform all
required duties safely.
(c) Toxic, corrosive, irritant or fumi- (2) The employer shall ensure that
gated atmospheres and residues. (1) The each employee who enters a confined
employer shall ensure that spaces or space, enclosed space, or other areas
adjacent spaces that contain or have with dangerous atmospheres is trained
contained liquids, gases, or solids that to:
are toxic, corrosive or irritant are: (i) Recognize the characteristics of
(i) Inspected visually by the com- the confined space;
petent person to determine the pres-
(ii) Anticipate and be aware of the
ence of toxic, corrosive, or irritant res-
hazards that may be faced during
idue contaminants; and
entry;
(ii) Tested by a competent person
prior to initial entry by an employee to (iii) Recognize the adverse health ef-
determine the air concentration of fects that may be caused by the expo-
toxics, corrosives, or irritants within sure to a hazard;
the space. (iv) Understand the physical signs
(2) If a space contains an air con- and reactions related to exposures to
centration of a material which exceeds such hazards;
a part 1915 subpart Z permissible expo- (v) Know what personal protective
sure limit (PEL) or is IDLH, the space equipment is needed for safe entry into
shall be labeled Not Safe for Work- and exit from the space;
ers. Ventilation shall be provided at (vi) Use personal protective equip-
volumes and flow rates which will en- ment; and
sure that air concentrations are main- (vii) Where necessary, be aware of the
tained within the PEL or, in the case presence and proper use of barriers
of contaminants for which there is no that may be needed to protect an en-
established PEL, below the IDLH. The trant from hazards.
warning label may be removed when (3) The employer shall ensure that
the concentration of contaminants is each entrant into confined or enclosed
maintained within the PEL or below spaces or other dangerous atmospheres
IDLH level. is trained to exit the space or dan-
(3) If a space cannot be ventilated to gerous atmosphere whenever:
within the PELs or is IDLH, a Marine (i) The employer or his or her rep-
Chemist or CIH must re-test until the resentative orders evacuation;
space can be certified Enter with Re- (ii) An evacuation signal such as an
strictions or Safe for Workers. alarm is activated ; or
(4) An employee may not enter a (iii) The entrant perceives that he or
space whose atmosphere exceeds a PEL she is in danger.
or is IDLH. Exception: An employee (4) The employer shall provide each
may enter for emergency rescue, or for employee with training:
a short duration for installation of ven- (i) Before the entrant begins work ad-
tilation equipment provided: dressed by this section; and
(i) The atmosphere in the space is
(ii) Whenever there is a change in op-
monitored continuously;
erations or in an employees duties
(ii) Respiratory protection and other
that presents a hazard about which the
necessary and appropriate personal
employee has not previously been
protective equipment and clothing are
trained.
provided in accordance with subpart I
of this part. (5) The employer shall certify that
the training required by paragraphs
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c): Other provisions (d)(1) through (d)(4) of this section has
for work in IDLH atmospheres are located in been accomplished.
subpart I of this part.
(i) The certification shall contain the
(d) Training of employees entering con- employees name, the name of the cer-
fined and enclosed spaces or other dan- tifier, and the date(s) of the certifi-
gerous atmospheres. (1) The employer cation.
37
(ii) The certification shall be avail- atmospheres shall ensure that all
able for inspection by the Assistant available information on the hazards,
Secretary, the Director, employees, safety rules, and emergency procedures
and their representatives. concerning those spaces and
(e) Rescue teams. The employer shall atmospheres is exchanged with any
either establish a shipyard rescue team other employer whose employees may
or arrange for an outside rescue team enter the same spaces.
which will respond promptly to a re-
quest for rescue service. [59 FR 37857, July 25, 1994, as amended at 60
(1) Shipyard rescue teams shall meet FR 14219, Mar. 16, 1995]
the following criteria:
(i) Each employee assigned to the 1915.13 Cleaning and other cold
shipyard team shall be provided with work.
and trained to use the personal protec- (a) Locations covered by this section.
tive equipment he or she will need, in- The employer shall ensure that manual
cluding respirators and any rescue cleaning and other cold work are not
equipment necessary for making res- performed in the following spaces un-
cues from confined and enclosed spaces less the conditions of paragraph (b) of
and other dangerous atmospheres. this section have been met:
(ii) Each employee assigned to the (1) Spaces containing or having last
shipyard rescue team shall be trained contained bulk quantities of combus-
to perform his or her rescue functions tible or flammable liquids or gases; and
including confined and enclosed and
(2) Spaces containing or having last
other dangerous atmosphere entry.
contained bulk quantities of liquids,
(iii) Shipyard rescue teams shall
practice their skills at least once every gases or solids that are toxic, corrosive
12 months. Practice drills shall include or irritating.
the use of mannequins and rescue (b) Requirements for performing clean-
equipment during simulated rescue oping or cold work. (1) Liquid residues of
erations involving physical facilities hazardous materials shall be removed
that approximate closely those facili- from work spaces as thoroughly as
ties from which rescue may be needed. practicable before employees start
cleaning operations or cold work in a
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (e)(1)(iii): If the team
performs an actual rescue during the 12 space. Special care shall be taken to
month period, an additional practice drill for prevent the spilling or the draining of
that type of rescue is not required. these materials into the water sur-
(iv) At least one person on each res- rounding the vessel, or for shore-side
cue team shall maintain current cer- operations, onto the surrounding work
tification in basic first aid which in- area.
cludes maintenance of an airway, con- (2) Testing shall be conducted by a
trol of bleeding, maintenance of cir- competent person to determine the
culation and cardiopulmonary resus- concentration of flammable, combus-
citation (CPR) skills. tible, toxic, corrosive, or irritant va-
(2) The employer shall inform outside pors within the space prior to the be-
rescue teams of the hazards that the ginning of cleaning or cold work.
team may encounter when called to (3) Continuous ventilation shall be
perform confined and enclosed space or provided at volumes and flow rates suf-
other dangerous atmosphere rescue at ficient to ensure that the concentra-
the employers facility so that the res- tion(s) of:
cue team can be trained and equipped. (i) Flammable vapor is maintained
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (e): The criteria for in- below 10 percent of the lower explosive
house rescue, listed in paragraph (e)(1) can limit; and
be used by the employer in evaluating out-
side rescue services. NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(3)(i): Spaces con-
taining highly volatile residues may require
(f) Exchanging hazard information be- additional ventilation to keep the concentra-
tween employers. Each employer whose tion of flammable vapors below 10 percent of
employees work in confined and en- the lower explosive limit and within the per-
closed spaces or other dangerous missible exposure limit.
38
(ii) Toxic, corrosive, or irritant va- lating, all work in the contaminated
pors are maintained within the permis- area shall be stopped until the vapors
sible exposure limits and below IDLH have dissipated or been removed.
levels. (9) Only explosion-proof, self-con-
(4) Testing shall be conducted by the tained portable lamps, or other electric
competent person as often as necessary equipment approved by a National Rec-
during cleaning or cold work to assure ognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for
that air concentrations are below 10 the hazardous location shall be used in
percent of the lower explosive limit spaces described in paragraph (a) of
and within the PELs and below IDLH this section until such spaces have
levels. Factors such as, but not limited been certified as Safe for Workers.
to, temperature, volatility of the resi- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(9): Battery-fed,
dues and other existing conditions in portable lamps or other electric equipment
and about the spaces are to be consid- bearing the approval of a NRTL for the class,
ered in determining the frequency of and division of the location in which they
testing necessary to assure a safe at- are used are deemed to meet the require-
mosphere. ments of this paragraph.
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(4): See appendix A (10) The employer shall prominently
for additional information on frequency of post signs that prohibit sources of igni-
testing. tion within or near a space that has
contained flammable or combustible
(5) Spills or other releases of flam-
liquids or gases in bulk quantities:
mable, combustible, toxic, corrosive, (i) At the entrance to those spaces;
and irritant materials shall be cleaned (ii) In adjacent spaces; and
up as work progresses. (iii) In the open area adjacent to
(6) An employee may not enter a con- those spaces.
fined or enclosed space or other dan- (11) All air moving equipment and its
gerous atmosphere if the concentration component parts, including duct work,
of flammable or combustible vapors in capable of generating a static electric
work spaces exceeds 10 percent of the discharge of sufficient energy to create
lower explosive limit. Exception: An a source of ignition, shall be bonded
employee may enter for emergency res- electrically to the structure of a vessel
cue or for a short duration for installa- or vessel section or, in the case of land-
tion of ventilation equipment provided: side spaces, grounded to prevent an
(i) No ignition sources are present; electric discharge in the space.
(ii) The atmosphere in the space is (12) Fans shall have non-sparking
monitored continuously; blades, and portable air ducts shall be
(iii) The atmosphere in the space is of non-sparking materials.
maintained above the upper explosive
limit; and NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b): See 1915.12(c) of
(iv) Respiratory protection, personal this part and applicable requirements of 29
CFR part 1915, subpart Z for other provisions
protective equipment, and clothing are
affecting cleaning and cold work.
provided in accordance with subpart I
of this part. 1915.14 Hot work.
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(6): Other provisions (a) Hot work requiring testing by a Ma-
for work in IDLH and other dangerous rine Chemist or Coast Guard authorized
atmospheres are located in subpart I of this person. (1) The employer shall ensure
part.
that hot work is not performed in or on
(7) A competent person shall test any of the following confined and en-
ventilation discharge areas and other closed spaces and other dangerous
areas where discharged vapors may col- atmospheres, boundaries of spaces or
lect to determine if vapors discharged pipelines until the work area has been
from the spaces being ventilated are tested and certified by a Marine Chem-
accumulating in concentrations haz- ist or a U.S. Coast Guard authorized
ardous to employees. person as Safe for Hot Work:
(8) If the tests required in paragraph (i) Within, on, or immediately adja-
(b)(7) of this section indicate that con- cent to spaces that contain or have
centrations of exhaust vapors that are contained combustible or flammable
hazardous to employees are accumu- liquids or gases.
39
(ii) Within, on, or immediately adja- where the hot work is to be done, then
cent to fuel tanks that contain or have the space shall be labeled Not Safe for
last contained fuel; and Hot Work and ventilation shall be
(iii) On pipelines, heating coils, pump provided at volumes and flow rates suf-
fittings or other accessories connected ficient to ensure that the concentra-
to spaces that contain or have last con- tion of flammable vapors or gases is
tained fuel. below 10 percent by volume of the
(iv) Exception: On dry cargo, mis- lower explosive limit. The warning
cellaneous and passenger vessels and in label may be removed when the con-
the landside operations within spaces centration of flammable vapors and
which meet the standards for oxygen, gases are below 10 percent lower explo-
flammability and toxicity in 1915.12, sive limit.
but are adjacent to spaces containing
flammable gases or liquids, with a NOTE TO 1915.14: See appendix A of this
flash point below 150 F (65.6 C) when subpart for additional information relevant
the distance between such spaces and to performing hot work safely.
the work is 25 feet (7.62 m) or greater. [59 FR 37857, July 25, 1994, as amended at 60
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a)(1)(iv): For flam- FR 14219, Mar. 16, 1995; 67 FR 44541, July 3,
mable liquids with flash points above 150 F 2002]
(65.6 C), see paragraph (b) of this section.
1915.15 Maintenance of safe condi-
(2) The certificate issued by the Ma- tions.
rine Chemist or Coast Guard author-
(a) Preventing hazardous materials from
ized person shall be posted in the im-
mediate vicinity of the affected oper- entering. Pipelines that could carry
ations while they are in progress and hazardous materials into spaces that
kept on file for a period of at least have been certified Safe for Workers
three months from the date of the com- or Safe for Hot Work shall be discon-
pletion of the operation for which the nected, blanked off, or otherwise
certificate was generated. blocked by a positive method to pre-
(b) Hot work requiring testing by a com- vent hazardous materials from being
petent person. (1) Hot work is not per- discharged into the space.
mitted in or on the following spaces or (b) Alteration of existing conditions.
adjacent spaces or other dangerous When a change that could alter condi-
atmospheres until they have been test- tions within a tested confined or en-
ed by a competent person and deter- closed space or other dangerous atmos-
mined to contain no concentrations of phere occurs, work in the affected
flammable vapors equal to or greater space or area shall be stopped. Work
than 10 percent of the lower explosive may not be resumed until the affected
limit: space or area is visually inspected and
(i) Dry cargo holds, retested and found to comply with
(ii) The bilges, 1915.12, 1915.13, and 1915.14 of this
(iii) The engine room and boiler part, as applicable.
spaces for which a Marine Chemist or a
Coast Guard authorized person certifi- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b): Examples of
changes that would warrant the stoppage of
cate is not required under paragraph
work include: The opening of manholes or
(a)(1)(i) of this section. other closures or the adjusting of a valve
(iv) Vessels and vessel sections for regulating the flow of hazardous materials.
which a Marine Chemist or Coast
Guard authorized person certificate is (c) Tests to maintain the conditions of a
not required under paragraph (a)(1)(iv) Marine Chemists or Coast Guard author-
of this section. ized persons certificates. A competent
(v) Land-side confined and enclosed person shall visually inspect and test
spaces or other dangerous atmospheres each space certified as Safe for Work-
not covered by paragraph (a)(1) of this ers or Safe for Hot Work, as often
section. as necessary to ensure that atmos-
(2) If the concentration of flammable pheric conditions within that space are
vapors or gases is equal to or greater maintained within the conditions es-
than 10 percent of the lower explosive tablished by the certificate after the
limit in the space or an adjacent space certificate has been issued.
40
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1915, Subpt. B, App. A
(d) Change in the conditions of a Ma- ously at each means of access to the
rine Chemists or Coast Guard authorized work area.
persons certificate. If a competent per-
son finds that the atmospheric condi- APPENDIX A TO SUBPART B OF PART
tions within a certified space fail to 1915COMPLIANCE ASSISTANCE
meet the applicable requirements of GUIDELINES FOR CONFINED AND EN-
1915.12, 1915.13, and 1915.14 of this CLOSED SPACES AND OTHER DAN-
part, work in the certified space shall GEROUS ATMOSPHERES
be stopped and may not be resumed This appendix is a non-mandatory set of
until the space has been retested by a guidelines provided to assist employers in
Marine Chemist or Coast Guard au- complying with the requirements of this sub-
thorized person and a new certificate part. This appendix neither creates addi-
issued in accordance with 1915.14(a). tional obligations nor detracts from obliga-
tions otherwise contained in the standard. It
(e) Tests to maintain a competent per- is intended to provide explanatory informa-
sons findings. After a competent person tion and educational material to employers
has conducted a visual inspection and and employees to foster understanding of,
tests required in 1915.12, 1915.13, and and compliance with, the standard.
1915.14 of this part and determined a Sections 1915.11 through 1915.16. These stand-
space to be safe for an employee to ards are minimum safety standards for en-
enter, he or she shall continue to test tering and working safely in vessel tanks
and visually inspect spaces as often as and compartments.
Section 1915.11(b) Definition of Hot work.
necessary to ensure that the required There are several instances in which cir-
atmospheric conditions within the cumstances do not necessitate that grinding,
tested space are maintained. drilling, abrasive blasting be regarded as hot
(f) Changes in conditions determined by work. Some examples are:
competent persons findings. After the 1. Abrasive blasting of the hull for paint
competent person has determined ini- preparation does not necessitate pumping
tially that a space is safe for an em- and cleaning the tanks of a vessel.
2. Prior to hot work on any hollow struc-
ployee to enter and he or she finds sub- ture, the void space should be tested and ap-
sequently that the conditions within propriate precautions taken.
the tested space fail to meet the re- Section 1915.11(b) Definition of Lower ex-
quirements of 1915.12, 1915.13, and plosive limit. The terms lower flammable
1915.14, of this part, as applicable, work limit (LFL) and lower explosive limit (LEL)
shall be stopped until the conditions in are used interchangeably in fire science lit-
the tested space are corrected to com- erature.
Section 1915.11(b) Definition of Upper ex-
ply with 1915.12, 1915.13, and 1915.14,
plosive limit. The terms upper flammable
as applicable. limit (UFL) and upper explosive limit (UEL)
[59 FR 37857, July 25, 1994, as amended at 60 are used interchangeably in fire science lit-
FR 14219, Mar. 16, 1995; 67 FR 44541, July 3, erature.
2002] Section 1915.12(a)(3). After a tank has been
properly washed and ventilated, the tank
1915.16 Warning signs and labels. should contain 20.8 percent oxygen by vol-
ume. This is the same amount found in our
(a) Employee comprehension of signs normal atmosphere at sea level. However, it
and labels. The Employer shall ensure is possible that the oxygen content will be
that each sign or label posted to com- lower. When this is the case, the reasons for
ply with the requirements of this sub- this deficiency should be determined and
corrective action taken.
part is presented in a manner that can An oxygen content of 19.5 percent can sup-
be perceived and understood by all em- port life and is adequate for entry. However,
ployees. any oxygen level greater than 20.8 percent by
(b) Posting of large work areas. A volume should alert the competent person to
warning sign or label required by para- look for the cause of the oxygen-enriched at-
graph (a) of this section need not be mosphere and correct it prior to entry. In ad-
posted at an individual tank, compart- dition, any oxygen level lower than 19.5 per-
cent level should also alert the competent
ment or work space within a work area
person to look for the cause of the oxygen-
if the entire work area has been tested deficiency and correct it prior to entry.
and certified: not safe for workers, not Section 1915.12(b)(3) Flammable atmospheres.
safe for hot work, and if the sign or Atmospheres with a concentration of flam-
label to this effect is posted conspicu- mable vapors at or above 10 percent of the
41
Pt. 1915, Subpt. B, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7107 Edition)
lower explosive limit (LEL) are considered rechecked by the competent person prior to
hazardous when located in confined spaces. entry and starting work.
However, atmospheres with flammable va- 4. Unattended tanks or spaces. When a tank
pors below 10 percent of the LEL are not nec- or space has been tested and declared safe,
essarily safe. then subsequently left unattended for a pe-
Such atmospheres are too lean to burn. riod of time, it should be retested prior to
Nevertheless, when a space contains or pro- entry and starting work. For example, when
duces measurable flammable vapors below barges are left unattended at night, uniden-
the 10 percent LEL, it might indicate that tified products from another barge are some-
flammable vapors are being released or in- times dumped into their empty tanks. Since
troduced into the space and could present a this would result in a changed atmosphere,
hazard in time. Therefore, the cause of the the tanks should be retested prior to entry
vapors should be investigated and, if pos- and starting work.
sible, eliminated prior to entry. 5. Work break. When workers take a break
Some situations that have produced meas- or leave at the end of the shift, equipment
urable concentrations of flammable vapors sometimes is inadvertently left in the tanks.
that could exceed 10 percent of the LEL in At lunch or work breaks and at the end of
time are: the shift are the times when it is most likely
1. Pipelines that should have been blanked someone will leave a burning or cutting
or disconnected have opened, allowing prod- torch in the tank, perhaps turned on and
uct into the space. leaking oxygen or an inert gas. Since the
2. The vessel may have shifted, allowing former can produce an oxygen-enriched at-
mosphere, and the latter an oxygen-deficient
product not previously cleaned and removed
atmosphere, tanks should be checked for
during washing to move into other areas of
equipment left behind, and atmosphere,
the vessel.
monitored if necessary prior to re-entering
3. Residues may be producing the atmos-
and resuming work. In an oxygen-enriched
phere by releasing flammable vapor.
atmosphere, the flammable range is severely
Section 1915.12(b)(6) Flammable atmospheres broadened. This means that an oxygen-en-
that are toxic. An atmosphere with a measur- riched atmosphere can promote very rapid
able concentration of a flammable substance burning.
below 10 percent of the LEL may be above 6. Ballasting or trimming. Changing the posi-
the OSHA permissible exposure limit for tion of the ballast, or trimming or in any
that substance. In that case, refer to way moving the vessel so as to expose cargo
1915.12(c) (2), (3), and (4). that had been previously trapped, can
Sections 1915.13(b)(4), 1915.15(c), and produce a change in the atmosphere of the
1915.15(e). The frequency with which a tank tank. The atmosphere should be retested
is monitored to determine if atmospheric after any such move and prior to entry or
conditions are being maintained is a func- work.
tion of several factors that are discussed Section 1915.14 (a) and (b) Hot work. This is
below: a reminder that other sections of the OSHA
1. Temperature. Higher temperatures will shipyard safety and health standards in part
cause a combustible or flammable liquid to 1915 should be reviewed prior to starting any
vaporize at a faster rate than lower tempera- hot work. Most notably, subpart D, Welding,
tures. This is important since hotter days Cutting and Heating, places additional re-
may cause tank residues to produce more va- strictions on hot work. The requirements of
pors and that may result in the vapors ex- 1915.51 and 1915.53 must be met before hot
ceeding 10 percent of the LEL or an over- work is begun on any metal that is toxic or
exposure to toxic contaminants. is covered by a preservative coating respec-
2. Work in the tank. Any activity in the tively; the requirements of 1915.54 must be
tank could change the atmospheric condi- met before welding, cutting, or heating is
tions in that tank. Oxygen from a leaking begun on any hollow containers or struc-
oxyfuel hose or torch could result in an oxy- tures not covered by 1915.12.
gen-enriched atmosphere that would more Section 1915.12(a)(2). During hot work, more
easily propagate a flame. Some welding oper- than 20.8 percent oxygen by volume can be
ations use inert gas, and leaks can result in unsafe since it extends the normal flam-
an oxygen-deficient atmosphere. Manual mable range. The standard permits the oxy-
tank cleaning with high pressure spray de- gen level to reach 22 percent by volume in
vices can stir up residues and result in expo- order to account for instrument error. How-
sures to toxic contaminants. Simple clean- ever, the cause of excess oxygen should be in-
ing or mucking out, where employees walk vestigated and the source removed.
through and shovel residues and sludge, can Section 1915.16(b). If the entire vessel has
create a change in atmospheric conditions. been found to be in the same condition, then
3. Period of time elapsed. If a period of time employers shall be considered to be in com-
has elapsed since a Marine Chemist or Coast pliance with this requirement when signs
Guard authorized person has certified a tank using appropriate warning language in ac-
as safe, the atmospheric condition should be cordance with 1915.16(a) are posted at the
42
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1915, Subpt. B, App. B
gangway and at all other means of access to far as can reasonably be done, the safe condi-
the vessel. tions in the spaces certified, throughout the
operation and shall include such additional
tests and certifications as considered re-
FR 44541, July 3, 2002]
quired. Such qualifications and requirements
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART B OF PART shall include precautions necessary to elimi-
nate or minimize hazards that may be
1915REPRINT OF U.S. COAST GUARD present from protective coatings or residues
REGULATIONS REFERENCED IN SUB- from cargoes.
PART B, FOR DETERMINATION OF 2. Title 46 CFR 71.60(c)(1) covering hot
COAST GUARD AUTHORIZED PER- work on passenger vessels reads as follows:
SONS (a) The provisions of Standard for the
Control of Gas Hazards on Vessels to be Re-
This appendix provides a complete reprint paired, NFPA No. 306, published by Na-
of U.S. Coast Guard regulations as of Octo- tional Fire Protection Association, 1
ber 1, 1993, referenced in subpart B for pur- Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269, shall
poses of determining who is a Coast Guard be used as a guide in conducting the inspec-
authorized person.
tions and issuance of certificates required by
1. Title 46 CFR 35.011 (a) through (c) cov-
this section.
ering hot work on tank vessels reads as fol-
(b) Until an inspection has been made to
lows:
(a) The provisions of Standard for the determine that such operation can be under-
Control of Gas Hazards on Vessels to be Re- taken with safety, no alterations, repairs, or
paired, NFPA No. 306, published by Na- other such operations involving riveting,
tional Fire Protection Association, 1 welding, burning, or like fire-producing ac-
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269, shall tions shall be made:
be used as a guide in conducting the inspec- (1) Within or on the boundaries of cargo
tions and issuance of certificates required by tanks which have been used to carry flam-
this section. mable or combustible liquid or chemicals in
(b) Until an inspection has been made to bulk, or within spaces adjacent to such cargo
determine that such operation can be under- tanks; or
taken with safety, no alterations, repairs, or (2) Within or on the boundaries of fuel
other such operations involving riveting, tanks; or
welding, burning, or like fire-producing ac- (3) To pipe lines, heating coils, pumps, fit-
tions shall be made: tings, or other appurtenances connected to
(1) Within or on the boundaries of cargo such cargo or fuel tanks.
tanks that have been used to carry flam- (c) Such inspections shall be made and evi-
mable or combustible liquid or chemicals in denced as follows:
bulk, or within spaces adjacent to such cargo (1) In ports or places in the United States
tanks; or or its territories and possessions the inspec-
(2) Within or on the boundaries of fuel tion shall be made by a Marine Chemist cer-
tanks; or tificated by the National Fire Protection As-
(3) To pipe lines, heating coils, pumps, fit- sociation; however, if the services of such
tings, or other appurtenances connected to certified Marine Chemist are not reasonably
such cargo or fuel tanks. available, the Officer in Charge, Marine In-
(c) Such inspections shall be made and evi- spection, upon the recommendation of the
denced as follows: vessel owner and his contractor or their rep-
(1) In ports or places in the United States resentative, shall select a person who, in the
or its territories and possessions, the inspec- case of an individual vessel, shall be author-
tion shall be made by a Marine Chemist cer- ized to make such inspection. If the inspec-
tificated by the National Fire Protection As- tion indicated that such operations can be
sociation; however, if the services of such undertaken with safety, a certificate setting
certified Marine Chemists are not reasonably forth the fact in writing and qualified as
available, the Officer in Charge, Marine In- may be required, shall be issued by the cer-
spection, upon the recommendation of the tified Marine Chemist or the authorized per-
vessel owner and his contractor or their rep- son before the work is started. Such quali-
resentative, shall select a person who, in the fications shall include any requirements as
case of an individual vessel, shall be author- may be deemed necessary to maintain, inso-
ized to make such inspection. If the inspec- far as can reasonably be done, the safe condi-
tion indicates that such operations can be tions in the spaces certified throughout the
undertaken with safety, a certificate setting operation and shall include such additional
forth the fact in writing and qualified as tests and certifications as considered re-
may be required, shall be issued by the cer- quired. Such qualifications and requirements
tified Marine Chemist or the authorized per- shall include precautions necessary to elimi-
son before the work is started. Such quali- nate or minimize hazards that may be
fications shall include any requirements as present from protective coatings or residues
may be deemed necessary to maintain, inso- from cargoes.
43
3. Title 46 CFR 91.501(c)(1) covering hot Subpart CSurface Preparation
work on cargo and miscellaneous vessels as
follows:
and Preservation
(a) The provisions of Standard for the
1915.31 Scope and application of sub-
Control of Gas Hazards on Vessels to be Re-
part.
paired, NFPA No. 306, published by Na-
tional Fire Protection Association, 1 The standards contained in this sub-
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269, shall part shall apply to ship repairing and
be used as a guide in conducting the inspec- shipbuilding and shall not apply to
tions and issuance of certificates required by shipbreaking.
this section.
(b) Until an inspection has been made to 1915.32 Toxic cleaning solvents.
determine that such operation can be under-
taken with safety, no alterations, repairs, or (a) When toxic solvents are used, the
other such operations involving riveting, employer shall employ one or more of
welding, burning, or like fire-producing ac- the following measures to safeguard
tions shall be made: the health of employees exposed to
(1) Within or on the boundaries of cargo these solvents.
tanks which have been used to carry flam- (1) The cleaning operation shall be
mable or combustible liquid or chemicals in completely enclosed to prevent the es-
bulk, or within spaces adjacent to such cargo cape of vapor into the working space.
tanks; or,
(2) Either natural ventilation or me-
(2) Within or on the boundaries of fuel
tanks; or,
chanical exhaust ventilation shall be
(3) To pipe lines, heating coils, pumps, fit- used to remove the vapor at the source
tings, or other appurtenances connected to and to dilute the concentration of va-
such cargo or fuel tanks. pors in the working space to a con-
(c) Such inspections shall be made and evi- centration which is safe for the entire
denced as follows: work period.
(1) In ports or places in the United States (3) Employees shall be protected
or its territories and possessions the inspec- against toxic vapors by suitable res-
tion shall be made by a Marine Chemist cer- piratory protective equipment in ac-
tificated by the National Fire Protection As- cordance with the requirements of sub-
sociation; however, if the services of such part I of this part and, where nec-
certified Marine Chemist are not reasonably essary, against exposure of skin and
available, the Officer in Charge, Marine In- eye contact with toxic solvents and
spection, upon the recommendation of the
their vapors by suitable clothing and
vessel owner and his contractor or their rep-
resentative, shall select a person who, in the
equipment.
case of an individual vessel, shall be author- (b) The principles in the threshold
ized to make such inspection. If the inspec- limit values to which attention is di-
tion indicated that such operations can be rected in 1915.4 will be used by the De-
undertaken with safety, a certificate setting partment of Labor in enforcement pro-
forth the fact in writing and qualified as ceedings in defining a safe concentra-
may be required, shall be issued by the cer- tion of air contaminants.
tified Marine Chemist or the authorized per- (c) When flammable solvents are
son before the work is started. Such quali- used, precautions shall be taken in ac-
fications shall include any requirements as cordance with the requirements of
may be deemed necessary to maintain, inso-
1915.36.
far as can reasonably be done, the safe condi-
tions in the spaces certified throughout the [47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 61
operation and shall include such additional FR 26351, May 24, 1996]
tests and certifications as considered re-
quired. Such qualifications and requirements 1915.33 Chemical paint and preserva-
shall include precautions necessary to elimi- tive removers.
nate or minimize hazards that may be
(a) Employees shall be protected
present from protective coatings or residues
from cargoes.
against skin contact during the han-
dling and application of chemical paint
and preservative removers and shall be
protected against eye injury by goggles
or face shields in accordance with the
requirements of subpart I of this part.
44
(b) When using flammable paint and pirator in accordance with the require-
preservative removers, precautions ments of subpart I of this part.
shall be taken in accordance with the (2) Flame or heat shall not be used to
requirements of 1915.36. remove soft and greasy preservative
(c) When using chemical paint and coatings.
preservative removers which contain (c) Abrasive blasting(1) Equipment.
volatile and toxic solvents, such as Hoses and fittings used for abrasive
benzol, acetone and amyl acetate, the blasting shall meet the following re-
provisions of 1915.32 shall be applica- quirements:
ble. (i) Hoses. Hose of a type to prevent
(d) When using paint and rust remov- shocks from static electricity shall be
ers containing strong acids or alkalies, used.
employees shall be protected by suit- (ii) Hose couplings. Hose lengths shall
able face shields to prevent chemical be joined by metal couplings secured to
burns on the face and neck. the outside of the hose to avoid erosion
(e) When steam guns are used, all em- and weakening of the couplings.
ployees working within range of the (iii) Nozzles. Nozzles shall be attached
blast shall be protected by suitable to the hose by fittings that will pre-
face shields. Metal parts of the steam vent the nozzle from unintentionally
gun itself shall be insulated to protect becoming disengaged. Nozzle attach-
the operator against heat burns. ments shall be of metal and shall fit
[47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 61 onto the hose externally.
FR 26351, May 24, 1996] (iv) Dead man control. A dead man
control device shall be provided at the
1915.34 Mechanical paint removers. nozzle end of the blasting hose either
(a) Power tools. (1) Employees en- to provide direct cutoff or to signal the
gaged in the removal of paints, preserv- pot tender by means of a visual and au-
atives, rusts, or other coatings by dible signal to cut off the flow, in the
means of power tools shall be protected event the blaster loses control of the
against eye injury by using goggles or hose. The pot tender shall be available
face shields in accordance with the re- at all times to respond immediately to
quirements of subpart I of this part. the signal.
(2) All portable rotating tools used (2) Replacement. Hoses and all fittings
for the removal of paints, preserva- used for abrasive blasting shall be in-
tives, rusts or other coatings shall be spected frequently to insure timely re-
adequately guarded to protect both the placement before an unsafe amount of
operator and nearby workers from fly- wear has occurred.
ing missiles. (3) Personal protective equipment. (i)
(3) Portable electric tools shall be Abrasive blasters working in enclosed
grounded in accordance with the re- spaces shall be protected by hoods and
quirements of 1915.132. air line respirators, or by air helmets
(4) In a confined space, mechanical of a positive pressure type in accord-
exhaust ventilation sufficient to keep ance with the requirements of subpart
the dust concentration to a minimum I of this part.
shall be used, or employees shall be (ii) Abrasive blasters working in the
protected by respiratory protective open shall be protected as indicated in
equipment in accordance with the re- paragraph (c)(3)(i) of this section ex-
quirements of subpart I of this part. cept that when synthetic abrasive con-
(b) Flame removal. (1) Hardened pre- taining less than one percent free silica
servative coatings shall not be removed are used, filter type respirators ap-
by flame in enclosed spaces unless the proved jointly by the National Insti-
employees exposed to fumes are pro- tute for Occupational Safety and
tected by air line respirators in accord- Health and the Mine Safety and Health
ance with the requirements of subpart Administration for exposure to lead
I. Employees performing such an oper- dusts, used in conjunction with the
ation in the open air, and those ex- proper eye, face and head protection,
posed to the resulting fumes shall be may be used in accordance with sub-
protected by a fume filter type res- part I of this part.
45
(iii) Employees, other than blasters, (4) The metallic parts of air moving
including machine tenders and abrasive devices, including fans, blowers, and
recovery men, working in areas where jet-type air movers, and all duct work
unsafe concentrations of abrasive ma- shall be electrically bonded to the ves-
terials and dusts are present shall be sels structure.
protected by eye and respiratory pro- (b) Paints and tank coatings dissolved
tective equipment in accordance with in highly volatile, toxic and flammable
the requirements of subpart I of this solvents. Several organic coatings, ad-
part. hesives and resins are dissolved in
(iv) The blaster shall be protected highly toxic, flammable and explosive
against injury from exposure to the solvents with flash points below 80 F.
blast by appropriate protective cloth- Work involving such materials shall be
ing, including gloves. done only when all of the following spe-
(v) Since surges from drops in pres- cial precautions have been taken:
sure in the hose line can be of suffi- (1) Sufficient exhaust ventilation
cient proportions to throw the blaster shall be provided to keep the con-
off the staging, the blaster shall be pro- centration of solvent vapors below ten
tected by a safety belt when blasting is (10) percent of the lower explosive
being done from elevations where ade- limit. Frequent tests shall be made by
quate protection against falling cannot a competent person to ascertain the
be provided by railings. concentration.
[47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 61 (2) If the ventilation fails or if the
FR 26351, May 24, 1996] concentration of solvent vapors
reaches or exceeds ten (10) percent of
1915.35 Painting. the lower explosive limit, painting
(a) Paints mixed with toxic vehicles or shall be stopped and the compartment
solvents. (1) When paints mixed with shall be evacuated until the concentra-
toxic vehicles or solvents are sprayed, tion again falls below ten (10) percent
the following conditions shall apply: of the lower explosive limit. If the con-
(i) In confined spaces, employees concentration does not fall when painting
tinuously exposed to such spraying is stopped, additional ventilation to
shall be protected by air line res- bring the concentration to below ten
pirators in accordance with the re- (10) percent of the lower explosive limit
quirements of subpart I of this part. shall be provided.
(ii) In tanks or compartments, em- (3) Ventilation shall be continued
ployees continuously exposed to such after the completion of painting until
spraying shall be protected by air line the space or compartment is gas free.
respirators in accordance with the re- The final determination as to whether
quirements of subpart I. Where me- the space or compartment is gas free
chanical ventilation is provided, em- shall be made after the ventilating
ployees shall be protected by res- equipment has been shut off for at
pirators in accordance with the re- least 10 minutes.
quirements of subpart I of this part. (4) Exhaust ducts shall discharge
(iii) In large and well ventilated clear of working areas and away from
areas, employees exposed to such sources of possible ignition. Periodic
spraying shall be protected by res- tests shall be made to ensure that the
pirators in accordance with the re- exhausted vapors are not accumulating
quirements of subpart I of this part. in other areas within or around the
(2) Where brush application of paints vessel or dry dock.
with toxic solvents is done in confined (5) All motors and control equipment
spaces or in other areas where lack of shall be of the explosion-proof type.
ventilation creates a hazard, employ- Fans shall have nonferrous blades.
ees shall be protected by filter res- Portable air ducts shall also be of non-
pirators in accordance with the re- ferrous materials. All motors and asso-
quirements of subpart I of this part. ciated control equipment shall be prop-
(3) When flammable paints or vehi- erly maintained and grounded.
cles are used, precautions shall be (6) Only non-sparking paint buckets,
taken in accordance with the require- spray guns and tools shall be used.
ments of 1915.36. Metal parts of paint brushes and rollers
46
shall be insulated. Staging shall be (14) All employees doing exterior

erected in a manner which ensures that paint spraying with such paints shall
it is non-sparking. be protected by suitable filter car-
(7) Only explosion proof lights, ap- tridge type respirators in accordance
proved by the Underwriters Labora- with the requirements of subpart I of
tories for use in Class I, Group D this part and by suitable protective
atmospheres, or approved as permis- clothing.
sible by the Mine Safety and Health
Administration or the U.S. Coast [47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 61
FR 26351, May 24, 1996; 67 FR 44541, July 3,
Guard, shall be used.
2002]
(8) A competent person shall inspect
all power and lighting cables to ensure 1915.36 Flammable liquids.
that the insulation is in excellent con-
dition, free of all cracks and worn (a) In all cases when liquid solvents,
spots, that there are no connections paint and preservative removers,
within fifty (50) feet of the operation, paints or vehicles, other than those
that lines are not overloaded, and that covered by 1915.35(b), are capable of
they are suspended with sufficient producing a flammable atmosphere
slack to prevent undue stress or chaf- under the conditions of use, the fol-
ing. lowing precautions shall be taken:
(9) The face, eyes, head, hands, and (1) Smoking, open flames, arcs and
all other exposed parts of the bodies of spark-producing equipment shall be
employees handling such highly vola- prohibited in the area.
tile paints shall be protected. All foot- (2) Ventilation shall be provided in
wear shall be non-sparking, such as sufficient quantities to keep the con-
rubbers, rubber boots or rubber soled centration of vapors below ten (10) per-
shoes without nails. Coveralls or other cent of their lower explosive limit. Fre-
outer clothing shall be of cotton. Rub- quent tests shall be made by a com-
ber, rather than plastic, gloves shall be petent person to ascertain the con-
used because of the danger of static centration.
sparks. (3) Scrapings and rags soaked with
(10) No matches, lighted cigarettes, these materials shall be kept in a cov-
cigars, or pipes, and no cigarette light- ered metal container.
ers or ferrous articles shall be taken (4) Only explosion proof lights, ap-
into the area where work is being done. proved by the Underwriters Labora-
(11) All solvent drums taken into the tories for use in Class I, Group D
compartment shall be placed on non- atmospheres, or approved as permis-
ferrous surfaces and shall be grounded sible by the Mine Safety and Health
to the vessel. Metallic contact shall be Administration or the U.S. Coast
maintained between containers and
Guard, shall be used.
drums when materials are being trans-
(5) A competent person shall inspect
ferred from one to another.
all power and lighting cables to ensure
(12) Spray guns, paint pots, and me-
that the insulation is in excellent con-
tallic parts of connecting tubing shall
be electrically bonded, and the bonded dition, free of all cracks and worn
assembly shall be grounded to the ves- spots, that there are no connections
sel. within fifty (50) feet of the operation,
(13) All employees continuously in a that lines are not overloaded, and that
compartment in which such painting is they are suspended with sufficient
being performed shall be protected by slack to prevent undue stress or chaf-
air line respirators in accordance with ing.
the requirements of subpart I of this (6) Suitable fire extinguishing equip-
part and by suitable protective cloth- ment shall be immediately available in
ing. Employees entering such compart- the work area and shall be maintained
ments for a limited time shall be pro- in a state of readiness for instant use.
tected by filter cartridge type res-
pirators in accordance with the re-
quirements of subpart I of this part.
47
Subpart DWelding, Cutting and (3) When sufficient ventilation can-

Heating not be obtained without blocking the
means of access, employees in the con-
1915.51 Ventilation and protection in fined space shall be protected by air
welding, cutting and heating. line respirators in accordance with the
(a) The provisions of this section requirements of 1915.154, and an em-
shall apply to all ship repairing, ship- ployee on the outside of such a con-
building, and shipbreaking operations; fined space shall be assigned to main-
except that paragraph (e) of this sec- tain communication with those work-
tion shall apply only to ship repairing ing within it and to aid them in an
and shipbuilding. Paragraph (g) of this emergency.
section shall apply only to ship repair- (d) Welding, cutting or heating of met-
ing. als of toxic significance. (1) Welding, cut-
(b) Mechanical ventilation require- ting or heating in any enclosed spaces
ments. (1) For purposes of this section, aboard the vessel involving the metals
mechanical ventilation shall meet the specified below shall be performed with
following requirements: either general mechanical or local ex-
(i) Mechanical ventilation shall con- haust ventilation meeting the require-
sist of either general mechanical ven- ments of paragraph (b) of this section:
tilation systems or local exhaust sys- (i) Zinc-bearing base or filler metals
tems. or metals coated with zinc-bearing ma-
(ii) General mechanical ventilation terials.
shall be of sufficient capacity and so (ii) Lead base metals.
arranged as to produce the number of (iii) Cadmium-bearing filler mate-
air changes necessary to maintain rials.
welding fumes and smoke within safe (iv) Chromium-bearing metals or
limits. metals coated with chromium-bearing
(iii) Local exhaust ventilation shall materials.
consist of freely movable hoods in- (2) Welding, cutting or heating in any
tended to be placed by the welder or enclosed spaces aboard the vessel in-
burner as close as practicable to the volving the metals specified below
work. This system shall be of sufficient shall be performed with local exhaust
capacity and so arranged as to remove ventilation in accordance with the re-
fumes and smoke at the source and quirements of paragraph (b) of this sec-
keep the concentration of them in the tion or employees shall be protected by
breathing zone within safe limits. air line respirators in accordance with
(iv) Contaminated air exhausted from the requirements of 1915.154:
a working space shall be discharged (i) Metals containing lead, other than
into the open air or otherwise clear of as an impurity, or metals coated with
the source of intake air. lead-bearing materials.
(v) All air replacing that withdrawn (ii) Cadmium-bearing or cadmium
shall be clean and respirable. coated base metals.
(vi) Oxygen shall not be used for ven- (iii) Metals coated with mercury-
tilation purposes, comfort cooling, bearing metals.
blowing dust or dirt from clothing, or (iv) Beryllium-containing base or
for cleaning the work area. filler metals. Because of its high tox-
(c) Welding, cutting and heating in con- icity, work involving beryllium shall
fined spaces. (1) Except as provided in be done with both local exhaust ven-
paragraphs (c)(3) and (d)(2) of this sec- tilation and air line respirators.
tion either general ventilation meeting (3) Employees performing such oper-
the requirements of paragraph (b) of ations in the open air shall be pro-
this section shall be provided whenever tected by filter type respirators, and
welding, cutting or heating is per- employees performing such operations
formed in a confined space. on beryllium-containing base or filler
(2) The means of access shall be pro- metals shall be protected by air line
vided to a confined space and ventila- respirators, in accordance with the re-
tion ducts to this space shall be ar- quirements of 1915.154.
ranged in accordance with 1915.76(b) (4) Other employees exposed to the
(1) and (2). same atmosphere as the welders or
48
burners shall be protected in the same piratory protective equipment shall be

manner as the welder or burner. provided.
(e) Inert-gas metal-arc welding. (1) (2) Employees performing any type of
Since the inert-gas metal-arc welding welding, cutting or heating shall be
process involves the production of ul- protected by suitable eye protective
traviolet radiation of intensities of 5 to equipment in accordance with the re-
30 times that produced during shielded quirements of 1915.153.
metal-arc welding, the decomposition (g) Residues and cargoes of metallic
of chlorinated solvents by ultraviolet ores. (1) Residues and cargoes of metal-
rays, and the liberation of toxic fumes lic ores of toxic significance shall be
and gases, employees shall not be per- removed from the area or protected
mitted to engage in, or be exposed to from the heat before ship repair work
the process until the following special which involves welding, cutting or
precautions have been taken: heating is begun.
(i) The use of chlorinated solvents [47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 67
shall be kept at least two hundred (200) FR 44541, July 3, 2002]
feet from the exposed arc, and surfaces
1915.53 Welding, cutting and heating
prepared with chlorinated solvents in way of preservative coatings.
shall be thoroughly dry before welding
is permitted on such surfaces. (a) The provisions in this section
(ii) Helpers and other employees in shall apply to all ship repairing, ship-
the area not protected from the arc by building and shipbreaking operations
screening as provided in 1915.56(e) except for paragraphs (e) and (f) of this
shall be protected by filter lenses section which shall apply to ship re-
meeting the requirements of 1915.153. pairing and shipbulding and shall not
apply to shipbreaking.
When two or more welders are exposed
(b) Before welding, cutting or heating
to each others arc, filter lens goggles
is commenced on any surface covered
of a suitable type meeting the require-
by a preservative coating whose flam-
ments of 1915.153 shall be worn under
mability is not known, a test shall be
welding helmets or hand shields to pro-
made by a competent person to deter-
tect the welder against flashes and ra-
mine its flammability. Preservative
diant energy when either the helmet is
coatings shall be considered to be high-
lifted or the shield is removed.
ly flammable when scrapings burn with
(iii) Welders and other employees extreme rapidity.
who are exposed to radiation shall be (c) Precautions shall be taken to pre-
suitably protected so that the skin is vent ignition of highly flammable
covered completely to prevent burns hardened preservative coatings. When
and other damage by ultraviolet rays. coatings are determined to be highly
Welding helmets and hand shields shall flammable they shall be stripped from
be free of leaks and openings, and free the area to be heated to prevent igni-
of highly reflective surfaces. tion, or, where shipbreaking is in-
(iv) When inert-gas metal-arc weld- volved, the coatings may be burned
ing is being performed on stainless away under controlled conditions. A 112
steel, the requirements of paragraph inch or larger fire hose with fog nozzle,
(d)(2) of this section shall be met to which has been uncoiled and placed
protect against dangerous concentra- under pressure, shall be immediately
tions of nitrogen dioxide. available for instant use in the imme-
(f) General welding, cutting, and heat- diate vicinity, consistent with avoiding
ing. (1) Welding, cutting and heating freezing of the hose.
not involving conditions or materials (d) Protection against toxic preservative
described in paragraph (c), (d) or (e) of coatings. (1) In enclosed spaces, all sur-
this section may normally be done faces covered with toxic preservatives
without mechanical ventilation or res- shall be stripped of all toxic coatings
piratory protective equipment, but for a distance of at least 4 inches from
where, because of unusual physical or the area of heat application or the em-
atmospheric conditions, an unsafe ac- ployees shall be protected by air line
cumulation of contaminants exists, respirators meeting the requirements
suitable mechanical ventilation or res- of 1915.154.
49
(2) In the open air, employees shall be them, either be filled with water or
protected by a filter type respirator in thoroughly cleaned of such substances
accordance with the requirements of and ventilated and tested.
1915.154. (b) Before heat is applied to a drum,
(e) Before welding, cutting or heating container, or hollow structure, a vent
is commenced in enclosed spaces on or opening shall be provided for the re-
metals covered by soft and greasy pre- lease of any built-up pressure during
servatives, the following precautions the application of heat.
shall be taken: (c) Before welding, cutting, heating
(1) A competent person shall test the or brazing is begun on structural voids
atmosphere in the space to ensure that such as skegs, bilge keels, fair waters,
it does not contain explosive vapors, masts, booms, support stanchions, pipe
since there is a possibility that some stanchions or railings, a competent
soft and greasy preservatives may have person shall inspect the object and, if
flash points below temperatures which necessary, test it for the presence of
may be expected to occur naturally. If flammable liquids or vapors. If flam-
such vapors are determined to be mable liquids or vapors are present, the
present, no hot work shall be com- object shall be made safe.
menced until such precautions have (d) Objects such as those listed in
been taken as will ensure that the paragraph (c) of this section shall also
welding, cutting or heating can be per- be inspected to determine whether
formed in safety. water or other non-flammable liquids
(2) The preservative coatings shall be are present which, when heated, would
removed for a sufficient distance from build up excessive pressure. If such liq-
the area to be heated to ensure that uids are determined to be present, the
the temperature of the unstripped object shall be vented, cooled, or other-
metal will not be appreciably raised. wise made safe during the application
Artificial cooling of the metal sur- of heat.
rounding the heated area may be used
(e) Jacketed vessels shall be vented
to limit the size of the area required to
before and during welding, cutting or
be cleaned. The prohibition contained
heating operations in order to release
in 1915.34(b)(2) shall apply.
any pressure which may build up dur-
(f) Immediately after welding, cut-
ing the application of heat.
ting or heating is commenced in en-
closed spaces on metal covered by soft 1915.55 Gas welding and cutting.
and greasy preservatives, and at fre-
quent intervals thereafter, a competent The provisions of this section shall
person shall make tests to ensure that apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding
no flammable vapors are being pro- and shipbreaking.
duced by the coatings. If such vapors (a) Transporting, moving and storing
are determined to be present, the oper- compressed gas cylinders. (1) Valve pro-
ation shall be stopped immediately and tection caps shall be in place and se-
shall not be resumed until such addi- cure. Oil shall not be used to lubricate
tional precautions have been taken as protection caps.
are necessary to ensure that the oper- (2) When cylinders are hoisted, they
ation can be resumed safely. shall be secured on a cradle, slingboard
or pallet. They shall not be hoisted by
FR 44542, July 3, 2002]
means of magnets or choker slings.
(3) Cylinders shall be moved by tilt-
1915.54 Welding, cutting and heating ing and rolling them on their bottom
of hollow metal containers and edges. They shall not be intentionally
structures not covered by 1915.12. dropped, struck, or permitted to strike
The provisions of this section shall each other violently.
apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding (4) When cylinders are transported by
and shipbreaking. vehicle, they shall be secured in posi-
(a) Drums, containers, or hollow tion.
structures which have contained flam- (5) Valve protection caps shall not be
mable substances shall, before welding, used for lifting cylinders from one
cutting, or heating is undertaken on vertical position to another. Bars shall
50
not be used under valves or valve pro- (d) Use of fuel gas. The employer shall
tection caps to pry cylinders loose thoroughly instruct employees in the
when frozen. Warm, not boiling, water safe use of fuel gas, as follows:
shall be used to thaw cylinders loose. (1) Before connecting a regulator to a
(6) Unless cylinders are firmly se- cylinder valve, the valve shall be
cured on a special carrier intended for opened slightly and closed imme-
this purpose, regulators shall be re- diately. (This action is generally
moved and valve protection caps put in termed cracking and is intended to
place before cylinders are moved. clear the valve of dust or dirt that
(7) A suitable cylinder truck, chain, might otherwise enter the regulator.)
or other steadying device shall be used The person cracking the valve shall
to keep cylinders from being knocked stand to one side of the outlet, not in
over while in use. front of it. The valve of a fuel gas cyl-
inder shall not be cracked where the
(8) When work is finished, when cyl-
gas would reach welding work, sparks,
inders are empty or when cylinders are
flame or other possible sources of igni-
moved at any time, the cylinder valves tion.
shall be closed. (2) The cylinder valve shall always be
(9) Acetylene cylinders shall be se- opened slowly to prevent damage to
cured in an upright position at all the regulator. To permit quick closing,
times except, if necessary, for short pe- valves on fuel gas cylinders shall not
riods of time while cylinders are actu- be opened more than 112 turns. When a
ally being hoisted or carried. special wrench is required, it shall be
(b) Placing cylinders. (1) Cylinders left in position on the stem of the valve
shall be kept far enough away from the while the cylinder is in use so that the
actual welding or cutting operation so fuel gas flow can be shut off quickly in
that sparks, hot slag or flame will not case of an emergency. In the case of
reach them. When this is impractical, manifolded or coupled cylinders, at
fire resistant shields shall be provided. least one such wrench shall always be
(2) Cylinders shall be placed where available for immediate use. Nothing
they cannot become part of an elec- shall be placed on top of a fuel gas cyl-
trical circuit. Electrodes shall not be inder, when in use, which may damage
struck against a cylinder to strike an the safety device or interfere with the
arc. quick closing of the valve.
(3) Fuel gas cylinders shall be placed (3) Fuel gas shall not be used from
with valve end up whenever they are in cylinders through torches or other de-
use. They shall not be placed in a loca- vices which are equipped with shut-off
tion where they would be subject to valves without reducing the pressure
open flame, hot metal, or other sources through a suitable regulator attached
of artificial heat. to the cylinder valve or manifold.
(4) Cylinders containing oxygen or (4) Before a regulator is removed
acetylene or other fuel gas shall not be from a cylinder valve, the cylinder
valve shall always be closed and the
taken into confined spaces.
gas released from the regulator.
(c) Treatment of cylinders. (1) Cyl-
(5) If, when the valve on a fuel gas
inders, whether full or empty, shall not cylinder is opened, there is found to be
be used as rollers or supports. a leak around the valve stem, the valve
(2) No person other than the gas sup- shall be closed and the gland nut tight-
plier shall attempt to mix gases in a ened. If this action does not stop the
cylinder. No one except the owner of leak, the use of the cylinder shall be
the cylinder or person authorized by discontinued, and it shall be properly
him shall refill a cylinder. No one shall tagged and removed from the vessel. In
use a cylinders contents for purposes the event that fuel gas should leak
other than those intended by the sup- from the cylinder valve rather than
plier. Only cylinders bearing Interstate from the valve stem and the gas cannot
Commerce Commission identification be shut off, the cylinder shall be prop-
and inspection markings shall be used. erly tagged and removed from the ves-
(3) No damaged or defective cylinder sel. If a regulator attached to a cyl-
shall be used. inder valve will effectively stop a leak
51
through the valve seat, the cylinder it is subject, but in no case less than
need not be removed from the vessel. two hundered (200) psi. Defective hose
(6) If a leak should develop at a fuse or hose in doubtful condition shall not
plug or other safety device, the cyl- be used.
inder shall be removed from the vessel (5) Hose couplings shall be of the type
(e) Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds. (1) that cannot be unlocked or discon-
Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds shall nected by means of a straight pull
bear the name of the substance they without rotary motion.
contain in letters at least one (1) inch (6) Boxes used for the stowage of gas
high which shall be either painted on hose shall be ventilated.
the manifold or on a sign permanently (g) Torches. (1) Clogged torch tip
attached to it. openings shall be cleaned with suitable
(2) Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds cleaning wires, drills or other devices
shall be placed in safe and accessible designed for such purpose.
locations in the open air. They shall (2) Torches shall be inspected at the
not be located within enclosed spaces. beginning of each shift for leaking
(3) Manifold hose connections, in- shutoff valves, hose couplings, and tip
cluding both ends of the supply hose connections. Defective torches shall
that lead to the manifold, shall be such not be used.
that the hose cannot be interchanged (3) Torches shall be lighted by fric-
between fuel gas and oxygen manifolds tion lighters or other approved devices,
and supply header connections. Adapt- and not by matches or from hot work.
ers shall not be used to permit the (h) Pressure regulators. Oxygen and
interchange of hose. Hose connections fuel gas pressure regulators including
shall be kept free of grease and oil. their related gauges shall be in proper
(4) When not in use, manifold and working order while in use.
header hose connections shall be
capped. 1915.56 Arc welding and cutting.
(5) Nothing shall be placed on top of The provisions of this section shall
a manifold, when in use, which will apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding
damage the manifold or interfere with and shipbreaking.
the quick closing of the valves. (a) Manual electrode holders. (1) Only
(f) Hose. (1) Fuel gas hose and oxygen manual electrode holders which are
hose shall be easily distinguishable specifically designed for arc welding
from each other. The contrast may be and cutting and are of a capacity capa-
made by different colors or by surface ble of safely handling the maximum
characteristics readily distinguishable rated current required by the elec-
by the sense of touch. Oxygen and fuel trodes shall be used.
gas hoses shall not be interchangeable. (2) Any current carrying parts pass-
A single hose having more than one gas ing through the portion of the holder
passage, a wall failure of which would which the arc welder or cutter grips in
permit the flow of one gas into the his hand, and the outer surfaces of the
other gas passage, shall not be used. jaws of the holder, shall be fully insu-
(2) When parallel sections of oxygen lated against the maximum voltage en-
and fuel gas hose are taped together countered to ground.
not more than 4 inches out of 8 inches (b) Welding cables and connectors. (1)
shall be covered by tape. All arc welding and cutting cables shall
(3) All hose carrying acetylene, oxy- be of the completely insulated, flexible
gen, natural or manufactured fuel gas, type, capable of handling the max-
or any gas or substance which may ig- imum current requirements of the
nite or enter into combustion or be in work in progress, taking into account
any way harmful to employees, shall be the duty cycle under which the arc
inspected at the beginning of each welder or cutter is working.
shift. Defective hose shall be removed (2) Only cable free from repair or
from service. splices for a minimum distance of ten
(4) Hose which has been subjected to (10) feet from the cable end to which
flashback or which shows evidence of the electrode holder is connected shall
severe wear or damage shall be tested be used, except that cables with stand-
to twice the normal pressure to which ard insulated connectors or with
52
splices whose insulating quality is containing the circuit conductor or

equal to that of the cable are per- through a separate wire which is
mitted. grounded at the source of the current.
(3) When it becomes necessary to con- Grounding circuits, other than by
nect or splice lengths of cable one to means of the vessels structure, shall
another, substantial insulated connec- be checked to ensure that the circuit
tors of a capacity at least equivalent to between the ground and the grounded
that of the cable shall be used. If con- power conductor has resistance low
nections are effected by means of cable enough to permit sufficient current to
lugs, they shall be securely fastened to- flow to cause the fuse or circuit break-
gether to give good electrical contact, er to interrupt the current.
and the exposed metal parts of the lugs
(6) All ground connections shall be
shall be completely insulated.
(4) Cables in poor repair shall not be inspected to ensure that they are me-
used. When a cable other than the chanically strong and electrically ade-
cable lead referred to in paragraph quate for the required current.
(b)(2) of this section becomes worn to (d) Operating instructions. Employers
the extent of exposing bare conductors, shall instruct employees in the safe
the portion thus exposed shall be pro- means of arc welding and cutting as
tected by means of rubber and friction follows:
tapes or other equivalent insulation. (1) When electrode holders are to be
(c) Ground returns and machine left unattended, the electrodes shall be
grounding. (1) A ground return cable removed and the holders shall be so
shall have a safe current carrying ca- placed or protected that they cannot
pacity equal to or exceeding the speci- make electrical contact with employ-
fied maximum output capacity of the ees or conducting objects.
arc welding or cutting unit which it (2) Hot electrode holders shall not be
services. When a single ground return dipped in water, since to do so may ex-
cable services more than one unit, its pose the arc welder or cutter to elec-
safe current carrying capacity shall tric shock.
equal or exceed the total specified
(3) When the arc welder or cutter has
maximum output capacities of all the
units which it services. occasion to leave his work or to stop
(2) Structures or pipe lines, except work for any appreciable length of
pipe lines containing gases of flam- time, or when the arc welding or cut-
mable liquids or conduits containing ting machine is to be moved, the power
electrical circuits, may be used as part supply switch to the equipment shall
of the ground return circuit, provided be opened.
that the pipe or structure has a current (4) Any faulty or defective equipment
carrying capacity equal to that re- shall be reported to the supervisor.
quired by paragraph (c)(1) of this sec- (e) Shielding. Whenever practicable,
tion. all arc welding and cutting operations
(3) When a structure or pipe line is shall be shielded by noncombustible or
employed as a ground return circuit, it flame-proof screens which will protect
shall be determined that the required employees and other persons working
electrical contact exists at all joints. in the vicinity from the direct rays of
The generation of an arc, sparks or the arc.
heat at any point shall cause rejection
of the structure as a ground circuit. 1915.57 Uses of fissionable material
(4) When a structure or pipe line is in ship repairing and shipbuilding.
continuously employed as a ground re-
The provisions of this section apply
turn circuit, all joints shall be bonded,
to ship repairing and shipbuilding only.
and periodic inspections shall be con-
ducted to ensure that no condition of (a) In activities involving the use of
electrolysis or fire hazard exists by vir- and exposure to sources of ionizing ra-
tue of such use. diation not only on conventionally
(5) The frames of all arc welding and powered but also on nuclear powered
cutting machines shall be grounded ei- vessels, the applicable provisions of the
ther through a third wire in the cable Nuclear Regulatory Commissions
53
Standards for Protection Against Radi- (6) Barrels, boxes, cans, loose bricks,
ation (10 CFR part 20), relating to pro- or other unstable objects shall not be
tection against occupational radiation used as working platforms or for the
exposure, shall apply. support of planking intended as scaf-
(b) Any activity which involves the folds or working platforms.
use of radiocative material, whether or (7) No scaffold shall be erected,
not under license from the Nuclear moved, dismantled or altered except
Regulatory Commission, shall be per- under the supervision of competent
formed by competent persons specially persons.
trained in the proper and safe oper- (8) No welding, burning, riveting or
ation of such equipment. In the case of open flame work shall be performed on
materials used under Commission li- any staging suspended by means of
cense, only persons actually licensed, fiber rope.
or competent persons under direction (9) Lifting bridles on working plat-
and supervision of the licensee, shall forms suspended from cranes shall con-
perform such work. sist of four legs so attached that the
stability of the platform is assured.
Subpart EScaffolds, Ladders and (10) Unless the crane hook has a safe-
ty latch or is moused, the lifting bri-
Other Working Surfaces dles on working platforms suspended
1915.71 Scaffolds or staging. from cranes shall be attached by
shackles to the lower lifting block or
(a) Scope and application. The provi- other positive means shall be taken to
sions of this section shall apply to all prevent them from becoming acciden-
ship repairing, shipbuilding and tally disengaged from the crane hook.
shipbreaking operations except that (c) Independent pole wood scaffolds. (1)
paragraphs (b)(8) through (b)(10) and All pole uprights shall be set plump.
paragraphs (c) through (f) of this sec- Poles shall rest on a foundation of suf-
tion shall only apply to ship repairing ficient size and strength to distribute
and shipbuilding operations and shall the loan and to prevent displacement.
not apply to shipbreaking. (2) In light-duty scaffolds, not more
(b) General requirements. (1) All scaf- than 24 feet in height, poles may be
folds and their supports whether of spliced by overlapping the ends not less
lumber, steel or other material, shall than 4 feet and securely nailing them
be capable of supporting the load they together. A substantial cleat shall be
are designed to carry with a safety fac- nailed to the lower section to form a
tor of not less than four (4). support for the upper section except
(2) All lumber used in the construc- when bolted connections are used.
tion of scaffolds shall be spruce, fir, (3) All other poles to be spliced shall
long leaf yellow pine, Oregon pine or be squared at the ends of each splice,
wood of equal strength. The use of abutted, and rigidly fastened together
hemlock, short leaf yellow pine, or by not less than two cleats securely
short fiber lumber is prohibited. nailed or bolted thereto. Each cleat
(3) Lumber dimensions as given in shall overlap each pole end by at least
this subpart are nominal except where 24 inches and shall have a width equal
given in fractions of an inch. to the face of the pole to which it is at-
(4) All lumber used in the construc- tached. The combined cross sectional
tion of scaffolds shall be sound, area of the cleats shall be not less than
straight-grained, free from cross grain, the cross sectional area of the pole.
shakes and large, loose or dead knots. (4) Ledgers shall extend over two con-
It shall also be free from dry rot, large secutive pole spaces and shall overlap
checks, worm holes or other defects the poles at each end by not less than
which impair its strength or dura- 4 inches. They shall be left in position
bility. to brace the poles as the platform is
(5) Scaffolds shall be maintained in a raised with the progress of the work.
safe and secure condition. Any compo- Ledgers shall be level and shall be se-
nent of the scaffold which is broken, curely nailed or bolted to each pole and
burned or otherwise defective shall be shall be placed against the inside face
replaced. of each pole.
54
(5) All bearers shall be set with their base sections of the extension trestle
greater dimension vertical and shall ladder, shall be as follows:
extend beyond the ledgers upon which (i) Ladders up to and including those
they rest. 16 feet long shall have side rails of not
(6) Diagonal bracing shall be provided less than 1516234 inch lumber.
between the parallel poles, and cross (ii) Ladders over 16 feet long and up
bracing shall be provided between the to and including those 20 feet long
inner and outer poles or from the outer shall have side rails of not less than
poles to the ground. 1516 3 inch lumber.
(7) Minimum dimensions and spacing (3) The side rails of the extension sec-
of members shall be in accordance with tion of the extension trestle ladder
Table E1 in 1915.118. shall be parallel and shall have min-
(8) Platform planking shall be in ac- imum dimensions as follows:
cordance with the requirements of (i) Ladders up to and including 12 feet
paragraph (i) of this section. long shall have side rails of not less
(9) Backrails and toeboards shall be than 1516214 inch lumber.
in accordance with the requirements of (ii) Ladders over 12 feet long and up
paragraph (j) of this section. to and including those 16 feet long
(d) Independent pole metal scaffolds. (1) shall have side rails of not less than
Metal scaffold members shall be main- 1516212 inch lumber.
tained in good repair and free of corro- (iii) Ladders over 16 feet long and up
sion. to and including those 20 feet long
(2) All vertical and horizontal mem- shall have side rails of not less than
bers shall be fastened together with a 1516234 inch lumber.
coupler or locking device which will (4) Trestle ladders and base sections
form a positive connection. The lock- of extension trestle ladders shall be so
ing device shall be of a type which has spread that when in an open position
no loose parts. the spread of the trestle at the bottom,
(3) Posts shall be kept plumb during inside to inside, shall be not less than
erection and the scaffold shall be sub- 512 inches per foot of the length of the
sequently kept plumb and rigid by ladder.
means of adequate bracing. (5) The width between the side rails
(4) Posts shall be fitted with bases at the bottom of the trestle ladder or
supported on a firm foundation to dis- of the base section of the extension
tribute the load. When wooden sills are trestle ladder shall be not less than 21
used, the bases shall be fastened there- inches for all ladders and sections 6
to. feet or less in length. For longer
(5) Bearers shall be located at each lengths of ladder, the width shall be in-
set of posts, at each level, and at each creased at least 1 inch for each addi-
intermediate level where working plat- tional foot of length. The width be-
forms are installed. tween the side rails of the extension
(6) Tubular bracing shall be applied section of the trestle ladder shall be
both lengthwise and crosswise as re- not less than 12 inches.
quired. (6) In order to limit spreading, the
(7) Platform planking shall be in ac- top ends of the side rails of both the
cordance with the requirements of trestle ladder and of the base section of
paragraph (h) of this section. the extension trestle ladder shall be
(8) Backrails and toeboards shall be beveled, or of equivalent construction,
in accordance with the requirements of and shall be provided with a metal
paragraph (j) of this section. hinge.
(e) Wood trestle and extension trestle (7) A metal spreader or locking de-
ladders. (1) The use of trestle ladders, vice to hold the front and back sections
or extension sections or base sections in an open position, and to hold the ex-
of extension trestle ladders longer than tension section securely in the elevated
20 feet is prohibited. The total height position, shall be a component of each
of base and extension may, however, be trestle ladder or extension ladder.
more than 20 feet. (8) Rungs shall be parallel and level.
(2) The minimum dimensions of the On the trestle ladder, or on the base
side rails of the trestle ladder, or the section of the extension trestle ladder,
55
rungs shall be spaced not less than 8 is used, the number of persons per-
inches nor more than 18 inches apart; mitted to work on the scaffold shall be
on the extension section of the exten- determined by the size and the safe
sion trestle ladder, rungs shall be working load of the scaffold.
spaced not less than 6 inches nor more (9) Backrails and toeboards shall be
than 12 inches apart. in accordance with the requirements of
(9) Platform planking shall be in ac- paragraph (j) of this section.
cordance with the requirements of (10) The swinging scaffold platform
paragraph (i) of this section, except shall be one of the three types de-
that the width of the platform plank- scribed in paragraphs (f)(11), (12), and
ing shall not exceed the distance be- (13) of this section.
tween the side rails. (11) The ladder-type platform con-
(10) Backrails and toeboards shall be
sists of boards upon a horizontal lad-
in accordance with the requirements of
der-like structure, referred to herein as
paragraph (j) of this section.
the ladder, the side rails of which are
(f) Painters suspended scaffolds. (1)
parallel. If this type of platform is used
The supporting hooks of swinging scaf-
the following requirements shall be
folds shall be constructed to be equiva-
lent in strength to mild steel or met.
wrought iron, shall be forged with care, (i) The width between the side rails
shall be not less than 78 inch in diame- shall be no more than 20 inches.
ter, and shall be secured to a safe an- (ii) The side rails of ladders in ladder-
chorage at all times. type platforms shall be equivalent in
(2) The ropes supporting a swinging strength to a beam of clear straight-
scaffold shall be equivalent in strength grained spruce of the dimensions con-
to first-grade 34 inch diameter manila tained in Table E2 in 1915.118.
rope properly rigged into a set of (iii) The side rails shall be tied to-
standard 6 inch blocks consisting of at gether with tie rods. The tie rods shall
least one double and one single block. be not less than 516 inch in diameter,
(3) Manila and wire ropes shall be located no more than 5 feet apart, pass
carefully examined before each oper- through the rails, and be riveted up
ation and thereafter as frequently as tight against washers at both ends.
may be necessary to ensure their safe (iv) The rungs shall be of straight-
condition. grained oak, ash, or hickory, not less
(4) Each end of the scaffold platform than 118 inches diameter, with 78 inch
shall be supported by a wrought iron or tenons mortised into the side rails not
mild steel stirrup or hanger, which in less than 78 inch and shall be spaced no
turn is supported by the suspension more than 18 inches on centers.
ropes. (v) Flooring strips shall be spaced no
(5) Stirrups shall be constructed so as more than 58 inch apart except at the
to be equivalent in strength to wrought side rails, where 1 inch spacing is per-
iron 34 inch in diameter. missible.
(6) The stirrups shall be formed with
(vi) Flooring strips shall be cleated
a horizontal bottom member to support
on their undersides.
the platform, shall be provided with
means to support the guardrail and (12) The plank-type platform consists
midrail and shall have a loop or eye at of planks supported on the stirrups or
the top for securing the supporting hangers. If this type of platform is
hook on the block. used, the following requirements shall
(7) Two or more swinging scaffolds be met:
shall not at any time be combined into (i) The planks of plank-type plat-
one by bridging the distance between forms shall be of not less than 210 inch
them with planks or any other form of lumber.
platform. (ii) The platform shall be no more
(8) No more than two persons shall be than 24 inches in width.
permitted to work at one time on a (iii) The planks shall be tied together
swinging scaffold built to the min- by cleats of not less than 16 inch lum-
imum specifications contained in this ber, nailed on their undersides at inter-
paragraph. Where heavier construction vals of not more than 4 feet.
56
(iv) The planks shall extend not less (3) The lateral spread of the legs shall
than 6 inches nor more than 18 inches be equal to not less than one-third of
beyond the supporting stirrups. the height of the horse.
(v) A cleat shall be nailed across the (4) All horses shall be kept in good
platform on the underside at each end repair, and shall be properly secured
outside the stirrup to prevent the plat- when used in staging or in locations
form from slipping off the stirrup. where they may be insecure.
(vi) Stirrup supports shall be not (5) Platform planking shall be in ac-
more than 10 feet apart. cordance with the requirements of
(13) The beam-type platform consists paragraph (i) of this section.
of longitudinal side stringers with (6) Backrails and toeboards shall be
cross beams set on edge and spaced not in accordance with paragraph (j) of this
more than 4 feet apart on which longi- section.
tudinal platform planks are laid. If this (h) Other types of scaffolds. (1) Scaf-
type platform is used, the following re- folds of a type for which specifications
quirements shall be met: are not contained in this section shall
(i) The side stringers shall be of meet the general requirements of para-
sound, straight-grained lumber, free graphs (b), (i), and (j) of this section,
from knots, and of not less than 26 shall be in accordance with recognized
inch lumber, set on edge. principles of design and shall be con-
(ii) The stringers shall be supported structed in accordance with accepted
on the stirrups with a clear span be- standards covering such equipment.
tween stirrups of not more than 16 feet. (i) Scaffold or platform planking. (1)
Except as otherwise provided in para-
(iii) The stringers shall be bolted to
graphs (f)(11) and (13) of this section,
the stirrups by U-bolts passing around
platform planking shall be of not less
the stirrups and bolted through the
than 210 inch lumber. Platform plank-
stringers with nuts drawn up tight on
ing shall be straight-grained and free
the inside face.
from large or loose knots and may be
(iv) The ends of the stringers shall
either rough or dressed.
extend beyond the stirrups not less
(2) Platforms of staging shall be not
than 6 inches nor more than 12 inches
less than two 10 inch planks in width
at each end of the platform.
except in such cases as the structure of
(v) The platform shall be supported the vessel or the width of the trestle
on cross beams of 26 inch lumber be- ladders make it impossible to provide
tween the side stringers securely nailed such a width.
thereto and spaced not more than 4 (3) Platform planking shall project
feet on centers. beyond the supporting members at ei-
(vi) The platform shall be not more ther end by at least 6 inches but in no
than 24 inches wide. case shall project more than 12 inches
(vii) The platform shall be formed of unless the planks are fastened to the
boards 78 inch in thickness by not less supporting members.
than 6 inches in width, nailed tightly (4) Table E4 in 1915.118 shall be used
together, and extending to the outside as a guide in determining safe loads for
face of the stringers. scaffold planks.
(viii) The ends of all platform boards (j) Backrails and toeboards. (1) Scaf-
shall rest on the top of the cross folding, staging, runways, or working
beams, shall be securely nailed, and at platforms which are supported or sus-
no intermediate points in the length of pended more than 5 feet above a solid
the platform shall there be any canti- surface, or at any distance above the
lever ends. water, shall be provided with a railing
(g) Horse scaffolds. (1) The minimum which has a top rail whose upper sur-
dimensions of lumber used in the con- face is from 42 to 45 inches above the
struction of horses shall be in accord- upper surface of the staging, platform,
ance with Table E3 in 1915.118. or runway and a midrail located half-
(2) Horses constructed of materials way between the upper rail and the
other than lumber shall provide the staging, platform, or runway.
strength, rigidity and security required (2) Rails shall be of 24 inch lumber,
of horses constructed of lumber. flat bar or pipe. When used with rigid
57
supports, taut wire or fiber rope of ade- 1915.72 Ladders.

quate strength may be used. If the dis- The provisions of this section shall
tance between supports is more than 8 apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding
feet, rails shall be equivalent in and shipbreaking.
strength to 24 inch lumber. Rails shall (a) General requirements. (1) The use of
be firmly secured. Where exposed to ladders with broken or missing rungs
hot work or chemicals, fiber rope rails or steps, broken or split side rails, or
shall not be used. other faulty or defective construction
(3) Rails may be omitted where the is prohibited. When ladders with such
structure of the vessel prevents their defects are discovered, they shall be
use. When rails are omitted, employees immediately withdrawn from service.
working more than 5 feet above solid Inspection of metal ladders shall in-
surfaces shall be protected by safety clude checking for corrosion of inte-
belts and life lines meeting the require- riors of open end, hollow rungs.
ments of 1915.159 and 1915.160, and (2) When sections of ladders are
employees working over water shall be spliced, the ends shall be abutted, and
protected by buoyant work vests meet- not fewer than 2 cleats shall be se-
ing the requirements of 1915.158(a). curely nailed or bolted to each rail.
(4) Employees working from swinging The combined cross sectional area of
scaffolds which are triced out of a the cleats shall be not less than the
vertical line below their supports or cross sectional area of the side rail.
from scaffolds on paint floats subject The dimensions of side rails for their
to surging, shall be protected against total length shall be those specified in
falling toward the vessel by a railing or paragraph (b) or (c) of this section.
a safety belt and line attached to the (3) Portable ladders shall be lashed,
backrail. blocked or otherwise secured to pre-
(5) When necessary, to prevent tools vent their being displaced. The side
and materials from falling on men rails of ladders used for access to any
below, toeboards of not less than 14 level shall extend not less than 36
inch lumber shall be provided. inches above that level. When this is
(k) Access to staging. (1) Access from not practical, grab rails which will pro-
below to staging more than 5 feet vide a secure grip for an employee
above a floor, deck or the ground shall moving to or from the point of access
consist of well secured stairways, shall be installed.
cleated ramps, fixed or portable ladders (4) Portable metal ladders shall be of
meeting the applicable requirements of strength equivalent to that of wood
1915.72 or rigid type non-collapsible ladders. Manufactured portable metal
trestles with parallel and level rungs. ladders provided by the employer shall
(2) Ramps and stairways shall be probe in accordance with the provisions of
vided with 36-inch handrails with ANSI Standard A14.21972: Safety Re-
midrails. quirements for Portable Metal Ladders
(3) Ladders shall be so located or (incorporated by reference, see 1915.5).
other means shall be taken so that it is (5) Portable metal ladders shall not
not necessary for employees to step be used near electrical conductors nor
more than one foot from the ladder to for electric arc welding operations.
any intermediate landing or platform. (6) Manufactured portable wood lad-
(4) Ladders forming integral parts of ders provided by the employer shall be
prefabricated staging are deemed to in accordance with the provisions of
meet the requirements of these regula- ANSI Standard A14.11975: Safety Re-
tions. quirements for Portable Wood Ladders
(5) Access from above to staging (incorporated by reference, see 1915.5).
more than 3 feet below the point of ac- (b) Construction of portable wood
cess shall consist of a straight, port- cleated ladders up to 30 feet in length. (1)
able ladder meeting the applicable re- Wood side rails shall be made from
quirements of 1915.72 or a Jacobs lad- West Coast hemlock, Eastern spruce,
der properly secured, meeting the re- Sitka spruce, or wood of equivalent
quirements of 1915.74(d). strength. Material shall be seasoned,
[47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 67 straight-grained wood, and free from
FR 44542, July 3, 2002] shakes, checks, decay or other defects
58
which will impair its strength. The use fastened with through bolts or other
of low density woods is prohibited. fasteners of equivalent strength.
(2) Side rails shall be dressed on all [47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 67
sides and kept free of splinters. FR 44542, July 3, 2002]
(3) All knots shall be sound and hard.
The use of material containing loose 1915.73 Guarding of deck openings
knots is prohibited. Knots shall not ap- and edges.
pear on the narrow face of the rail and, (a) The provisions of this section
when in the side face, shall be not more shall apply to ship repairing and ship-
than 12 inch in diameter or within 12 building operations and shall not apply
inch of the edge of the rail or nearer to shipbreaking.
than 3 inches to a tread or rung. (b) When employees are working in
(4) Pitch pockets not exceeding 18 the vicinity of flush manholes and
inch in width, 2 inches in length and 12 other small openings of comparable
inch in depth are permissible in wood size in the deck and other working sur-
side rails, provided that not more than faces, such openings shall be suitably
one such pocket appears in each 4 feet covered or guarded to a height of not
of length. less than 30 inches, except where the
(5) The width between side rails at use of such guards is made impracti-
the base shall be not less than 1112 cable by the work actually in progress.
inches for ladders 10 feet or less in (c) When employees are working
length. For longer ladders this width around open hatches not protected by
shall be increased at least 14 inch for coamings to a height of 24 inches or
each additional 2 feet in length. around other large openings, the edge
(6) Side rails shall be at least 158358 of the opening shall be guarded in the
working area to height of 36 to 42
inches in cross section.
inches, except where the use of such
(7) Cleats (meaning rungs rectangular guards is made impracticable by the
in cross section with the wide dimen- work actually in progress.
sion parallel to the rails) shall be of (d) When employees are exposed to
the material used for side rails, unguarded edges of decks, platforms,
straight-grained and free from knots. flats, and similar flat surfaces, more
Cleats shall be mortised into the edges than 5 feet above a solid surface, the
of the side rails 12 inch, or filler blocks edges shall be guarded by adequate
shall be used on the rails between the guardrails meeting the requirements of
cleats. The cleats shall be secured to 1915.71(j) (1) and (2), unless the nature
each rail with three 10d common wire of the work in progress or the physical
nails or fastened with through bolts or conditions prohibit the use or installa-
other fasteners of equivalent strength. tion of such guardrails.
Cleats shall be uniformly spaced not (e) When employees are working near
more than 12 inches apart. the unguarded edges of decks of vessels
(8) Cleats 20 inches or less in length afloat, they shall be protected by per-
shall be at least 25/323 inches in cross sonal flotation devices, meeting the re-
section. Cleats over 20 inches but not quirements of 1915.158(a).
more than 30 inches in length shall be (f) Sections of bilges from which floor
at least 25/32334 inches in cross sec- plates or gratings have been removed
tion. shall be guarded by guardrails except
(c) Construction of portable wood where they would interfere with work
cleated ladders from 30 to 60 feet in in progress. If these open sections are
length. (1) Ladders from 30 to 60 feet in in a walkway at least two 10-inch
length shall be in accordance with the planks placed side by side, or equiva-
specifications of paragraph (b) of this lent, shall be laid across the opening to
section with the following exceptions: provide a safe walking surface.
(i) Rails shall be of not less than 26 (g) Gratings, walkways, and cat-
inch lumber. walks, from which sections or ladders
(ii) Cleats shall be of not less than have been removed, shall be barricaded
14 inch lumber. with adequate guardrails.
(iii) Cleats shall be nailed to each [47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 67
rail with five 10d common wire nails or FR 44542, July 3, 2002]
59
1915.74 Access to vessels. imum height of approximately 33

(a) Access to vessels afloat. The em- inches with midrails on both sides.
ployer shall not permit employees to (8) Supporting bridles shall be kept
board or leave any vessel, except a clear so as to permit unobstructed pas-
barge or river towboat, until the fol- sage for employees using the gangway.
lowing requirements have been met: (9) When the upper end of the means
(1) Whenever practicable, a gangway of access rests on or flush with the top
of not less than 20 inches walking sur- of the bulwark, substantial steps prop-
face of adequate strength, maintained erly secured and equipped with at least
in safe repair and safely secured shall one substantial handrail approximately
be used. If a gangway is not prac- 33 inches in height shall be provided be-
ticable, a substantial straight ladder, tween the top of the bulwark and the
extending at least 36 inches above the deck.
upper landing surface and adequately (10) Obstructions shall not be laid on
secured against shifting or slipping or across the gangway.
shall be provided. When conditions are (11) The means of access shall be ade-
such that neither a gangway nor a quately illuminated for its full length.
straight ladder can be used, a Jacobs (12) Unless the construction of the
ladder meeting the requirements of vessel makes it impossible, the means
paragraphs (d) (1) and (2) of this section of access shall be so located that drafts
may be used. of cargo do not pass over it. In any
(2) Each side of such gangway, and event, loads shall not be passed over
the turn table if used, shall have a rail- the means of access while employees
ing with a minimum height of approxi- are on it.
mately 33 inches measured perpendicu- (b) Access to vessels in drydock or be-
larly from rail to walking surface at tween vessels. Gangways meeting the re-
the stanchion, with a midrail. Rails quirements of paragraphs (a) (1), (2),
shall be of wood, pipe, chain, wire or (9), (10), (11) of this section shall be pro-
rope and shall be kept taut at all vided for access from wingwall to ves-
times. sel or, when two or more vessels, other
(3) Gangways on vessels inspected than barges or river towboats, are
and certificated by the U.S. Coast lying abreast, from one vessel to an-
Guard are deemed to meet the fore- other.
going requirements, except in cases (c) Access to barges and river towboats.
where the vessels regular gangway is (1) Ramps for access of vehicles to or
not being used. between barges shall be of adequate
(4) The gangway shall be kept prop- strength, provided with side boards,
erly trimmed at all times. well maintained and properly secured.
(5) When a fixed tread accommoda- (2) Unless employees can step safely
tions ladder is used, and the angle is to or from the wharf, float, barge, or
low enough to require employees to river towboat, either a ramp meeting
walk on the edge of the treads, cleated the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of
duckboards shall be laid over and se- this section or a safe walkway meeting
cured to the ladder. the requirements of paragraph (a)(7) of
(6) When the lower end of a gangway this section shall be provided. When a
overhangs the water between the ship walkway is impracticable, a substan-
and the dock in such a manner that tial straight ladder, extending at least
there is danger of employees falling be- 36 inches above the upper landing sur-
tween the ship and the dock, a net or face and adequately secured against
other suitable protection shall be shifting or slipping, shall be provided.
rigged at the foot of the gangway in When conditions are such that neither
such a manner as to prevent employees a walkway nor a straight ladder can be
from falling from the end of the gang- used, a Jacobs ladder in accordance
way. with the requirements of paragraph (d)
(7) If the foot of the gangway is more of this section may be used.
than one foot away from the edge of (3) The means of access shall be in ac-
the apron, the space between them cordance with the requirements of
shall be bridged by a firm walkway paragraphs (a) (9), (10), and (11) of this
equipped with railings, with a min- section.
60
(d) Jacobs ladders. (1) Jacobs ladders (f) Access to wing walls from floors of
shall be of the double rung or flat tread dry docks shall be by ramps, perma-
type. They shall be well maintained nent stairways or ladders meeting the
and properly secured. applicable requirements of 1915.72.
(2) A Jacobs ladder shall either hang (g) Catwalks on stiles of marine rail-
without slack from its lashings or be ways shall be no less than 20 inches
pulled up entirely. wide and shall have on at least one side
[47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 67 a guardrail and midrail meeting the re-
FR 44542, July 3, 2002] quirements of 1915.71(j) (1) and (2).
1915.75 Access to and guarding of
dry docks and marine railways. FR 44542, July 3, 2002]
The provisions of this section shall 1915.76 Access to cargo spaces and
apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding confined spaces.
and shipbreaking.
The provisions of this section apply
(a) A gangway, ramp or permanent
to ship repairing, shipbuilding and
stairway of not less than 20 inches
shipbreaking except that paragraph
walking surface, of adequate strength,
(a)(4) of this section applies to ship re-
maintained in safe repair and securely
pairing only.
fastened, shall be provided between a
floating dry dock and the pier or bulk- (a) Cargo spaces. (1) There shall be at
head. least one safe and accessible ladder in
(b) Each side of such gangway, ramp any cargo space which employees must
or permanent stairway, including those enter.
which are used for access to wing walls (2) When any fixed ladder is visibly
from dry dock floors, shall have a rail- unsafe, the employer shall prohibit its
ing with a midrail. Such railings on use by employees.
gangways or ramps shall be approxi- (3) Straight ladders of adequate
mately 42 inches in height; and railings strength and suitably secured against
on permanent stairways shall be not shifting or slipping shall be provided as
less than approximately 30 or more necessary when fixed ladders in cargo
than approximately 34 inches in height. spaces do not meet the requirements of
Rails shall be of wood, pipe, chain, paragraph (a)(1) of this section. When
wire, or rope, and shall be kept taut at conditions are such that a straight lad-
all times. der cannot be used, a Jacobs ladder
(c) Railings meeting the require- meeting the requirements of 1915.74(d)
ments of paragraph (b) of this section may be used.
shall be provided on the means of ac- (4) When cargo is stowed within 4
cess to and from the floors of graving inches of the back of ladder rungs, the
docks. ladder shall be deemed unsafe for the
(d) Railings approximately 42 inches purpose of this section.
in height, with a midrail, shall be pro- (5) Fixed ladders or straight ladders
vided on the edges of wing walls of provided for access to cargo spaces
floating dry docks and on edges of shall not be used at the same time that
graving docks. Sections of the railings cargo drafts, equipment, materials,
may be temporarily removed where scrap or other loads are entering or
necessary to permit line handling while leaving the hold. Before using these
a vessel is entering or leaving the dock. ladders to enter or leave the hold, the
(e) When employees are working on employee shall be required to inform
the floor of a floating dry dock where the winchman or crane signalman of
they are exposed to the hazard of fall- his intention.
ing into the water, the end of the dry (b) Confined spaces. (1) More than one
dock shall be equipped with portable means of access shall be provided to a
stanchions and 42 inch railings with a confined space in which employees are
midrail. When such a railing would be working and in which the work may
impracticable or ineffective, other ef- generate a hazardous atmosphere in
fective means shall be provided to pre- the space except where the structure or
vent employees from falling into the arrangement of the vessel makes this
water. provision impractical.
61
(2) When the ventilation ducts re- Subpart FGeneral Working

quired by these regulations must pass Conditions
through these means of access, the
ducts shall be of such a type and so ar- 1915.91 Housekeeping.
ranged as to permit free passage of an The provisions of this section shall
employee through at least two of these apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding
means of access. and shipbreaking except that para-
graphs (c) and (e) of this section do not
1915.77 Working surfaces. apply to shipbreaking.
(a) Paragraphs (b) through (d) of this (a) Good housekeeping conditions
section shall apply to ship repairing shall be maintained at all times. Ade-
and shipbuilding operations, and shall quate aisles and passageways shall be
not apply to shipbreaking. Paragraph maintained in all work areas. All stag-
ing platforms, ramps, stairways, walk-
(e) of this section shall apply to ship-
ways, aisles, and passageways on ves-
building, ship repairing and
sels or dry docks shall be kept clear of
shipbreaking operations. all tools, materials, and equipment ex-
(b) When firebox floors present trip- cept that which is in use, and all debris
ping hazards of exposed tubing or of such as welding rod tips, bolts, nuts,
missing or removed refractory, suffi- and similar material. Hose and electric
cient planking to afford safe footing conductors shall be elevated over or
shall be laid while work is being car- placed under the walkway or working
ried on within the boiler. surfaces or covered by adequate cross-
(c) When employees are working over planks.
aloft, or elsewhere at elevations more (b) All working areas on or imme-
than 5 feet above a solid surface, either diately surrounding vessels and dry
scaffolds or a sloping ladder, meeting docks, graving docks, or marine rail-
the requirements of this subpart, shall ways shall be kept reasonably free of
be used to afford safe footing, or the debris, and construction material shall
employees shall be protected by safety be so piled as not to present a hazard
to employees.
belts and lifelines meeting the require-
(c) Slippery conditions on walkways
ments of 1915.159 and 1915.160. Em-
or working surfaces shall be eliminated
ployees visually restricted by blasting as they occur.
hoods, welding helmets, and burning (d) Free access shall be maintained at
goggles shall work from scaffolds, not all times to all exits and to all fire-
from ladders, except for the initial and alarm boxes or fire-extinguishing
final welding or burning operation to equipment.
start or complete a job, such as the (e) All oils, paints thinners, solvents,
erection and dismantling of hung scaf- waste, rags, or other flammable sub-
folding, or other similar, nonrepetitive stances shall be kept in fire resistant
jobs of brief duration. covered containers when not in use.
(d) For work performed in restricted
quarters, such as behind boilers and in 1915.92 Illumination.
between congested machinery units The provisions of this section shall
and piping, work platforms at least 20 apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding
inches wide meeting the requirements and shipbreaking.
of 1915.71(i)(1) shall be used. Backrails (a) All means of access and walkways
may be omitted if bulkheading, boilers, leading to working areas as well as the
machinery units, or piping afford prop- working areas themselves shall be ade-
er protection against falling. quately illuminated.
(e) When employees are boarding, (b) Temporary lights shall meet the
leaving, or working from small boats following requirements:
(1) Temporary lights shall be
or floats, they shall be protected by
equipped with guards to prevent acci-
personal flotation devices meeting the
dental contact with the bulb, except
requirements of 1915.158(a).
that guards are not required when the
[47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 67 construction of the reflector is such
FR 44543, July 3, 2002] that the bulb is deeply recessed.
62
(2) Temporary lights shall be safe working pressure of the vessels

equipped with heavy duty electric steam system. The employer shall in-
cords with connections and insulation stall a pressure gauge and a relief valve
maintained in safe condition. Tem- of proper size and capacity at the point
porary lights shall not be suspended by where the temporary steam hose joins
their electric cords unless cords and the vessels steam piping system or
lights are designed for this means of systems. The relief valve shall be set
suspension. Splices which have insula- and capable of relieving at a pressure
tion equal to that of the cable are per- not exceeding the safe working pres-
mitted. sure of the vessels system in its
(3) Cords shall be kept clear of work- present condition, and there shall be no
ing spaces and walkways or other loca- means of isolating the relief valve from
tions in which they are readily exposed the system which it protects. The pres-
to damage. sure gauge and relief valve shall be lo-
(c) Exposed non-current-carrying cated so as to be visible and readily ac-
metal parts of temporary lights fur- cessible.
nished by the employer shall be (2) Steam hose and fittings shall have
grounded either through a third wire in a safety factor of not less than five (5).
the cable containing the circuit con- (3) When steam hose is hung in a
ductors or through a separate wire bight or bights, the weight shall be re-
which is grounded at the source of the lieved by appropriate lines. The hose
current. Grounding shall be in accord- shall be protected against chafing.
ance with the requirements of (4) Steam hose shall be protected
1915.132(b). from damage and hose and temporary
(d) Where temporary lighting from piping shall be so shielded where pass-
sources outside the vessel is the only ing through normal work areas as to
means of illumination, portable emer- prevent accidental contact by employ-
gency lighting equipment shall be ees.
available to provide illumination for (b) Electric power. (1) When the vessel
safe movement of employees. is supplied with electric power from a
(e) Employees shall not be permitted source outside the vessel, the following
to enter dark spaces without a suitable precautions shall be taken prior to en-
portable light. The use of matches and ergizing the vessels circuits:
open flame lights is prohibited. In (i) If in dry dock, the vessel shall be
nongas free spaces, portable lights adequately grounded.
shall meet the requirements of (ii) The employer shall ascertain
1915.13(b)(9). from responsible vessels representa-
(f) Temporary lighting stringers or tives, having knowledge of the condi-
streamers shall be so arranged as to tion of the vessels electrical system,
avoid overloading of branch circuits. that all circuits to be energized are in
Each branch circuit shall be equipped a safe condition.
with overcurrent protection of capac- (iii) All circuits to be energized shall
ity not exceeding the rated current be equipped with overcurrent protec-
carrying capacity of the cord used. tion of capacity not exceeding the
[47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 67 rated current carrying capacity of the
FR 44543, July 3, 2002] cord used.
(c) Infrared electrical heat lamps. (1)
1915.93 Utilities. All infrared electrical heat lamps shall
The provisions of this section shall be equipped with guards that surround
apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding, the lamps with the exception of the
and shipbreaking except that para- face, to minimize accidental contact
graph (c) of this section applies to ship with the lamps.
repairing and shipbuilding only.
(a) Steam supply and hoses. (1) Prior 1915.94 Work in confined or isolated
to supplying a vessel with steam from spaces.
a source outside the vessel, the em- The provisions of this section shall
ployer shall ascertain from responsible apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding
vessels representatives, having knowl- and shipbreaking. When any work is
edge of the condition of the plant, the performed in a confined space, except
63
as provided in 1915.51(c)(3), or when an 1915.97 Health and sanitation.

employee is working alone in an iso- The provisions of this section shall
lated location, frequent checks shall be apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding
made to ensure the safety of the em- and shipbreaking, except where indi-
ployees. cated otherwise.
(a) The employer shall provide all
1915.95 Ship repairing and ship-
building work on or in the vicinity necessary controls, and the employees
of radar and radio. shall be protected by suitable personal
protective equipment against the haz-
The provisions of this section shall ards identified in 1915.1200 of this part
apply to ship repairing and ship- and those hazards for which specific
building. precautions are required in subparts B,
(a) No employees other than radar or C, and D of this part.
radio repairmen shall be permitted to (b) The employer shall provide ade-
work on masts, king posts or other quate washing facilities for employees
aloft areas unless the radar and radio engaged in the application of paints or
are secured or otherwise made incapa- coatings or in other operations where
ble of radiation. In either event, the contaminants can, by ingestion or ab-
radio and radar shall be appropriately sorption, be detrimental to the health
tagged. of the employees. The employer shall
(b) Testing of radar or radio shall not encourage good personal hygiene prac-
be done until the employer can sched- tices by informing the employees of the
ule such tests at a time when no work need for removing surface contami-
is in progress aloft or personnel can be nants by thorough washing or hands
cleared from the danger area according and face prior to eating or smoking.
to minimum safe distances established (c) The employer shall not permit
for and based on the type, model, and employees to eat or smoke in areas un-
power of the equipment. dergoing surface preparation or preser-
vation or where shipbreaking oper-
[47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 49 ations produce atmospheric contami-
FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 54 FR 24334, June 7, nants.
1989]
(d) The employer shall not permit
employees engaged in ship repair work
1915.96 Work in or on lifeboats.
on a vessel to work in the immediate
The provisions of this section shall vicinity of uncovered garbage and shall
apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding, ensure that employees working be-
and shipbreaking except that para- neath or on the outboard side of a ves-
graph (b) of this section applies to ship sel are not subject to contamination by
repairing and shipbuilding only. drainage or waste from overboard dis-
(a) Before employees are permitted charges.
to work in or on a lifeboat, either (e) No minor under 18 years of age
stowed or in a suspended position, the shall be employed in shipbreaking or
employer shall ensure that the boat is related employments.
secured independently of the releasing [52 FR 31886, Aug. 24, 1987, as amended at 67
gear to prevent the boat from falling FR 44543, July 3, 2002]
due to accidental tripping of the re-
leasing gear and movement of the 1915.98 First aid.
davits or capsizing of a boat in chocks. The provisions of this section shall
(b) Employees shall not be permitted apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding
to remain in boats while the boats are and shipbreaking.
being hoisted into final stowed posi- (a) Unless a first aid room and a
tion. qualified attendant are close at hand
(c) Employees shall not be permitted and prepared to render first aid to em-
to work on the outboard side of life- ployees on behalf of the employer, the
boats stowed on their chocks unless employer shall furnish a first aid kit
the boats are secured by gripes or oth- for each vessel on which work is being
erwise secured to prevent them from performed, except that when work is
swinging outboard. being performed on more than one
64
small vessel at one pier, only one kit motor vehicle, or transport vehicle
shall be required. The kit, when re- that is required to be marked or plac-
quired, shall be kept close to the vessel arded in accordance with the Haz-
and at least one employee, close at ardous Materials Regulations shall re-
hand, shall be qualified to administer tain those markings and placards on
first aid to the injured. the freight container, rail freight car,
(b) The first aid kit shall consist of a motor vehicle or transport vehicle
weatherproof container with individual until the hazardous materials which re-
sealed packages for each type of item. quire the marking or placarding are
The contents of such kit shall contain sufficiently removed to prevent any po-
a sufficient quantity of at least the fol- tential hazards.
lowing types of items: (c) Markings, placards and labels
Gauze roller bandages, 1 inch and 2 inch. shall be maintained in a manner that
Gauze compress bandages, 4 inch. ensures that they are readily visible.
Adhesive bandages, 1 inch. (d) For non-bulk packages which will
Triangular bandage, 40 inch. not be reshipped, the provisions of this
Ammonia inhalants and ampules. section are met if a label or other ac-
Antiseptic applicators or swabs. ceptable marking is affixed in accord-
Burn dressing. ance with the Hazard Communication
Eye dressing.
Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200).
Wire or thin board splints.
Forceps and tourniquet. (e) For the purposes of this section,
the term hazardous material and
(c) The contents of the first aid kit any other terms not defined in this sec-
shall be checked before being sent out tion have the same definition as in the
on each job and at least weekly on each Hazardous Materials Regulations (49
job to ensure that the expended items CFR parts 171 through 180).
are replaced.
(d) There shall be available for each [59 FR 36700, July 19, 1994]
vessel on which ten (10) or more em-
ployees are working one Stokes basket Subpart GGear and Equipment
stretcher, or equivalent, permanently for Rigging and Materials
equipped with bridles for attaching to Handling
the hoisting gear, except that no more
than two strechers are required on 1915.111 Inspection.
each job location. A blanket or other
The provisions of this section shall
liner suitable for transferring the pa-
apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding
tient to and from the stretcher shall be
and shipbreaking.
provided. Stretchers shall be kept close
to the vessels. This paragraph does not (a) All gear and equipment provided
apply where ambulance services which by the employer for rigging and mate-
are available are known to carry such rials handling shall be inspected before
stretchers. each shift and when necessary, at in-
tervals during its use to ensure that it
1915.100 Retention of DOT markings, is safe. Defective gear shall be removed
placards and labels. and repaired or replaced before further
(a) Any employer who receives a use.
package of hazardous material which is (b) The safe working load of gear as
required to be marked, labeled or plac- specified in 1915.112 and 1915.113 shall
arded in accordance with the U. S. De- not be exceeded.
partment of Transportations Haz-
1915.112 Ropes, chains and slings.
ardous Materials Regulations (49 CFR
parts 171 through 180) shall retain those The provisions of this section shall
markings, labels and placards on the apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding
package until the packaging is suffi- and shipbreaking.
ciently cleaned of residue and purged (a) Manila rope and manila rope slings.
of vapors to remove any potential haz- (1) Table G1 in 1915.118 shall be used
ards. to determine the safe working load of
(b) Any employer who receives a various sizes of manila rope and manila
freight container, rail freight car, rope slings at various angles, except
65
that higher safe working loads are per- increase in length of a measured sec-
missible when recommended by the tion exceeds five (5) percent; when a
manufacturer for specific, identifiable link is bent, twisted or otherwise dam-
products, provided that a safety factor aged; or when raised scarfs or defective
of not less than five (5) is maintained. welds appear.
(b) Wire rope and wire rope slings. (1) (5) All repairs to chains shall be made
Tables G2 through G5 in 1915.118 under qualified supervision. Links or
shall be used to determine the safe portions of the chain found to be defec-
working loads of various sizes and clas- tive as described in paragraph (c)(4) of
sifications of improved plow steel wire this section shall be replaced by links
rope and wire rope slings with various having proper dimensions and made of
types of terminals. For sizes, classi- material similar to that of the chain.
fications and grades not included in Before repaired chains are returned to
these tables, the safe working load rec- service, they shall be proof tested to
ommended by the manufacturer for the proof test load recommended by
specific, identifiable products shall be the manufacturer.
followed, provided that a safety factor (6) Wrought iron chains in constant
of not less than five (5) is maintained. use shall be annealed or normalized at
(2) Protruding ends of strands in intervals not exceeding six months
splices on slings and bridles shall be when recommended by the manufac-
covered or blunted. turer. The chain manufacturer shall be
(3) Where U-bolt wire rope clips are consulted for recommended procedures
used to form eyes, Table G6 in for annealing or normalizing. Alloy
1915.118 shall be used to determine the chains shall never be annealed.
number and spacing of clips. The U- (7) A load shall not be lifted with a
bolt shall be applied so that the U chain having a kink or knot in it. A
section is in contact with the dead end chain shall not be shortened by bolt-
of the rope. ing, wiring or knotting.
(4) Wire rope shall not be secured by
knots. [47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 67
(c) Chains and chain slings. (1) Tables FR 44543, July 3, 2002]
G7 and G8 in 1915.118 shall be used to
1915.113 Shackles and hooks.
determine the working load limit of
various sizes of wrought iron and alloy The provisions of this section shall
steel chains and chain slings, except apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding
that higher safe working loads are per- and shipbreaking.
missible when recommended by the (a) Shackles. (1) Table G10 in
manufacturer for specific, identifiable 1915.118 shall be used to determine the
products. safe working loads of various sizes of
(2) All sling chains, including end fas- shackles, except that higher safe work-
tenings, shall be given a visual inspec- ing loads are permissible when rec-
tion before being used on the job. A ommended by the manufacturer for
thorough inspection of all chains in use specific, identifiable products, provided
shall be made every 3 months. Each that a safety factor of not less than (5)
chain shall bear an indication of the is maintained.
month in which it was thoroughly in- (b) Hooks. (1) The manufacturers rec-
spected. The thorough inspection shall ommendations shall be followed in de-
include inspection for wear, defective termining the safe working loads of the
welds, deformation and increase in various sizes and types of specific and
length or stretch. identifiable hooks. All hooks for which
(3) Interlink wear, not accompanied no applicable manufacturers rec-
by stretch in excess of 5 percent, shall ommendations are available shall be
be noted and the chain removed from tested to twice the intended safe work-
service when maximum allowable wear ing load before they are initially put
at any point of link, as indicated in into use. The employer shall maintain
Table G9 in 1915.118, has been and keep readily available a certifi-
reached. cation record which includes the date
(4) Chain slings shall be removed of such tests, the signature of the per-
from service when, due to stretch, the son who performed the test and an
66
identifier for the hook which was test- (b) The moving parts of hoisting and
ed. hauling equipment shall be guarded.
(2) Loads shall be applied to the (c) Mobile crawler or truck cranes used
throat of the hook since loading the on a vessel. (1) The maximum manufac-
point overstresses and bends or springs turers rated safe working loads for the
the hook. various working radii of the boom and
(3) Hooks shall be inspected periodi- the maximum and minimum radii at
cally to see that they have not been which the boom may be safely used
bent by overloading. Bent or sprung with and without outriggers shall be
hooks shall not be used. conspicuously posted near the controls
[47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 51 and shall be visible to the operator. A
FR 34562, Sept. 29, 1986] radius indicator shall be provided.
(2) The posted safe working loads of
1915.114 Chain falls and pull-lifts. mobile crawler or truck cranes under
The provisions of this section shall the conditions of use shall not be ex-
apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding ceeded.
and shipbreaking. (d) Accessible areas within the swing
(a) Chain falls and pull-lifts shall be radius of the outermost part of the
clearly marked to show the capacity body of a revolving derrick or crane,
and the capacity shall not be exceeded. whether permanently or temporarily
(b) Chain falls shall be regularly in- mounted, shall be guarded in such a
spected to ensure that they are safe, manner as to prevent an employee
particular attention being given to the from being in such a position as to be
lift chain, pinion, sheaves and hooks struck by the crane or caught between
for distortion and wear. Pull-lifts shall the crane and fixed parts of the vessel
be regularly inspected to ensure that or of the crane itself.
they are safe, particular attention (e) Marine railways. (1) The cradle or
being given to the ratchet, pawl, chain carriage on the marine railway shall be
and hooks for distortion and wear. positively blocked or secured when in
(c) Straps, shackles, and the beam or the hauled position to prevent it from
overhead structure to which a chain being accidentally released.
fall or pull-lift is secured shall be of
adequate strength to support the [47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 67
FR 44543, July 3, 2002]
weight of load plus gear. The upper
hook shall be moused or otherwise se- 1915.116 Use of gear.
cured against coming free of its sup-
port. (a) The provisions of this section
(d) Scaffolding shall not be used as a shall apply to ship repairing, ship-
point of attachment for lifting devices building and shipbreaking except that
such as tackles, chain falls, and pull- paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section
lifts unless the scaffolding is specifi- shall apply to ship repairing and ship-
cally designed for that purpose. building only.
(b) Loads shall be safely rigged before
1915.115 Hoisting and hauling equip- being hoisted.
ment. (c) Plates shall be handled on and off
The provisions of this section shall hulls by means of shackles whenever
apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding possible. Clips or pads of ample size
and shipbreaking. shall be welded to the plate to receive
(a) Derrick and crane certification. (1) the shackle pins when there are no
Derricks and cranes which are part of, holes in the plate. When it is not pos-
or regularly placed aboard barges, sible to make holes in or to weld pads
other vessels, or on wingwalls of float- to the plate, alligator tongs, grab
ing drydocks, and are used to transfer clamps or screw clamps may be used.
materials or equipment from or to a In such cases special precautions shall
vessel or drydock, shall be tested and be taken to keep employees from under
certificated in accordance with the such lifts.
standards provided in part 1919 of this (d) Tag lines shall be provided on
title by persons accredited for the pur- loads likely to swing or to need guid-
pose. ance.
67
(e) When slings are secured to eye- (p) Before loads or empty lifting gear
bolts, the slings shall be so arranged, are raised, lowered, or swung, clear and
using spreaders if necessary, that the sufficient advance warning shall be
pull is within 20 degrees of the axis of given to employees in the vincinity of
the bolt. such operations.
(f) Slings shall be padded by means of (q) At no time shall an employee be
wood blocks or other suitable material permitted to place himself in a haz-
where they pass over sharpe edges or ardous position between a swinging
corners of loads so as to prevent cut- load and a fixed object.
ting or kinking.
(g) Skips shall be rigged to be han- [47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 67
dled by not less than 3 legged bridles, FR 44543, July 3, 2002]
and all legs shall always be used. When
1915.117 Qualifications of operators.
open end skips are used, means shall be
taken to prevent the contents from Paragraphs (a) and (d) of this section
falling. shall apply to ship repairing and ship-
(h) Loose ends of idle legs of slings in building only. Paragraphs (b) and (c) of
use shall be hung on the hook. this section shall apply to ship repair-
(i) Employees shall not be permitted ing, shipbuilding and shipbreaking.
to ride the hook or the load. (a) When ships gear is used to hoist
(j) Loads (tools, equipment or other materials aboard, a competent person
materials) shall not be swung or sus- shall determine that the gear is prop-
pended over the heads of employees. erly rigged, that it is in safe condition,
(k) Pieces of equipment or structure and that it will not be overloaded by
susceptible to falling or dislodgement the size and weight of the lift.
shall be secured or removed as early as (b) Only those employees who under-
possible. stand the signs, notices, and operating
(l) An individual who is familiar with instructions, and are familiar with the
the signal code in use shall be assigned signal code in use, shall be permitted
to act as a signalman when the hoist to operate a crane, winch, or other
operator cannot see the load being han- power operated hoisting apparatus.
dled. Communications shall be made by
(c) No employee known to have defec-
means of clear and distinct visual or
tive uncorrected eyesight or hearing,
auditory signals except that verbal sig-
or to be suffering from heart disease,
nals shall not be permitted.
epilepsy, or similar ailments which
(m) Pallets, when used, shall be of
may suddenly incapacitate him, shall
such material and contruction and so
be permitted to operate a crane, winch
maintained as to safely support and
or other power operated hoisting appa-
carry the loads being handled on them.
(n) A section of hatch through which ratus.
materials or equipment are being (d) No minor under eighteen (18)
raised, lowered, moved, or otherwise years of age shall be employed in occu-
shifted manually or by a crane, winch, pations involving the operation of any
hoist, or derrick, shall be completely power-driven hoisting apparatus or as-
opened. The beam or pontoon left in sisting in such operations by work such
place adjacent to an opening shall be as hooking on, loading slings, rigging
sufficiently lashed, locked or otherwise gear, etc.
secured to prevent it from moving so
that it cannot be displaced by accident. 1915.118 Tables.
(o) Hatches shall not be open or The provisions of this section apply
closed while employees are in the to ship repairing, shipbuilding and
square of the hatch below. shipbreaking.
TABLE E1DIMENSIONS AND SPACING OF WOOD INDEPENDENT-POLE SCAFFOLD MEMBERS
Light duty (Up to 25 pounds per square Heavy duty (25 to 75 pounds per square
foot)Height in feet foot)Height in feet
Structural members
24 >2440 >4060 24 >2440 >4060
Poles or uprights (in inches) ..... 2x4 3 x 4 or 2 x 6 4x4 3x4 4x4 4x6
Bearers (in inches) .................... 2x6 2x6 2x6 2x8 2x8 2 x 10
68
TABLE E1DIMENSIONS AND SPACING OF WOOD INDEPENDENT-POLE SCAFFOLD MEMBERS

Continued
Light duty (Up to 25 pounds per square Heavy duty (25 to 75 pounds per square
foot)Height in feet foot)Height in feet
Structural members
24 >2440 >4060 24 >2440 >4060
Ledgers (in inches) ................... 2x6 2x6 2x6 2x8 2x8 2x8
Stringers (not supporting bear-
ers) (in inches) ....................... 1x6 1x6 1x6 1x6 1x6 1x6
Braces (in inches) ..................... 1x4 1x6 1x6 1x6 1x6 1x6
Pole spacinglongitudinally (in
feet) ........................................ 7 12 7 12 7 12 7 7 7
Pole spacingtransversely (in
feet) ........................................ 612 min 712 min 812 min 612 10 10
Ledger spacingvertically (in
feet) ........................................ 7 7 7 4 12 4 12 4 12
TABLE E2SPECIFICATIONS FOR SIDE RAILS OF LADDERS

Cross section (in inches)
Length (in feet)
At ends At center
15 ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 x2
78 34 178 x 3 3 4
16 ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 78 x 2 34 178 x 3 3 4
18 ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 78 x 3 1 78 x 4
20 ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 78 x 3 1 78 x 4
24 ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 78 x 3 1 78 x 4 1 2
TABLE E3SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF HORSES

Height in feet
Structural members
10 >1016 1620
inches inches inches

Legs ..................................................................................................................................... 2x4 3x4 4x6
Bearers or headers ............................................................................................................. 2x6 2x8 4x6
Crossbraces ........................................................................................................................ 2x4 2x4 2x6
or
1x8
Longitudinal braces ............................................................................................................. 2x4 2x6 2x6
TABLE E4SAFE CENTER LOADS FOR SCAFFOLD PLANK OF 1,100 POUNDS FIBRE STRESS
Lumber dimensions in inches
Span in feet
A B A B A B A B A B
2 x 10 1 58 x 9 12 2 x 12 158 x 1112 3x8 2 58 x 7 1 2 3 x 10 2 58 x 9 1 2 3 x 12 258 x 1112
6 ..................................... 256 309 526 667 807

8 ..................................... 192 232 395 500 605
10 ................................... 153 186 316 400 484
12 ................................... 128 155 263 333 404
14 ................................... 110 133 225 286 346
16 ................................... ............ 116 197 250 303
(A)Rough lumber.
(B)Dressed lumber.
TABLE G1MANILA ROPE

[In pounds or tons of 2,000 pounds]
Diameter in
Circumferences Single leg 60 bridle 45 bridle 30 bridle
inches
lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs.

.....................................................
34 14 120 204 170 120
1 ......................................................
5 16 200 346 282 200
118 ................................................... 38 270 467 380 270
114 ...................................................
7 16 350 605 493 350
138 ...................................................
15 32 450 775 635 450
69
TABLE G1MANILA ROPEContinued

[In pounds or tons of 2,000 pounds]
Diameter in
Circumferences Single leg 60 bridle 45 bridle 30 bridle
inches
lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs.

112 ................................................... 12 530 915 798 530
134 ...................................................
9 16 690 1190 973 690
2 ...................................................... 58 880 1520 1240 880
214 ................................................... 34 1080 1870 1520 1080
212 ...................................................
13 16 1300 2250 1830 1300
234 ................................................... 78 1540 2660 2170 1540
3 ...................................................... 1 1800 3120 2540 1800
Tons Tons Tons Tons
314 ................................................... 1116 1.0 1.7 1.4 1.0
312 ................................................... 1 18 1.2 2.1 1.7 1.2
334 ................................................... 1 14 1.35 2.3 1.9 1.35
4 ...................................................... 1516 1.5 2.6 2.1 1.5
412 ................................................... 1 12 1.8 3.1 2.5 1.8
5 ...................................................... 1 58 2.25 3.9 3.2 2.25
512 ................................................... 1 34 2.6 4.5 3.7 2.6
6 ...................................................... 2 3.1 5.4 4.4 3.1
612 ................................................... 2 18 3.6 6.2 5.1 3.6
TABLE G2RATED CAPACITIES FOR IMPROVED PLOW STEEL, INDEPENDENT WIRE ROPE CORE,
WIRE ROPE AND WIRE ROPE SLINGS
[In tons of 2,000 pounds]
Single leg
Rope diameter Vertical Choker
A B C A B C
619 Classification
.............................................
14 .59 .56 .53 .44 .42 .40
38 ............................................. 1.3 1.2 1.1 .98 .93 .86
12 ............................................. 2.3 2.2 2.0 1.7 1.6 1.5
58 ............................................. 3.6 3.4 3.0 2.7 2.5 2.2
34 ............................................. 5.1 4.9 4.2 3.8 3.6 3.1
78 ............................................. 6.9 6.6 5.5 5.2 4.9 4.1
1 ............................................... 9.0 8.5 7.2 6.7 6.4 5.4
118 ........................................... 11 10 9.0 8.5 7.8 6.8
637 Classification
1 ...........................................
14 13 12 10 9.9 9.2 7.9
138 ........................................... 16 15 13 12 11 9.6
112 ........................................... 19 17 15 14 13 11
134 ........................................... 26 24 20 19 18 15
2 ............................................... 33 30 26 25 23 20
214 ........................................... 41 38 33 31 29 25
(A)Socket or Swaged Terminal attachment.
(B)Mechanical Sleeve attachment.
(C)Hand Tucked Splice attachment.
WIRE ROPE SLINGS
[in tons of 2,000 pounds]
Two-leg bridle or basket hitch
Vertical 60 bridle 45 bridle 30 bridle

Rope di-
ameter A B C A B C A B C A B C
619 Classification

14 ......... 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0 .97 .92 .83 .79 .75 .59 .56 .53

38 ......... 2.6 2.5 2.3 2.3 2.1 2.0 1.8 1.8 1.6 1.3 1.2 1.1

12 ......... 4.6 4.4 3.9 4.0 3.8 3.4 3.2 3.1 2.8 2.3 2.2 2.0
58 ......... 7.2 6.8 6.0 6.2 5.9 5.2 5.1 4.8 4.2 3.6 3.4 3.0
34 ......... 10 9.7 8.4 8.9 8.4 7.3 7.2 6.9 5.9 5.1 4.9 4.2
70
WIRE ROPE SLINGSContinued

Rope di-
ameter A B C A B C A B C A B C
.........
78 14 13 11 12 11 9.6 9.8 9.3 7.8 6.9 6.6 5.5
1 .......... 18 17 14 15 15 12 13 12 10 9.0 8.5 7.2
118 ....... 23 21 18 19 18 16 16 15 13 11 10 9.0
637 Classification
114 ....... 26 24 21 23 21 18 19 17 15 13 12 10
138 ....... 32 29 25 28 25 22 22 21 18 16 15 13
112 ....... 38 35 30 33 30 26 27 25 21 19 17 15
134 ....... 51 47 41 44 41 35 36 33 29 26 24 20
2 .......... 66 61 53 57 53 46 47 43 37 33 30 26
214 ....... 83 76 66 72 66 57 58 54 47 41 38 33
(A)Socket or Swaged Terminal Attachment.
(B)Mechanical Sleeve Attachment.
(C)Hand Tucked Splice Attachment.
TABLE G4RATED CAPACITIES FOR IMPROVED PLOW STEEL, FIBER CORE, WIRE ROPE AND WIRE
ROPE SLINGS
Single leg
Rope diameter Vertical Choker
A B C A B C
619 Classification
.............................................
14 .55 .51 .49 .41 .38 .37
.............................................
38 1.2 1.1 1.1 .91 .85 .80
.............................................
12 2.1 2.0 1.8 1.6 1.5 1.4
58 ............................................. 3.3 3.1 2.8 2.5 2.3 2.1
34 ............................................. 4.8 4.4 3.9 3.6 3.3 2.9
78 ............................................. 6.4 5.9 5.1 4.8 4.5 3.9
1 ............................................... 8.4 7.7 6.7 6.3 5.8 5.0
118 ........................................... 10 9.5 8.4 7.9 7.1 6.3
637 Classification
114 ........................................... 12 11 9.8 9.2 8.3 7.4

138 ........................................... 15 13 12 11 10 8.9
112 ........................................... 17 16 14 13 12 10
134 ........................................... 24 21 19 18 16 14
2 ............................................... 31 28 25 23 21 18
TABLE G5RATED CAPACITIES FOR IMPROVED PLOW STEEL, FIBER CORE, WIRE ROPE SLINGS

Rope diameter
A B C A B C A B C A B C
6 19 Classification
.................................
14 1.1 1.0 .99 .95 .88 .85 .77 .72 .70 .55 .51 .49
.................................
38 2.4 2.2 2.1 2.1 1.9 1.8 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.2 1.1 1.1
.................................
12 4.3 3.9 3.7 3.7 3.4 3.2 3.0 2.8 2.6 2.1 2.0 1.8
58 ................................. 6.7 6.2 5.6 5.8 5.3 4.8 4.7 4.4 4.0 3.3 3.1 2.8
34 ................................. 9.5 8.8 7.8 8.2 7.6 6.8 6.7 6.2 5.5 4.8 4.4 3.9
78 ................................. 13 12 10 11 10 8.9 9.1 8.4 7.3 6.4 5.9 5.1
1 .................................. 17 15 13 14 13 11 12 11 9.4 8.4 7.7 6.7
71
TABLE G5RATED CAPACITIES FOR IMPROVED PLOW STEEL, FIBER CORE, WIRE ROPE SLINGS
Continued

Rope diameter
A B C A B C A B C A B C
118 ............................... 21 19 17 18 16 14 15 13 12 10 9.5 8.4
6 37 Classification
114 ............................... 25 22 20 21 19 17 17 16 14 12 11 9.8

138 ............................... 30 27 24 26 23 20 21 19 17 15 13 12
112 ............................... 35 32 28 30 27 24 25 22 20 17 16 14
134 ............................... 48 43 38 41 37 33 34 30 27 24 21 19
2 .................................. 62 55 49 53 48 43 43 39 35 31 28 25
TABLE G6NUMBER AND SPACING OF U-BOLT TABLE G8ALLOY STEEL CHAIN

WIRE ROPE CLIPS (In tons of 2,000 pounds)
Number of clips Min- Nominal size chain stock Single 60 45 30

Improved plow steel, rope imum leg bridle bridle bridle
diameter, inches Drop Other spacing,
forged material inches .....................................
14 1.62 2.82 2.27 1.62
.....................................
38 3.30 5.70 4.65 3.30
(1) ......................................... .............. .............. .............. 12 .....................................
12 .........................................
5.62 9.75 7.90 5.62
3 4 3 58 .....................................
58 .........................................
8.25 14.25 11.65 8.25
3 4 3 34 34 .....................................
34 .........................................
11.5 19.9 16.2 11.5
4 5 4 2
1
78 .....................................
78 .........................................
14.3 24.9 20.3 14.3
4 5 5 14
1 ....................................... 19.3 33.5 27.3 19.8
1 ........................................... 4 6 6
118 ................................... 22.2 38.5 31.5 22.2
118 ....................................... 5 6 6 34
114 ................................... 28.7 49.7 40.5 28.7
114 ....................................... 5 7 7 2
1
138 ................................... 33.5 58.0 47.0 33.5
138 ....................................... 6 7 8 14
112 ................................... 39.7 68.5 56.0 39.7
112 ....................................... 6 8 9
158 ................................... 42.5 73.5 59.5 42.5
1 Three clips shall be used on wire size less than 12-inch 134 ................................... 47.0 81.5 62.0 47.0
diameter.
TABLE G7WROUGHT IRON CHAIN TABLE G9MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE WEAR AT

[In pounds or tons of 2,000 pounds] ANY POINT OF LINK
Single 60 45 30 Max-
Nominal size chains stock imum al-
leg bridle bridle bridle
lowable
Chain size in inches wear in
...................................
14 1 1060 1835 1500 1060 fraction
..................................
5 16 1 1655 2865 2340 1655 of
38 1 ................................... 2385 2.1 3370 2385 inches
716 1 .................................. 3250 2.8 2.3 3250
12 ..................................... ( ) .....................................................................
1 4 9 32
3 64
2.1 3.7 3.0 2.1
916 1 .................................. .............................................................................
38
5 64
2.7 4.6 3.8 2.7 12 ............................................................................. 764
58 ..................................... 3.3 5.7 4.7 3.3 58 ............................................................................. 964
34 ..................................... 4.8 8.3 6.7 4.8 34 ............................................................................. 532
78 ..................................... 6.5 11.2 9.2 6.5 78 ............................................................................. 1164
1 ....................................... 8.5 14.7 12.0 8.5
1 ............................................................................... 316
118 ................................... 10.0 17.3 14.2 10.0
118 ........................................................................... 732
114 ................................... 12.4 21.4 17.5 12.4
114 ........................................................................... 1 4
138 ................................... 15.0 25.9 21.1 15.0
138 ........................................................................... 932
112 ................................... 17.8 30.8 25.2 17.8
112 ........................................................................... 516
158 ................................... 20.9 36.2 29.5 20.9
134 ........................................................................... 1132
134 ................................... 24.2 42.0 34.3 24.2
178 ................................... 27.6 47.9 39.1 27.6
2 ....................................... 31.6 54.8 44.8 31.6
1 These sizes of wrought iron chain are no longer manufac-
tured in the United States.
72
TABLE G10SAFE WORKING LOADS FOR the work, the lower guard shall auto-
SHACKLES matically and instantly return to the
[In tons of 2,000 pounds] covering position.
(d) The moving parts of machinery on
Pin di- Safe
Material size (inches) ameter working a dry dock shall be guarded.
(inches) load (e) Before use, pneumatic tools shall
...........................................................
12 58 1.4 be secured to the extension hose or
...........................................................
58 34 2.2 whip by some positive means to pre-
34 ........................................................... 78 3.2
78 ...........................................................
vent the tool from becoming acciden-
1 4.3
1 ............................................................. 1 8
1 5.6 tally disconnected from the whip.
118 ......................................................... 1 14 6.7 (f) The moving parts of drive mecha-
114 ......................................................... 1 38 8.2 nisms, such as gearing and belting on
138 ......................................................... 1 12 10.0
112 ......................................................... 1 58 11.9 large portable tools, shall be ade-
134 ......................................................... 2 16.2 quately guarded.
2 ............................................................. 2 14 21.2 (g) Headers, manifolds and widely
spaced hose connections on compressed
[47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 61 air lines shall bear the word air in
FR 26351, May 24, 1996; 67 FR 44543, July 3, letters at least 1-inch high, which shall
2002] be painted either on the manifolds or
1915.120 Powered industrial truck separate hose connections, or on signs
operator training. permanently attached to the manifolds
or connections. Grouped air connec-
NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship- tions may be marked in one location.
yard employment under this section are
identical to those set forth at 1910.178(l) of (h) Before use, compressed air hose
this chapter. shall be examined. Visibly damaged
and unsafe hose shall not be used.
[63 FR 66274, Dec. 1, 1998]
Subpart HTools and Related FR 44543, July 3, 2002]
Equipment 1915.132 Portable electric tools.
1915.131 General precautions. The provisions of this section shall
The provisions of this section shall apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding
apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding and shipbreaking except that para-
and shipbreaking. graph (e) of this section applies to ship
(a) Hand lines, slings, tackles of ade- repairing only.
quate strength, or carriers such as tool (a) The frames of portable electric
bags with shoulder straps shall be pro- tools and appliances, except double in-
vided and used to handle tools, mate- sulated tools approved by Under-
rials, and equipment so that employees writers Laboratories, shall be ground-
will have their hands free when using ed either through a third wire in the
ships ladders and access ladders. The cable containing the circuit conductors
use of hose or electric cords for this or through a separate wire which is
purpose is prohibited. grounded at the source of the current.
(b) When air tools of the recipro- (b) Grounding circuits, other than by
cating type are not in use, the dies and means of the structure of the vessel on
tools shall be removed. which the tool is being used, shall be
(c) All portable, power-driven cir- checked to ensure that the circuit be-
cular saws shall be equipped with tween the ground and the grounded
guards above and below the base plate power conductor has resistance which
or shoe. The upper guard shall cover is low enough to permit sufficient cur-
the saw to the depth of the teeth, ex- rent to flow to cause the fuse or circuit
cept for the minimum arc required to breaker to interrupt the current.
permit the base to be tilted for bevel (c) Portable electric tools which are
cuts. The lower guard shall cover the held in the hand shall be equipped with
saw to the depth of the teeth, except switches of a type which must be
for the minimum arc required to allow manually held in the closed position.
proper retraction and contact with the (d) Worn or frayed electric cables
work. When the tool is withdrawn from shall not be used.
73
(e) The employer shall notify the of- requirements of paragraph (e) of this
ficer in charge of the vessel before section, except as follows:
using electric power tools operated (1) When the work location makes it
with the vessels current. impossible, in which case a wheel
equipped with safety flanges as de-
1915.133 Hand tools. scribed in paragraph (f) of this section
The provisions of this section shall shall be used.
apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding (2) When wheels 2 inches or less in di-
and shipbreaking. ameter which are securely mounted on
(a) Employers shall not issue or per- the end of a steel mandrel are used.
mit the use of unsafe hand tools. (d) Portable abrasive wheels used for
(b) Wrenches, including crescent, internal grinding shall be provided
pipe, end and socket wrenches, shall with safety flanges (protection flanges)
not be used when jaws are sprung to meeting the requirements of paragraph
the point that slippage occurs. (f) of this section, except as follows:
(c) Impact tools, such as drift pins, (1) When wheels 2 inches or less in di-
wedges, and chisels, shall be kept free ameter which are securely mounted on
of mushroomed heads. the end of a steel mandrel are used.
(d) The wooden handles of tools shall (2) If the wheel is entirely within the
be kept free of splinters or cracks and work being ground while in use.
shall be kept tight in the tool. (e) When safety guards are required,
they shall be so mounted as to main-
1915.134 Abrasive wheels.
tain proper alignment with the wheel,
This section shall apply to ship re- and the guard and its fastenings shall
pairing, shipbuilding and shipbreaking. be of sufficient strength to retain frag-
(a) Floor stand and bench mounted ments of the wheel in case of acci-
abrasive wheels used for external dental breakage. The maximum angu-
grinding shall be provided with safety lar exposure of the grinding wheel pe-
guards (protection hoods). The max- riphery and sides shall not exceed 180
imum angular exposure of the grinding degrees.
wheel periphery and sides shall be not (f) When safety flanges are required,
more than 90 degrees, except that when they shall be used only with wheels de-
work requires contact with the wheel signed to fit the flanges. Only safety
below the horizontal plane of the spin- flanges of a type and design and prop-
dle, the angular exposure shall not ex- erly assembled so as to insure that the
ceed 125 degrees. In either case the ex- pieces of the wheel will be retained in
posure shall begin not more than 65 de- case of accidental breakage shall be
grees above the horizontal plane of the used.
spindle. Safety guards shall be strong
(g) All abrasive wheels shall be close-
enough to withstand the effect of a
ly inspected and ring tested before
bursting wheel.
mounting to ensure that they are free
(b) Floor and bench mounted grinders
from cracks or defects.
shall be provided with work rests
which are rigidly supported and readily (h) Grinding wheels shall fit freely on
adjustable. Such work rests shall be the spindle and shall not be forced on.
kept a distance not to exceed 18 inch The spindle nut shall be tightened only
from the surface of the wheel. enough to hold the wheel in place.
(c) Cup type wheels used for external (i) The power supply shall be suffi-
grinding shall be protected by either a cient to maintain the rated spindle
revolving cup guard or a band type speed under all conditions of normal
guard in accordance with the provi- grinding. The rated maximum speed of
sions of the United States of America the wheel shall not be exceeded.
Standard Safety Code for the Use, (j) All employees using abrasive
Care, and Protection of Abrasive wheels shall be protected by eye pro-
Wheels, B7.11964. All other portable tection equipment in accordance with
abrasive wheels used for external the requirements of subpart I of this
grinding shall be provided with safety part except when adequate eye protec-
guards (protection hoods) meeting the tion is afforded by eye shields which
74
are permanently attached to the bench cordance with the requirements of sub-
or floor stand. part I of this part.
(c) Instruction of operators. Before em-
FR 26351, May 24, 1996; 67 FR 44543, July 3, ployees are permitted to use powder ac-
2002] tuated tools, they shall have been thor-
oughly instructed by a competent per-
1915.135 Powder actuated fastening son with respect to the requirements of
tools. paragraph (b) of this section and the
(a) The section shall apply to ship re- safe use of such tools as follows:
pairing and shipbuilding only. (1) Before using a tool, the operator
(b) General precautions. (1) Powder ac- shall inspect it to determine that it is
tuated fastening tools shall be tested clean, that all moving parts operate
each day before loading to ensure that freely and that the barrel is free from
the safety devices are in proper work- obstructions.
ing condition. Any tool found not to be (2) When a tool develops a defect dur-
in proper working order shall be imme- ing use, the operator shall immediately
diately removed from service until re- cease to use it and shall notify his su-
pairs are made. pervisor.
(2) Powder actuated fastening tools (3) Tools shall not be loaded until
shall not be used in an explosive or just prior to the intended firing time
flammable atmosphere. and the tool shall not be left unat-
(3) All tools shall be used with the tended while loaded.
type of shield or muzzle guard appro- (4) The tool, whether loaded or
priate for a particular use. empty, shall not be pointed at any per-
(4) Fasteners shall not be driven into son, and hands shall be kept clear of
very hard or brittle materials such as the open barrel end.
cast iron, glazed tile, surface hardened (5) In case of a misfire, the operator
steel, glass block, live rock, face brick shall hold the tool in the operating po-
or hollow title. sition for at least 15 seconds and shall
(5) Fasteners shall not be driven into continue to hold the muzzle against
soft materials unless such materials the work surface during disassembly or
are backed by a substance that will opening of the tool and removal of the
prevent the pin or fastener from pass- powder load.
ing completely through and creating a (6) Neither tools nor powder charges
flying missile hazard on the opposite shall be left unattended in places where
side. they would be available to unauthor-
(6) Unless a special guard, fixture or ized persons.
jig is used, fasteners shall not be driven [47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 61
directly into materials such as brick or FR 26351, May 24, 1996]
concrete within 3 inches of the unsup-
ported edge or corner, or into steel sur- 1915.136 Internal combustion en-
faces within 12 inch of the unsupported gines, other than ships equipment.
edge or corner. When fastening other The provisions of this section shall
material, such as 24 inch lumber to a apply to ship repairing, shipbuilding
concrete surface, fasteners of greater and shipbreaking.
than 732 inch shank diameter shall not (a) When internal combustion en-
be used and fasteners shall not be driv- gines furnished by the employer are
en within 2 inches of the unsupported used in a fixed position below decks,
edge or corner of the work surface. for such purposes as driving pumps,
(7) Fasteners shall not be driven generators, and blowers, the exhaust
through existing holes unless a positive shall be led to the open air, clear of
guide is used to secure accurate align- any ventilation intakes and openings
ment. through which it might enter the ves-
(8) No attempt shall be made to drive sel.
a fastener into a spalled area caused by (b) All exhaust line joints and con-
an unsatisfactory fastening. nections shall be checked for tightness
(9) Employees using powder actuated immediately upon starting the engine,
fastening tools shall be protected by and any leaks shall be corrected at
personal protective equipment in ac- once.
75
(c) When internal combustion engines lanyard, specially woven lanyard, tear-
on vehicles, such as forklifts and mo- ing or deforming lanyard, or automatic
bile cranes, or on portable equipment self-retracting lifeline/lanyard, which
such as fans, generators, and pumps ex- serves to dissipate a substantial
haust into the atmosphere below decks, amount of energy during a fall arrest,
the competent person shall make tests or otherwise limit the energy imposed
of the carbon monoxide content of the on an employee during fall arrest.
atmosphere as frequently as conditions Deceleration distance means the addi-
require to ensure that dangerous con- tional vertical distance a falling em-
centrations do not develop. Employees
ployee travels, excluding lifeline elon-
shall be removed from the compart-
gation and free fall distance, before
ment involved when the carbon mon-
stopping, from the point at which the
oxide concentration exceeds 50 parts
per million (0.005%). The employer deceleration device begins to operate.
shall use blowers sufficient in size and It is measured as the distance between
number and so arranged as to maintain the location of an employees body belt
the concentration below this allowable or body harness attachment point at
limit before work is resumed. the moment of activation (at the onset
of fall arrest forces) of the deceleration
Subpart IPersonal Protective device during a fall, and the location of
Equipment (PPE) that attachment point after the em-
ployee comes to a full stop.
Equivalent means alternative designs,
SOURCE: 61 FR 26352, May 24, 1996, unless
otherwise noted. materials, or methods to protect
against a hazard which the employer
1915.151 Scope, application and defi- can demonstrate will provide an equal
nitions. or greater degree of safety for employ-
(a) Scope and application. This sub- ees than the method or item specified
part applies to all work in shipyard in the standard.
employment regardless of geographic Free fall means the act of falling be-
location. fore a personal fall arrest system be-
(b) Definitions applicable to this sub- gins to apply force to arrest the fall.
part. Anchorage means a secure point of Free fall distance means the vertical
attachment for lifelines, lanyards, or displacement of the fall arrest attach-
deceleration devices. ment point on the employees body belt
Body belt means a strap with means or body harness between onset of the
for both securing it about the waist fall and just before the system begins
and attaching it to a lanyard, lifeline, to apply force to arrest the fall. This
or deceleration device. distance excludes deceleration dis-
Body harness means straps which tance, and lifeline/lanyard elongation,
may be secured about the employee in
but includes any deceleration device
a manner that will distribute the fall
slide distance or self-retracting life-
arrest forces over at least the thighs,
line/lanyard extension before the de-
shoulders, chest and pelvis with means
vice operates and fall arrest forces
for attaching it to other components of
occur.
a personal fall arrest system.
Connector means a device which is Lanyard means a flexible line of rope,
used to couple (connect) parts of a per- wire rope, or strap which generally has
sonal fall arrest system or parts of a a connector at each end for connecting
positioning device system together. It the body belt or body harness to a de-
may be an independent component of celeration device, lifeline, or anchor-
the system, such as a carabiner, or it age.
may be an integral component of part Lifeline means a component con-
of the system (such as a buckle or D- sisting of a flexible line for connection
ring sewn into a body belt or body har- to an anchorage at one end to hang
ness or a snaphook spliced or sewn to a vertically (vertical lifeline), or for con-
lanyard or self-retracting lanyard). nection to anchorages at both ends to
Deceleration device means any mecha- stretch horizontally (horizontal life-
nism, such as a rope grab, ripstitch line), and which serves as a means for
76
connecting other components of a per- personal fall protection equipment, and

sonal fall arrest system to the anchor- life saving equipment, meeting the ap-
age. plicable provisions of this subpart,
Lower levels means those areas or sur- wherever employees are exposed to
faces to which an employee can fall. work activity hazards that require the
Such areas or surfaces include but are use of PPE.
not limited to ground levels, floors, (b) Hazard assessment and equipment.
ramps, tanks, materials, water, exca- The employer shall assess its work ac-
vations, pits, vessels, structures, or tivity to determine whether there are
portions thereof. hazards present, or likely to be
Personal fall arrest system means a present, which necessitate the employ-
system used to arrest an employee in a ees use of PPE. If such hazards are
fall from a working level. It consists of present, or likely to be present, the
an anchorage, connectors, body belt or employer shall:
body harness and may include a lan- (1) Select the type of PPE that will
yard, a deceleration device, a lifeline, protect the affected employee from the
or a suitable combination of these. As hazards identified in the occupational
of January 1, 1998, the use of a body hazard assessment;
belt for fall arrest is prohibited. (2) Communicate selection decisions
Positioning device system means a body to affected employees;
belt or body harness system rigged to (3) Select PPE that properly fits each
allow an employee to be supported at affected employee; and
an elevated vertical surface, such as a (4) Verify that the required occupa-
wall or window, and to be able to work tional hazard assessment has been per-
with both hands free while leaning. formed through a document that con-
Qualified person means a person who tains the following information: occu-
by possession of a recognized degree or pation, the date(s) of the hazard assess-
certificate of professional standing, or ment, and the name of the person per-
who, by extensive knowledge, training, forming the hazard assessment.
and experience, has successfully dem- NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (b): A hazard assess-
onstrated the ability to solve or re- ment conducted according to the trade or oc-
solve problems related to the subject cupation of affected employees will be con-
matter and work. sidered to comply with paragraph (b) of this
Restraint (tether) line means a line section, if the assessment addresses any
PPE-related hazards to which employees are
from an anchorage, or between anchor- exposed in the course of their work activi-
ages, to which the employee is secured ties.
in such a way as to prevent the em- NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (b): Non-mandatory
ployee from walking or falling off an appendix A to this subpart contains exam-
elevated work surface. Note: A re- ples of procedures that will comply with the
straint line is not necessarily designed requirement for an occupational hazard as-
to withstand forces resulting from a sessment.
fall. (c) Defective and damaged equipment.
Rope grab means a deceleration de- Defective or damaged PPE shall not be
vice which travels on a lifeline and used.
automatically, by friction, engages the (d) Reissued equipment. The employer
lifeline and locks so as to arrest the shall ensure that all unsanitary PPE,
fall of an employee. A rope grab usu- including that which has been used by
ally employs the principle of inertial employees, be cleaned and disinfected
locking, cam/level locking or both. before it is reissued.
(e) Training. (1) The employer shall
1915.152 General requirements. provide training to each employee who
(a) Provision and use of equipment. The is required, by this section, to use PPE
employer shall provide and shall ensure (exception: training in the use of per-
that each affected employee uses the sonal fall arrest systems and posi-
appropriate personal protective equip- tioning device systems training is cov-
ment (PPE) for the eyes, face, head, ex- ered in 1915.159 and 1915.160). Each
tremities, torso, and respiratory sys- employee shall be trained to under-
tem, including protective clothing, stand at least the following:
protective shields, protective barriers, (i) When PPE is necessary;
77
(ii) What PPE is necessary; employee uses appropriate eye or face

(iii) How to properly don, doff, ad- protection where there are exposures
just, and wear PPE; to eye or face hazards caused by flying
(iv) The limitations of the PPE; and, particles, molten metal, liquid chemi-
(v) The proper care, maintenance, cals, acid or caustic liquids, chemical
useful life and disposal of the PPE. gases or vapors, or potentially inju-
(2) The employer shall ensure that rious light radiation.
each affected employee demonstrates
(2) The employer shall ensure that
the ability to use PPE properly before
each affected employee uses eye or face
being allowed to perform work requir-
ing the use of PPE. protection that provides side protec-
(3) The employer shall retrain any tion when there is a hazard from flying
employee who does not understand or objects. Detachable side protectors
display the skills required by para- (e.g., a clip-on or slide-on side shield)
graph (e)(2) of this section. Cir- meeting the pertinent requirements of
cumstances where retraining is re- this section are acceptable.
quired include, but are not limited to, (3) The employer shall ensure that
situations where: each affected employee who wears pre-
(i) Changes in occupation or work scription lenses while engaged in oper-
render previous training obsolete; or ations that involve eye hazards wears
(ii) Changes in the types of PPE to be eye protection that incorporates the
used render previous training obsolete; prescription in its design, unless the
or employee is protected by eye protec-
(iii) Inadequacies in an affected em- tion that can be worn over prescription
ployees knowledge or use of assigned
lenses without disturbing the proper
PPE indicate that the employee has
position of either the PPE or the pre-
not retained the requisite under-
standing or skill. scription lenses.
(4) The employer shall verify that (4) The employer shall ensure that
each affected employee has received each affected employee uses equipment
the required training through a docu- with filter lenses that have a shade
ment that contains the following infor- number that provides appropriate pro-
mation: name of each employee tection from injurious light radiation.
trained, the date(s) of training, and Table I1 is a listing of appropriate
type of training the employee received. shade numbers for various operations.
[61 FR 26352, May 24, 1996; 61 FR 29957, June If filter lenses are used in goggles worn
13, 1996, as amended at 67 FR 44543, July 3, under a helmet which has a lens, the
2002] shade number of the lens in the helmet
may be reduced so that the shade num-
1915.153 Eye and face protection. bers of the two lenses will equal the
(a) General requirements. (1) The em- value as shown in Table I1, 1915.153.
ployer shall ensure that each affected
TABLE I1FILTER LENSES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST RADIANT ENERGY
Minimum
Operations Electrode size 132 in. Arc current protective
shade
Shielded metal arc welding ............... Less than 3 ...................................... Less than ......................................... 7
35 ................................................... 60 ..................................................... 8
58 ................................................... 60160 ............................................. 10
More than 8 ..................................... 160250 ........................................... 11
.......................................................... 250550 ........................................... ....................
Gas metal arc welding and flux .......................................................... Less than ......................................... 7
cored arc welding.
.......................................................... 60 ..................................................... 10
.......................................................... 60160 ............................................. 10
.......................................................... 160250 ........................................... 10
.......................................................... 250500 ........................................... ....................
Gas Tungsten arc welding ................ .......................................................... Less than ......................................... 8
.......................................................... 50 ..................................................... 8
.......................................................... 50150 ............................................. 10
.......................................................... 150500 ........................................... ....................
78
TABLE I1FILTER LENSES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST RADIANT ENERGYContinued

Minimum
Operations Electrode size 132 in. Arc current protective
shade
Air carbon .......................................... (Light) ............................................... Less than ......................................... 10

Arc cutting ......................................... (Heavy) ............................................ 500 ................................................... 11
5001000 ......................................... ....................
Plasma arc welding ........................... .......................................................... Less than ......................................... 6
.......................................................... 20 ..................................................... 8
.......................................................... 20 ................................................. 10
.......................................................... 100 ................................................... 11
.......................................................... 100 ............................................... ....................
.......................................................... 400 ................................................... ....................
.......................................................... 400 ............................................... ....................
.......................................................... 800 ................................................... ....................
Plasma arc cutting ............................ (light)** ............................................. Less than 300 .................................. 8
(medium)** ....................................... 300400 ........................................... 9
(heavy)** .......................................... 400800 ........................................... 10
Torch brazing .................................... .......................................................... .......................................................... 3
Torch soldering ................................. .......................................................... .......................................................... 2
Carbon Arc welding .......................... .......................................................... .......................................................... 14
** These values apply where the actual arc is clearly seen. Lighter filters may be used when the arc is hidden by the
workpiece.
FILTER LENSES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST RADIANT ENERGY

Minimum*
Operations Plate thicknessinches Plate thicknessmm protective
shade
Gas welding:
Light ........................................... Under 18 .......................................... Under 3.2 ......................................... 4
Medium ...................................... 18 to 12 ............................................ 3.2 to 12.7 ....................................... 5
Heavy ......................................... Over 12 ............................................ Over 12.7 ......................................... 6
Oxygen cutting
Light ........................................... Under 1 ............................................ Under 25 .......................................... 3
Medium ...................................... 1 to 6 ............................................... 25 to 150 ......................................... 4
Heavy ......................................... Over 6 .............................................. Over 150 .......................................... 5
* As a rule of thumb, start with a shade that is too dark to see the weld zone. Then go to a lighter shade which gives sufficient
view of the weld zone without going below the minimum. In oxyfuel gas welding or cutting where the torch produces a high yel-
low light, it is desirable to use a filter lens that absorbs the yellow or sodium line in the visible light of the (spectrum) operation.
(b) Criteria for protective eye and face 1915.154 Respiratory protection.
devices. (1) Protective eye and face de-
Respiratory protection for shipyard
vices purchased after May 20, 1982,
employment is covered by 29 CFR
shall comply with the American Na-
1910.134.
tional Standards Institute, ANSI Z87.1
1989, Practice for Occupational and 1915.155 Head protection.
Educational Eye and Face Protection,
which is incorporated by reference as (a) Use. (1) The employer shall ensure
specified in 1915.5, or shall be dem- that each affected employee wears a
onstrated by the employer to be equal- protective helmet when working in
ly effective. areas where there is a potential for in-
jury to the head from falling objects.
(2) Eye and face protective devices
purchased before May 20, 1982, shall (2) The employer shall ensure that
comply with American National each affected employee wears a protec-
Standard Practice for Occupational tive helmet designed to reduce elec-
and Educational Eye and Face Protec- trical shock hazards where there is po-
tion, Z87.1 1979, which is incorporated tential for electric shock or burns due
by reference as specified in 1915.5, or to contact with exposed electrical con-
shall be demonstrated by the employer ductors which could contact the head.
to be equally effective. (b) Criteria for protective helmets. (1)
Protective helmets purchased after Au-
gust 22, 1996, shall comply with ANSI
79
Z89.l1986, Personnel ProtectionPro- (c) Electrical protective devices. The

tective Headwear for Industrial Work- employer shall ensure that each af-
ers-Requirements, which is incor- fected employee wears protective elec-
porated by reference, as specified in trical insulating gloves and sleeves or
1915.5, or shall be demonstrated by the other electrical protective equipment,
employer to be equally effective. if that employee is exposed to elec-
(2) Protective helmets purchased be- trical shock hazards while working on
fore August 22, 1996, shall comply with electrical equipment.
the American National Standard
Safety Requirements for Industrial 1915.158 Lifesaving equipment.
Head Protection, Z89.11969, which is (a) Personal flotation devices. (1) PFDs
incorporated by reference as specified
(life preservers, life jackets, or work
in 1915.5, or shall be demonstrated by
vests) worn by each affected employee
the employer to be equally effective.
must be United States Coast Guard
1915.156 Foot protection. (USCG) approved pursuant to 46 CFR
part 160 (Type I, II, III, or V PFD) and
(a) Use. The employer shall ensure marked for use as a work vest, for com-
that each affected employee wears pro-
mercial use, or for use on vessels.
tective footwear when working in areas
USCG approval is pursuant to 46 CFR
where there is a danger of foot injuries
part 160, Coast Guard Lifesaving Equip-
due to falling or rolling objects or ob-
jects piercing the sole. ment Specifications.
(b) Criteria for protective footwear. (1) (2) Prior to each use, personal floata-
Protective footwear purchased after tion devices shall be inspected for dry
August 22, 1996, shall comply with rot, chemical damage, or other defects
ANSI Z411991, American National which may affect their strength and
Standard for Personal Protection-Pro- buoyancy. Defective personal floata-
tective Footwear, which is incor- tion devices shall not be used.
porated by reference, as specified in (b) Ring life buoys and ladders. (1)
1915.5, or shall be demonstrated by the When work is being performed on a
employer to be equally as effective. floating vessel 200 feet (61 m) or more
(2) Protective footwear purchased be- in length, at least three 30-inch (0.76 m)
fore August 22, 1996, shall comply with U.S. Coast Guard approved ring life
the American National Standard for buoys with lines attached shall be lo-
Personal Protection- Protective Foot- cated in readily visible and accessible
wear Z411983, which is incorporated places. Ring life buoys shall be located
by reference, as specified in 1915.5, or one forward, one aft, and one at the ac-
shall be demonstrated by the employer cess to the gangway.
to be equally effective. (2) On floating vessels under 200 feet
(61 m) in length, at least one 30-inch
1915.157 Hand and body protection.
(0.76 m) U.S. Coast Guard approved ring
(a) Use. The employer shall ensure life buoy with line attached shall be lo-
that each affected employee uses ap- cated at the gangway.
propriate hand protection and other (3) At least one 30-inch (0.76 m) U. S.
protective clothing where there is ex- Coast Guard approved ring life buoy
posure to hazards such as skin absorp- with a line attached shall be located on
tion of harmful substances, severe cuts each staging alongside of a floating
or lacerations, severe abrasions, punc-
vessel on which work is being per-
tures, chemical burns, thermal burns,
formed.
harmful temperature extremes, and
sharp objects. (4) At least 90 feet (27.43m) of line
shall be attached to each ring life
(b) Hot work operations. The employer
shall ensure that no employee wears buoy.
clothing impregnated or covered in full (5) There shall be at least one port-
or in part with flammable or combus- able or permanent ladder in the vicin-
tible materials (such as grease or oil) ity of each floating vessel on which
while engaged in hot work operations work is being performed. The ladder
or working near an ignition source. shall be of sufficient length to assist
80
employees to reach safety in the event (7) On suspended scaffolds or similar

they fall into the water. work platforms with horizontal life-
[61 FR 26352, May 24, 1996, as amended at 67
lines that may become vertical life-
FR 44543, July 3, 2002] lines, the devices used for connection
to the horizontal lifeline shall be capa-
1915.159 Personal fall arrest systems ble of locking in any direction on the
(PFAS). lifeline.
The criteria of this section apply to (8) Anchorages used for attachment
PFAS and their use. Effective January of personal fall arrest equipment shall
1, 1998, body belts and non-locking be independent of any anchorage being
snaphooks are not acceptable as part of used to support or suspend platforms.
a personal fall arrest system. (9) Anchorages shall be capable of
(a) Criteria for connectors and anchor- supporting at least 5,000 pounds (22.24
ages. (1) Connectors shall be made of Kn) per employee attached, or shall be
drop forged, pressed, or formed steel or designed, installed, and used as follows:
shall be made of materials with equiva- (i) As part of a complete personal fall
lent strength. arrest system which maintains a safety
(2) Connectors shall have a corrosion- factor of at least two; and
resistant finish, and all surfaces and (ii) Under the direction and super-
edges shall be smooth to prevent dam- vision of a qualified person.
age to the interfacing parts of the sys- (b) Criteria for lifelines, lanyards, and
tem. personal fall arrest systems. (1) When
(3) D-rings and snaphooks shall be ca- vertical lifelines are used, each em-
pable of sustaining a minimum tensile ployee shall be provided with a sepa-
load of 5,000 pounds (22.24 Kn). rate lifeline.
(4) D-rings and snaphooks shall be (2) Vertical lifelines and lanyards
proof-tested to a minimum tensile load shall have a minimum tensile strength
of 3,600 pounds (16 Kn) without crack- of 5,000 pounds (22.24 Kn).
ing, breaking, or being permanently de- (3) Self-retracting lifelines and lan-
formed. yards that automatically limit free fall
(5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be distances to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less shall
compatible with the member to which be capable of sustaining a minimum
they are connected to prevent uninten- tensile load of 3,000 pounds (13.34 Kn)
tional disengagement of the snaphook applied to a self-retracting lifeline or
caused by depression of the snaphook lanyard with the lifeline or lanyard in
keeper by the connected member, or the fully extended position.
shall be of a locking type that is de- (4) Self-retracting lifelines and lan-
signed and used to prevent disengage- yards which do not limit free fall dis-
ment of the snap-hook by contact of tance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, ripstitch
the snaphook keeper by the connected lanyards and tearing and deforming
member. lanyards shall be capable of sustaining
(6) Snaphooks, unless of a locking a minimum static tensile load of 5,000
type designed and used to prevent dis- pounds (22.24 Kn) applied to the device
engagement from the following connec- when they are in the fully extended po-
tions, shall not be engaged: sition.
(i) Directly to webbing, rope or wire (5) Horizontal lifelines shall be de-
rope; signed, installed, and used under the
(ii) To each other; supervision of a qualified person, and
(iii) To a D-ring to which another shall only be used as part of a complete
snaphook or other connector is at- personal fall arrest system that main-
tached; tains a safety factor of at least two.
(iv) To a horizontal lifeline; or (6) Effective November 20, 1996, per-
(v) To any object that is incom- sonal fall arrest systems shall:
patibly shaped or dimensioned in rela- (i) Limit the maximum arresting
tion to the snaphook such that unin- force on a falling employee to 900
tentional disengagement could occur pounds (4 Kn) when used with a body
by the connected object being able to belt;
depress the snaphook keeper and re- (ii) Limit the maximum arresting
lease itself. force on a falling employee to 1,800
81
pounds (8 Kn) when used with a body ration. Defective components shall be
harness; removed from service.
(iii) Bring a falling employee to a (6) Personal fall arrest systems and
complete stop and limit the maximum components subjected to impact load-
deceleration distance an employee ing shall be immediately removed from
travels to 3.5 feet (1.07 m), and service and shall not be used again for
(iv) Have sufficient strength to with- employee protection until inspected
stand twice the potential impact en- and determined by a qualified person to
ergy of an employee free falling a dis- be undamaged and suitable for reuse.
tance of 6 feet (1.83 m), or the free fall (7) The employer shall provide for
distance permitted by the system, prompt rescue of employees in the
whichever is less; event of a fall or shall ensure that em-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(6) OF THIS SECTION:
ployees are able to rescue themselves.
A personal fall arrest system which meets (8) Body belts shall be at least one
the criteria and protocols contained in ap- and five-eighths inches (4.13 cm) wide.
pendix B, is considered to comply with para- (9) Personal fall arrest systems and
graph (b)(6). If the combined tool and body components shall be used only for em-
weight is 310 pounds (140.62 kg) or more, sys- ployee fall protection and not to hoist
tems that meet the criteria and protocols materials.
contained in appendix B will be deemed to (d) Training. Before using personal
comply with the provisions of paragraph
fall arrest equipment, each affected
(b)(6) only if they are modified appropriately
to provide protection for the extra weight of employee shall be trained to under-
the employee and tools. stand the application limits of the
equipment and proper hook-up, anchor-
(7) Personal fall arrest systems shall ing, and tie-off techniques. Affected
be rigged such that an employee can employees shall also be trained so that
neither free fall more than 6 feet (1.83 they can demonstrate the proper use,
m) nor contact any lower level. inspection, and storage of their equip-
(c) Criteria for selection, use and care of ment.
systems and system components. (1) Lan-
yards shall be attached to employees [61 FR 26352, May 24, 1996, as amended at 67
using personal fall arrest systems, as FR 44544, July 3, 2002]
follows:
(i) The attachment point of a body 1915.160 Positioning device systems.
harness shall be located in the center Positioning device systems and their
of the wearers back near the shoulder use shall conform to the following pro-
level, or above the wearers head. If the visions:
free fall distance is limited to less than (a) Criteria for connectors and anchor-
20 inches (50.8 cm), the attachment ages. (1) Connectors shall have a corro-
point may be located in the chest posi- sion-resistant finish, and all surfaces
tion; and and edges shall be smooth to prevent
(ii) The attachment point of a body damage to interfacing parts of this sys-
belt shall be located in the center of tem.
the wearers back. (2) Connecting assemblies shall have
(2) Ropes and straps (webbing) used a minimum tensile strength of 5,000
in lanyards, lifelines and strength compounds (22.24 Kn).
ponents of body belts and body har- (3) Positioning device systems shall
nesses shall be made from synthetic fi- be secured to an anchorage capable of
bers or wire rope. supporting at least twice the potential
(3) Ropes, belts, harnesses, and lan- impact load of an employees fall.
yards shall be compatible with their (4) Snaphooks, unless each is of a
hardware. locking type designed and used to pre-
(4) Lifelines and lanyards shall be vent disengagement, shall not be con-
protected against cuts, abrasions, nected to each other. As of January 1,
burns from hot work operations and de- 1998, only locking type snaphooks shall
terioration by acids, solvents, and be used in positioning device systems.
other chemicals. (b) Criteria for positioning device sys-
(5) Personal fall arrest systems shall tems. (1) Restraint (tether) lines shall
be inspected prior to each use for mil- have a minimum breaking strength of
dew, wear, damage, and other deterio- 3,000 pounds (13.34 Kn).
82
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1915, Subpt. I, App. A
(2) The following system performance (PPE) and PPE training. It neither adds to
criteria for positioning device systems or detracts from the employers responsi-
are effective November 20, 1996: bility to comply with the provisions of this
subpart.
(i) A window cleaners positioning 1. Controlling hazards. Employers and em-
system shall be capable of with- ployees should not rely exclusively on PPE
standing without failure a drop test for protection from hazards. PPE should be
consisting of a 6 foot (1.83 m) drop of a used, where appropriate, in conjunction with
250-pound (113.4 kg) weight. The system engineering controls, guards, and safe work
shall limit the initial arresting force to practices and procedures.
not more than 2,000 pounds (8.9 Kn), 2. Assessment and selection. Employers
with a duration not to exceed 2 milli- need to consider certain general guidelines
for assessing the hazardous situations that
seconds. The system shall limit any are likely to arise under foreseeable work ac-
subsequent arresting forces imposed on tivity conditions and to match employee
the falling employee to not more than PPE to the identified hazards. The employer
1,000 pounds (4.45 Kn); should designate a safety officer or some
(ii) All other positioning device sys- other qualified person to exercise common
tems shall be capable of withstanding sense and appropriate expertise to assess
without failure a drop test consisting work activity hazards and select PPE.
3. Assessment guidelines. In order to assess
of a 4 foot (1.22 m) drop of a 250-pound
the need for PPE the following steps should
(113.4 kg) weight. be taken:
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2) OF THIS SECTION: a. Survey. Conduct a walk-through survey
Positioning device systems which comply of the area in question to identify sources of
with the provisions of section 2 of non-man- hazards.
datory appendix B to this subpart shall be Categories for Consideration:
deemed to meet the requirements of this
(1) Impact
paragraph (b)(2).
(2) Penetration
(c) Criteria for the use and care of posi- (3) Compression (roll-over)
tioning device systems. (1) Positioning (4) Chemical
device systems shall be inspected be- (5) Heat
fore each use for mildew, wear, dam- (6) Harmful dust
age, and other deterioration. Defective (7) Light (optical) radiation
components shall be removed from (8) Drowning
service. (9) Falling
(2) A positioning device system or b. Sources. During the walk-through survey
the safety officer should observe:
component subjected to impact loading
(1) Sources of motion; for example, ma-
shall be immediately removed from chinery or processes where any movement of
service and shall not be used again for tools, machine elements or particles could
employee protection, unless inspected exist, or movement of personnel that could
and determined by a qualified person to result in collision with stationary objects.
be undamaged and suitable for reuse. (2) Sources of high temperatures that could
(d) Training. Before using a posi- result in burns, eye injury or ignition of pro-
tioning device system, employees shall tective equipment.
(3) Types of chemical exposures.
be trained in the application limits,
(4) Sources of harmful dust.
proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off (5) Sources of light radiation, for instance,
techniques, methods of use, inspection, welding, brazing, cutting, heat treating, fur-
and storage of positioning device sys- naces, and high intensity lights.
tems. (6) Sources of falling objects or potential
for dropping objects.
[61 FR 26352, May 24, 1996, as amended at 67 (7) Sources of sharp objects which might
FR 44544, July 3, 2002] pierce or cut the hands.
(8) Sources of rolling or pinching objects
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART I OF PART which could crush the feet.
1915NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES (9) Layout of work place and location of
FOR HAZARD ASSESSMENT, PER- co-workers.
SONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (10) Any electrical hazards.
(PPE) SELECTION, AND PPE TRAIN- (11) Review injury/accident data to help
ING PROGRAM identify problem areas.
Organize data. Following the walk-through
This appendix is intended to provide com- survey, it is necessary to organize the data
pliance assistance for hazard assessment, se- and other information obtained. That mate-
lection of personal protective equipment rial provides the basis for hazard assessment
83
Pt. 1915, Subpt. I, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7107 Edition)
that enables the employer to select the ap- basis so the wearer will have a comfortable
propriate PPE. fit that maintains the protective device in
d. Analyze data. Having gathered and orga- the proper position. Particular care should
nized data regarding a particular occupation, be taken in fitting devices for eye protection
employers need to estimate the potential for against dust and chemical splash to ensure
injuries. Each of the identified hazards (see that the seal is appropriate for the face.
paragraph 3.a.) should be reviewed and clas- (b) In addition, proper fitting of hard hats
sified as to its type, the level of risk, and the is important to ensure that the hard hat will
seriousness of any potential injury. Where it not fall off during work operations. In some
is foreseeable that an employee could be ex- cases a chin strap may be necessary to keep
posed to several hazards simultaneously, the
the hard hat on an employees head. (Chin
consequences of such exposure should be con-
straps should break at a reasonably low force
sidered.
4. Selection guidelines. After completion of to prevent a strangulation hazard). Where
the procedures in paragraph 3, the general manufacturers instructions are available,
procedure for selection of protective equip- they should be followed carefully.
ment is to: 7. Reassessment of hazards. Compliance with
(a) become familiar with the potential haz- the hazard assessment requirements of
ards and the types of protective equipment 1915.152(b) will involve the reassessment of
that are available, and what they can do; for work activities where changing cir-
example, splash protection, and impact pro- cumstances make it necessary. a. The em-
tection; ployer should have a safety officer or other
(b) compare the hazards associated with qualified person reassess the hazards of the
the environment; for instance, impact ve- work activity area as necessary. This reas-
locities, masses, projectile shapes, radiation sessment should take into account changes
intensities, with the capabilities of the in the workplace or work practices, such as
available protective equipment; those associated with the installation of new
(c) select the protective equipment which equipment, and the lessons learned from re-
ensures a level of protection greater than the viewing accident records, and a reevaluation
minimum required to protect employees performed to determine the suitability of
from the hazards; and PPE selected for use.
(d) fit the user with the protective device 8. Selection chart guidelines for eye and face
and give instructions on care and use of the
protection. Examples of occupations for
PPE. It is very important that users be made
which eye protection should be routinely
aware of all warning labels and limitations
considered are carpenters, engineers, copper-
of their PPE.
5. Fitting the device. Careful consideration smiths, instrument technicians, insulators,
must be given to comfort and fit. The em- electricians, machinists, mobile equipment
ployee will be most likely to wear the pro- mechanics and repairers, plumbers and ship
tective device if it fits comfortably. PPE fitters, sheet metal workers and tinsmiths,
that does not fit properly may not provide grinding equipment operators, machine oper-
the necessary protection, and may create ators, welders, boiler workers, painters, la-
other problems for wearers. Generally, pro- borers, grit blasters, ship fitters and burners.
tective devices are available in a variety of This is not a complete list of occupations
sizes and choices. Therefore employers that require the use of eye protection. The
should be careful to select the appropriate following chart provides general guidance for
sized PPE. the proper selection of eye and face protec-
6. Devices with adjustable features. (a) Ad- tion to protect against hazards associated
justments should be made on an individual with the listed hazard source operations.
EYE AND FACE PROTECTION SELECTION CHART

Source Assessment of hazard Protection
Impact:
Chipping, grinding machining, masonry work, Flying fragments, ob- Spectacles with side protection, goggles, face
woodworking, sawing, drilling, chiseling, jects, large chips, par- shields. See notes (1), (3), (5), (6), (10). For
powered fastening, riveting, and sanding. ticles, sand, dirt, etc. severe exposure, use face shield.
Heat:
Furnace operations, pouring, casting, hot dip- Hot sparks ..................... Face shields, goggles, spectacles with side pro-
ping, and welding. tection. For severe exposure use face shield.
See notes (1), (2), (3).
Splash from molten met- Face shields worn over goggles. See notes (1),
als. (2), (3).
High temperature expo- Screen face shields, reflective face shields. See
sure. notes (1), (2), (3).
Chemicals:
Acid and chemicals handling, degreasing, Splash ........................... Goggles, eyecup and cover types. For severe
plating. exposure, use face shield. See notes (3), (11).
84
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1915, Subpt. I, App. A
EYE AND FACE PROTECTION SELECTION CHARTContinued

Source Assessment of hazard Protection
Irritating mists ................ Special-purpose goggles.

Dust:
Woodworking, buffing, general dusty condi- Nuisance dust ............... Goggles, eyecup and cover types. See note (8).
tions.
Light and/or Radiation:
Welding: Electric arc ........................................ Optical radiation ............ Welding helmets or welding shields. Typical
shades: 1014. See notes (9), (12).
Welding: Gas ................................................... Optical radiation ............ Welding goggles or welding face shield. Typical
shades: gas welding 48, cutting 36, brazing
34. See note (9).
Cutting, Torch brazing, Torch soldering .......... Optical radiation ............ Spectacles or welding face-shield. Typical
shades, 1.53. See notes (3), (9).
Glare ................................................................ Poor vision .................... Spectacles with shaded or special-purpose
lenses, as suitable. See notes (9), (10).
NOTES TO EYE AND FACE PROTECTION (k) Ventilation should be adequate, but
SELECTION CHART well protected from splash entry. Eye and
face protection should be designed and used
(a) Care should be taken to recognize the so that it provides both adequate ventilation
possibility of multiple and simultaneous ex- and protects the wearer from splash entry.
posure to a variety of hazards. Adequate pro- (l) Protection from light radiation is di-
tection against the highest level of each of rectly related to filter lens density. See note
the hazards should be provided. Protective (d). Select the darkest shade that allows
devices do not provide unlimited protection. task performance.
(b) Operations involving heat may also in- 9. Selection guidelines for head protection. (a)
volve light radiation. As required by the Hard hats are designed to provide protection
standard, protection from both hazards must from impact and penetration hazards caused
be provided. by falling objects. Head protection is also
(c) Face shields should only be worn over available which provides protection from
primary eye protection (spectacles or gog- electric shock and burn. When selecting head
gles). protection, knowledge of potential electrical
(d) As required by the standard, filter hazards is important. Class A helmets, in ad-
lenses must meet the requirements for shade dition to impact and penetration resistance,
designations in 1915.153(a)(4). Tinted and provide electrical protection from low-volt-
shaded lenses are not filter lenses unless age conductors. (They are proof tested to
they are marked or identified as such. 2,200 volts.) Class B helmets, in addition to
(e) As required by the standard, persons impact and penetration resistance, provide
whose vision requires the use of prescription electrical protection from high-voltage con-
(Rx) lenses must wear either protective de- ductors. (They are proof tested to 20,000
vices fitted with prescription (Rx) lenses or volts.) Class C helmets provide impact and
protective devices designed to be worn over penetration resistance. (They are usually
regular prescription (Rx) eye wear. made of aluminum, which conducts elec-
tricity and should not be used around elec-
(f) Wearers of contact lenses must also
trical hazards.)
wear appropriate eye and face protection de-
(b) Where falling object hazards are
vices in a hazardous environment. It should
present, head protection must be worn. Some
be recognized that dusty and/or chemical en-
examples of exposure include: working below
vironments may represent an additional haz-
other workers who are using tools and mate-
ard to contact lens wearers.
rials which could fall; working around or
(g) Caution should be exercised in the use under conveyor belts which are carrying
of metal frame protective devices in elec- parts or materials; working below machinery
trical hazard areas. or processes which might cause material or
(h) Atmospheric conditions and the re- objects to fall; and working on exposed ener-
stricted ventilation of the protector can gized conductors.
cause lenses to fog. Frequent cleansing may (c) Examples of occupations for which head
be necessary. protection should be considered are: car-
(i) Welding helmets or face shields should penters, electricians, machinists, boiler-
be used only over primary eye protection makers, erectors, plumbers, coppersmiths,
(spectacles or goggles). ship fitters, welders, laborers and material
(j) Non-side shield spectacles are available handlers.
for frontal protection only, but are not ac- 10. Selection guidelines for foot protection. (a)
ceptable eye protection for the sources and Safety shoes and boots must meet ANSI Z41
operations listed for impact. 1991 and provide impact and compression
85
Pt. 1915, Subpt. I, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7107 Edition)
protection to the foot. Where necessary, dexterity required, the duration, frequency,
safety shoes can be obtained which provide and degree of exposure to the hazard, and the
puncture protection. In some work situa- physical stresses that will be applied.
tions, metatarsal (top of foot) protection (d) With respect to selection of gloves for
should be provided, and in some other special protection against chemical hazards:
situations, electrical conductive or insu- (A) The toxic properties of the chemical(s)
lating safety shoes would be appropriate. must be determined; in particular, the abil-
(b) Safety shoes or boots with impact pro- ity of the chemical to cause local effects on
tection would be required for carrying or the skin or to pass through the skin and
handling materials such as packages, ob- cause systemic effects or both;
jects, parts or heavy tools, which could be (B) Generally, any chemical resistant
dropped, and for other activities where ob- glove can be used for dry powders;
jects might fall onto the feet. Safety shoes (C) For mixtures and formulated products
or boots with compression protection would (unless specific test data are available), a
be required for work activities involving glove should be selected on the basis of the
skid trucks (manual material handling chemical component with the shortest
carts) around bulk rolls (such as paper rolls) breakthrough time, since it is possible for
and around heavy pipes, all of which could solvents to carry active ingredients through
potentially roll over an employees feet.
polymeric materials; and,
Safety shoes or boots with puncture protec-
(D) Employees must be able to remove the
tion would be required where sharp objects
gloves in such a manner as to prevent skin
such as nails, wire, tacks, screws, large sta-
contamination.
ples, scrap metal etc., could be stepped on by
employees, causing an injury. 12. Cleaning and maintenance. (a) It is im-
(c) Some occupations (not a complete list) portant that all PPE be kept clean and be
for which foot protection should be routinely properly maintained. Cleaning is particu-
considered are: shipping and receiving larly important for eye and face protection
clerks, stock clerks, carpenters, electricians, where dirty or fogged lenses could impair vi-
machinists, boiler makers, plumbers, copper sion.
smiths, pipe fitters, ship fitters, burners, (b) For the purposes of compliance, PPE
chippers and grinders, erectors, press opera- should be inspected, cleaned, and maintained
tors, welders, laborers, and material han- at regular intervals so that the PPE provides
dlers. the requisite protection.
11. Selection guidelines for hand protection. (c) It is important to ensure that contami-
(a) Gloves are often relied upon to prevent nated PPE which cannot be decontaminated
cuts, abrasions, burns, and skin contact with is disposed of in a manner that protects em-
chemicals that are capable of causing local ployees from exposure to hazards.
or systemic effects following dermal expo- 13. Examples of work activities, trades and se-
sure. OSHA is unaware of any gloves that lection of basic PPE.
provide protection against all potential hand
Example 1: Welder. Based on an assessment
hazards, and commonly available glove ma-
of the work activity area hazards to which
terials provide only limited protection
welders are exposed, the equipment listed
against many chemicals. Therefore, it is im-
below is the basic PPE required for this oc-
portant to select the most appropriate glove
cupation. This does not take into account a
for a particular application and to determine
job location in which additional PPE may be
how long it can be worn, and whether it can
required, such as where the welder works
be reused.
from an elevated platform without guard
(b) It is also important to know the per-
rails. In this situation the welder must also
formance characteristics of gloves relative
wear the proper fall protection equipment,
to the specific hazard anticipated, e.g.,
such as a body harness.
chemical hazards, cut hazards, and flame
hazards. These performance characteristics Hard hat
should be assessed by using standard test Welding Shield (Face)
procedures. Before purchasing gloves, the Welding Gloves
employer should request documentation Safety Glasses
from the manufacturer that the gloves meet Safety Shoes
the appropriate test standard(s) for the haz- Welding Sleeves (welding in the overhead
ard(s) anticipated. position)
(c) other general factors to be considered (Signed and dated)
for glove selection are: Example 2: Yard Maintenance Worker. Based
(A) As long as the performance character- on an assessment of the workplace hazards
istics are acceptable, in certain cir- to which shipyard maintenance workers are
cumstances, it may be more cost effective to exposed, the equipment listed below is the
regularly change cheaper gloves than to basic PPE required for this occupation.
reuse more expensive types; and, Where maintenance workers are exposed to
(B) The work activities of the employee other hazards, such as asbestos, the insula-
should be studied to determine the degree of tion on a pipe is being repaired, maintenance
86
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1915, Subpt. I, App. B
workers must be provided with the appro- (Signed and Dated)
priate supplemental PPE (requirements for
asbestos PPE are set out in 1915.1001).
FR 44544, July 3, 2002]
Hard Hat
Safety Glasses APPENDIX B TO SUBPART I OF PART
Work Gloves
Safety Shoes
1915GENERAL TESTING CONDITIONS
(Signed and Dated) AND ADDITIONAL GUIDELINES FOR
Example 3: Chipper and Grinder Worker. PERSONAL FALL PROTECTION SYS-
Based on an assessment of the workplace TEMS (NON-MANDATORY)
hazards to which shipyard chipper and grind-
er workers are exposed, the equipment listed 1. Personal fall arrest systems(a) General
below is the basic PPE required for this oc- test conditions. (1) Lifelines, lanyards, and de-
cupation. Where workers are exposed to celeration devices should be attached to an
other hazards, such as hazardous dust from anchorage and connected to the body-belt or
chipping or grinding operations, chipper and body harness in the same manner as they
grinder workers must be provided with the would be when used to protect employees,
appropriate supplemental PPE. except that lanyards should be tested only
Safety Glasses when connected directly to the anchorage,
Transparent Face Shields and not when connected to a lifeline.
(2) The anchorage should be rigid, and
Hearing Protection
should not have a deflection greater than .04
Foot Protection
inches (1 cm) when a force of 2,250 pounds
Gloves
(10.01 Kn) is applied.
(Signed and Dated)
(3) The frequency response of the load
Example 4: Painter. Based on an assessment
measuring instrumentation should be 100 Hz.
of the workplace hazards to which shipyard
(4) The test weight used in the strength
painters are exposed, the equipment listed
and force tests should be a rigid, metal cylin-
below is the basic PPE required for this oc-
drical or torso-shaped object with a girth of
cupation. Where painters are exposed to
38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96.5 cm plus
other hazards, such as a fall from an ele-
or minus 10.16 cm).
vation where no guardrails are present,
(5) The lanyard or lifeline used to create
painters must be provided with the appro-
the free fall distance should be the one sup-
priate supplemental PPE.
plied with the system, or in its absence, the
Hard Hats least elastic lanyard or lifeline available to
Safety Glasses be used by the employee with the system.
Disposable Clothing (6) The test weight for each test should be
Gloves hoisted to the required level and should be
Respiratory Protection, including Airline quickly released without having any appre-
Respirators when working in Confined ciable motion imparted to it.
Spaces (7) The systems performance should be
Barrier Creams evaluated, taking into account the range of
(Signed and Dated) environmental conditions for which it is de-
Example 5: Tank Cleaner. Tank cleaning op- signed to be used.
erations and the basic PPE required for them (8) Following the test, the system need not
depend largely upon the type of cargo be capable of further operation.
shipped in the tank. Therefore, the following (b) Strength test. (1) During the testing of
example is given for a tank in which gasoline all systems, a test weight of 300 pounds plus
has been shipped. Based on an assessment of or minus 5 pounds (136.08 kg plus or minus
the workplace hazards to which shipyard 2.27 kg) should be used. (See paragraph (a)(4)
tank cleaners are exposed, specifically ben- above.)
zene and flammability hazards, the equip- (2) The test consists of dropping the test
ment listed below is the basic PPE required weight once. A new unused system should be
for this situation. Other tank cleaning oper- used for each test.
ations will require variations in the PPE (3) For lanyard systems, the lanyard
listed below. length should be 6 feet plus or minus 2 inches
Respiratory Protection, Airline Res- (1.83 m plus or minus 5.08 cm) as measured
pirators for working in confined spaces or from the fixed anchorage to the attachment
where personal exposure limits could be on the body belt or harness.
exceeded. (4) For rope-grab-type deceleration sys-
Chemically resistant clothing tems, the length of the lifeline above the
Face Shields center line of the grabbing mechanism to the
Chemically resistant boots lifelines anchorage point should not exceed
Chemically resistant gloves 2 feet (0.61 m).
Fall Protection (5) For lanyard systems, for systems with
Non sparking tools and equipment deceleration devices which do not automati-
Explosion-proof Lighting cally limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m)
87
Pt. 1915, Subpt. I, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7107 Edition)
or less, and for systems with deceleration de- and the system allowed to retract the life-
vices which have a connection distance in ex- line or lanyard as it would in normal use.
cess of 1 foot (0.31 m) (measured between the The test weight would then be released and
centerline of the lifeline and the attachment the force and deceleration distance meas-
point to the body belt or harness), the test ured.)
weight should be rigged to free fall a dis- (3) Failure. A system fails the force test if
tance of 7.5 feet (2.29 m) from a point that is the recorded maximum arresting force ex-
1.5 feet (45.72 cm) above the anchorage point, ceeds 1,260 pounds (5.6 Kn) when using a body
to its hanging location (6 feet (1.83 m) below belt, or exceeds 2,520 pounds (11.21 Kn) when
the anchorage). The test weight should fall using a body harness.
without interference, obstruction, or hitting (4) Distances. The maximum elongation
the floor or the ground during the test. In and deceleration distance should be recorded
some cases, a non-elastic wire lanyard of suf- during the force test.
ficient length may need to be added to the (d) Deceleration device testsgeneral. The de-
system (for test purposes) to create the nec- vice should be evaluated or tested under the
essary free fall distance. environmental conditions (such as rain, ice,
(6) For deceleration device systems with grease, dirt, type of lifeline, etc.) for which
integral lifelines or lanyards which auto- the device is designed.
matically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (1) Rope-grab-type deceleration devices. (i)
(0.61 m) or less, the test weight should be Devices should be moved on a lifeline 1,000
rigged to free fall a distance of four feet (1.22 times over the same length of line a distance
m). of not less than 1 foot (30.48 cm), and the
(7) Any weight which detaches from the mechanism should lock each time.
belt or harness should constitute failure for (ii) Unless the device is permanently
the strength test. marked to indicate the type of lifelines
(c) Force test general. The test consists of which must be used, several types (different
dropping the respective test weight once. A diameters and different materials) of life-
new, unused system should be used for each lines should be used to test the device.
test. (2) Other-self-activating-type deceleration
(1) For lanyard systems. (i) A test weight devices. The locking mechanisms of other
of 220 pounds plus or minus three pounds self-activating-type deceleration devices de-
(99.79 kg plus or minus 1.36 kg) should be signed for more than one arrest should lock
used (see paragraph (a)(4) above). each of 1,000 times as they would in normal
(ii) Lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or service.
minus 2 inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5.08 cm) 2. Positioning device systems(a) Test Condi-
as measured from the fixed anchorage to the tions. (1) The fixed anchorage should be rigid
attachment on the body belt or body har- and should not have a deflection greater
ness. than .04 inches (1.02 mm) when a force of
(iii) The test weight should fall free from 2,250 pounds (10.01 Kn) is applied.
the anchorage level to its handling location (2) For linemans body belts and pole
(a total of 6 feet (1.83 m) free fall distance) straps, the body belt should be secured to a
without interference, obstruction, or hitting 250 pound (113.4 kg) bag of sand at a point
the floor or ground during the test. which simulates the waist of an employee.
(2) For all other systems. (i) A test weight One end of the pole strap should be attached
of 220 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (99.79 kg to the rigid anchorage and the other end to
plus or minus 1.36 kg) should be used (see the body belt. The sand bag should be al-
paragraph (a)(4) above). lowed to free fall a distance of 4 feet (1.22 m).
(ii) The free fall distance to be used in the Failure of the pole strap and body belt
test should be the maximum fall distance should be indicated by any breakage or slip-
physically permitted by the system during page sufficient to permit the bag to fall free
normal use conditions, up to a maximum to the ground.
free fall distance for the test weight of 6 feet (3) For window cleaners belts, the com-
(1.83 m), except as follows: plete belt should withstand a drop test con-
(A) For deceleration systems which have a sisting of a 250 pound (113.4 kg) weight fall-
connection link or lanyard, the test weight ing free for a distance of 6 feet (1.83 m). The
should free fall a distance equal to the con- weight should be a rigid object with a girth
nection distance (measured between the cen- of 38 inches plus or minus four inches (96.52
ter line of the lifeline and the attachment cm plus or minus 10.16 cm.) The weight
point to the body belt or harness). should be placed in the waistband with the
(B) For deceleration device systems with belt buckle drawn firmly against the weight,
integral life lines or lanyards which auto- as when the belt is worn by a window clean-
matically limit free fall distance to 2 feet er. One belt terminal should be attached to a
(0.61 m) or less, the test weight should free rigid anchor and the other terminal should
fall a distance equal to that permitted by the hang free. The terminals should be adjusted
system in normal use. (For example, to test to their maximum span. The weight fastened
a system with a self-retracting lifeline or in the freely suspended belt should then be
lanyard, the test weight should be supported lifted exactly 6 feet (1.83 m) above its at
88
rest position and released so as to permit a that employees are working in the boil-
free fall of 6 feet (1.83 m) vertically below the er. This tag shall not be removed nor
point of attachment of the terminal anchor.
the valves unblanked until it is deter-
The belt system should be equipped with de-
vices and instrumentation capable of meas- mined that this may be done without
uring the duration and magnitude of the ar- creating a hazard to the employees
rest forces. Any breakage or slippage which working in the boiler, or until the
permits the weight to fall free of the system work in the boiler is completed. Where
constitutes failure of the test. In addition, valves are welded instead of bolted at
the initial and subsequent arresting force
peaks should be measured and should not ex-
least two isolation and shutoff valves
ceed 2,000 pounds (8.9 Kn) for more than 2 connecting the dead boiler with the
milliseconds for the initial impact, nor ex- live system or systems shall be se-
ceed 1,000 pounds (4.45 Kn) for the remainder cured, locked, and tagged.
of the arrest time. (2) Drain connections to atmosphere
(4) All other positioning device systems on all of the dead interconnecting sys-
(except for restraint line systems) should
withstand a drop test consisting of a 250- tems shall be opened for visual obser-
pound (113.4 kg) weight falling free for a dis- vation of drainage.
tance of 4 feet (1.22 m). The weight should be (3) A warning sign calling attention
a rigid object with a girth of 38 inches plus to the fact that employees are working
or minus 4 inches (96.52 cm plus or minus in the boilers shall be hung in a con-
10.16 cm). The body belt or harness should be
affixed to the test weight as it would be to
spicuous location in the engine room.
an employee. The system should be con- This sign shall not be removed until it
nected to the rigid anchor in the manner is determined that the work is com-
that the system would be connected in nor- pleted and all employees are out of the
mal use. The weight should be lifted exactly boilers.
4 feet (1.22 m) above its at rest position
and released so as to permit a vertical free 1915.163 Ships piping systems.
fall of 4 feet (1.22 m). Any breakage or slip-
page which permits the weight to fall free to (a) Before work is performed on a
the ground should constitute failure of the valve, fitting, or section of piping in a
system. piping system where employees may be
[47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 67 subject to injury from the direct escape
FR 44544, July 3, 2002] of steam, or water, oil, or other me-
dium at a high temperature, the em-
Subpart JShips Machinery and ployer shall insure that the following
Piping Systems steps are taken:
(1) The isolation and shutoff valves
1915.161 Scope and application of connecting the dead system with the
subpart. live system or systems shall be se-
The standards contained in this sub- cured, blanked, and tagged to indicate
part shall apply to ship repairing and that employees are working on the sys-
shipbuilding and shall not apply to tems. This tag shall not be removed
shipbreaking. nor the valves unblanked until it is de-
termined that this may be done with-
1915.162 Ships boilers.
out creating a hazard to the employees
(a) Before work is performed in the working on the system, or until the
fire, steam, or water spaces of a boiler work on the system is completed.
where employees may be subject to in- Where valves are welded instead of
jury from the direct escape of a high bolted at least two isolation and shut-
temperature medium such as steam, or off valves connecting the dead system
water, oil, or other medium at a high with the live system or systems shall
temperature entering from an inter- be secured, locked, and tagged.
connecting system, the employer shall
(2) Drain connections to the atmos-
insure that the following steps are
phere on all of the dead inter-
taken:
connecting systems shall be opened for
(1) The isolation and shutoff valves
visual observation of drainage.
connecting the dead boiler with the
live system or systems shall be se- [47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 67
cured, blanked, and tagged indicating FR 44545, July 3, 2002]
89
1915.164 Ships propulsion machin- accessories, the employer shall ensure

ery. that the following steps are taken:
(a) Before work is performed on the (1) The devil claws (also known as
main engine, reduction gear, or con- chain stoppers) shall be made fast to
necting accessories, the employer shall the anchor chains.
ensure that the following steps are (2) The riding pawls shall be in the
taken: engaged position.
(1) The jacking gear shall be engaged (3) In the absence of devil claws and
to prevent the main engine from turn- riding pawls, the anchor chains shall be
ing over. A sign shall be posted at the secured to a suitable fixed structure of
throttle indicating that the jacking the vessel.
gear is engaged. This sign shall not be [47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 67
removed until the jacking gear can be FR 44545, July 3, 2002]
safely disengaged.
(2) If the jacking gear is steam driv-
en, the stop valves to the jacking gear Subpart KPortable, Unfired Pres-
shall be secured, locked, and tagged insure Vessels, Drums and Con-
dicating that employees are working tainers, Other Than Ships
on the main engine. Equipment
(3) If the jacking gear is electrically
driven, the circuit controlling the 1915.171 Scope and application of
jacking gear shall be deenergized by subpart.
tripping the circuit breaker, opening The standards contained in this sub-
the switch or removing the fuse, which- part shall apply to ship repairing and
ever is appropriate. The breaker, shipbuilding and shall not apply to
switch, or fuse location shall be tagged shipbreaking.
indicating that employees are working
on the main engine. 1915.172 Portable air receivers and
(b) Before the jacking engine is oper- other unfired pressure vessels.
ated, the following precautions shall be (a) Portable, unfired pressure vessels,
taken: built after the effective date of this
(1) A check shall be made to ensure regulation, shall be marked and re-
that all employees, equipment, and ported indicating that they have been
tools are clear of the engine, reduction designed and constructed to meet the
gear, and its connecting accessories. standards of the American Society of
(2) A check shall be made to ensure Mechanical Engineers Boiler and Pres-
that all employees, equipment and sure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Rules
tools are free of the propeller. for Construction of Unfired Pressure
(c) Before work is started on or in the Vessels, 1963. They shall be subjected
immediate vicinity of the propeller, a to a hydrostatic pressure test of one
warning sign calling attention to the and one-half times the working pres-
fact that employees are working in sure of the vessels.
that area shall be hung in a con- (b) Portable, unfired pressure vessels,
spicuous location in the engine room. not built to the code requirements of
This sign shall not be removed until it paragraph (a) of this section, and built
is determined that the work is com- prior to the effective date of this regu-
pleted and all employees are free of the lation, shall be examined quarterly by
propeller. a competent person. They shall be sub-
(d) Before the main engine is turned jected yearly to a hydrostatic pressure
over (e.g., when warming up before de- test of one and one-half times the
parture or testing after an overhaul) a working pressure of the vessels.
check shall be made to ensure that all (c) The relief valves on the portable,
employees, equipment, and tools are unfired pressure vessels in paragraphs
free of the propeller. (a) and (b) of this section shall be set to
the safe working pressure of the ves-
1915.165 Ships deck machinery. sels, or set to the lowest safe working
(a) Before work is performed on the pressure of the systems, whichever is
anchor windlass or any of its attached lower.
90
(d) A certification record of such ex- Subpart LElectrical Machinery

aminations and tests made in compli-
ance with the requirements of para- 1915.181 Electrical circuits and dis-
graphs (a) and (b) of this section shall tribution boards.
be maintained. The certification record (a) The provisions of this section
shall include the date of examinations shall apply to ship repairing and ship-
and tests, the signature of the person building and shall not apply to
who performed the examinations or shipbreaking.
tests and the serial number, or other (b) Before an employee is permitted
identifier, of the equipment examined to work on an electrical circuit, except
and tested. when the circuit must remain ener-
gized for testing and adjusting, the cir-
[47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 51 cuit shall be deenergized and checked
FR 34562, Sept. 29, 1986; 67 FR 44545, July 3, at the point at which the work is to be
2002] done to insure that it is actually deen-
ergized. When testing or adjusting an
1915.173 Drums and containers. energized circuit a rubber mat, duck
(a) Shipping drums and containers board, or other suitable insulation
shall not be pressurized to remove shall be used underfoot where an insu-
their contents. lated deck does not exist.
(b) A temporarily assembled pressur- (c) Deenergizing the circuit shall be
ized piping system conveying haz- accomplished by opening the circuit
ardous liquids or gases shall be pro- breaker, opening the switch, or remov-
vided with a relief valve and by-pass to ing the fuse, whichever method is ap-
prevent rupture of the system and the propriate. The circuit breaker, switch,
or fuse location shall be tagged to indi-
escape of such hazardous liquids or
cate that an employee is working on
gases.
the circuit. Such tags shall not be re-
(c) Pressure vessels, drums and con- moved nor the circuit energized until it
tainers containing toxic or flammable is definitely determined that the work
liquids or gases shall not be stored or on the circuit has been completed.
used where they are subject to open (d) When work is performed imme-
flame, hot metal, or other sources of diately adjacent to an open-front ener-
artificial heat. gized board or in back of an energized
(d) Unless pressure vessels, drums board, the board shall be covered or
and containers of 30 gallon capacity or some other equally safe means shall be
over containing flammable or toxic liq- used to prevent contact with any of the
uids or gases are placed in an out-of- energized parts.
the-way area where they will not be [47 FR 16986, Apr. 20, 1982, as amended at 67
subject to physical injury from an out- FR 44545, July 3, 2002]
side source, barriers or guards shall be
erected to protect them from such Subparts MO [Reserved]
physical injury.
(e) Containers of 55 gallons or more Subpart PFire Protection in
capacity containing flammable or toxic Shipyard Employment
liquid shall be surrounded by dikes or
pans which enclose a volume equal to
SOURCE: 69 FR 55702, Sept. 15, 2004, unless
at least 35 percent of the total volume otherwise noted.
of the containers.
(f) Fire extinguishers adequate in 1915.501 General provisions.
number and suitable for the hazard (a) Purpose. The purpose of the stand-
shall be provided. These extinguishers ard in this subpart is to require em-
shall be located in the immediate area ployers to protect all employees from
where pressure vessels, drums and con- fire hazards in shipyard employment,
tainers containing flammable liquids including employees engaged in fire re-
or gases are stored or in use. Such ex- sponse activities.
tinguishers shall be ready for use at all (b) Scope. This subpart covers em-
times. ployers with employees engaged in
91
shipyard employment aboard vessels (b) Plan elements. The employer must
and vessel sections, and on land-side include the following information in
operations regardless of geographic lo- the fire safety plan:
cation. (1) Identification of the significant
(c) Employee participation. The em- fire hazards;
ployer must provide ways for employ- (2) Procedures for recognizing and re-
ees or employee representatives, or porting unsafe conditions;
both to participate in developing and (3) Alarm procedures;
periodically reviewing programs and (4) Procedures for notifying employ-
policies adopted to comply with this ees of a fire emergency;
subpart. (5) Procedures for notifying fire re-
(d) Multi-employer worksites(1) Host sponse organizations of a fire emer-
gency;
employer responsibilities. The host em-
(6) Procedures for evacuation;
ployers responsibilities are to:
(7) Procedures to account for all em-
(i) Inform all employers at the work- ployees after an evacuation; and
site about the content of the fire safety (8) Names, job titles, or departments
plan including hazards, controls, fire for individuals who can be contacted
safety and health rules, and emergency for further information about the plan.
procedures; (c) Reviewing the plan with employees.
(ii) Make sure the safety and health The employer must review the plan
responsibilities for fire protection are with each employee at the following
assigned as appropriate to other em- times:
ployers at the worksite; and (1) Within 90 days of December 14,
(iii) If there is more than one host 2004, for employees who are currently
employer, each host employer must working;
communicate relevant information (2) Upon initial assignment for new
about fire-related hazards to other host employees; and
employers. When a vessel owner or op- (3) When the actions the employee
erator (temporarily) becomes a host must take under the plan change be-
shipyard employer by directing the cause of a change in duties or a change
work of ships crews on repair or modi- in the plan.
fication of the vessel or by hiring other (d) Additional employer requirements.
contractors directly, the vessel owner The employer also must:
or operator must also comply with (1) Keep the plan accessible to em-
these provisions for host employers. ployees, employee representatives, and
(2) Contract employer responsibilities. OSHA;
The contract employers responsibil- (2) Review and update the plan when-
ities are to: ever necessary, but at least annually;
(i) Make sure that the host employer (3) Document that affected employ-
ees have been informed about the plan
knows about the fire-related hazards
as required by paragraph (c) of this sec-
associated with the contract employ-
tion; and
ers work and what the contract em-
(4) Ensure any outside fire response
ployer is doing to address them; and
organization that the employer expects
(ii) Advise the host employer of any to respond to fires at the employers
previously unidentified fire-related worksite has been given a copy of the
hazards that the contract employer current plan.
identifies at the worksite. (e) Contract employers. Contract em-
ployers in shipyard employment must
1915.502 Fire safety plan.
have a fire safety plan for their em-
(a) Employer responsibilities. The employees, and this plan must comply
ployer must develop and implement a with the host employers fire safety
written fire safety plan that covers all plan.
the actions that employers and em-
ployees must take to ensure employee 1915.503 Precautions for hot work.
safety in the event of a fire. (See Ap- (a) General requirements(1) Des-
pendix A to this subpart for a Model ignated Areas. The employer may des-
Fire Safety Plan.) ignate areas for hot work in sites such
92
as vessels, vessel sections, fabricating 1915.504 Fire watches.

shops, and subassembly areas that are
(a) Written fire watch policy. The em-
free of fire hazards. ployer must create and keep current a
(2) Non-designated Areas. (i) Before written policy that specifies the fol-
authorizing hot work in a non-des- lowing requirements for employees per-
ignated area, the employer must vis- forming fire watch in the workplace:
ually inspect the area where hot work (1) The training employees must be
is to be performed, including adjacent given ( 1915.508(c) contains detailed
spaces, to ensure the area is free of fire fire watch training requirements);
hazards, unless a Marine Chemists cer- (2) The duties employees are to per-
tificate or Shipyard Competent Per- form;
sons log is used for authorization. (3) The equipment employees must be
(ii) The employer shall authorize em- given; and
ployees to perform hot work only in (4) The personal protective equip-
areas that are free of fire hazards, or ment (PPE) that must be made avail-
that have been controlled by physical able and worn as required by 29 CFR
isolation, fire watches, or other posi- Part 1915, Subpart I.
tive means. (b) Posting fire watches. The employer
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a)(2): The require- must post a fire watch if during hot
ments of paragraph (a)(2) apply to all hot work any of the following conditions
work operations in shipyard employment ex- are present:
cept those covered by 1915.14. (1) Slag, weld splatter, or sparks
might pass through an opening and
(b) Specific requirements(1) Maintain-
cause a fire;
ing fire hazard-free conditions. The em-
(2) Fire-resistant guards or curtains
ployer must keep all hot work areas
are not used to prevent ignition of
free of new hazards that may cause or
combustible materials on or near
contribute to the spread of fire. Unex-
decks, bulkheads, partitions, or
pected energizing and energy release
overheads;
are covered by 29 CFR 1915.181, Subpart
(3) Combustible material closer than
L. Exposure to toxic and hazardous
35 ft. (10.7m) to the hot work in either
substances is covered in 29 CFR
the horizontal or vertical direction
1915.1000 through 1915.1450, subpart Z.
cannot be removed, protected with
(2) Fuel gas and oxygen supply lines flame-proof covers, or otherwise shield-
and torches. The employer must make ed with metal or fire-resistant guards
sure that: or curtains;
(i) No unattended fuel gas and oxygen (4) The hot work is carried out on or
hose lines or torches are in confined near insulation, combustible coatings,
spaces; or sandwich-type construction that
(ii) No unattended charged fuel gas cannot be shielded, cut back, or re-
and oxygen hose lines or torches are in moved, or in a space within a sandwich
enclosed spaces for more than 15 min- type construction that cannot be
utes; and inerted;
(iii) All fuel gas and oxygen hose (5) Combustible materials adjacent to
lines are disconnected at the supply the opposite sides of bulkheads, decks,
manifold at the end of each shift; overheads, metal partitions, or sand-
(iv) All disconnected fuel gas and ox- wich-type construction may be ignited
ygen hose lines are rolled back to the by conduction or radiation;
supply manifold or to open air to dis- (6) The hot work is close enough to
connect the torch; or extended fuel gas cause ignition through heat radiation
and oxygen hose lines are not recon- or conduction on the following:
nected at the supply manifold unless (i) Insulated pipes, bulkheads, decks,
the lines are given a positive means of partitions, or overheads; or
identification when they were first (ii) Combustible materials and/or
connected and the lines are tested coatings;
using a drop test or other positive (7) The work is close enough to un-
means to ensure the integrity of fuel protected combustible pipe or cable
gas and oxygen burning system. runs to cause ignition; or
93
(8) A Marine Chemist, a Coast Guard- (b) Required written policy informa-
authorized person, or a shipyard Com- tion(1) Internal fire response. If an in-
petent Person, as defined in 29 CFR ternal fire response is to be used, the
Part 1915, Subpart B, requires that a employer must include the following
fire watch be posted. information in the employers written
(c) Assigning employees to fire watch policy:
duty. (1) The employer must not assign (i) The basic structure of the fire re-
other duties to a fire watch while the sponse organization;
hot work is in progress. (ii) The number of trained fire re-
(2) Employers must ensure that em- sponse employees;
ployees assigned to fire watch duty: (iii) The fire response functions that
(i) Have a clear view of and imme- may need to be carried out;
diate access to all areas included in the (iv) The minimum number of fire re-
fire watch; sponse employees necessary, the num-
(ii) Are able to communicate with ber and types of apparatuses, and a de-
workers exposed to hot work; scription of the fire suppression oper-
(iii) Are authorized to stop work if ations established by written standard
necessary and restore safe conditions operating procedures for each type of
within the hot work area; fire response at the employers facility;
(iv) Remain in the hot work area for (v) The type, amount, and frequency
at least 30 minutes after completion of of training that must be given to fire
the hot work, unless the employer or response employees; and
its representative surveys the exposed (vi) The procedures for using protec-
area and makes a determination that tive clothing and equipment.
there is no further fire hazard; (2) Outside fire response. If an outside
(v) Are trained to detect fires that fire response organization is used, the
occur in areas exposed to the hot work; employer must include the following
(vi) Attempt to extinguish any incip- information in the written policy:
ient stage fires in the hot work area (i) The types of fire suppression inci-
that are within the capability of avail- dents to which the fire response organi-
able equipment and within the fire zation is expected to respond at the
watchs training qualifications, as de- employers facility or worksite;
fined in 1915.508; (ii) The liaisons between the em-
(vii) Alert employees of any fire be- ployer and the outside fire response or-
yond the incipient stage; and ganizations; and
(viii) If unable to extinguish fire in (iii) A plan for fire response functions
the areas exposed to the hot work, ac- that:
tivate the alarm. (A) Addresses procedures for obtain-
(3) The employer must ensure that ing assistance from the outside fire re-
employees assigned to fire watch are sponse organization;
physically capable of performing these (B) Familiarizes the outside fire re-
duties. sponse organization with the layout of
the employers facility or worksite, in-
1915.505 Fire response. cluding access routes to controlled
(a) Employer responsibilities. The em- areas, and site-specific operations, oc-
ployer must: cupancies, vessels or vessel sections,
(1) Decide what type of response will and hazards; and,
be provided and who will provide it; (C) Sets forth how hose and coupling
and connection threads are to be made
(2) Create, maintain, and update a compatible and includes where the
written policy that: adapter couplings are kept; or
(i) Describes the internal and outside (D) States that the employer will not
fire response organizations that the allow the use of incompatible hose con-
employer will use; and nections.
(ii) Defines what evacuation proce- (3) A combination of internal and out-
dures employees must follow, if the side fire response. If a combination of in-
employer chooses to require a total or ternal and outside fire response is to be
partial evacuation of the worksite at used, the employer must include the
the time of a fire. following information, in addition to
94
the requirements in paragraphs (b)(1) forming their duties, meet the medical
and (2) of this section, in the written requirements of 1915.154;
policy: (3) Each fire response employee has
(i) The basic organizational structure an annual medical examination; and
of the combined fire response; (4) The medical records of fire re-
(ii) The number of combined trained sponse employees are kept in accord-
fire responders; ance with 1915.1020.
(iii) The fire response functions that (d) Organization of internal fire re-
may need to be carried out; sponse functions. The employer must:
(iv) The minimum number of fire re- (1) Organize fire response functions
sponse employees necessary, the num- to ensure enough resources to conduct
ber and types of apparatuses, and a de- emergency operations safely;
scription of the fire suppression oper- (2) Establish lines of authority and
ations established by written standard assign responsibilities to ensure that
operating procedures for each par- the components of the internal fire re-
ticular type of fire response at the sponse are accomplished;
worksite; and (3) Set up an incident management
(v) The type, amount, and frequency system to coordinate and direct fire re-
of joint training with outside fire response functions, including:
sponse organizations if given to fire re-
(i) Specific fire emergency respon-
sponse employees.
sibilities;
(4) Employee evacuation. The employer
(ii) Accountability for all fire re-
must include the following information
sponse employees participating in an
in the employers written policy:
emergency operation; and
(i) Emergency escape procedures;
(iii) Resources offered by outside or-
(ii) Procedures to be followed by em-
ganizations; and
ployees who may remain longer at the
worksite to perform critical shipyard (4) Provide the information required
employment operations during the in this paragraph (d) to the outside fire
evacuation; response organization to be used.
(iii) Procedures to account for all (e) Personal protective clothing and
employees after emergency evacuation equipment for fire response employees(1)
is completed; General requirements. The employer
(iv) The preferred means of reporting must:
fires and other emergencies; and (i) Supply to all fire response em-
(v) Names or job titles of the employ- ployees, at no cost, the appropriate
ees or departments to be contacted for personal protective clothing and equip-
further information or explanation of ment they may need to perform ex-
duties. pected duties; and
(5) Rescue and emergency response. The (ii) Ensure that fire response employ-
employer must include the following ees wear the appropriate personal pro-
information in the employers written tective clothing and use the equip-
policy: ment, when necessary, to protect them
(i) A description of the emergency from hazardous exposures.
rescue procedures; and (2) Thermal stability and flame resist-
(ii) Names or job titles of the em- ance. The employer must:
ployees who are assigned to perform (i) Ensure that each fire response em-
them. ployee exposed to the hazards of flame
(c) Medical requirements for shipyard does not wear clothing that could in-
fire response employees. The employer crease the extent of injury that could
must ensure that: be sustained; and
(1) All fire response employees re- (ii) Prohibit wearing clothing made
ceive medical examinations to assure from acetate, nylon, or polyester, ei-
that they are physically and medically ther alone or in blends, unless it can be
fit for the duties they are expected to shown that:
perform; (A) The fabric will withstand the
(2) Fire response employees, who are flammability hazard that may be en-
required to wear respirators in per- countered; or
95
(B) The clothing will be worn in such exposed to the hazards of proximity
a way to eliminate the flammability firefighting, appropriate protective
hazard that may be encountered. proximity clothing meets the applica-
(3) Respiratory protection. The em- ble recommendations in NFPA 1976
ployer must: 2000 Standard on Protective Ensemble
(i) Provide self-contained breathing for Proximity Fire Fighting (incor-
apparatus (SCBA) to all fire response porated by reference, see 1915.5).
employees involved in an emergency (6) Personal Alert Safety System (PASS)
operation in an atmosphere that is im- devices. The employer must:
mediately dangerous to life or health (i) Provide each fire response em-
(IDLH), potentially IDLH, or unknown; ployee involved in firefighting oper-
(ii) Provide SCBA to fire response ations with a PASS device; and
employees performing emergency oper- (ii) Ensure that each PASS device
ations during hazardous chemical meets the recommendations in NFPA
emergencies that will expose them to 19821998 Standard on Personal Alert
known hazardous chemicals in vapor Safety Systems (PASS), (incorporated
form or to unknown chemicals; by reference, see 1915.5).
(iii) Provide fire response employees (7) Life safety ropes, body harnesses,
who perform or support emergency op- and hardware. The employer must en-
erations that will expose them to haz- sure that:
ardous chemicals in liquid form either: (i) All life safety ropes, body har-
(A) SCBA, or nesses, and hardware used by fire re-
(B) Respiratory protective devices sponse employees for emergency oper-
certified by the National Institute for ations meet the applicable rec-
Occupational Safety and Health ommendations in NFPA 19832001,
(NIOSH) under 42 CFR Part 84 as suit- Standard on Fire Service Life Safety
able for the specific chemical environ- Rope and System Components (incor-
ment; porated by reference, see 1915.5);
(iv) Ensure that additional outside (ii) Fire response employees use only
air supplies used in conjunction with Class I body harnesses to attach to lad-
SCBA result in positive pressure sys- ders and aerial devices; and
tems that are certified by NIOSH under (iii) Fire response employees use only
42 CFR Part 84; Class II and Class III body harnesses
(v) Provide only SCBA that meet the for fall arrest and rappelling oper-
requirements of NFPA 19812002 Stand- ations.
ard on Open-Circuit Self-Contained (f) Equipment maintenance(1) Per-
Breathing Apparatus for Fire and sonal protective equipment. The em-
Emergency Services (incorporated by ployer must inspect and maintain per-
reference, see 1915.5); and sonal protective equipment used to
(vi) Ensure that the respiratory pro- protect fire response employees to en-
tection program and all respiratory sure that it provides the intended pro-
protection equipment comply with tection.
1915.154. (2) Fire response equipment. The em-
(4) Interior structural firefighting oper- ployer must:
ations. The employer must: (i) Keep fire response equipment in a
(i) Supply at no cost to all fire re- state of readiness;
sponse employees exposed to the haz- (ii) Standardize all fire hose coupling
ards of shipyard fire response, a hel- and connection threads throughout the
met, gloves, footwear, and protective facility and on vessels and vessel sec-
hoods, and either a protective coat and tions by providing the same type of
trousers or a protective coverall; and hose coupling and connection threads
(ii) Ensure that this equipment meets for hoses of the same or similar diame-
the applicable recommendations in ter; and
NFPA 19712000 Standard on Protective (iii) Ensure that either all fire hoses
Ensemble for Structural Fire Fighting and coupling connection threads are
(incorporated by reference, see 1915.5). the same within a facility or vessel or
(5) Proximity firefighting operations. vessel section as those used by the out-
The employer must provide, at no cost, side fire response organization, or sup-
to all fire response employees who are ply suitable adapter couplings if such
96
an organization is expected to use the ployer must evacuate all employees

fire response equipment within a facil- from the space and assure that no em-
ity or vessel or vessel section. ployees remain in the space during the
[69 FR 55702, Sept. 15, 2004, as amended at 71
discharge. The employer must retest
FR 60847, Oct. 17, 2006] the atmosphere in accordance with
1915.12 to ensure that the oxygen lev-
1915.506 Hazards of fixed extin- els are safe for employees to enter.
guishing systems on board vessels (2) When testing a fixed extin-
and vessel sections. guishing system does not involve a
(a) Employer responsibilities. The em- total discharge of the systems extin-
ployer must comply with the provi- guishing medium, the employer must
sions of this section whenever employ- make sure that the systems extin-
ees are exposed to fixed extinguishing guishing medium is physically isolated
systems that could create a dangerous and that all employees not directly in-
atmosphere when activated in vessels volved in the testing are evacuated
and vessel sections, regardless of geo- from the protected space.
graphic location. (f) Conducting system maintenance. Be-
(b) Requirements for automatic and fore conducting maintenance on a fixed
manual systems. Before any work is extinguishing system, the employer
done in a space equipped with fixed ex- must ensure that the system is phys-
tinguishing systems, the employer ically isolated.
must either: (g) Using fixed manual extinguishing
(1) Physically isolate the systems or systems for fire protection. If fixed man-
use other positive means to prevent the ual extinguishing systems are used to
systems discharge; or provide fire protection for spaces in
(2) Ensure employees are trained to which the employees are working, the
recognize: employer must ensure that:
(i) Systems discharge and evacu- (1) Only authorized employees are al-
ation alarms and the appropriate es- lowed to activate the system;
cape routes; and (2) Authorized employees are trained
(ii) Hazards associated with the ex- to operate and activate the systems;
tinguishing systems and agents includ- and
ing the dangers of disturbing system (3) All employees are evacuated from
components and equipment such as pip- the protected spaces, and accounted
ing, cables, linkages, detection devices, for, before the fixed manual extin-
activation devices, and alarm devices. guishing system is activated.
(c) Sea and dock trials. During trials,
the employer must ensure that all sys- 1915.507 Land-side fire protection
tems shall remain operational. systems.
(d) Doors and hatches. The employer (a) Employer responsibilities. The em-
must: ployer must ensure all fixed and port-
(1) Take protective measures to enable fire protection systems needed to
sure that all doors, hatches, scuttles, meet an OSHA standard for employee
and other exit openings remain work- safety or employee protection from fire
ing and accessible for escape in the hazards in land-side facilities, includ-
event the systems are activated; and ing, but not limited to, buildings,
(2) Ensure that all inward opening structures, and equipment, meet the
doors, hatches, scuttles, and other po- requirements of this section.
tential barriers to safe exit are re- (b) Portable fire extinguishers and hose
moved, locked open, braced, or other- systems. (1) The employer must select,
wise secured so that they remain open install, inspect, maintain, and test all
and accessible for escape if systems portable fire extinguishers according
activation could result in a positive to NFPA 102002 Standard for Portable
pressure in the protected spaces suffi- Fire Extinguishers (incorporated by
cient to impede escape. reference, see 1915.5).
(e) Testing the system. (1) When test- (2) The employer is permitted to use
ing a fixed extinguishing system in- Class II or Class III hose systems, in
volves a total discharge of extin- accordance with NFPA 102002 (incor-
guishing medium into a space, the em- porated by reference, see 1915.5), as
97
portable fire extinguishers if the em- (2) Automatic sprinkler systems ac-
ployer selects, installs, inspects, main- cording to NFPA 252002 Standard for
tains, and tests those systems accord- the Inspection, Testing, and Mainte-
ing to the specific recommendations in nance of Water-based Fire Protection
NFPA 142003 Standard for the Instal- Systems, (incorporated by reference,
lation of Standpipe and Hose Systems see 1915.5), and either (i) NFPA 132002
(incorporated by reference, see 1915.5). Standard for the Installation of Sprin-
(c) General requirements for fixed extin- kler Systems (incorporated by ref-
guishing systems. The employer must: erence, see 1915.5), or (ii) NFPA 750
(1) Ensure that any fixed extin- 2003 Standard on Water Mist Fire Pro-
guishing system component or extin- tection Systems (incorporated by ref-
guishing agent is approved by an OSHA erence, see 1915.5);
Nationally Recognized Testing Labora- (3) Fixed extinguishing systems that
tory, meeting the requirements of 29 use water or foam as the extinguishing
CFR 1910.7, for use on the specific haz- agent according to NFPA 152001
ards the employer expects it to control Standard for Water Spray Fixed Sys-
or extinguish; tems for Fire Protection (incorporated
(2) Notify employees and take the by reference, see 1915.5) and NFPA 11
necessary precautions to ensure em- 2005 Standard for Low-, Medium-, and
ployees are safe from fire if for any High-Expansion Foam (incorporated by
reason a fire extinguishing system reference, see 1915.5);
stops working, until the system is (4) Fixed extinguishing systems using
working again; dry chemical as the extinguishing
(3) Ensure all repairs to fire extin- agent according to NFPA 172002
guishing systems and equipment are Standard for Dry Chemical Extin-
done by a qualified technician or me- guishing Systems (incorporated by ref-
chanic; erence, see 1915.5); and
(4) Provide and ensure employees use (5) Fixed extinguishing systems using
proper personal protective equipment gas as the extinguishing agent accord-
when entering discharge areas in which ing to NFPA 122005 Standard on Car-
the atmosphere remains hazardous to bon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems
employee safety or health, or provide (incorporated by reference, see 1915.5);
safeguards to prevent employees from NFPA 12A2004 Standard on Halon 1301
entering those areas. See 1915.12 for Fire Extinguishing Systems (incor-
additional requirements applicable to porated by reference, see 1915.5); and
safe entry into spaces containing dan- NFPA 20012004 Standard on Clean
gerous atmospheres; Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems (in-
(5) Post hazard warning or caution corporated by reference, see 1915.5).
signs at both the entrance to and in-
side of areas protected by fixed extin- [69 FR 55702, Sept. 15, 2004, as amended at 71
FR 60847, Oct. 17, 2006]
guishing systems that use extin-
guishing agents in concentrations 1915.508 Training.
known to be hazardous to employee
safety or health; and (a) The employer must train employ-
(6) Select, install, inspect, maintain, ees in the applicable requirements of
and test all automatic fire detection this section:
systems and emergency alarms accord- (1) Within 90 days of December 14,
ing to NFPA 722002 National Fire 2004, for employees currently working;
Alarm Code (incorporated by reference, (2) Upon initial assignment for new
see 1915.5) employees; and
(d) Fixed extinguishing systems. The (3) When necessary to maintain pro-
employer must select, install, main- ficiency for employees previously
tain, inspect, and test all fixed systems trained.
required by OSHA as follows: (b) Employee training. The employer
(1) Standpipe and hose systems ac- must ensure that all employees are
cording to NFPA 142003 Standard for trained on:
the Installation of Standpipe and Hose (1) The emergency alarm signals, in-
Systems (incorporated by reference, cluding system discharge alarms and
see 1915.5); employee evacuation alarms; and
98
(2) The primary and secondary evacu- (8) Conduct any training that in-
ation routes that employees must use volves live fire response exercises in
in the event of a fire in the workplace. accordance with NFPA 14032002 Stand-
While all vessels and vessel sections ard on Live Fire Training Evolutions
must have a primary evacuation route, (incorporated by reference, see 1915.5);
a secondary evacuation route is not re- (9) Conduct semi-annual drills ac-
quired when impracticable. cording to the employers written pro-
(c) Additional training requirements for cedures for fire response employees
employees expected to fight incipient stage that cover site-specific operations, oc-
fires. The employer must ensure that cupancies, buildings, vessels and vessel
employees expected to fight incipient sections, and fire-related hazards; and
stage fires are trained on the following: (10) Prohibit the use of smoke gener-
(1) The general principles of using ating devices that create a dangerous
fire extinguishers or hose lines, the atmosphere in training exercises.
hazards involved with incipient fire- (e) Additional training requirements for
fighting, and the procedures used to re-
fire watch duty. (1) The employer must
duce these hazards;
ensure that each fire watch is trained
(2) The hazards associated with fixed
by an instructor with adequate fire
and portable fire protection systems
watch knowledge and experience to
that employees may use or to which
cover the items as follows:
they may be exposed during discharge
of those systems; and (i) Before being assigned to fire
(3) The activation and operation of watch duty;
fixed and portable fire protection sys- (ii) Whenever there is a change in op-
tems that the employer expects em- erations that presents a new or dif-
ployees to use in the workplace. ferent hazard;
(d) Additional training requirements for (iii) Whenever the employer has rea-
shipyard employees designated for fire re- son to believe that the fire watchs
sponse. The employer must: knowledge, skills, or understanding of
(1) Have a written training policy the training previously provided is in-
stating that fire response employees adequate; and
must be trained and capable of car- (iv) Annually.
rying out their duties and responsibil- (2) The employer must ensure that
ities at all times; each employee who stands fire watch
(2) Keep written standard operating duty is trained in:
procedures that address anticipated (i) The basics of fire behavior, the
emergency operations and update these different classes of fire and of extin-
procedures as necessary; guishing agents, the stages of fire, and
(3) Review fire response employee methods for extinguishing fires;
training programs and hands-on ses- (ii) Extinguishing live fire scenarios
sions before they are used in fire re- whenever allowed by local and federal
sponse training to make sure that fire law;
response employees are protected from (iii) The recognition of the adverse
hazards associated with fire response health effects that may be caused by
training; exposure to fire;
(4) Provide training for fire response
(iv) The physical characteristics of
employees that ensures they are capa-
the hot work area;
ble of carrying out their duties and re-
sponsibilities under the employers (v) The hazards associated with fire
standard operating procedures; watch duties;
(5) Train new fire response employees (vi) The personal protective equip-
before they engage in emergency oper- ment (PPE) needed to perform fire
ations; watch duties safely;
(6) At least quarterly, provide train- (vii) The use of PPE;
ing on the written operating proce- (viii) The selection and use of any
dures to fire response employees who fire extinguishers and fire hoses likely
are expected to fight fires; to be used by a fire watch in the work
(7) Use qualified instructors to con- area;
duct the training; (ix) The location and use of barriers;
99
(x) The means of communication des- Contract employeran employer, such

ignated by the employer for fire watch- as a painter, joiner, carpenter, or scaf-
es; folding sub-contractor, who performs
(xi) When and how to start fire alarm work under contract to the host em-
procedures; and ployer or to another employer under
(xii) The employers evacuation plan. contract to the host employer at the
(3) The employer must ensure that host employers worksite. This ex-
each fire watch is trained to alert oth- cludes employers who provide inci-
ers to exit the space whenever: dental services that do not influence
(i) The fire watch perceives an unsafe shipyard employment (such as mail de-
condition; livery or office supply services).
(ii) The fire watch perceives that a Dangerous atmospherean atmosphere
worker performing hot work is in dan- that may expose employees to the risk
ger; of death, incapacitation, injury, acute
(iii) The employer or a representative illness, or impairment of ability to
of the employer orders an evacuation; self-rescue (i.e., escape unaided from a
or confined or enclosed space).
(iv) An evacuation signal, such as an Designated areaan area established
alarm, is activated. for hot work after an inspection that is
(f) Records. The employer must keep free of fire hazards.
records that demonstrate that employ-
Drop Testa method utilizing gauges
ees have been trained as required by
to ensure the integrity of an oxygen
paragraphs (a) through (e) of this sec-
fuel gas burning system. The method
tion.
requires that the burning torch is in-
(1) The employer must ensure that
stalled to one end of the oxygen and
the records include the employees
fuel gas lines and then the gauges are
name; the trainers name; the type of
attached to the other end of the hoses.
training; and the date(s) on which the
The manifold or cylinder supply valve
training took place.
is opened and the system is pressur-
(2) The employer must keep each
training record for one year from the ized. The manifold or cylinder supply
time it was made or until it is replaced valve is then closed and the gauges are
with a new training record, whichever watched for at least sixty (60) seconds.
is shorter, and make it available for in- Any drop in pressure indicates a leak.
spection and copying by OSHA on re- Emergency operationsactivities per-
quest. formed by fire response organizations
that are related to: rescue, fire sup-
1915.509 Definitions applicable to pression, emergency medical care, and
this subpart. special operations or activities that in-
Alarma signal or message from a clude responding to the scene of an in-
person or device that indicates that cident and all activities performed at
there is a fire, medical emergency, or that scene.
other situation that requires emer- Fire hazarda condition or material
gency response or evacuation. At some that may start or contribute to the
shipyards, this may be called an inci- spread of fire.
dent or a call for service. Fire protectionmethods of providing
Alarm systema system that warns fire prevention, response, detection,
employees at the worksite of danger. control, extinguishment, and engineer-
Body harnessa system of straps that ing.
may be secured about the employee in Fire responsethe activity taken by
a manner that will distribute the fall the employer at the time of an emer-
arrest forces over at least the thighs, gency incident involving a fire at the
shoulders, chest, and pelvis, with worksite, including fire suppression ac-
means for attaching it to other compo- tivities carried out by internal or ex-
nents of a personal fall arrest system. ternal resources or a combination of
Class II standpipe systema 112 inch both, or total or partial employee evac-
(3.8 cm) hose system which provides a uation of the area exposed to the fire.
means for the control or extinguish- Fire response employeea shipyard
ment of incipient stage fires. employee who carries out the duties
100
and responsibilities of shipyard fire- Inertingthe displacement of the at-

fighting in accordance with the fire mosphere in a permit space by non-
safety plan. combustible gas (such as nitrogen) to
Fire response organizationan orga- such an extent that the resulting at-
nized group knowledgeable, trained, mosphere is noncombustible. This pro-
and skilled in shipyard firefighting op- cedure produces an IDLH oxygen-defi-
erations that responds to shipyard fire cient atmosphere.
emergencies, including: fire brigades, Interior structural firefighting oper-
shipyard fire departments, private or ationsthe physical activity of fire re-
contractual fire departments, and mu- sponse, rescue, or both involving a fire
nicipal fire departments.
beyond the incipient stage inside of
Fire suppressionthe activities in-
buildings, enclosed structures, vessels,
volved in controlling and extinguishing
fires. and vessel sections.
Fire watchthe activity of observing Multi-employer workplacea work-
and responding to the fire hazards asso- place where there is a host employer
ciated with hot work in shipyard em- and at least one contract employer.
ployment and the employees des- Personal Alert Safety System (PASS)a
ignated to do so. device that sounds a loud signal if the
Fixed extinguishing systema perma- wearer becomes immobilized or is mo-
nently installed fire protection system tionless for 30 seconds or more.
that either extinguishes or controls Physical isolationthe elimination of
fire occurring in the space it protects. a fire hazard by removing the hazard
Flammable liquidany liquid having a from the work area (at least 35 feet for
flashpoint below 100 F (37.8 C), except combustibles), by covering or shielding
any mixture having components with the hazard with a fire-resistant mate-
flashpoints of 100 F (37.8 C) or higher, rial, or physically preventing the haz-
the total of which make up 99 percent ard from entering the work area.
or more of the total volume of the mix- Physically isolatedpositive isolation
ture.
of the supply from the distribution pip-
Hazardous substancea substance
ing of a fixed extinguishing system. Ex-
likely to cause injury by reason of
being explosive, flammable, poisonous, amples of ways to physically isolate in-
corrosive, oxidizing, an irritant, or oth- clude: removing a spool piece and in-
erwise harmful. stalling a blank flange; providing a
Hose systemsfire protection systems double block and bleed valve system;
consisting of a water supply, approved or completely disconnecting valves and
fire hose, and a means to control the piping from all cylinders or other pres-
flow of water at the output end of the sure vessels containing extinguishing
hose. agents.
Host employeran employer who is in Protected spaceany space into which
charge of coordinating work or who a fixed extinguishing system can dis-
hires other employers to perform work charge.
at a multi-employer workplace. Proximity firefightingspecialized
Incident management systema system fire-fighting operations that require
that defines the roles and responsibil- specialized thermal protection and
ities to be assumed by personnel and may include the activities of rescue,
the operating procedures to be used in fire suppression, and property con-
the management and direction of emer- servation at incidents involving fires
gency operations; the system is also re- producing very high levels of conduc-
ferred to as an incident command sys- tive, convective, and radiant heat such
tem (ICS).
as aircraft fires, bulk flammable gas
Incipient stage firea fire, in the ini-
fires, and bulk flammable liquid fires.
tial or beginning stage, which can be
controlled or extinguished by portable Proximity firefighting operations usu-
fire extinguishers, Class II standpipe or ally are exterior operations but may be
small hose systems without the need combined with structural firefighting
for protective clothing or breathing ap- operations. Proximity firefighting is
paratus. not entry firefighting.
101
Pt. 1915, Subpt. P, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7107 Edition)
Qualified instructora person with D. Potential ignition sources for fires and
specific knowledge, training, and expe- how to control them.
rience in fire response or fire watch ac- E. Types of fire protection equipment and
systems that can control a fire.
tivities to cover the material found in
F. The level of firefighting capability
1915.508(b) or (c). present in the facility, vessel, or vessel sec-
Rescuelocating endangered persons tion.
at an emergency incident, removing G. Description of the personnel responsible
those persons from danger, treating the for maintaining equipment, alarms, and sys-
injured, and transporting the injured tems that are installed to prevent or control
to an appropriate health care facility. fire ignition sources, and to control fuel
Shipyard firefightingthe activity of source hazards.
rescue, fire suppression, and property III. ALARM SYSTEMS AND HOW TO REPORT
conservation involving buildings, en- FIRES
closed structures, vehicles, vessels, air-
A. A demonstration of alarm procedures, if
craft, or similar properties involved in more than one type exists.
a fire or emergency situation. B. The work site emergency alarm system.
Small hose systema system of hoses C. Procedures for reporting fires.
ranging in diameter from 58 (1.6 cm)
up to 112 (3.8 cm) which is for the use IV. HOW TO EVACUATE IN DIFFERENT
of employees and which provides a EMERGENCY SITUATIONS
means for the control and extinguish- A. Emergency escape procedures and route
ment of incipient stage fires. assignments.
Standpipea fixed fire protection sys- B. Procedures to account for all employees
tem consisting of piping and hose con- after completing an emergency evacuation.
C. What type of evacuation is needed and
nections used to supply water to ap-
what the employees role is in carrying out
proved hose lines or sprinkler systems. the plan.
The hose may or may not be connected D. Helping physically impaired employees.
to the system.
V. EMPLOYEE AWARENESS
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART P TO PART Names, job titles, or departments of indi-
1915MODEL FIRE SAFETY PLAN viduals who can be contacted for further in-
(NON-MANDATORY) formation about this plan.
MODEL FIRE SAFETY PLAN
Subparts QY [Reserved]
NOTE: This appendix is non-mandatory and
provides guidance to assist employers in es-
tablishing a Fire Safety Plan as required in Subpart ZToxic and Hazardous
1915.502. Substances
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOURCE: 58 FR 35514, July 1, 1993, unless
I. Purpose. otherwise noted.
II. Work site fire hazards and how to prop-
erly control them. 1915.1000 Air contaminants.
III. Alarm systems and how to report fires.
IV. How to evacuate in different emergency Wherever this section applies, an
situations. employeess exposure to any substance
V. Employee awareness. listed in Table ZShipyards of this
section shall be limited in accordance
I. PURPOSE
with the requirements of the following
The purpose of this fire safety plan is to in- paragraphs of this section.
form our employees of how we will control (a)(1) Substances with limits preceded
and reduce the possibility of fire in the by CCeiling values. An employees
workplace and to specify what equipment
exposure to any substance in Table Z
employees may use in case of fire.
Shipyards, the exposure limit of which
II. WORK SITE FIRE HAZARDS AND HOW TO is preceded by a C, shall at no time
PROPERLY CONTROL THEM exceed the exposure limit given for
A. Measures to contain fires. that substance. If instantaneous moni-
B. Teaching selected employees how to use toring is not feasible, then the ceiling
fire protection equipment. shall be assessed as a 15-minute time
C. What to do if you discover a fire. weighted average exposure which shall
102
not be exceeded at any time over a yards. Assume that an employee is sub-
working day. ject to the following exposure:
(2) Other Substances8-hour Time Two hours exposure at 150 p/m
Weighted Averages. An employees expo- Two hours exposure at 75 p/m
sure to any substance in Table Z Four hours exposure at 50 p/m
Shipyards, the exposure limit of which Substituting this information in the for-
is not preceded by a C, shall not ex- mula, we have
ceed the 8-hour Time Weighted Aver- (2150+275+450)8=81.25 p/m
age given for that substance in any 8- Since 81.25 ppm is less than 100 ppm, the 8-
hour work shift of a 40-hour work hour time weighted average limit, the expo-
week. sure is acceptable.
(b)(c) [Reserved] (2)(i) in case of a mixture of air con-
(d) Computation formula. The com- taminants an employer shall compute
putation formula which shall apply to the equivalent exposure as follows:
employee exposure to more than one
substance for which 8-hour time Em = (C1L1+C2L2)+...(CnLn)
weighted averages are listed in subpart Where:
Z of 29 CFR part 1915 in order to deter- Em is the equivalent exposure for the mix-
mine whether an employee is exposed ture.
over the regulatory limit is as follows: C is the concentration of a particular con-
(1)(i) The cumulative exposure for an taminant.
8-hour work shift shall be computed as L is the exposure limit for that substance
specified in subpart Z of 29 CFR part 1915.
follows: The value of Em shall not exceed unity (1).
E = (Ca Ta+Cb Tb+...Cn Tn)8 (ii) To illustrate the formula pre-
Where: scribed in paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this
E is the equivalent exposure for the working
section, consider the following expo-
shift. sures:
C is the concentration during any period of Actual con-
time T where the concentration remains centration of 8 8 hr. TWA
Substance
constant. hour exposure PEL (ppm)
(ppm)
T is the duration in hours of the exposure at
the concentration C. B ........................................ 500 1000
The value of E shall not exceed the 8-hour C ........................................ 45 200
D ........................................ 40 200
time weighted average specified in subpart Z
of 29 CFR part 1915 for the material involved. Substituting in the formula, we have:
Em=5001,000+45200+40200
(ii) To illustrate the formula pre- Em=0.500+0.225+0.200
Em=0.925
scribed in paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this
section, assume that Substance A has Since Em is less than unity (1), the ex-
an 8-hour time weighted average limit posure combination is within accept-
of 100 ppm noted in Table ZShip- able limits.
TABLE ZSHIPYARDS
Skin Designa-
Substance CAS No. d ppm a,* mg/m 3,b,* tion
Abate; see Temephos.

Acetaldehyde ................................................ 75070 200 360
Acetic acid .................................................... 64197 10 25
Acetic anhydride ........................................... 108247 5 20
Acetone ........................................................ 67641 1000 2400
Acetonitrile .................................................... 75058 40 70
2-Acetylaminofluorine; see 1915.1014 ...... 53963
Acetylene ...................................................... 74862 E
Acetylene dichloride; see 1,2-
Dichloroethylene.
Acetylene tetrabromide ................................ 79276 1 14
Acrolein ......................................................... 107028 0.1 0.25
Acrylamide .................................................... 79061 0.3 X
103
TABLE ZSHIPYARDSContinued
Skin Designa-
Acrylonitrile; see 1915.1045 ...................... 107131

Aldrin ............................................................ 309002 0.25 X
Allyl alcohol .................................................. 107186 2 5 X
Allyl chloride ................................................. 107051 1 3
Allyl glycidyl ether (AGE) ............................. 106923 (C)10 (C)45
Allyl propyl disulfide ...................................... 2179591 2 12
alpha-Alumina ............................................... 1344281
Total dust ....................................... 15
Respirable fraction ......................... 5
Aluminum, (as Al) Metal ............................... 7429905
Total dust ....................................... 15
Alundum; see alpha-Alumina.
4-Aminodiphenyl; see 1915.1011 .............. 92671
2-Aminoethanol; see Ethanolamine.
2-Aminopyridine ............................................ 504290 0.5 2
Ammonia ...................................................... 7664417 50 35
Ammonium sulfamate ................................... 7773060
Total dust ....................................... 15
n-Amyl acetate ............................................. 628637 100 525
sec-Amyl acetate .......................................... 626380 125 650
Aniline and homologs ................................... 62533 5 19 X
Anisidine (o-, p-isomers) .............................. 29191524 0.5 X
Antimony and compounds (as Sb) ............... 7440360 0.5
ANTU (alpha Naphthylthiourea) ................... 86884 0.3
Argon ............................................................ 7440371 E
Arsenic, inorganic compounds (as As); see
1915.1018 .............................................. 7440382
Arsenic, organic compounds (as As) ........... 7440382 0.5
Arsine ........................................................... 7784421 0.05 0.2
Asbestos; see 1915.1001.
Azinphos-methyl ........................................... 86500 0.2 X
Barium, soluble compounds (as Ba) ............ 7440393 0.5
Barium sulfate .............................................. 7727437
Total dust ....................................... 15
Benomyl ........................................................ 17804352
Total dust ....................................... 15
Benzene g; see 1915.1028 ........................ 71432
Benzidine; see 1915.1010 ......................... 92875
p-Benzoquinone; see Quinone.
Benzo(a)pyrene; see Coal tar pitch volatiles.
Benzoyl peroxide .......................................... 94360 5
Benzyl chloride ............................................. 100447 1 5
Beryllium and beryllium compounds (as Be) 7440417 0.002
Biphenyl; see Diphenyl.
Bismuth telluride, Undoped .......................... 1304821
Total dust ....................................... 15
Bisphenol A; see Diglycidyl ether.
Boron oxide .................................................. 1303862
Total dust ....................................... 15
Boron tribromide ........................................... 10294334 1 10
Boron trifluoride ............................................ 7637072 (C)1 (C)3
Bromine ........................................................ 7726956 0.1 0.7
Bromine pentafluoride .................................. 7789302 0.1 0.7
Bromoform .................................................... 75252 0.5 5 X
104
Skin Designa-
Butadiene (1,3-Butadiene); see 29 CFR

1910.1051; 29 CFR 1910.19(l) ................. 106990 1
ppm/5
ppm
STEL
Butanethiol; see Butyl mercaptan.
2-Butanone (Methyl ethyl ketone) ................ 78933 200 590
2-Butoxyethanol ............................................ 111762 50 240 X
n-Butyl-acetate ............................................. 123864 150 710
sec-Butyl acetate .......................................... 105464 200 950
tert-Butyl acetate .......................................... 540885 200 950
n-Butyl alcohol .............................................. 71363 100 300
sec-Butyl alcohol .......................................... 78922 150 450
tert-Butyl alcohol ........................................... 75650 100 300
Butylamine .................................................... 109739 (C)5 (C)15 X
tert-Butyl chromate (as CrO3); see
1915.1026 n ............................................... 1189851
n-Butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) ......................... 2426086 50 270
Butyl mercaptan ........................................... 109795 0.5 1.5
p-tert-Butyltoluene ........................................ 98511 10 60
Cadmium dust fume (as Cd); see
1915.1027 ................................................. 7440439
Calcium carbonate ....................................... 1317653
Total dust ....................................... 15
Calcium hydroxide ........................................ 1305620
Calcium hydroxide.
Total dust ....................................... 15
Calcium oxide ............................................... 1305788 5
Calcium silicate ............................................ 1344952
Total dust ....................................... 15
Calcium sulfate ............................................. 7778189
Total dust ....................................... 15
Camphor, synthetic ...................................... 76222 2
Carbaryl (Sevin) ........................................... 63252 5
Carbon black ................................................ 1333864 3.5
Carbon dioxide ............................................. 124389 5000 9000
Carbon disulfide ........................................... 75150 20 60 X
Carbon monoxide ......................................... 630080 50 55
Carbon tetrachloride ..................................... 56235 10 65 X
Cellulose ....................................................... 9004346
Total dust ....................................... 15
Chlordane ..................................................... 57749 0.5 X
Chlorinated camphene ................................. 8001352 0.5 X
Chlorinated diphenyl oxide ........................... 55720995 0.5
Chlorine ........................................................ 7782505 1 3
Chlorine trifluoride ........................................ 7790912 (C)0.1 (C)0.4
Chloroacetaldehyde ...................................... 107200 (C)1 (C)3
a-Chloroacetophenone (Phenacyl chloride) 532274 0.05 0.3
Chlorobenzene ............................................. 108907 75 350
o-Chlorobenzylidene malononitrile ............... 2698411 0.05 0.4
Chlorobromomethane ................................... 74975 200 1050
2-Chloro-1,3-butadiene; see beta-Chloro-
prene.
Chlorodiphenyl (42% Chlorine) (PCB) ......... 53469219 1 X
Chlorodiphenyl (54% Chlorine) (PCB) ......... 11097691 0.5 X
1-Chloro,2,3-epoxypropane; see
Epichlorohydrin.
105
Skin Designa-
2-Chloroethanol; see Ethylene chlorohydrin.

Chloroethylene; see Vinyl chloride.
Chloroform (Trichloromethane) .................... 67663 50 240
bis(Chloromethyl) ether; see 1915.1008 ... 542881
Chloromethyl methyl ether; see 1915.1006 107302
1-Chloro-1-nitropropane ............................... 600259 20 100
Chloropicrin .................................................. 76062 0.1 0.7
beta-Chloroprene .......................................... 126998 25 90 X
2-Chloro-6-(trichloromethyl) pyridine ............ 1929824
Total dust ....................................... 15
Chromium (II) compounds.
(as Cr) ............................................ 7440473 0.5
Chromium (III) compounds.
(as Cr) ............................................ 7440473 0.5
Chromium (VI) compounds; see
1915.1026 o.
Chromium metal and insol. salts (as Cr) ..... 7440473 1
Chrysene; see Coal tar pitch volatiles.
Clopidol ......................................................... 2971906
Total dust ....................................... 15
Coal tar pitch volatiles (benzene soluble
fraction), anthracene, BaP, phenanthrene,
acridine, chrysene, pyrene ....................... 65966932 0.2
Cobalt metal, dust, and fume (as Co) .......... 7440484 0.1
Copper .......................................................... 7440508
Fume (as Cu) ................................. 0.1
Dusts and mists (as Cu) ................ 1
Corundum; see Emery.
Cotton dust (raw) .......................................... 1
Crag herbicide (Sesone) .............................. 136787
Total dust ....................................... 15
Cresol, all isomers ........................................ 1319773 5 22 X
Crotonaldehyde ............................................ 123739; 2 6
4170303
Cumene ........................................................ 98828 50 245 X
Cyanides (as CN) ......................................... Varies with 5
Compound
Cyanogen ..................................................... 460195 10
Cyclohexane ................................................. 110827 300 1050
Cyclohexanol ................................................ 108930 50 200
Cyclohexanone ............................................. 108941 50 200
Cyclohexene ................................................. 110838 300 1015
Cyclonite ....................................................... 121824 1.5 X
Cyclopentadiene ........................................... 542927 75 200
2,4-D (Dichlorophenoxyacetic acid) ............. 94757 10
Decaborane .................................................. 17702419 0.05 0.3 X
Demeton (Systox) ......................................... 8065483 0.1 X
Diacetone alcohol (4-Hydroxy-4-methyl-2-
pentanone) ................................................ 123422 50 240
1,2-Diaminoethane; see Ethylenediamine.
Diazomethane .............................................. 334883 0.2 0.4
Diborane ....................................................... 19287457 0.1 0.1
1,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane (CBCP); see
1915.1044 .............................................. 96128
1,2-Dibromoethane; see Ethylene dibromide.
Dibutyl phosphate ......................................... 107664 1 5
Dibutyl phthalate ........................................... 84742 5
Dichloroacetylene ......................................... 7572294 (C)0.1 (C)0.4
o-Dichlorobenzene ....................................... 95501 (C)50 (C)300
106
Skin Designa-
p-Dichlorobenzene ....................................... 106467 75 450

3,3-Dichlorobenzidine; see 1915.1007 ..... 91941
Dichlorodifluoromethane ............................... 75718 1000 4950
1,3-Dichloro-5,5-dimethyl hydantoin ............. 118525 0.2
Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane (DDT) ........ 50293 1 X
1,1-Dichloroethane ....................................... 75343 100 400
1,2-Dichloroethane; see Ethylene dichloride.
1,2-Dichloroethylene ..................................... 540590 200 790
Dichloroethyl ether ....................................... 111444 (C)15 (C)90 X
Dichloromethane; see Methylene chloride.
Dichloromonofluoromethane ........................ 75434 1000 4200
1,1-Dichloro-1-nitroethane ............................ 594729 (C)10 (C)60
1,2-Dichloropropane; see Propylene dichlo-
ride.
Dichlorotetrafluoroethane ............................. 76142 1000 7000
Dichlorvos (DDVP) ....................................... 62737 1 X
Dicyclopentadienyl iron ................................ 102545
Total dust ....................................... 15
Dieldrin ......................................................... 60571 0.25 X
Diethylamine ................................................. 109897 25 75
2-Diethylaminoethanol .................................. 100378 10 50
Diethylene triamine ....................................... 111400 (C)10 (C)42 X
Diethyl ether; see Ethyl ether.
Difluorodibromomethane .............................. 75616 100 860
Diglycidyl ether (DGE) .................................. 2238075 (C)0.5 (C)2.8
Dihydroxybenzene; see Hydroquinone.
Diisobutyl ketone .......................................... 108838 50 290
Diisopropylamine .......................................... 108189 5 20 X
4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene; see
1915.1015 .............................................. 60117
Dimethoxymethane; see Methylal.
Dimethyl acetamide ...................................... 127195 10 35 X
Dimethylamine .............................................. 124403 10 18
Dimethylaminobenzene; see Xylidine.
Dimethylaniline (N,N-Dimethylaniline) .......... 121697 5 25 X
Dimethylbenzene; see Xylene.
Dimethyl-1,2-dibromo- 2,2-dichloroethyl
phosphate ................................................. 300765 3
Dimethylformamide ....................................... 68122 10 30 X
2,6-Dimethyl-4-heptanone; see Diisobutyl
ketone.
1,1-Dimethylhydrazine .................................. 57147 0.5 1 X
Dimethylphthalate ......................................... 131113 5
Dimethyl sulfate ............................................ 77783 1 5 X
Dinitrobenzene (all isomers) ........................ 1 X
(ortho) ............................................. 528290
(meta) ............................................. 99650
(para) .............................................. 100254
Dinitro-o-cresol ............................................. 534521 0.2 X
Dinitrotoluene ............................................... 25321146 1.5 X
Dioxane (Diethylene dioxide) ....................... 123911 100 360 X
Diphenyl (Biphenyl) ...................................... 92524 0.2 1
Diphenylamine .............................................. 122394 10
Diphenylmethane diisocyanate; see Meth-
ylene bisphenyl isocyanate.
Dipropylene glycol methyl ether ................... 34590948 100 600 X
Di-sec octyl phthalate (Di-(2-ethylhexyl)
phthalate) .................................................. 117817 5
Emery ........................................................... 12415348
Total dust ....................................... 15
107
Skin Designa-
Endosulfan .................................................... 115297 0.1 X

Endrin ........................................................... 72208 0.1 X
Epichlorohydrin ............................................. 106898 5 19 X
EPN .............................................................. 2104645 0.5 X
1,2-Epoxypropane; see Propylene oxide.
2,3-Epoxy-1-propanol; see Glycidol.
Ethane .......................................................... 74840 E
Ethanethiol; see Ethyl mercaptan.
Ethanolamine ................................................ 141435 3 6
2-Ethoxyethanol (Cellosolve) ....................... 110805 200 740 X
2-Ethoxyethyl acetate (Cellosolve acetate) .. 111159 100 540 X
Ethyl acetate ................................................. 141786 400 1400
Ethyl acrylate ................................................ 140885 25 100 X
Ethyl alcohol (Ethanol) ................................. 64175 1000 1900
Ethylamine .................................................... 75047 10 18
Ethyl amyl ketone (5-Methyl-3-heptanone) .. 541855 25 130
Ethyl benzene ............................................... 100414 100 435
Ethyl bromide ............................................... 74964 200 890
Ethyl butyl ketone (3-Heptanone) ................ 106354 50 230
Ethyl chloride ................................................ 75003 1000 2600
Ethyl ether .................................................... 60297 400 1200
Ethyl formate ................................................ 109944 100 300
Ethyl mercaptan ........................................... 75081 0.5 1
Ethyl silicate ................................................. 78104 100 850
Ethylene ........................................................ 74851 E
Ethylene chlorohydrin ................................... 107073 5 16 X
Ethylenediamine ........................................... 107153 10 25
Ethylene dibromide ....................................... 106934 (C)25 (C)190 X
Ethylene dichloride (1,2-Dichloroethane) ..... 107062 50 200
Ethylene glycol dinitrate ............................... 628966 (C)0.2 (C)1 X
Ethylene glycol methyl acetate; see Methyl
cellosolve acetate.
Ethyleneimine; see 1915.1012 .................. 151564
Ethylene oxide; see 1915.1047 ................. 75218
Ethylidene chloride; see 1,1-Dichloroethane.
N-Ethylmorpholine ........................................ 100743 20 94 X
Ferbam ......................................................... 14484641
Total dust ....................................... 15
Ferrovanadium dust ..................................... 12604589 1
Fibrous Glass.
Total dust ....................................... 15
Fluorides (as F) ............................................ Varies with 2.5
compound
Fluorine ......................................................... 7782414 0.1 0.2
Fluorotrichloromethane
(Trichlorofluoromethane) ........................... 75694 1000 5600
Formaldehyde; see 1915.1048 .................. 50000
Formic acid ................................................... 64186 5 9
Furfural ......................................................... 98011 5 20 X
Furfuryl alcohol ............................................. 98000 50 200
Gasoline ....................................................... 8006619 A3
Glycerin (mist) .............................................. 56815
Total dust ....................................... 15
Glycidol ......................................................... 556525 50 150
Glycol monoethyl ether; see 2-
Ethoxyethanol.
Graphite, natural, respirable dust ................. 7782425 (2) (2) (2)
Graphite, synthetic.
Total dust ....................................... 15
108
Skin Designa-
Guthion; see Azinphos methyl.

Gypsum ........................................................ 13397245
Total dust ....................................... 15
Hafnium ........................................................ 7440586 0.5
Helium .......................................................... 7440597 E
Heptachlor .................................................... 76448 0.5 X
Heptane (n-Heptane) .................................... 142825 500 2000
Hexachloroethane ........................................ 67721 1 10 X
Hexachloronaphthalene ................................ 1335871 0.2 X
n-Hexane ...................................................... 110543 500 1800
2-Hexanone (Methyl n-butyl ketone) ............ 591786 100 410
Hexone (Methyl isobutyl ketone) .................. 108101 100 410
sec-Hexyl acetate ......................................... 108849 50 300
Hydrazine ..................................................... 302012 1 1.3 X
Hydrogen ...................................................... 1333740 E
Hydrogen bromide ........................................ 10035106 3 10
Hydrogen chloride ........................................ 7647010 (C)5 (C)7
Hydrogen cyanide ........................................ 74908 10 11 X
Hydrogen fluoride (as F) .............................. 7664393 3 2
Hydrogen peroxide ....................................... 7722841 1 1.4
Hydrogen selenide (as Se) .......................... 7783075 0.05
Hydrogen sulfide .......................................... 7783064 10 15
Hydroquinone ............................................... 123319 2
Indene ........................................................... 95136 10 45
Indium and compounds (as In) .................... 7440746 0.1
Iodine ............................................................ 7553562 (C)0.1 (C)1
Iron oxide fume ............................................ 1309371 10
Iron salts (soluble) (as Fe) ........................... Varies with 1
compound
Isoamyl acetate ............................................ 123922 100 525
Isoamyl alcohol (primary and secondary) .... 123513 100 360
Isobutyl acetate ............................................ 110190 150 700
Isobutyl alcohol ............................................. 78831 100 300
Isophorone .................................................... 78591 25 140
Isopropyl acetate .......................................... 108214 250 950
Isopropyl alcohol .......................................... 67630 400 980
Isopropylamine ............................................. 75310 5 12
Isopropyl ether .............................................. 108203 500 2100
Isopropyl glycidyl ether (IGE) ....................... 4016142 50 240
Kaolin ............................................................ 1332587
Total dust ....................................... 15
Ketene .......................................................... 463514 0.5 0.9
Lead, inorganic (as Pb); see 1915.1025 ... 7439921
Limestone ..................................................... 1317653
Total dust ....................................... 15
Lindane ......................................................... 58899 0.5 X
Lithium hydride ............................................. 7580678 0.025
L.P.G. (Liquefied petroleum gas) ................. 68476857 1000 1800
Magnesite ..................................................... 546930
Total dust ....................................... 15
Magnesium oxide fume ................................ 1309484
Total particulate ............................. 15
Malathion ...................................................... 121755
Total dust ....................................... 15 X
Maleic anhydride .......................................... 108316 0.25
Manganese compounds (as Mn) ................. 7439965 (C)5
Manganese fume (as Mn) ............................ 7439965 (C)5
Marble ........................................................... 1317653
109
Skin Designa-
Total dust ....................................... 15

Mercury (aryl and inorganic)(as Hg) ............ 7439976 0.1 X
Mercury (organo) alkyl compounds (as Hg) 7439976 0.01 X
Mercury (vapor) (as Hg) ............................... 7439976 0.1 X
Mesityl oxide ................................................. 141797 25 100
Methane ........................................................ 74828 E
Methanethiol; see Methyl mercaptan.
Methoxychlor ................................................ 72435
Total dust ....................................... 15
2-Methoxyethanol (Methyl cellosolve) .......... 109864 25 80 X
2-Methoxyethyl acetate (Methyl cellosolve
acetate) ..................................................... 110496 25 120 X
Methyl acetate .............................................. 79209 200 610
Methyl acetylene (Propyne) ......................... 74997 1000 1650
Methyl acetylene-propadiene mixture
(MAPP) ..................................................... 1000 1800
Methyl acrylate ............................................. 96333 10 35 X
Methylal (Dimethoxy-methane) .................... 109875 1000 3100
Methyl alcohol .............................................. 67561 200 260
Methylamine ................................................. 74895 10 12
Methyl amyl alcohol; see Methyl isobutyl
carbinol.
Methyl n-amyl ketone ................................... 110430 100 465
Methyl bromide ............................................. 74839 (C)20 (C)80 X
Methyl butyl ketone; see 2-Hexanone.
Methyl cellosolve; see 2-Methoxyethanol.
Methyl cellosolve acetate; see 2-
Methoxyethyl acetate.
Methyl chloride ............................................. 74873 100 210
Methyl chloroform (1,1,1-Trichloroethane) ... 71556 350 1900
Methylcyclohexane ....................................... 108872 500 2000
Methylcyclohexanol ...................................... 25639423 100 470
o-Methylcyclohexanone ................................ 583608 100 460 X
Methylene chloride; see 1910.1052.
Methyl ethyl ketone (MEK); see 2-Butanone.
Methyl formate .............................................. 107313 100 250
Methyl hydrazine (Monomethyl hydrazine) .. 60344 (C)0.2 (C)0.35 X
Methyl iodide ................................................ 74884 5 28 X
Methyl isoamyl ketone .................................. 110123 100 475
Methyl isobutyl carbinol ................................ 108112 25 100 X
Methyl isobutyl ketone; see Hexone.
Methyl isocyanate ......................................... 624839 0.02 0.05 X
Methyl mercaptan ......................................... 74931 0.5 1
Methyl methacrylate ..................................... 80626 100 410 100
Methyl propyl ketone; see 2-Pentanone.
Methyl silicate ............................................... 681845 5 30
alpha-Methyl styrene .................................... 98839 (C)100 (C)480
Methylene bisphenyl isocyanate (MDI) ........ 101688 (C)0.02 (C)0.2
Mica; see Silicates.
Mineral wool.
Total dust ....................................... 15
Respirable dust .............................. 5
Molybdenum (as Mo) ................................... 7439987
Soluble compounds ....................... 5
Insoluble compounds.
Total dust .................................... 15
Monomethyl aniline ...................................... 100618 2 9 X
Monomethyl hydrazine; see Methyl hydra-
zine.
Morpholine .................................................... 110918 20 70 X
Naphtha (Coal tar) ........................................ 8030306 100 400
110
Skin Designa-
Naphthalene ................................................. 91203 10 50

alpha-Naphthylamine; see 1915.1004 ....... 134327
beta-Naphthylamine; see 1915.1009 ......... 91598
Neon ............................................................. 7440019 ......................
Nickel carbonyl (as Ni) ................................. 13463393 0.001 0.007
Nickel, metal and insoluble compounds (as
Ni) ............................................................. 7440020 1
Nickel, soluble compounds (as Ni) .............. 7440020 1
Nicotine ......................................................... 54115 0.5 X
Nitric acid ...................................................... 7697372 2 5
Nitric oxide .................................................... 10102439 25 30
p-Nitroaniline ................................................ 100016 1 6 X
Nitrobenzene ................................................ 98953 1 5 X
p-Nitrochlorobenzene ................................... 100005 1 X
4-Nitrodiphenyl; see 1915.1003 ................. 92933
Nitroethane ................................................... 79243 100 310
Nitrogen ........................................................ 7727379 E
Nitrogen dioxide ........................................... 10102440 (C)5 (C)9
Nitrogen trifluoride ........................................ 7783542 10 29
Nitroglycerin .................................................. 55630 (C)0.2 (C)2 X
Nitromethane ................................................ 75525 100 250
1-Nitropropane .............................................. 108032 25 90
2-Nitropropane .............................................. 79469 25 90
N-Nitrosodimethylamine; see 1915.1016 .. 62799
Nitrotoluene (all isomers) ............................. 5 30 X
o-isomer ......................................... 88722;
m-isomer ........................................ 99081;
p-isomer ......................................... 99990
Nitrotrichloromethane; see Chloropicrin.
Nitrous oxide ................................................ 10024972 E
Octachloronaphthalene ................................ 2234131 0.1 X
Octane .......................................................... 111659 400 1900
Oil mist, mineral ........................................... 8012951 5
Osmium tetroxide (as Os) ............................ 20816120 0.002
Oxalic acid .................................................... 144627 1
Oxygen difluoride ......................................... 7783417 0.05 0.1
Ozone ........................................................... 10028156 0.1 0.2
Paraquat, respirable dust ............................. 4685147; 0.5 X
1910425;
2074502
Parathion ...................................................... 56382 0.1
Particulates not otherwise regulated.
Total dust organic and inorganic ... 15
PCB; see Chlorodiphenyl (42% and 54%
chlorine).
Pentaborane ................................................. 19624227 0.005 0.01
Pentachloronaphthalene ............................... 1321648 0.5 X
Pentachlorophenol ........................................ 87865 0.5 X
Pentaerythritol .............................................. 115775
Total dust ....................................... 15
Pentane ........................................................ 109660 500 1500
2-Pentanone (Methyl propyl ketone) ............ 107879 200 700
Perchloroethylene (Tetrachloroethylene) ..... 127184 100 670
Perchloromethyl mercaptan ......................... 594423 0.1 0.8
Perchloryl fluoride ......................................... 7616946 3 13.5
Perlite ........................................................... 93763703
Total dust ....................................... 15
Petroleum distillates (Naphtha)(Rubber Sol-
vent) .......................................................... A3
Phenol .......................................................... 108952 5 19 X
111
Skin Designa-
p-Phenylene diamine .................................... 106503 0.1 X

Phenyl ether, vapor ...................................... 101848 1 7
Phenyl ether-biphenyl mixture, vapor .......... 1 7
Phenylethylene; see Styrene.
Phenyl glycidyl ether (PGE) ......................... 122601 10 60
Phenylhydrazine ........................................... 100630 5 22 X
Phosdrin (Mevinphos) .................................. 7786347 0.1 X
Phosgene (Carbonyl chloride) ...................... 75445 0.1 0.4
Phosphine ..................................................... 7803512 0.3 0.4
Phosphoric acid ............................................ 7664382 1
Phosphorus (yellow) ..................................... 7723140 0.1
Phosphorus pentachloride ............................ 10026138 1
Phosphorus pentasulfide .............................. 1314803 1
Phosphorus trichloride .................................. 7719122 0.5 3
Phthalic anhydride ........................................ 85449 2 12
Picloram ........................................................ 1918021
Total dust ....................................... 15
Picric acid ..................................................... 88891 0.1
Piperazine dihydrochloride ........................... 142643 X
Pindone (2-Pivalyl-1,3-indandione) .............. 83261 0.1
Plaster of Paris ............................................. 26499650
Total dust ....................................... 15
Platinum (as Pt) ............................................ 7440064
Metal ..............................................
Soluble salts ................................... 0.002
Polytetrafluoroethylene decomposition prod-
ucts ........................................................... A2
Portland cement ........................................... 65997151
Total dust ....................................... 15 10
Propargyl alcohol .......................................... 107197 1 X
beta-Propriolactone; see 1915.1013 ......... 57578
Propionic acid ............................................... 79094
n-Propyl acetate ........................................... 109604 200 840
n-Propyl alcohol ............................................ 71238 200 500
n-Propyl nitrate ............................................. 627134 25 110
Propylene dichloride ..................................... 78875 75 350
Propylene imine ............................................ 75558 2 5 X
Propylene oxide ............................................ 75569 100 240
Propyne; see Methyl acetylene.
Pyrethrum ..................................................... 8003347 5
Pyridine ......................................................... 110861 5 15
Quinone ........................................................ 106514 0.1 0.4
RDX; see Cyclonite.
Rhodium (as Rh), metal fume and insoluble
compounds ............................................... 7440166 0.1
Rhodium (as Rh), soluble compounds ......... 7440166 0.001
Ronnel .......................................................... 299843 10
Rotenone ...................................................... 83794 5
Rouge ...........................................................
Total dust ....................................... 15
Selenium compounds (as Se) ...................... 7782492 0.2
Selenium hexafluoride (as Se) ..................... 7783791 0.05 0.4
Silica, amorphous, precipitated and gel ....... 112926008 (2) 2
( ) (2)
Silica, amorphous, diatomaceous earth,
containing less than 1% crystalline silica 61790532 (2) (2) (2)
Silica, crystalline cristobalite, respirable dust 14464461 (2) (2) (2)
Silica, crystalline quartz, respirable dust ...... 14808607 (2) (2) (2)
112
Skin Designa-
Silica, crystalline tripoli (as quartz), res-

pirable dust ............................................... 1317959 (2) (2) (2)
Silica, crystalline tridymite, respirable dust .. 15468323 (2) (2) (2)
Silica, fused, respirable dust ........................ 60676860 (2) (2) (2)
Silicates (less than 1% crystalline silica).
Mica (respirable dust) .................... 12001262 (2) (2) (2)
Soapstone, total dust ..................... (2) (2) (2)
Soapstone, respirable dust ............ (2) (2) (2)
Talc (containing asbestos) ............. (3) (3) (3)
Talc (containing no asbestos), res-
pirable dust ................................. 14807966 (2) (2) (2)
Tremolite, asbestiform ................... (3) (3) (3)
Silicon ........................................................... 7440213
Total dust ....................................... 15
Silicon carbide .............................................. 409212
Total dust ....................................... 15
Silver, metal and soluble compounds (as
Ag) ............................................................ 7440224 0.01
Soapstone; see Silicates.
Sodium fluoroacetate ................................... 62748 0.05 X
Sodium hydroxide ......................................... 1310732 2
Starch ........................................................... 9005258
Total dust ....................................... 15
Stibine ........................................................... 7803523 0.1 0.5
Stoddard solvent .......................................... 8052413 200 1150
Strychnine ..................................................... 57249 0.15
Styrene ......................................................... 100425 100 420 50
Sucrose ........................................................ 57501
Total dust ....................................... 15
Sulfur dioxide ................................................ 7446095 5 13
Sulfur hexafluoride ....................................... 2551624 1000 6000
Sulfuric acid .................................................. 7664939 1
Sulfur monochloride ..................................... 10025679 1 6
Sulfur pentafluoride ...................................... 5714227 0.025 0.25
Sulfuryl fluoride ............................................. 2699798 5 20
Systox, see Demeton.
2,4,5-T (2,4,5-trichlorophenoxyacetic acid) .. 93765 10
Talc; see Silicates.
Tantalum, metal and oxide dust ................... 7440257 5
TEDP (Sulfotep) ........................................... 3689245 0.2 X
Teflon decomposition products .................... A2
Tellurium and compounds (as Te) ............... 13494809 0.1
Tellurium hexafluoride (as Te) ..................... 7783804 0.02 0.2
Temephos ..................................................... 3383968
Total dust ....................................... 15
TEPP (Tetraethyl pyrophosphate) ................ 107493 0.05 X
Terphenyls .................................................... 26140603 (C)1 (C)9
1,1,1,2-Tetrachloro-2,2-difluoroethane ......... 76119 500 4170
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloro-1,2-difluoroethane ......... 76120 500 4170
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane ............................ 79345 5 35 X
Tetrachloroethylene; see Perchloroethylene.
Tetrachloromethane; see Carbon tetra-
chloride.
Tetrachloronaphthalene ................................ 1335882 2 X
Tetraethyl lead (as Pb) ................................. 78002 0.1 X
Tetrahydrofuran ............................................ 109999 200 590
Tetramethyl lead, (as Pb) ............................. 75741 0.15 X
113
Skin Designa-
Tetramethyl succinonitrile ............................. 3333526 0.5 3 X

Tetranitromethane ........................................ 509148 1 8
Tetryl (2,4,6-Trinitrophenylmethylnitramine) 479458 1.5 X
Thallium, soluble compounds (as Tl) ........... 7440280 0.1 X
4,4-Thiobis (6-tert, Butyl-m-cresol) .............. 96695
Total dust ....................................... 15
Thiram .......................................................... 137268 5
Tin, inorganic compounds (except oxides)
(as Sn) ...................................................... 7440315 2
Tin, organic compounds (as Sn) .................. 7440315 0.1
Tin oxide (as Sn) .......................................... 21651194
Total dust ....................................... 15
Titanium dioxide ........................................... 13463677
Total dust ....................................... 15
Toluene ......................................................... 108883 200 750 100
Toluene-2,4-diisocyanate (TDI) .................... 584849 (C)0.02 (C)0.14
o-Toluidine .................................................... 95534 5 22 X
Toxaphene; see Chlorinated camphene.
Tremolite; see Silicates.
Tributyl phosphate ........................................ 126738 5
1,1,1-Trichloroethane; see Methyl chloro-
form.
1,1,2-Trichloroethane ................................... 79005 10 45 X
Trichloroethylene .......................................... 79016 100 535
Trichloromethane; see Chloroform.
Trichloronaphthalene .................................... 1321659 5 X
1,2,3-Trichloropropane ................................. 96184 50 300
1,1,2-Trichloro-1,2,2-trifluoroethane ............. 76131 1000 7600
Triethylamine ................................................ 121448 25 100
Trifluorobromomethane ................................ 75638 1000 6100
Trimethyl benzene ........................................ 25551137 25 120
2,4,6-Trinitrophenyl; see Picric acid.
2,4,6-Trinitrophenylmethylnitramine; see
Tetryl.
2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene (TNT) ........................... 118967 1.5 X
Triorthocresyl phosphate .............................. 78308 0.1
Triphenyl phosphate ..................................... 115866 3
Tungsten (as W) ........................................... 7440337
Insoluble compounds ..................... 5
Soluble compounds ....................... 1
Turpentine .................................................... 8006642 100 560
Uranium (as U) ............................................. 7440611
Soluble compounds ....................... 0.2
Insoluble compounds ..................... 0.2
Vanadium ..................................................... 1314621
Respirable dust (as V2 O5) ............ (C)0.5
Fume (as V2 O5) ............................ (C)0.1
Vegetable oil mist.
Total dust ....................................... 15
Vinyl benzene; see Styrene.
Vinyl chloride; see 1915.1017 ................... 75014
Vinyl cyanide; see Acrylonitrile.
Vinyl toluene ................................................. 25013154 100 480
Warfarin ........................................................ 81812 0.1
Xylenes (o-, m-, p-isomers) .......................... 1330207 100 435
Xylidine ......................................................... 1300738 5 25 X
Yttrium .......................................................... 7440655 1
Zinc chloride fume ........................................ 7646857 1
Zinc oxide fume ............................................ 1314132 5
114
Skin Designa-
Zinc oxide ..................................................... 1314132

Total dust ....................................... 15
Zinc stearate ................................................. 557051
Total dust ....................................... 15
Zirconium compounds (as Zr) ...................... 7440677 5
MINERAL DUSTS
Substance mppcf (j)
SILICA:
Crystalline
Quartz. Threshold Limit calculated from the formula ................................................................................ 250 (k)
%SiO2+5
Cristobalite.
Amorphous, including natural diatomaceous earth ............................................................................... 20
SILICATES (less than 1% crystalline silica)
Mica ........................................................................................................................................................ 20
Portland cement ..................................................................................................................................... 50
Soapstone .............................................................................................................................................. 20
Talc (non-asbestiform) ........................................................................................................................... 20
Talc (fibrous), use asbestos limit ........................................................................................................... --
Graphite (natural) ...................................................................................................................................... 15
Inert or Nuisance Particulates: (m) 50 (or 15 mg/m3

whichever is the smaller)
of total dust <1% SiO2
Conversion factors.
mppcf 35.3 = million particles per cubic meter = particles per c.c.
Footnotes to Table ZShipyards:

1 [Reserved]
2 See Mineral Dusts Table.
3 Use Asbestos Limit 1915.1001.
4 See 1915.1001.
* The PELs are 8-hour TWAs unless otherwise noted; a (C) designation denotes a ceiling limit. They are to
be determined from breathing-zone air samples.
a Parts of vapor or gas per million parts of contaminated air by volume at 25 C and 760 torr.
b Milligrams of substance per cubic meter of air. When entry is in this column only, the value is exact; when
listed with a ppm entry, it is approximate.
c [Reserved]
d The CAS number is for information only. Enforcement is based on the substance name. For an entry cov-
ering more than one metal compound, measured as the metal, the CAS number for the metal is givennot
CAS numbers for the individual compounds.
e f [Reserved]
g For sectors excluded from 1915.1028 the limit is 10 ppm TWA.
h Where OSHA has published a proposal for a substance but has not issued a final rule, the proposal is ref-
erenced and the existing limit is published.
i [Reserved]
j Millions of particles per cubic foot of air, based on impinger samples counted by light-field techniques.
k The percentage of crystalline silica in the formula is the amount determined from airborne samples, except
in those instances in which other methods have been shown to be applicable.
m Covers all organic and inorganic particulates not otherwise regulated. Same as Particulates Not Otherwise
Regulated.
n If the exposure limit in 1915.1026 is stayed or is otherwise not in effect, the exposure limit is a ceiling of
0.1 mg/m3.
o If the exposure limit in 1915.1026 is stayed or is otherwise not in effect, the exposure limit is 0.1 mg/m3
(as CrO3) as an 8-hour TWA.
The 1970 TLV uses letter designations instead of a numerical value as follows:
A 1 [Reserved]
115
A 2 Polytetrafluoroethylene decomposition products. Because these products decompose in part by hydrol-
ysis in alkaline solution, they can be quantitatively determined in air as fluoride to provide an index of expo-
sure. No TLV is recommended pending determination of the toxicity of the products, but air concentrations
should be minimal.
A 3 Gasoline and/or Petroleum Distillates. The composition of these materials varies greatly and thus a sin-
gle TLV for all types of these materials is no longer applicable. The content of benzene, other aromatics and
additives should be determined to arrive at the appropriate TLV.
E Simple asphyxiants. The limiting factor is the available oxygen which shall be at least 18% and be within
the requirement addressing explosion in subpart B of part 1915.
[58 FR 35514, July 1, 1993, as amended at 61 FR 56856, Nov. 4, 1996; 62 FR 1619, Jan. 10, 1997;
67 FR 44545, July 3, 2002; 71 FR 10377, Feb. 28, 2006; 71 FR 36009, June 23, 2006]
1915.1001 Asbestos. has been chemically treated and/or al-

(a) Scope and application. This section tered. For purposes of this standard,
regulates asbestos exposure in all ship- asbestos includes PACM, as defined
yard employment work as defined in 29 below.
CFR part 1915, including but not lim- Asbestos-containing material, (ACM)
ited to the following: means any material containing more
(1) Demolition or salvage of struc- than one percent asbestos.
tures, vessels, and vessel sections Assistant Secretary means the Assist-
where asbestos is present; ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa-
(2) Removal or encapsulation of ma- tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart-
terials containing asbestos; ment of Labor, or designee.
(3) Construction, alteration, repair, Authorized person means any person
maintenance, or renovation of vessels, authorized by the employer and re-
vessel sections, structures, substrates, quired by work duties to be present in
or portions thereof, that contain asbes- regulated areas.
tos; Building/facility/vessel owner is the
(4) Installation of products con- legal entity, including a lessee, which
taining asbestos; exercises control over management and
(5) Asbestos spill/emergency cleanup; record keeping functions relating to a
and building, facility, and/or vessel in
(6) Transportation, disposal, storage, which activities covered by this stand-
containment of and housekeeping ac- ard take place.
tivities involving asbestos or products Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH)
containing asbestos, on the site or lo- means one certified in the practice of
cation at which construction activities industrial hygiene by the American
are performed. Board of Industrial Hygiene.
(7) Coverage under this standard Class I asbestos work means activities
shall be based on the nature of the involving the removal of thermal sys-
work operation involving asbestos ex- tem insulation or surfacing ACM/
posure. PACM.
(8) This section does not apply to as- Class II asbestos work means activities
bestos-containing asphalt roof ce- involving the removal of ACM which is
ments, coatings and mastics. neither TSI or surfacing ACM. This in-
(b) Definitions. Aggressive method cludes, but is not limited to, the re-
means removal or disturbance of build- moval of asbestos-containing wall-
ing/vessel materials by sanding, abrad- board, floor tile and sheeting, roofing
ing, grinding, or other method that and siding shingles, and construction
breaks, crumbles, or otherwise disinte- mastics.
grates intact ACM. Class III asbestos work means repair
Amended water means water to which and maintenance operations, where
surfactant (wetting agent) has been ACM, including TSI and surfacing
added to increase the ability of the liq- ACM and PACM, is likely to be dis-
uid to penetrate ACM. turbed.
Asbestos includes chrysotile, amosite, Class IV asbestos work means mainte-
crocidolite, tremolite asbestos, nance and custodial activities during
anthophyllite asbestos, actinolite as- which employees contact but do not
bestos, and any of these minerals that disturb ACM or PACM and activities to
116
clean up dust, waste and debris result- plied with impermeable bags or con-
ing from Class I, II, and III activities. tainers for the disposal of contami-
Clean room means an uncontaminated nated protective clothing and equip-
room having facilities for the storage ment.
of employees street clothing and Fiber means a particulate form of as-
uncontaminated materials and equip- bestos, 5 micrometers or longer, with a
ment. length-to-diameter ratio of at least 3 to
Closely resemble means that the major 1.
workplace conditions which have con- Glovebag means not more than a 6060
tributed to the levels of historic asbes- inch impervious plastic bag-like enclo-
tos exposure, are no more protective sure affixed around an asbestos-con-
than conditions of the current work- taining material, with glove-like ap-
place. pendages through which material and
Competent person see qualified person. tools may be handled.
Critical barrier means one or more High-efficiency particulate air (HEPA)
layers of plastic sealed over all open- filter means a filter capable of trapping
ings into a work area or any other and retaining at least 99.97 percent of
physical barrier sufficient to prevent all mono-dispersed particles of 0.3 mi-
airborne asbestos in a work area from crometers in diameter.
migrating to an adjacent area. Homogeneous area means an area of
Decontamination area means an en- surfacing material or thermal system
closed area adjacent and connected to insulation that is uniform in color and
the regulated area and consisting of an texture.
equipment room, shower area, and Industrial hygienist means a profes-
clean room, which is used for the de- sional qualified by education, training,
contamination of workers, materials, and experience to anticipate, recog-
and equipment that are contaminated nize, evaluate and develop controls for
with asbestos. occupational health hazards.
Demolition means the wrecking or Intact means that the ACM has not
taking out of any load-supporting crumbled, been pulverized, or otherwise
structural member and any related deteriorated so that the asbestos is no
razing, removing, or stripping of asbes- longer likely to be bound with its ma-
tos products. trix.
Director means the Director, National Modification for purposes of para-
Institute for Occupational Safety and graph (g)(6)(ii) of this section means a
Health, U.S. Department of Health and changed or altered procedure, material
Human Services, or designee. or component of a control system,
Disturbance means activities that dis- which replaces a procedure, material or
rupt the matrix of ACM or PACM, component of a required system. Omit-
crumble or pulverize ACM or PACM, or ting a procedure or component, or re-
generate visible debris from ACM or ducing or diminishing the stringency
PACM. Disturbance includes cutting or strength of a material or component
away small amounts of ACM and of the control system is not a modi-
PACM, no greater than the amount fication for purposes of paragraph
which can be contained in one standard (g)(6) of this section.
sized glove bag or waste bag, in order Negative Initial Exposure Assessment
to access a building or vessel compo- means a demonstration by the em-
nent. In no event shall the amount of ployer, which complies with the cri-
ACM or PACM so disturbed exceed that teria in paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this sec-
which can be contained in one glove tion, that employee exposure during an
bag or waste bag which shall not ex- operation is expected to be consist-
ceed 60 inches in length and width. ently below the PELs.
Employee exposure means that expo- PACM means presumed asbestos con-
sure to airborne asbestos that would taining material.
occur if the employee were not using Presumed asbestos containing material
respiratory protective equipment. means thermal system insulation and
Equipment room (change room) means surfacing material found in buildings,
a contaminated room located within vessels, and vessel sections constructed
the decontamination area that is sup- no later than 1980. The designation of a
117
material as PACM may be rebutted acoustical, fireproofing, and other pur-

pursuant to paragraph (k)(5) of this poses).
section. Surfacing ACM means surfacing mate-
Project Designer means a person who rial which contains more than 1% as-
has successfully completed the train- bestos.
ing requirements for an abatement Thermal system insulation (TSI) means
project designer established by 40 ACM applied to pipes, fittings, boilers,
U.S.C. 763.90(g). breeching, tanks, ducts or other struc-
Qualified person means, in addition to tural components to prevent heat loss
the definition in 29 CFR 1926.32(f), one or gain.
who is capable of identifying existing Thermal system insulation ACM is
asbestos hazards in the workplace and thermal system insulation which con-
selecting the appropriate control strat- tains more than 1% asbestos.
egy for asbestos exposure, who has the (c) Permissible exposure limits (PELS)
authority to take prompt corrective (1) Time-weighted average limit (TWA).
measures to eliminate them, as speci- The employer shall ensure that no em-
fied in 29 CFR 1926.32(f); in addition, for ployee is exposed to an airborne con-
Class I and Class II work who is spe- centration of asbestos in excess of 0.1
cially trained in a training course fiber per cubic centimeter of air as an
which meets the criteria of EPAs eight (8) hour time-weighted average
Model Accreditation Plan (40 CFR part (TWA), as determined by the method
763) for supervisor, or its equivalent, prescribed in appendix A to this sec-
and for Class III and Class IV work, tion, or by an equivalent method.
who is trained in a manner consistent (2) Excursion limit. The employer shall
with EPA requirements for training of ensure that no employee is exposed to
local education agency maintenance an airborne concentration of asbestos
and custodial staff as set forth at 40 in excess of 1.0 fiber per cubic centi-
CFR 763.92(a)(2). meter of air (1 f/cc) as averaged over a
Regulated area means an area estab- sampling period of thirty (30) minutes,
lished by the employer to demarcate as determined by the method pre-
areas where Class I, II, and III asbestos scribed in appendix A to this section,
work is conducted, and any adjoining or by an equivalent method.
area where debris and waste from such (d) Multi-employer worksites. (1) On
asbestos work accumulate; and a work multi-employer worksites, an employer
area within which airborne concentra- performing work requiring the estab-
tions of asbestos, exceed or can reason- lishment of a regulated area shall in-
ably be expected to exceed the permis- form other employers on the site of the
sible exposure limit. Requirements for nature of the employers work with as-
regulated areas are set out in para- bestos and/or PACM, of the existence of
graph (e) of this section. and requirements pertaining to regu-
Removal means all operations where lated areas, and the measures taken to
ACM and/or PACM is taken out or ensure that employees of such other
stripped from structures or substrates, employers are not exposed to asbestos.
and includes demolition operations. (2) Asbestos hazards at a multi-em-
Renovation means the modifying of ployer worksite shall be abated by the
any existing vessel, vessel section, contractor who created or controls the
structure, or portion thereof. source of asbestos contamination. For
Repair means overhauling, rebuild- example, if there is a significant
ing, reconstructing, or reconditioning breach of an enclosure containing Class
of vessels, vessel sections, structures or I work, the employer responsible for
substrates, including encapsulation or erecting the enclosure shall repair the
other repair of ACM or PACM attached breach immediately.
to structures or substrates. (3) In addition, all employers of em-
Surfacing material means material ployees exposed to asbestos hazards
that is sprayed, troweled-on or other- shall comply with applicable protective
wise applied to surfaces (such as acous- provisions to protect their employees.
tical plaster on ceilings and fire- For example, if employees working im-
proofing materials on structural mem- mediately adjacent to a Class I asbes-
bers, or other materials on surfaces for tos job are exposed to asbestos due to
118
the inadequate containment of such (4) Respirators. All persons entering a

job, their employer shall either remove regulated area where employees are re-
the employees from the area until the quired pursuant to paragraph (h)(1) of
enclosure breach is repaired; or per- this section to wear respirators shall
form an initial exposure assessment be supplied with a respirator selected
pursuant to paragraph (f) of this sec- in accordance with paragraph (h)(2) of
tion. this section.
(4) All employers of employees work- (5) Prohibited activities. The employer
ing adjacent to regulated areas estab- shall ensure that employees do not eat,
lished by another employer on a multi- drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or
employer worksite shall take steps on apply cosmetics in the regulated area.
a daily basis to ascertain the integrity (6) Qualified persons. The employer
of the enclosure and/or the effective- shall ensure that all asbestos work per-
ness of the control method relied on by formed within regulated areas is super-
the primary asbestos contractor to as- vised by a qualified person, as defined
sure that asbestos fibers do not mi- in paragraph (b) of this section. The
grate to such adjacent areas. duties of the qualified person are set
(5) All general contractors on a ship- out in paragraph (o) of this section.
yard project which includes work cov- (f) Exposure assessments and moni-
ered by this standard shall be deemed toring(1) General monitoring criteria. (i)
to exercise general supervisory author- Each employer who has a workplace or
ity over the work covered by this work operation where exposure moni-
standard, even though the general con- toring is required under this section
tractor is not qualified to serve as the shall perform monitoring to determine
asbestos qualified person as defined accurately the airborne concentrations
by paragraph (b) of this section. As su- of asbestos to which employees may be
pervisor of the entire project, the gen- exposed.
eral contractor shall ascertain whether (ii) Determinations of employee ex-
the asbestos contractor is in compli- posure shall be made from breathing
ance with this standard, and shall re- zone air samples that are representa-
quire such contractor to come into tive of the 8-hour TWA and 30-minute
compliance with this standard when short-term exposures of each employee.
necessary. (iii) Representative 8-hour TWA em-
(e) Regulated areas. (1) All Class I, II ployee exposure shall be determined on
and III asbestos work shall be con- the basis of one or more samples rep-
ducted within regulated areas. All resenting full-shift exposure for em-
other operations covered by this stand- ployees in each work area. Representa-
ard shall be conducted within a regu- tive 30-minute short-term employee ex-
lated area where airborne concentra- posures shall be determined on the
tions of asbestos exceed, or there is a basis of one or more samples rep-
reasonable possibility they may exceed resenting 30 minute exposures associ-
a PEL. Regulated areas shall comply ated with operations that are most
with the requirements of paragraphs likely to produce exposures above the
(e) (2), (3), (4) and (5) of this section. excursion limit for employees in each
(2) Demarcation. The regulated area work area.
shall be demarcated in any manner (2) Initial exposure assessment. (i) Each
that minimizes the number of persons employer who has a workplace or work
within the area and protects persons operation covered by this standard
outside the area from exposure to air- shall ensure that a qualified person
borne asbestos. Where critical barriers conducts an exposure assessment im-
or negative pressure enclosures are mediately before or at the initiation of
used, they may demarcate the regu- the operation to ascertain expected ex-
lated area. Signs shall be provided and posures during that operation or work-
displayed pursuant to the requirements place. The assessment must be com-
of paragraph (k)(7) of this section. pleted in time to comply with require-
(3) Access. Access to regulated areas ments which are triggered by exposure
shall be limited to authorized persons data or the lack of a negative expo-
and to persons authorized by the Act or sure assessment, and to provide infor-
regulations issued pursuant thereto. mation necessary to assure that all
119
control systems planned are appro- conditions used and prevailing in the
priate for that operation and will work employers current operations, the op-
properly. erations were conducted by employees
(ii) Basis of initial exposure assessment. whose training and experience are no
Unless a negative exposure assessment more extensive than that of employees
has been made pursuant to paragraph performing the current job, and these
(f)(2)(iii) of this section, the initial ex- data show that under the conditions
posure assessment shall, if feasible, be prevailing and which will prevail in the
based on monitoring conducted pursu- current workplace there is a high de-
ant to paragraph (f)(1)(iii) of this sec- gree of certainty that employee expo-
tion. The assessment shall take into sures will not exceed the TWA and ex-
consideration both the monitoring re- cursion limit; or
sults and all observations, information (C) The results of initial exposure
or calculations which indicate em- monitoring of the current job made
ployee exposure to asbestos, including from breathing zone air samples that
any previous monitoring conducted in are representative of the 8-hour TWA
the workplace, or of the operations of and 30-minute short-term exposures of
the employer which indicate the levels each employee covering operations
of airborne asbestos likely to be en- which are most likely during the per-
countered on the job. For Class I asbes- formance of the entire asbestos job to
tos work, until the employer conducts result in exposures over the PELs.
exposure monitoring and documents (3) Periodic monitoring(i) Class I and
that employees on that job will not be II operations. The employer shall con-
exposed in excess of the PELs, or oth- duct daily monitoring that is rep-
erwise makes a negative exposure as- resentative of the exposure of each em-
sessment pursuant to paragraph ployee who is assigned to work within
(f)(2)(iii) of this section, the employer a regulated area who is performing
shall presume that employees are ex- Class I or II work, unless the employer
posed in excess of the TWA and excur- pursuant to paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this
sion limit. section, has made a negative exposure
(iii) Negative initial exposure assess- assessment for the entire operation.
ment. For any one specific asbestos job (ii) All operations under the standard
which will be performed by employees other than Class I and II operations. The
who have been trained in compliance employer shall conduct periodic moni-
with the standard, the employer may toring of all work where exposures are
demonstrate that employee exposures expected to exceed a PEL, at intervals
will be below the PELs by data which sufficient to document the validity of
conform to the following criteria: the exposure prediction.
(A) Objective data demonstrating (iii) Exception. When all employees
that the product or material con- required to be monitored daily are
taining asbestos minerals or the activ- equipped with supplied-air respirators
ity involving such product or material operated in the pressure demand mode,
cannot release airborne fibers in con- or other positive pressure mode res-
centrations exceeding the TWA and ex- pirator, the employer may dispense
cursion limit under those work condi- with the daily monitoring required by
tions having the greatest potential for this paragraph. However, employees
releasing asbestos; or performing Class I work using a con-
(B) Where the employer has mon- trol method which is not listed in para-
itored prior asbestos jobs for the PEL graph (g)(4) (i), (ii), or (iii) of this sec-
and the excursion limit within 12 tion or using a modification of a listed
months of the current or projected job, control method, shall continue to be
the monitoring and analysis were per- monitored daily even if they are
formed in compliance with the asbestos equipped with supplied-air respirators.
standard in effect; and the data were (4) Termination of monitoring. (i) If the
obtained during work operations con- periodic monitoring required by para-
ducted under workplace conditions graph (f)(3) of this section reveals that
closely resembling the processes, employee exposures, as indicated by
type of material, control methods, statistically reliable measurements,
work practices, and environmental are below the permissible exposure
120
limit and excursion limit the employer cept as provided in paragraph (g)(8)(ii)
may discontinue monitoring for those of this section in the case of roofing
employees whose exposures are rep- material;
resented by such monitoring. (ii) Wet methods, or wetting agents,
(ii) Additional monitoring. Notwith- to control employee exposures during
standing the provisions of paragraph (f) asbestos handling, mixing, removal,
(2) and (3), and (f)(4) of this section, the cutting, application, and cleanup, ex-
employer shall institute the exposure cept where employers demonstrate
monitoring required under paragraph that the use of wet methods is infeasi-
(f)(3) of this section whenever there has ble due to for example, the creation of
been a change in process, control electrical hazards, equipment malfunc-
equipment, personnel or work practices tion, and, in roofing, except as provided
that may result in new or additional in paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of this section;
exposures above the permissible expo- and
sure limit and/or excursion limit or (iii) Prompt clean-up and disposal of
when the employer has any reason to wastes and debris contaminated with
suspect that a change may result in asbestos in leak-tight containers ex-
new or additional exposures above the cept in roofing operations, where the
permissible exposure limit and/or ex- procedures specified in paragraph
cursion limit. Such additional moni- (g)(8)(ii) of this section apply.
toring is required regardless of whether
(2) In addition to the requirements of
a negative exposure assessment was
paragraph (g)(1) of this section above,
previously produced for a specific job.
the employer shall use the following
(5) Employee notification of monitoring
control methods to achieve compliance
results. The employer must, as soon as
with the TWA permissible exposure
possible but no later than 5 days after
limit and excursion limit prescribed by
the receipt of the results of any moni-
paragraph (c) of this section;
toring performed under this section,
(i) Local exhaust ventilation
notify each affected employee of these
equipped with HEPA filter dust collec-
results either individually in writing or
tion systems;
by posting the results in an appro-
priate location that is accessible to (ii) Enclosure or isolation of proc-
employees. esses producing asbestos dust;
(6) Observation of monitoring. (i) The (iii) Ventilation of the regulated area
employer shall provide affected em- to move contaminated air away from
ployees and their designated represent- the breathing zone of employees and
atives an opportunity to observe any toward a filtration or collection device
monitoring of employee exposure to as- equipped with a HEPA filter;
bestos conducted in accordance with (iv) Use of other work practices and
this section. engineering controls that the Assistant
(ii) When observation of the moni- Secretary can show to be feasible.
toring of employee exposure to asbes- (v) Wherever the feasible engineering
tos requires entry into an area where and work practice controls described
the use of protective clothing or equip- above are not sufficient to reduce em-
ment is required, the observer shall be ployee exposure to or below the permis-
provided with and be required to use sible exposure limit and/or excursion
such clothing and equipment and shall limit prescribed in paragraph (c) of this
comply with all other applicable safety section, the employer shall use them to
and health procedures. reduce employee exposure to the lowest
(g) Methods of compliance(1) Engi- levels attainable by these controls and
neering controls and work practices for all shall supplement them by the use of
operations covered by this section. The respiratory protection that complies
employer shall use the following engi- with the requirements of paragraph (h)
neering controls and work practices in of this section.
all operations covered by this section, (3) Prohibitions. The following work
regardless of the levels of exposure: practices and engineering controls
(i) Vacuum cleaners equipped with shall not be used for work related to
HEPA filters to collect all debris and asbestos or for work which disturbs
dust containing ACM and PACM, ex- ACM or PACM, regardless of measured
121
levels of asbestos exposure or the re- measured by Phase Contrast Micros-

sults of initial exposure assessments: copy (PCM) are no more than back-
(i) High-speed abrasive disc saws that ground levels representing the same
are not equipped with point of cut ven- area before the asbestos work began.
tilator or enclosures with HEPA fil- The results of such monitoring shall be
tered exhaust air. made known to the employer no later
(ii) Compressed air used to remove than 24 hours from the end of the work
asbestos, or materials containing as- shift represented by such monitoring.
bestos, unless the compressed air is Exception: For work completed out-
used in conjunction with an enclosed doors where employees are not working
ventilation system designed to capture in areas adjacent to the regulated
the dust cloud created by the com- areas, this paragraph (g)(4)(ii) is satis-
pressed air. fied when the specific control methods
(iii) Dry sweeping, shoveling or other in paragraph (g)(5) of this section are
dry clean-up of dust and debris con-
used.
taining ACM and PACM.
(iii) For all Class I jobs, HVAC sys-
(iv) Employee rotation as a means of
reducing employee exposure to asbes- tems shall be isolated in the regulated
tos. area by sealing with a double layer of
(4) Class I requirements. In addition to 6 mil plastic or the equivalent;
the provisions of paragraphs (g) (1) and (iv) For all Class I jobs, impermeable
(2) of this section, the following engi- dropcloths shall be placed on surfaces
neering controls and work practices beneath all removal activity;
and procedures shall be used. (v) For all Class I jobs, all objects
(i) All Class I work, including the in- within the regulated area shall be cov-
stallation and operation of the control ered with impermeable dropcloths or
system shall be supervised by a quali- plastic sheeting which is secured by
fied person as defined in paragraph (b) duct tape or an equivalent.
of this section; (vi) For all Class I jobs where the em-
(ii) For all Class I jobs involving the ployer cannot produce a negative expo-
removal of more than 25 linear or 10 sure assessment or where exposure
square feet of TSI or surfacing ACM or monitoring shows the PELs are exceed-
PACM; for all other Class I jobs, where ed, the employer shall ventilate the
the employer cannot produce a nega- regulated area to move contaminated
tive exposure assessment pursuant to air away from the breathing zone of
paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section, or employees toward a HEPA filtration or
where employees are working in areas collection device.
adjacent to the regulated area, while (5) Specific control systems for Class I
the Class I work is being performed, work. In addition, Class I asbestos work
the employer shall use one of the fol- shall be performed using one or more of
lowing methods to ensure that airborne the following control methods pursu-
asbestos does not migrate from the reg- ant to the limitations stated below:
ulated area:
(i) Negative pressure enclosure (NPE)
(A) Critical barriers shall be placed
systems. NPE systems may be used
over all the openings to the regulated
where the configuration of the work
area, except where activities are per-
area does not make the erection of the
formed outdoors; or
enclosure infeasible, with the following
(B) The employer shall use another
barrier or isolation method which pre- specifications and work practices.
vents the migration of airborne asbes- (A) Specifications(1) The negative
tos from the regulated area, as verified pressure enclosure (NPE) may be of
by perimeter area surveillance during any configuration,
each work shift at each boundary of (2) At least 4 air changes per hour
the regulated area, showing no visible shall be maintained in the NPE,
asbestos dust; and perimeter area mon- (3) A minimum of 0.02 column
itoring showing that clearance levels inches of water pressure differential,
contained in 40 CFR part 763, subpart E relative to outside pressure, shall be
of the EPA Asbestos in Schools Rule maintained within the NPE as evi-
are met, or that perimeter area levels, denced by manometric measurements,
122
(4) The NPE shall be kept under neg- (8) A sliding valve or other device
ative pressure throughout the period of shall separate the waste bag from the
its use, and hose to ensure no exposure when the
(5) Air movement shall be directed waste bag is disconnected.
away from employees performing as- (9) At least two persons shall perform
bestos work within the enclosure, and Class I glovebag removal operations.
toward a HEPA filtration or a collec- (iii) Negative pressure glove bag sys-
tion device. tems. Negative pressure glove bag sys-
(B) Work practices(1) Before begin- tems may be used to remove ACM or
ning work within the enclosure and at PACM from piping.
the beginning of each shift, the NPE (A) Specifications: In addition to the
shall be inspected for breaches and specifications for glove bag systems
smoke-tested for leaks, and any leaks above, negative pressure glove bag sys-
sealed. tems shall attach the HEPA vacuum
(2) Electrical circuits in the enclo- system or other device to the bag to
sure shall be deactivated, unless prevent collapse during removal.
equipped with ground-fault circuit in- (B) Work practices(1) The employer
terrupters. shall comply with the work practices
(ii) Glove bag systems may be used to for glove bag systems in paragraph
remove PACM and/or ACM from (g)(5)(ii)(B)(4) of this section,
straight runs of piping and elbows and (2) The HEPA vacuum cleaner or
other connections with the following other device used to prevent collapse of
specifications and work practices: bag during removal shall run contin-
(A) Specifications(1) Glovebags shall ually during the operation until it is
be made of 6 mil thick plastic and shall completed at which time the bag shall
be seamless at the bottom. be collapsed prior to removal of the
(2) Glovebags used on elbows and bag from the pipe.
other connections must be designed for (3) Where a separate waste bag is
that purpose and used without modi- used along with a collection bag and
fications. discarded after one use, the collection
(B) Work practices(1) Each glovebag bag may be reused if rinsed clean with
shall be installed so that it completely amended water before reuse.
covers the circumference of pipes or (iv) Negative pressure glove box sys-
other structures where the work is to tems. Negative pressure glove boxes
be done. may be used to remove ACM or PACM
(2) Glovebags shall be smoke-tested from pipe runs with the following spec-
for leaks and any leaks sealed prior to ifications and work practices.
use. (A) Specifications(1) Glove boxes
(3) Glovebags may be used only once shall be constructed with rigid sides
and may not be moved. and made from metal or other material
(4) Glovebags shall not be used on which can withstand the weight of the
surfaces whose temperature exceeds 150 ACM and PACM and water used during
F. removal:
(5) Prior to disposal, glovebags shall (2) A negative pressure generator
be collapsed by removing air within shall be used to create negative pres-
them using a HEPA vacuum. sure in the system:
(6) Before beginning the operation, (3) An air filtration unit shall be at-
loose and friable material adjacent to tached to the box:
the glovebag/box operation shall be (4) The box shall be fitted with gloved
wrapped and sealed in two layers of six apertures:
mil plastic or otherwise rendered in- (5) An aperture at the base of the box
tact. shall serve as a bagging outlet for
(7) Where a system uses an attached waste ACM and water:
waste bag, such bag shall be connected (6) A back-up generator shall be
to a collection bag using hose or other present on site:
material which shall withstand the (7) Waste bags shall consist of 6 mil
pressure of ACM waste and water with- thick plastic double-bagged before they
out losing its integrity. are filled or plastic thicker than 6 mil.
123
(B) Work practices(1) At least two (A) Specifications(1) The fabricated

persons shall perform the removal: or job-made enclosure shall be con-
(2) The box shall be smoke-tested for structed of 6 mil plastic or equivalent:
leaks and any leaks sealed prior to (2) The enclosure shall be placed
each use. under negative pressure by means of a
(3) Loose or damaged ACM adjacent HEPA filtered vacuum or similar ven-
to the box shall be wrapped and sealed tilation unit:
in two layers of 6 mil plastic prior to (B) Work practices(1) Before use, the
the job, or otherwise made intact prior mini-enclosure shall be inspected for
to the job. leaks and smoketested to detect
(4) A HEPA filtration system shall be breaches, and any breaches sealed.
used to maintain pressure barrier in (2) Before reuse, the interior shall be
box. completely washed with amended
(v) Water spray process system. A water and HEPA-vacuumed.
water spray process system may be (3) During use, air movement shall be
used for removal of ACM and PACM directed away from the employees
from cold line piping if, employees car- breathing zone within the mini-enclo-
rying out such process have completed sure.
a 40-hour separate training course in (6) Alternative control methods for Class
its use, in addition to training required I work. Class I work may be performed
for employees performing Class I work. using a control method which is not
The system shall meet the following referenced in paragraph (g)(5) of this
specifications and shall be performed section, or which modifies a control
by employees using the following work method referenced in paragraph (g)(5)
practices. of this section, if the following provi-
(A) Specifications(1) Piping from sions are complied with:
which insulation will be removed shall (i) The control method shall enclose,
be surrounded on 3 sides by rigid fram- contain or isolate the processes or
ing, source of airborne asbestos dust, or
(2) A 360 degree water spray, deliv- otherwise capture or redirect such dust
ered through nozzles supplied by a high before it enters the breathing zone of
pressure separate water line, shall be employees.
formed around the piping. (ii) A certified industrial hygienist or
(3) The spray shall collide to form a licensed professional engineer who is
fine aerosol which provides a liquid also qualified as a project designer as
barrier between workers and the ACM defined in paragraph (b) of this section,
and PACM. shall evaluate the work area, the pro-
(B) Work practices(1) The system jected work practices and the engineer-
ing controls and shall certify in writ-
shall be run for at least 10 minutes be-
ing that: the planned control method is
fore removal begins.
adequate to reduce direct and indirect
(2) All removal shall take place with- employee exposure to below the PELs
in the barrier. under worst-case conditions of use, and
(3) The system shall be operated by that the planned control method will
at least three persons, one of whom prevent asbestos contamination out-
shall not perform removal but shall side the regulated area, as measured by
check equipment, and ensure proper clearance sampling which meets the re-
operation of the system. quirements of EPAs Asbestos in
(4) After removal, the ACM and Schools Rule issued under AHERA, or
PACM shall be bagged while still inside perimeter monitoring which meets the
the water barrier. criteria in paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(B) of
(vi) A small walk-in enclosure which this section.
accommodates no more than two per- (A) Where the TSI or surfacing mate-
sons (mini-enclosure) may be used if rial to be removed is 25 linear or 10
the disturbance or removal can be com- square feet or less , the evaluation re-
pletely contained by the enclosure, quired in paragraph (g)(6) of this sec-
with the following specifications and tion may be performed by a qualified
work practices. person, and may omit consideration
124
of perimeter or clearance monitoring methods. Class II work also may be

otherwise required. performed using a method allowed for
(B) The evaluation of employee expo- Class I work, except that glove bags
sure required in paragraph (g)(6) of this and glove boxes are allowed if they
section, shall include and be based on fully enclose the Class II material to be
sampling and analytical data rep- removed.
resenting employee exposure during (i) For removing vinyl and asphalt
the use of such method under worst- flooring/deck materials which contain
case conditions and by employees ACM or for which in buildings con-
whose training and experience are structed not later than 1980, the em-
equivalent to employees who are to ployer has not verified the absence of
perform the current job. ACM pursuant to paragraph (g)(8)(i)(I):
(7) Work practices and engineering con- the employer shall ensure that employ-
trols for Class II work. (i) All Class II ees comply with the following work
work shall be supervised by a qualified practices and that employees are
person as defined in paragraph (b) of trained in these practices pursuant to
this section. paragraph (k)(9) of this section:
(ii) For all indoor Class II jobs, where (A) Flooring/deck materials or its
the employer has not produced a nega- backing shall not be sanded.
tive exposure assessment pursuant to (B) Vacuums equipped with HEPA fil-
paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section, or ter, disposable dust bag, and metal
where during the job, changed condi- floor tool (no brush) shall be used to
tions indicate there may be exposure clean floors.
above the PEL or where the employer (C) Resilient sheeting shall be re-
does not remove the ACM in a substan- moved by cutting with wetting of the
tially intact state, the employer shall snip point and wetting during
use one of the following methods to en- delamination. Rip-up of resilient sheet
sure that airborne asbestos does not floor material is prohibited.
migrate from the regulated area;
(D) All scraping of residual adhesive
(A) Critical barriers shall be placed
and/or backing shall be performed
over all openings to the regulated area;
using wet methods.
or,
(E) Dry sweeping is prohibited.
(B) The employer shall use another
barrier or isolation method which pre- (F) Mechanical chipping is prohibited
vents the migration of airborne asbes- unless performed in a negative pressure
tos from the regulated area, as verified enclosure which meets the require-
by perimeter area monitoring or clear- ments of paragraph (g)(5)(i) of this sec-
ance monitoring which meets the cri- tion.
teria set out in paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(B) (G) Tiles shall be removed intact, un-
of this section. less the employer demonstrates that
(C) Impermeable dropcloths shall be intact removal is not possible.
placed on surfaces beneath all removal (H) When tiles are heated and can be
activity; removed intact, wetting may be omit-
(iii) [Reserved] ted.
(iv) All Class II asbestos work shall (I) Resilient flooring/deck material in
be performed using the work practices buildings/vessels constructed no later
and requirements set out above in than 1980, including associated mastic
paragraph (g)(1)(i) through (g)(1)(iii) of and backing shall be assumed to be as-
this section. bestos-containing unless an industrial
(8) Additional controls for Class II hygienist determines that it is asbes-
work. Class II asbestos work shall also tos-free using recognized analytical
be performed by complying with the techniques.
work practices and controls designated (ii) For removing roofing material
for each type of asbestos work to be which contains ACM the employer
performed, set out in this paragraph. shall ensure that the following work
Where more than one control method practices are followed:
may be used for a type of asbestos (A) Roofing material shall be re-
work, the employer may choose one or moved in an intact state to the extent
a combination of designated control feasible.
125
(B) Wet methods shall be used to re- (H) Notwithstanding any other provi-
move roofing materials that are not in- sion of this section, removal or repair
tact, or that will be rendered not in- of sections of intact roofing less than
tact during removal, unless such wet 25 square feet in area does not require
methods are not feasible or will create use of wet methods or HEPA
safety hazards. vacuuming as long as manual methods
(C) Cutting machines shall be con- which do not render the material non-
tinuously misted during use, unless a intact are used to remove the material
competent person determines that and no visible dust is created by the re-
misting substantially decreases worker moval method used. In determining
safety. whether a job involves less than 25
(D) When removing built-up roofs square feet, the employer shall include
with asbestos-containing roofing felts all removal and repair work performed
and an aggregate surface using a power on the same roof on the same day.
roof cutter, all dust resulting from the (iii) When removing cementitious as-
cutting operation shall be collected by bestos-containing siding and shingles
a HEPA dust collector, or shall be or transite panels containing ACM on
HEPA vacuumed by vacuuming along building exteriors (other than roofs,
the cut line. When removing built-up where paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of this sec-
roofs with asbestos-containing roofing tion applies) the employer shall ensure
felts and a smooth surface using a that the following work practices are
power roof cutter, the dust resulting followed:
from the cutting operation shall be col- (A) Cutting, abrading or breaking
lected either by a HEPA dust collector siding, shingles, or transite panels
or HEPA vacuuming along the cut line, shall be prohibited unless the employer
or by gently sweeping and then care- can demonstrate that methods less
fully and completely wiping up the likely to result in asbestos fiber re-
lease cannot be used.
still-wet dust and debris left along the
(B) Each panel or shingle shall be
cut line. The dust and debris shall be
sprayed with amended water prior to
immediately bagged or placed in cov-
removal.
ered containers.
(C) Unwrapped or unbagged panels or
(E) Asbestos-containing material shingles shall be immediately lowered
that has been removed from a roof to the ground via a covered dust-tight
shall not be dropped or thrown to the chute, crane or hoist, or be placed in an
ground. Unless the material is carried impervious waste bag or wrapped in
or passed to the ground by hand, it plastic sheeting and lowered to the
shall be lowered to the ground via cov- ground no later than the end of the
ered, dust-tight chute, crane or hoist: work shift.
(1) Any ACM that is not intact shall (D) Nails shall be cut with flat, sharp
be lowered to the ground as soon as is instruments.
practicable, but in any event no later (iv) When removing gaskets con-
than the end of the work shift. While taining ACM, the employer shall en-
the material remains on the roof it sure that the following work practices
shall either be kept wet, placed in an are followed:
impermeable waste bag, or wrapped in (A) If a gasket is visibly deteriorated
plastic sheeting. and unlikely to be removed intact, re-
(2) Intact ACM shall be lowered to moval shall be undertaken within a
the ground as soon as is practicable, glovebag as described in paragraph
but in any event no later than the end (g)(5)(ii) of this section.
of the work shift. (B) [Reserved]
(F) Upon being lowered, unwrapped (C) The gasket shall be immediately
material shall be transferred to a placed in a disposal container.
closed receptacle in such manner so as (D) Any scraping to remove residue
to preclude the dispersion of dust. must be performed wet.
(G) Roof level heating and ventila- (v) When performing any other Class
tion air intake sources shall be isolated II removal of asbestos containing ma-
or the ventilation system shall be shut terial for which specific controls have
down. not been listed in paragraph (g)(8)(iv)
126
(A) through (D) of this section, the em- which minimize the exposure to em-
ployer shall ensure that the following ployees performing the asbestos work
work practices are complied with. and to bystander employees.
(A) The material shall be thoroughly (i) The work shall be performed using
wetted with amended water prior to wet methods.
and during its removal. (ii) To the extent feasible, the work
(B) The material shall be removed in shall be performed using local exhaust
an intact state unless the employer ventilation.
demonstrates that intact removal is (iii) Where the disturbance involves
not possible. drilling, cutting, abrading, sanding,
(C) Cutting, abrading or breaking the chipping, breaking, or sawing of ther-
material shall be prohibited unless the mal system insulation or surfacing ma-
employer can demonstrate that meth- terial, the employer shall use imper-
ods less likely to result in asbestos meable dropcloths and shall isolate the
fiber release are not feasible. operation using mini-enclosures or
(D) Asbestos-containing material re- glove bag systems pursuant to para-
moved, shall be immediately bagged or graph (g)(5) of this section or another
wrapped, or kept wetted until trans- isolation method.
ferred to a closed receptacle, no later (iv) Where the employer does not
than the end of the work shift. demonstrate by a negative exposure as-
(vi) Alternative work practices and con- sessment performed in compliance with
trols. Instead of the work practices and paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section that
controls listed in paragraphs (g)(8) (i) the PELs will not be exceeded, or
through (v) of this section, the em- where monitoring results show
ployer may use different or modified exceedances of a PEL, the employer
engineering and work practice controls shall contain the area using imper-
if the following provisions are complied meable dropcloths and plastic barriers
with. or their equivalent, or shall isolate the
(A) The employer shall demonstrate operation using mini-enclosure or
by data representing employee expo- glove bag systems pursuant to para-
sure during the use of such method graph (g)(5) of this section.
under conditions which closely resem- (v) Employees performing Class III
ble the conditions under which the jobs which involve the disturbance of
method is to be used, that employee ex- TSI or surfacing ACM or PACM or
posure will not exceed the PELs under where the employer does not dem-
any anticipated circumstances. onstrate by a negative exposure as-
(B) A qualified person shall evaluate sessment in compliance with para-
the work area, the projected work graph (f)(2)(iii) of this section that the
practices and the engineering controls, PELs will not be exceeded or where
and shall certify in writing, that the monitoring results show exceedances of
different or modified controls are ade- the PEL, shall wear respirators which
quate to reduce direct and indirect em- are selected, used and fitted pursuant
ployee exposure to below the PELs to provisions of paragraph (h) of this
under all expected conditions of use section.
and that the method meets the require- (10) Class IV asbestos work. Class IV
ments of this standard. The evaluation asbestos jobs shall be conducted by em-
shall include and be based on data rep- ployees trained pursuant to the asbes-
resenting employee exposure during tos awareness training program set out
the use of such method under condi- in paragraph (k)(9) of this section. In
tions which closely resemble the condi- addition, all Class IV jobs shall be con-
tions under which the method is to be ducted in conformity with the require-
used for the current job, and by em- ments set out in paragraph (g)(1) of
ployees whose training and experience this section, mandating wet methods,
are equivalent to employees who are to HEPA vacuums, and prompt clean up
perform the current job. of debris containing ACM or PACM.
(9) Work practices and engineering con- (i) Employees cleaning up debris and
trols for Class III asbestos work. Class III waste in a regulated area where res-
asbestos work shall be conducted using pirators are required shall wear res-
engineering and work practice controls pirators which are selected, used and
127
fitted pursuant to provisions of para- stalling, removing, repairing, or main-

graph (h) of this section. taining intact pipeline asphaltic wrap,
(ii) Employers of employees cleaning or roof flashings which contain asbes-
up waste and debris in an area where tos fibers encapsulated or coated by bi-
friable TSI or surfacing ACM/PACM is tuminous or resinous compounds shall
accessible, shall assume that such be deemed to be in compliance with
waste and debris contain asbestos. this section. If an employer does not
(11) Specific compliance methods for comply with all provisions of this para-
brake and clutch repair(i) Engineering graph (g)(12) or if during the course of
controls and work practices for brake and the job the material does not remain
clutch repair and service. During auto- intact, the provisions of paragraph
motive brake and clutch inspection, (g)(8) of this section apply instead of
disassembly, repair and assembly oper- this paragraph (g)(12).
ations, the employer shall institute en- (i) Before work begins and as needed
gineering controls and work practices during the job, a qualified person who
to reduce employee exposure to mate- is capable of identifying asbestos haz-
rials containing asbestos using a nega- ards in the workplace and selecting the
tive pressure enclosure/HEPA vacuum appropriate control strategy for asbes-
system method or low pressure/wet tos exposure, and who has the author-
cleaning method, which meets the de- ity to take prompt corrective measures
tailed requirements set out in appendix to eliminate such hazards, shall con-
L to this section. The employer may duct an inspection of the worksite and
also comply using an equivalent meth- determine that the roofing material is
od which follows written procedures intact and will likely remain intact.
which the employer demonstrates can (ii) All employees performing work
achieve results equivalent to Method covered by this paragraph (g)(12) shall
A. For facilities in which no more than be trained in a training program that
5 pair of brakes or 5 clutches are in- meets the requirements of paragraph
spected, disassembled, repaired, or as- (k)(9)(viii) of this section.
sembled per week, the method set for (iii) The material shall not be sand-
in paragraph [D] of appendix L to this ed, abraded, or ground. Manual meth-
section may be used. ods which do not render the material
(ii) The employer may also comply non-intact shall be used.
by using an equivalent method which (iv) Material that has been removed
follows written procedures, which the from a roof shall not be dropped or
employer demonstrates can achieve thrown to the ground. Unless the mate-
equivalent exposure reductions as do rial is carried or passed to the ground
the two preferred methods. Such by hand, it shall be lowered to the
demonstration must include moni- ground via covered, dust-tight chute,
toring data conducted under workplace crane or hoist. All such material shall
conditions closely resembling the proc- be removed from the roof as soon as is
ess, type of asbestos containing mate- practicable, but in any event no later
rials, control method, work practices than the end of the work shift.
and environmental conditions which (v) Where roofing products which
the equivalent method will be used, or have been labeled as containing asbes-
objective data, which document that tos pursuant to paragraph (k)(8) of this
under all reasonably foreseeable condi- section are installed on non-residential
tions of brake and clutch repair appli- roofs during operations covered by this
cations, the method results in expo- paragraph (g)(12), the employer shall
sures which are equivalent to the notify the building owner of the pres-
methods set out in appendix L to this ence and location of such materials no
section. later than the end of the job.
(12) Alternative methods of compliance (vi) All removal or disturbance of
for installation, removal, repair, and pipeline asphaltic wrap shall be per-
maintenance of certain roofing and pipe- formed using wet methods.
line coating materials. Notwithstanding (h) Respiratory protection(1) General.
any other provision of this section, an The employer shall provide respirators,
employer who complies with all provi- and ensure that they are used, where
sions of this paragraph (g)(12) when in- required by this section. Respirators
128
shall be used in the following cir- (A) Class II or Class III asbestos work
cumstances: for which no negative exposure assess-
(i) During all Class I asbestos jobs. ment is available.
(ii) During all Class II work where (B) Class III asbestos work involving
the ACM is not removed in a substan- disturbance of TSI or surfacing ACM or
tially intact state. PACM.
(iii) During all Class II and III work (v) Employers must provide employ-
which is not performed using wet ees with:
methods, provided, however, that res- (A) A tight-fitting, powered air-puri-
pirators need not be worn during re- fying respirator or a full facepiece, sup-
moval of ACM from sloped roofs when a plied-air respirator operated in the
negative exposure assessment has been pressure-demand mode and equipped
with either HEPA egress cartridges or
made and the ACM is removed in an in-
an auxiliary positive-pressure, self-con-
tact state.
tained breathing apparatus (SCBA)
(iv) During all Class II and III asbes- whenever the employees are in a regu-
tos jobs where the employer does not lated area performing Class I asbestos
produce a negative exposure assess- work for which a negative exposure as-
ment. sessment is not available and the expo-
(v) During all Class III jobs where sure assessment indicates that the ex-
TSI or surfacing ACM or PACM is posure level will be at or below 1 f/cc as
being disturbed. an 8-hour time-weighted average
(vi) During all Class IV work per- (TWA).
formed within regulated areas where (B) A full facepiece, supplied-air res-
employees performing other work are pirator operated in the pressure-de-
required to wear respirators. mand mode and equipped with an auxil-
(vii) During all work covered by this iary positive-pressure SCBA whenever
section where employees are exposed the employees are in a regulated area
above the TWA or excursion limit. performing Class I asbestos work for
(viii) In emergencies. which a negative exposure assessment
(2) Respirator selection. (i) Employers is not available and the exposure as-
must select, and provide to employees sessment indicates that the exposure
at no cost, the appropriate respirators level will be above 1 f/cc as an 8-hour
specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 TWA.
CFR 1910.134; however, employers must (3) Respirator program. (i) Where res-
not select or use filtering facepiece respiratory protection is used, the em-
pirators for use against asbestos fibers. ployer shall institute a respirator pro-
gram in accordance with 29 CFR
(ii) Employers are to provide HEPA
1910.134(b), (d), (e), and (f).
filters for powered and non-powered
(ii) The employer shall permit each
air-purifying respirators.
employee who uses a filter respirator
(iii) Employers must: to change the filter elements whenever
(A) Inform employees that they may an increase in breathing resistance is
require the employer to provide a detected and shall maintain an ade-
tight-fitting, powered air-purifying res- quate supply of filter elements for this
pirator (PAPR) permitted for use under purpose.
paragraph (h)(2)(i) of this standard in- (iii) Employees who wear respirators
stead of a negative pressure respirator. shall be permitted to leave work areas
(B) Provide employees with a tight- to wash their faces and respirator
fitting PAPR instead of a negative facepieces whenever necessary to pre-
pressure respirator when the employees vent skin irritation associated with
choose to use a tight-fitting PAPR and respirator use.
it provides them with the required pro- (iv) No employee shall be assigned to
tection against asbestos. tasks requiring the use of respirators
(iv) Employers must provide employ- if, based on his or her most recent ex-
ees with an air-purifying, half mask amination, an examining physician de-
respirator, other than a filtering face- termines that the employee will be un-
piece respirator, whenever the employ- able to function normally wearing a
ees perform: respirator, or that the safety or health
129
of the employee or of other employees (ii) Any employer who gives contami-
will be impaired by the use of a res- nated clothing to another person for
pirator. Such employees shall be as- laundering shall inform such person of
signed to another job or given the op- the requirement in paragraph (i)(2)(i)
portunity to transfer to a different po- of this section to effectively prevent
sition, the duties of which he or she is the release of airborne asbestos in ex-
able to perform with the same em- cess of the TWA excursion limit pre-
ployer, in the same geographical area, scribed in paragraph (c) of this section.
and with the same seniority, status, (3) Contaminated clothing. Contami-
and rate of pay and other job benefits nated clothing shall be transported in
he or she had just prior to such trans- sealed impermeable bags, or other
fer, if such a different position is avail- closed, impermeable containers, and be
able. labeled in accordance with paragraph
(4) Respirator fit testing. (i) The em- (k) of this section.
ployer shall ensure that the respirator (4) Inspection of protective clothing. (i)
issued to the employee exhibits the The qualified person shall examine
least possible facepiece leakage and worksuits worn by employees at least
that the respirator is fitted properly. once per workshift for rips or tears
(ii) Employers shall perform either that may occur during the performance
quantitative or qualitative face fit of work.
tests at the time of initial fitting and (ii) When rips or tears are detected
at least every 6 months thereafter for while an employee is working, rips and
each employee wearing a negative-
tears shall be immediately mended, or
pressure respirator. The qualitative fit
the worksuit shall be immediately re-
tests may be used only for testing the
placed.
fit of half-mask respirators where they
are permitted to be worn, or of full- (j) Hygiene facilities and practices for
facepiece air purifying respirators employees. (1) Requirements for employ-
where they are worn at levels at which ees performing Class I asbestos jobs in-
half-facepiece air purifying respirators volving over 25 linear or 10 square feet
are permitted. Qualitative and quan- of TSI or surfacing ACM and PACM.
titative fit tests shall be conducted in (i) Decontamination areas. For all
accordance with appendix C to this sec- Class I jobs involving over 25 linear or
tion. The tests shall be used to select 10 square feet of TSI or surfacing ACM
facepieces that provide the required or PACM, the employer shall establish
protection as prescribed in table 1, in a decontamination area that is adja-
paragraph (h)(2)(i) of this section. cent and connected to the regulated
(i) Protective clothing(1) General. The area for the decontamination of such
employer shall provide and require the employees. The decontamination area
use of protective clothing, such as cov- shall consist of an equipment room,
eralls or similar whole-body clothing, shower area, and clean room in series.
head coverings, gloves, and foot cov- The employer shall ensure that em-
erings for any employee exposed to air- ployees enter and exit the regulated
borne concentrations of asbestos that area through the decontamination
exceed the TWA and/or excursion limit area.
prescribed in paragraph (c) of this sec- (A) Equipment room. The equipment
tion, or for which a required negative room shall be supplied with imper-
exposure assessment is not produced, meable, labeled bags and containers for
or for any employee performing Class I the containment and disposal of con-
operations which involve the removal taminated protective equipment.
of over 25 linear or 10 square feet of TSI (B) Shower area. Shower facilities
or surfacing ACM or PACM. shall be provided which comply with 29
(2) Laundering. (i) The employer shall CFR 1910.141(d)(3), unless the employer
ensure that laundering of contami- can demonstrate that they are not fea-
nated clothing is done so as to prevent sible. The showers shall be adjacent
the release of airborne asbestos in ex- both to the equipment room and the
cess of the TWA or excursion limit pre- clean room, unless the employer can
scribed in paragraph (c) of this section. demonstrate that this location is not
130
feasible. Where the employer can dem- (B) Employees shall remove their
onstrate that it is not feasible to lo- protective clothing in the equipment
cate the shower between the equipment room and deposit the clothing in la-
room and the clean room, or where the beled impermeable bags or containers.
work is performed outdoors, or when (C) Employees shall not remove their
the work involving asbestos exposure respirators in the equipment room.
takes place on board a ship, the em- (D) Employees shall shower prior to
ployers shall ensure that employees: entering the clean room.
(1) Remove asbestos contamination (E) After showering, employees shall
from their worksuits in the equipment enter the clean room before changing
room using a HEPA vacuum before pro- into street clothes.
ceeding to a shower that is not adja- (iv) Lunch areas. Whenever food or
cent to the work area; or beverages are consumed at the work-
(2) Remove their contaminated site where employees are performing
worksuits in the equipment room, then Class I asbestos work, the employer
don clean worksuits, and proceed to a shall provide lunch areas in which the
shower that is not adjacent to the work airborne concentrations of asbestos are
area. below the permissible exposure limit
(C) Clean change room. The clean and/or excursion limit.
room shall be equipped with a locker or (2) Requirements for Class I work in-
appropriate storage container for each volving less than 25 linear or 10 square
employees use. When the employer can feet of TSI or surfacing and PACM, and
demonstrate that it is not feasible to for Class II and Class III asbestos work
provide a clean change area adjacent to operations where exposures exceed a PEL
the work area, or where the work is or where there is no negative exposure as-
performed outdoors, or when the work sessment produced before the operation.
takes place aboard a ship, the employer (i) The employer shall establish an
may permit employees engaged in equipment room or area that is adja-
Class I asbestos jobs to clean their pro- cent to the regulated area for the de-
tective clothing with a portable HEPA- contamination of employees and their
equipped vacuum before such employ- equipment which is contaminated with
ees leave the regulated area. Following asbestos which shall consist of an area
showering, such employees however covered by an impermeable drop cloth
must then change into street clothing on the floor/deck or horizontal working
in clean change areas provided by the surface.
employer which otherwise meet the re- (ii) The area must be of sufficient
quirements of this section. size as to accommodate cleaning of
equipment and removing personal pro-
(ii) Decontamination area entry proce-
tective equipment without spreading
dures. The employer shall ensure that
contamination beyond the area (as de-
employees:
termined by visible accumulations).
(A) Enter the decontamination area (iii) Work clothing must be cleaned
through the clean room; with a HEPA vacuum before it is re-
(B) Remove and deposit street cloth- moved.
ing within a locker provided for their (iv) All equipment and surfaces of
use; and containers filled with ACM must be
(C) Put on protective clothing and cleaned prior to removing them from
respiratory protection before leaving the equipment room or area.
the clean room. (v) The employer shall ensure that
(D) Before entering the regulated employees enter and exit the regulated
area, the employer shall ensure that area through the equipment room or
employees pass through the equipment area.
room. (3) Requirements for Class IV work.
(iii) Decontamination area exit proce- Employers shall ensure that employees
dures. The employer shall ensure that: performing Class IV work within a reg-
(A) Before leaving the regulated area, ulated area comply with the hygiene
employees shall remove all gross con- practice required of employees per-
tamination and debris from their pro- forming work which has a higher clas-
tective clothing. sification within that regulated area.
131
Otherwise employers of employees facility owners shall determine the

cleaning up debris and material which presence, location, and quantity of
is TSI or surfacing ACM or identified ACM and/or PACM at the work site
as PACM shall provide decontamina- pursuant to paragraph (k)(1) of this
tion facilities for such employees section.
which are required by paragraph (j)(2) (ii) Building/vessel and/or facility
of this section. owners shall notify the following per-
(4) Smoking in work areas. The em- sons of the presence, location and
ployer shall ensure that employees do quantity of ACM or PACM, at work
not smoke in work areas where they sites in their buildings/facilities/ves-
are occupationally exposed to asbestos sels. Notification either shall be in
because of activities in that work area. writing or shall consist of a personal
(k) Communication of hazards. (1) This communication between the owner and
section applies to the communication the person to whom notification must
of information concerning asbestos be given or their authorized represent-
hazards in shipyard employment ac- atives:
tivities to facilitate compliance with (A) Prospective employers applying
this standard. Most asbestos-related or bidding for work whose employees
shipyard activities involve previously reasonably can be expected to work in
installed building materials. Building/ or adjacent to areas containing such
vessel owners often are the only and/or material;
best sources of information concerning
(B) Employees of the owner who will
them. Therefore, they, along with em-
work in or adjacent to areas containing
ployers of potentially exposed employ-
such material:
ees, are assigned specific information
(C) On multi-employer worksites, all
conveying and retention duties under
employers of employees who will be
this section. Installed Asbestos Con-
performing work within or adjacent to
taining Building/Vessel Material: Em-
areas containing such materials;
ployers and building/vessel owners
shall identify TSI and sprayed or trow- (D) Tenants who will occupy areas
eled on surfacing materials as asbestos- containing such materials.
containing unless the employer, by (3) Duties of employers whose employees
complying with paragraph (k)(5) of this perform work subject to this standard in
section determines that the material is or adjacent to areas containing ACM and
not asbestos-containing. Asphalt or PACM. Building/vessel and facility
vinyl flooring/decking material in- owners whose employees perform such
stalled in buildings or vessels no later work shall comply with these provi-
than 1980 must also be considered as as- sions to the extent applicable.
bestos containing unless the employer/ (i) Before work in areas containing
owner, pursuant to paragraph ACM and PACM is begun, employers
(g)(8)(i)(I) of this section, determines it shall identify the presence, location,
is not asbestos containing. If the em- and quantity of ACM, and/or PACM
ployer or building/vessel owner has ac- therein pursuant to paragraph (k)(1) of
tual knowledge or should have known, this section.
through the exercise of due diligence, (ii) Before work under this standard
that materials other than TSI and is performed employers of employees
sprayed-on or troweled-on surfacing who will perform such work shall in-
materials are asbestos-containing, they form the following persons of the loca-
must be treated as such. When commu- tion and quantity of ACM and/or PACM
nicating information to employees pur- present at the worksite and the pre-
suant to this standard, owners and em- cautions to be taken to ensure that air-
ployers shall identify PACM as ACM. borne asbestos is confined to the area.
Additional requirements relating to (iii) Within 10 days of the completion
communication of asbestos work on of such work, the employer whose em-
multi- employer worksites are set out ployees have performed work subject to
in paragraph (d) of this standard. this standard, shall inform the build-
(2) Duties of building/vessel and facility ing/vessel or facility owner and em-
owners. (i) Before work subject to this ployers of employees who will be work-
standard is begun, building/vessel and ing in the area of the current location
132
and quantity of PACM and/or ACM re- or an equivalent nationally-recognized

maining in the former regulated area round robin testing program.
and final monitoring results, if any. (iii) The employer and/or building/
(4) In addition to the above require- vessel owner may demonstrate that
ments, all employers who discover flooring material including associated
ACM and/or PACM on a work site shall mastic and backing does not contain
convey information concerning the asbestos, by a determination of an in-
presence, location and quantity of such dustrial hygienist based upon recog-
newly discovered ACM and/or PACM to nized analytical techniques showing
the owner and to other employers of that the material is not ACM.
employees working at the work site, (6) At the entrance to mechanical
within 24 hours of the discovery. rooms/areas in which employees rea-
(5) Criteria to rebut the designation sonably can be expected to enter and
of installed material as PACM. (i) At which contain ACM and/or PACM, the
any time, an employer and/or building/ building/vessel owner shall post signs
vessel owner may demonstrate, for pur- which identify the material which is
poses of this standard, that PACM does
present, its location, and appropriate
not contain asbestos. Building/vessel
work practices which, if followed, will
owners and/or employers are not re-
ensure that ACM and/or PACM will not
quired to communicate information
about the presence of building material be disturbed. The employer shall en-
for which such a demonstration pursu- sure, to the extent feasible, that em-
ant to the requirements of paragraph ployees who come in contact with
(k)(5)(ii) of this section has been made. these signs can comprehend them.
However, in all such cases, the infor- Means to ensure employee comprehen-
mation, data and analysis supporting sion may include the use of foreign lan-
the determination that PACM does not guages, pictographs, graphics, and
contain asbestos, shall be retained pur- awareness training.
suant to paragraph (n) of this section. (7) Signs. (i) Warning signs that de-
(ii) An employer or owner may dem- marcate the regulated area shall be
onstrate that PACM does not contain provided and displayed at each location
more than 1% asbestos by the fol- where a regulated area is required to be
lowing: established by paragraph (e) of this sec-
(A) Having completed an inspection tion. Signs shall be posted at such a
conducted pursuant to the require- distance from such a location that an
ments of AHERA (40 CFR part 763, sub- employee may read the signs and take
part E) which demonstrates that the necessary protective steps before en-
material is not ACM; or tering the area marked by the signs.
(B) Performing tests of the material (ii)(A) The warning signs required by
containing PACM which demonstrate paragraph (k)(7) of this section shall
that no ACM is present in the material. bear the following information:
Such tests shall include analysis of
bulk samples collected in the manner DANGER
described in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests,
evaluation and sample collection shall ASBESTOS
be conducted by an accredited inspec-
tor or by a CIH. Analysis of samples CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE
shall be performed by persons or lab- HAZARD
oratories with proficiency dem-
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
onstrated by current successful partici-
pation in a nationally recognized test- (B) In addition, where the use of res-
ing program such as the National Vol- pirators and protective clothing is re-
untary Laboratory Accreditation Pro- quired in the regulated area under this
gram (NVLAP) or the National Insti- section, the warning signs shall include
tute for Standards and Technology the following:
(NIST) or the Round Robin for bulk
samples administered by the American
Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA),
133
RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE areas where they will clearly be no-

CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS ticed by employees who are likely to be
AREA exposed, such as at the entrance to me-
chanical room/areas. Signs required by
(iii) The employer shall ensure that
paragraph (k)(6) of this section may be
employees working in and contiguous
posted in lieu of labels so long as they
to regulated areas comprehend the
contain information required for label-
warning signs required to be posted by
ling. The employer shall ensure, to the
paragraph (k)(7)(i) of this section.
extent feasible, that employees who
Means to ensure employee comprehen-
come in contact with these signs or la-
sion may include the use of foreign lan-
bels can comprehend them. Means to
guages, pictographs and graphics.
(8) Labels. (i) Labels shall be affixed ensure employee comprehension may
to all products containing asbestos and include the use of foreign languages,
to all containers containing such prod- pictographs, graphics, and awareness
ucts, including waste containers. training.
Where feasible, installed asbestos prod- (9) Employee information and training.
ucts shall contain a visible label. (i) The employer shall, at no cost to
(ii) Labels shall be printed in large, the employee, institute a training pro-
bold letters on a contrasting back- gram for all employees who are likely
ground. to be exposed in excess of a PEL and
(iii) Labels shall be used in accord- for all employees who perform Class I
ance with the requirements of 29 CFR through IV asbestos operations, and
1910.1200(f) of OSHAs Hazard Commu- shall ensure their participation in the
nication standard, and shall contain program.
the following information: (ii) Training shall be provided prior
to or at the time of initial assignment
DANGER and at least annually thereafter.
(iii) Training for Class I operations
CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS
and for Class II operations that require
AVOID CREATING DUST the use of critical barriers (or equiva-
lent isolation methods) and/or negative
CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD pressure enclosures under this section
(iv) [Reserved] shall be the equivalent in curriculum,
(v) Labels shall contain a warning training method and length to the EPA
statement against breathing asbestos Model Accreditation Plan (MAP) asbes-
fibers. tos abatement workers training (40
(vi) The provisions for labels required CFR part 763, subpart E, appendix C).
by paragraphs (k)(8) (i) through (k)(8) (iv) Training for other Class II work.
(iii) of this section do not apply where: (A) For work with asbestos con-
(A) Asbestos fibers have been modi- taining roofing materials, flooring ma-
fied by a bonding agent, coating, bind- terials, siding materials, ceiling tiles,
er, or other material, provided that the or transite panels, training shall in-
manufacturer can demonstrate that, clude at a minimum all the elements
during any reasonably foreseeable use, included in paragraph (k)(9)(viii) of
handling, storage, disposal, processing, this section and in addition, the spe-
or transportation, no airborne con- cific work practices and engineering
centrations of asbestos fibers in excess controls set forth in paragraph (g) of
of the permissible exposure limit and/ this section which specifically relate to
or excursion limit will be released, or that category. Such course shall in-
(B) Asbestos is present in a product clude hands-on training and shall
in concentrations less than 1.0 percent. take at least 8 hours.
(vii) When a building/vessel owner or (B) An employee who works with
employer identifies previously in- more than one of the categories of ma-
stalled PACM and/or ACM, labels or terial specified in paragraph
signs shall be affixed or posted so that (k)(9)(iv)(A) of this section shall re-
employees will be notified of what ma- ceive training in the work practices ap-
terials contain PACM and/or ACM. The plicable to each category of material
employer shall attach such labels in that the employee removes and each
134
removal method that the employee (vii) Training for employees who are
uses. likely to be exposed in excess of the
(C) For Class II operations not in- PEL and who are not otherwise re-
volving the categories of material spec- quired to be trained under paragraph
ified in paragraph (k)(9)(iv)(A) of this (k)(9) (iii) through (vi) of this section,
section, training shall be provided shall meet the requirements of para-
which shall include at a minimum all graph (k)(9)(viii) of this section.
the elements included in paragraph (viii) The training program shall be
(k)(9)(viii) of this section and in addi- conducted in a manner that the em-
tion, the specific work practices and ployee is able to understand. In addi-
engineering controls set forth in para- tion to the content required by the pro-
graph (g) of this section which specifi- visions in paragraphs (k)(9)(iii) through
cally relate to the category of material (vi) of this section, the employer shall
being removed, and shall include ensure that each such employee is in-
hands-on training in the work prac- formed of the following:
tices applicable to each category of (A) Methods of recognizing asbestos,
material that the employee removes including the requirement in paragraph
and each removal method that the em- (k)(1) of this section to presume that
ployee uses. certain building materials contain as-
(v) Training for Class III employees bestos;
shall be consistent with EPA require- (B) The health effects associated with
ments for training of local education asbestos exposure;
agency maintenance and custodial staff (C) The relationship between smok-
as set forth at 40 CFR 763.92(a)(2). Such ing and asbestos in producing lung can-
a course shall also include hands-on cer;
training and shall take at least 16 (D) The nature of operations that
hours. Exception: For Class III oper- could result in exposure to asbestos,
ations for which the competent person the importance of necessary protective
determines that the EPA curriculum controls to minimize exposure includ-
does not adequately cover the training ing, as applicable, engineering con-
needed to perform that activity, train- trols, work practices, respirators,
ing shall include as a minimum all the housekeeping procedures, hygiene fa-
elements included in paragraph cilities, protective clothing, decon-
(k)(9)(viii) of this section and in addi- tamination procedures, emergency pro-
tion, the specific work practices and cedures, and waste disposal procedures,
engineering controls set forth in para- and any necessary instruction in the
graph (g) of this section which specifi- use of these controls and procedures;
cally relate to that activity, and shall where Class III and IV work will be or
include hands-on training in the is performed, the contents of EPA 20T
work practices applicable to each cat- 2003, Managing Asbestos In-Place
egory of material that the employee July 1990 or its equivalent in content;
disturbs. (E) The purpose, proper use, fitting
(vi) Training for employees per- instructions, and limitations of res-
forming Class IV operations shall be pirators as required by 29 CFR 1910.134;
consistent with EPA requirements for (F) The appropriate work practices
training of local education agency for performing the asbestos job;
maintenance and custodial staff as set (G) Medical surveillance program re-
forth at 40 CFR 763.92(a)(1). Such a quirements;
course shall include available informa- (H) The content of this standard in-
tion concerning the locations of ther- cluding appendices;
mal system insulation and surfacing (I) The names, addresses and phone
ACM/PACM, and asbestos-containing numbers of public health organizations
flooring material, or flooring material which provide information, materials
where the absence of asbestos has not and/or conduct programs concerning
yet been certified; and instruction in smoking cessation. The employer may
the recognition of damage, deteriora- distribute the list of such organiza-
tion, and delamination of asbestos con- tions contained in appendix J to this
taining building materials. Such a section, to comply with this require-
course shall take at least 2 hours. ment; and
135
(J) The requirements for posting (iv) Burnishing or dry buffing may be
signs and affixing labels and the mean- performed only on flooring/deck which
ing of the required legends for such has sufficient finish so that the pad
signs and labels. cannot contact the flooring/deck mate-
(10) Access to training materials. (i) rial.
The employer shall make readily avail- (4) Waste and debris and accom-
able to affected employees without panying dust in an area containing ac-
cost, written materials relating to the cessible thermal system insulation or
employee training program, including surfacing ACM/PACM or visibly dete-
a copy of this regulation. riorated ACM:
(ii) The employer shall provide to the (i) Shall not be dusted or swept dry,
Assistant Secretary and the Director, or vacuumed without using a HEPA fil-
upon request, all information and ter;
training materials relating to the em- (ii) Shall be promptly cleaned up and
ployee information and training pro- disposed of in leak tight containers.
gram. (m) Medical surveillance(1) General
(iii) The employer shall inform all (i) Employees covered. (A) The employer
employees concerning the availability shall institute a medical surveillance
of self-help smoking cessation program program for all employees who for a
material. Upon employee request, the combined total of 30 or more days per
year are engaged in Class I, II and III
employer shall distribute such mate-
work or are exposed at or above a per-
rial, consisting of NIH Publication No,
missible exposure limit. For purposes
891647, or equivalent self-help mate-
of this paragraph, any day in which a
rial, which is approved or published by
worker engages in Class II or Class III
a public health organization listed in
operations or a combination thereof on
appendix J to this section.
intact material for one hour or less
(l) Housekeeping(1) Vacuuming. (taking into account the entire time
Where vacuuming methods are se- spent on the removal operation, includ-
lected, HEPA filtered vacuuming ing cleanup) and, while doing so, ad-
equipment must be used. The equip- heres fully to the work practices speci-
ment shall be used and emptied in a fied in this standard, shall not be
manner that minimizes the reentry of counted.
asbestos into the workplace. (B) For employees otherwise required
(2) Waste disposal. Asbestos waste, by this standard to wear a negative
scrap, debris, bags, containers, equip- pressure respirator, employers shall en-
ment, and contaminated clothing con- sure employees are physically able to
signed for disposal shall be collected perform the work and use the equip-
and disposed of in sealed, labeled, im- ment. This determination shall be
permeable bags or other closed, la- made under the supervision of a physi-
beled, impermeable containers except cian.
in roofing operations, where the proce- (ii) Examination. (A) The employer
dures specified in paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of shall ensure that all medical examina-
this section apply. tions and procedures are performed by
(3) Care of asbestos-containing flooring/ or under the supervision of a licensed
deck material. (i) All vinyl and asphalt physician, and are provided at no cost
flooring/deck material shall be main- to the employee and at a reasonable
tained in accordance with this para- time and place.
graph unless the building/facility (B) Persons other than such licensed
owner demonstrates, pursuant to para- physicians who administer the pul-
graph (g)(8)(i)(I) of this section that the monary function testing required by
flooring/deck does not contain asbes- this section shall complete a training
tos. course in spirometry sponsored by an
(ii) Sanding of flooring/deck material appropriate academic or professional
is prohibited. institution.
(iii) Stripping of finishes shall be (2) Medical examinations and consulta-
conducted using low abrasion pads at tions(i) Frequency. The employer shall
speeds lower than 300 rpm and wet make available medical examinations
methods. and consultations to each employee
136
covered under paragraph (m)(1)(i) of following information to the exam-

this section on the following schedules: ining physician:
(A) Prior to assignment of the em- (i) A copy of this standard and appen-
ployee to an area where negative-pres- dices D, E, and I to this section;
sure respirators are worn; (ii) A description of the affected em-
(B) When the employee is assigned to ployees duties as they relate to the
an area where exposure to asbestos employees exposure;
may be at or above the permissible ex- (iii) The employees representative
posure limit for 30 or more days per exposure level or anticipated exposure
year, or engage in Class I, II, or III level;
work for a combined total of 30 or more (iv) A description of any personal
days per year, a medical examination protective and respiratory equipment
must be given within 10 working days used or to be used; and
following the thirtieth day of exposure; (v) Information from previous med-
(C) And at least annually thereafter. ical examinations of the affected em-
(D) If the examining physician deter- ployee that is not otherwise available
mines that any of the examinations to the examining physician.
should be provided more frequently (4) Physicians written opinion. (i) The
than specified, the employer shall pro- employer shall obtain a written opin-
vide such examinations to affected em- ion from the examining physician. This
ployees at the frequencies specified by written opinion shall contain the re-
the physician. sults of the medical examination and
(E) Exception: No medical examina- shall include:
tion is required of any employee if ade- (A) The physicians opinion as to
quate records show that the employee whether the employee has any detected
has been examined in accordance with medical conditions that would place
this paragraph within the past 1-year the employee at an increased risk of
period. material health impairment from expo-
(ii) Content. Medical examinations sure to asbestos;
made available pursuant to paragraphs (B) Any recommended limitations on
(m)(2)(i) (A) through (m)(2)(i) (C) of this the employee or on the use of personal
section shall include: protective equipment such as res-
(A) A medical and work history with pirators; and
special emphasis directed to the pul- (C) A statement that the employee
monary, cardiovascular, and gastro- has been informed by the physician of
intestinal systems. the results of the medical examination
(B) On initial examination, the and of any medical conditions that
standardized questionnaire contained may result from asbestos exposure.
in part 1 of appendix D to this section (D) A statement that the employee
and, on annual examination, the abbre- has been informed by the physician of
viated standardized questionnaire con- the increased risk of lung cancer at-
tained in part 2 of appendix D to this tributable to the combined effect of
section. smoking and asbestos exposure.
(C) A physical examination directed (ii) The employer shall instruct the
to the pulmonary and gastrointestinal physician not to reveal in the written
systems, including a chest x-ray to be opinion given to the employer specific
administered at the discretion of the findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc-
physician, and pulmonary function cupational exposure to asbestos.
tests of forced vital capacity (FVC) and (iii) The employer shall provide a
forced expiratory volume at one second copy of the physicians written opinion
(FEV(1)). Interpretation and classifica- to the affected employee within 30 days
tion of chest roentgenogram shall be from its receipt.
conducted in accordance with appendix (n) Recordkeeping(1) Objective data
E to this section. relied on pursuant to paragraph (f) of this
(D) Any other examinations or tests section. (i) Where the employer has re-
deemed necessary by the examining lied on objective data that dem-
physician. onstrates that products made from or
(3) Information provided to the physi- containing asbestos or the activity in-
cian. The employer shall provide the volving such products or material are
137
not capable of releasing fibers of asbes- accurate record for each employee sub-
tos in concentrations at or above the ject to medical surveillance by para-
permissible exposure limit and/or ex- graph (m) of this section, in accordance
cursion limit under the expected condi- with 29 CFR 1910.1020.
tions of processing, use, or handling to (ii) The record shall include at least
satisfy the requirements of paragraph the following information:
(f) of this section, the employer shall (A) The name and social security
establish and maintain an accurate number of the employee;
record of objective data reasonably re- (B) A copy of the employees medical
lied upon in support of the exemption. examination results, including the
(ii) The record shall include at least medical history, questionnaire re-
the following information: sponses, results of any tests, and physi-
(A) The product qualifying for ex- cians recommendations.
emption; (C) Physicians written opinions;
(B) The source of the objective data; (D) Any employee medical com-
(C) The testing protocol, results of plaints related to exposure to asbestos;
testing, and/or analysis of the material and
for the release of asbestos; (E) A copy of the information pro-
(D) A description of the operation ex- vided to the physician as required by
empted and how the data support the paragraph (m) of this section.
exemption; and (iii) The employer shall ensure that
(E) Other data relevant to the oper- this record is maintained for the dura-
ations, materials, processing, or em- tion of employment plus thirty (30)
ployee exposures covered by the ex- years, in accordance with 29 CFR
emption. 1910.1020.
(iii) The employer shall maintain (4) Training records. The employer
this record for the duration of the em- shall maintain all employee training
ployers reliance upon such objective records for one (1) year beyond the last
data. date of employment by that employer.
(2) Exposure measurements. (i) The em- (5) Data to rebut PACM. (i) Where the
ployer shall keep an accurate record of building owner and employer have re-
all measurements taken to monitor lied on data to demonstrate that PACM
employee exposure to asbestos as pre- is not asbestos-containing, such data
scribed in paragraph (f) of this section. shall be maintained for as long as they
Note: The employer may utilize the are relied upon to rebut the presump-
services of qualified organizations such tion.
as industry trade associations and em- (ii) [Reserved]
ployee associations to maintain the (6) Records of required notification. (i)
records required by this section. Where the building/vessel owner has
(ii) This record shall include at least communicated and received informa-
the following information: tion concerning the identity, location
(A) The date of measurement; and quantity of ACM and PACM, writ-
(B) The operation involving exposure ten records of such notifications and
to asbestos that is being monitored; their content shall be maintained by
(C) Sampling and analytical methods the owner for the duration of owner-
used and evidence of their accuracy; ship and shall be transferred to succes-
(D) Number, duration, and results of sive owners of such buildings/facilities/
samples taken; vessels.
(E) Type of protective devices worn, (ii) [Reserved]
if any; and (7) Availability. (i) The employer,
(F) Name, social security number, upon written request, shall make all
and exposure of the employees whose records required to be maintained by
exposures are represented. this section available to the Assistant
(iii) The employer shall maintain Secretary and the Director for exam-
this record for at least thirty (30) ination and copying.
years, in accordance with 29 CFR (ii) The employer, upon request, shall
1910.1020. make any exposure records required by
(3) Medical surveillance. (i) The em- paragraphs (f) and (n) of this section
ployer shall establish and maintain an available for examination and copying
138
to affected employees, former employ- in accordance with paragraph (e)(6) of

ees, designated representatives, and this section shall perform or supervise
the Assistant Secretary, in accordance the following duties, as applicable:
with 29 CFR 1910.1020(a) through (e) and (A) Set up the regulated area, enclo-
(g) through (i). sure, or other containment;
(iii) The employer, upon request, (B) Ensure (by on-site inspection) the
shall make employee medical records integrity of the enclosure or contain-
required by paragraphs (m) and (n) of ment;
this section available for examination (C) Set up procedures to control
and copying to the subject employee, entry to and exit from the enclosure
anyone having the specific written con- and/or area;
sent of the subject employee, and the (D) Supervise all employee exposure
Assistant Secretary, in accordance monitoring required by this section
with 29 CFR 1910.1020. and ensure that it is conducted as re-
(8) Transfer of records. (i) The em- quired by paragraph (f) of this section;
ployer shall comply with the require- (E) Ensure that employees working
ments concerning transfer of records within the enclosure and/or using glove
set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h). bags wear respirators and protective
(ii) Whenever the employer ceases to clothing as required by paragraphs (h)
do business and there is no successor and (i) of this section;
employer to receive and retain the (F) Ensure through on-site super-
records for the prescribed period, the vision, that employees set up, use, and
employer shall notify the Director at remove engineering controls, use work
least 90 days prior to disposal and, practices and personal protective
upon request, transmit them to the Di- equipment in compliance with all re-
rector. quirements;
(o) Qualified person(1) General. On (G) Ensure that employees use the
all shipyard worksites covered by this hygiene facilities and observe the de-
standard, the employer shall designate contamination procedures specified in
a qualified person, having the quali- paragraph (j) of this section;
fications and authority for ensuring (H) Ensure that through on-site in-
worker safety and health required by spection, engineering controls are func-
subpart C, General Safety and Health tioning properly and employees are
Provisions for Construction (29 CFR using proper work practices; and
1926.20 through 1926.32). (I) Ensure that notification require-
(2) Required inspections by the qualified ments in paragraph (k) of this section
person. 1926.20(b)(2) which requires are met.
health and safety prevention programs (4) Training for the competent person.
to provide for frequent and regular in- (i) For Class I and II asbestos work the
spections of the job sites, materials, qualified person shall be trained in all
and equipment to be made by qualified aspects of asbestos removal and han-
persons, is incorporated. dling, including: Abatement, installa-
(3) Additional inspections. In addition, tion, removal and handling; the con-
the qualified person shall make fre- tents of this standard; the identifica-
quent and regular inspections of the tion of asbestos; removal procedures,
job sites, in order to perform the duties where appropriate; and other practices
set out in paragraph (o)(3)(i) of this for reducing the hazard. Such training
section. For Class I jobs, on-site inspec- shall be obtained in a comprehensive
tions shall be made at least once dur- course for supervisors, that meets the
ing each work shift, and at any time at criteria of EPAs Model Accreditation
employee request. For Class II, III and Plan (40 CFR part 763, subpart E, ap-
IV jobs, on-site inspections shall be pendix C), such as a course conducted
made at intervals sufficient to assess by an EPA-approved or state-approved
whether conditions have changed, and training provider, certified by EPA or a
at any reasonable time at employee re- state, or a course equivalent in strin-
quest. gency, content, and length.
(i) On all worksites where employees (ii) For Class III and IV asbestos
are engaged in Class I or II asbestos work, the qualified person shall be
work, the qualified person designated trained in aspects of asbestos handling
139
appropriate for the nature of the work, 37-mm filter cassette accompanies the sam-
to include procedures for setting up ple results in the employees exposure moni-
glove bags and mini-enclosures, prac- toring record. Other cassettes such as the
Bell-mouth may be used within the limits of
tices for reducing asbestos exposures,
their validation. Do not reuse or reload cas-
use of wet methods, the contents of settes for asbestos sample collection.
this standard, and the identification of 3. An air flow rate between 0.5 liter/min
asbestos. Such training shall include and 5 liters/min shall be selected for the 25-
successful completion of a course that mm cassette. If the 37-mm cassette is used,
is consistent with EPA requirements an air flow rate between 1 liter/min and 5 li-
for training of local education agency ters/min shall be selected.
maintenance and custodial staff as set 4. Where possible, a sufficient air volume
forth at 40 CFR 763.92(a)(2), or its for each air sample shall be collected to
yield between 100 and 1,300 fibers per square
equivalent in stringency, content, and
millimeter on the membrane filter. If a filter
length. Qualified persons for Class III darkens in appearance or if loose dust is seen
and Class IV work may also be trained on the filter, a second sample shall be start-
pursuant to the requirements of para- ed.
graph (o)(4)(i) of this section. 5. Ship the samples in a rigid container
(p) Appendices. (1) Appendices A, C, D, with sufficient packing material to prevent
and E to this section are incorporated dislodging the collected fibers. Packing ma-
as part of this section and the contents terial that has a high electrostatic charge on
of these appendices are mandatory. its surface (e.g., expanded polystyrene) can-
not be used because such material can cause
(2) Appendices B, F, H, I, J, and K to
loss of fibers to the sides of the cassette.
this section are informational and are 6. Calibrate each personal sampling pump
not intended to create any additional before and after use with a representative fil-
obligations not otherwise imposed or ter cassette installed between the pump and
to detract from any existing obliga- the calibration devices.
tions. 7. Personal samples shall be taken in the
breathing zone of the employee (i.e., at-
APPENDIX A TO 1915.1001OSHA REFERENCE tached to or near the collar or lapel near the
METHOD (MANDATORY) workers face).
This mandatory appendix specifies the pro- 8. Fiber counts shall be made by positive
cedure for analyzing air samples for asbes- phase contrast using a microscope with an 8
tos, and specifies quality control procedures to 10 X eyepiece and a 40 to 45 X objective for
that must be implemented by laboratories a total magnification of approximately 400 X
performing the analysis. The sampling and and a numerical aperture of 0.65 to 0.75. The
analytical methods described below rep- microscope shall also be fitted with a green
resent the elements of the available moni- or blue filter.
toring methods (such as appendix B to this 9. The microscope shall be fitted with a
section, the most current version of the Walton-Beckett eyepiece graticule cali-
OSHA method ID160, or the most current brated for a field diameter of 100 microm-
version of the NIOSH Method 7400) which eters (2 micrometers).
OSHA considers to be essential to achieve 10. The phase-shift detection limit of the
adequate employee exposure monitoring microscope shall be about 3 degrees meas-
while allowing employers to use methods ured using the HSE phase shift test slide as
that are already established within their or- outlined below.
ganizations. All employers who are required a. Place the test slide on the microscope
to conduct air monitoring under paragraph stage and center it under the phase objec-
(f) of this section are required to utilize ana- tive.
lytical laboratories that use this procedure, b. Bring the blocks of grooved lines into
or an equivalent method, for collecting and focus.
analyzing samples. NOTE: The slide consists of seven sets of
grooved lines (ca. 20 grooves to each block)
Sampling and Analytical Procedure
in descending order of visibility from sets 1
1. The sampling medium for air samples to 7, seven being the least visible. The re-
shall be mixed cellulose ester filter mem- quirements for asbestos, tremolite,
branes. These shall be designated by the anthophyllite, and actinolite counting are
manufacturer as suitable for asbestos count- that the microscope optics must resolve the
ing. See below for rejection of blanks. grooved lines in set 3 completely, although
2. The preferred collection device shall be they may appear somewhat faint, and that
the 25-mm diameter cassette with an open- the grooved lines in sets 6 and 7 must be in-
faced 50-mm extension cowl. The 37-mm cas- visible. Sets 4 and 5 must be at least par-
sette may be used if necessary but only if tially visible but may vary slightly in visi-
written justification for the need to use the bility between microscopes. A microscope
140
that fails to meet these requirements has ei- Quality Control Procedures
ther too low or too high a resolution to be
1. Intra-laboratory program. Each labora-
used for asbestos, tremolite, anthophyllite,
tory and/or each company with more than
and actinolite counting.
one microscopist counting slides shall estab-
c. If the image deteriorates, clean and ad- lish a statistically designed quality assur-
just the microscope optics. If the problem ance program involving blind recounts and
persists, consult the microscope manufac- comparisons between microscopists to mon-
turer. itor the variability of counting by each
11. Each set of samples taken will include microscopist and between microscopists. In a
10% field blanks or a minimum of 2 field company with more than one laboratory, the
blanks. These blanks must come from the program shall include all laboratories and
same lot as the filters used for sample collec- shall also evaluate the laboratory-to-labora-
tion. The field blank results shall be aver- tory variability.
aged and subtracted from the analytical re- 2. a. Interlaboratory program. Each labora-
sults before reporting. A set consists of any tory analyzing asbestos, tremolite,
sample or group of samples for which an anthophyllite, and actinolite samples for
evaluation for this standard must be made. compliance determination shall implement
Any samples represented by a field blank an interlaboratory quality assurance pro-
having a fiber count in excess of the detec- gram that as a minimum includes participa-
tion limit of the method being used shall be tion of at least two other independent lab-
rejected. oratories. Each laboratory shall participate
12. The samples shall be mounted by the in round robin testing at least once every 6
acetone/triacetin method or a method with months with at least all the other labora-
an equivalent index of refraction and similar tories in its interlaboratory quality assur-
clarity. ance group. Each laboratory shall submit
13. Observe the following counting rules. slides typical of its own work load for use in
a. Count only fibers equal to or longer than this program. The round robin shall be de-
5 micrometers. Measure the length of curved signed and results analyzed using appro-
fibers along the curve. priate statistical methodology.
b. All laboratories should participate in a
b. In the absence of other information,
national sample testing scheme such as the
count all particles as asbestos that have a
Proficiency Analytical Testing Program
length-to-width ratio (aspect ratio) of 3 to 1
(PAT), the Asbestos Registry sponsored by
or greater.
the American Industrial Hygiene Association
c. Fibers lying entirely within the bound-
(AIHA).
ary of the Walton-Beckett graticule field
3. All individuals performing asbestos,
shall receive a count of 1. Fibers crossing the
tremolite, anthophyllite, and actinolite
boundary once, having one end within the
analysis must have taken the NIOSH course
circle, shall receive the count of one half
for sampling and evaluating airborne asbes-
(12). Do not count any fiber that crosses the
tos, tremolite, anthophyllite, and actinolite
graticule boundary more than once. Reject
dust or an equivalent course.
and do not count any other fibers even
4. When the use of different microscopes
though they may be visible outside the grati-
contributes to differences between counters
cule area.
and laboratories, the effect of the different
d. Count bundles of fibers as one fiber un- microscope shall be evaluated and the micro-
less individual fibers can be identified by ob- scope shall be replaced, as necessary.
serving both ends of an individual fiber. 5. Current results of these quality assur-
e. Count enough graticule fields to yield ance programs shall be posted in each lab-
100 fibers. Count a minimum of 20 fields; stop oratory to keep the microscopists informed.
counting at 100 fields regardless of fiber
count. APPENDIX B TO 1915.1001DETAILED PROCE-
14. Blind recounts shall be conducted at DURES FOR ASBESTOS SAMPLING AND ANAL-
the rate of 10 percent. YSIS (NON-MANDATORY)
Matrix: Air
OSHA Permissible Exposure Limits:
Time Weighted Average ......................................................................................................................... 0.1 fiber/cc
Excursion Level (30 minutes) ................................................................................................................. 1.0 fiber/cc
Collection Procedure:
A known volume of air is drawn through a 25-mm diameter cassette containing a mixed-cellulose ester filter. The cassette must
be equipped with an electrically conductive 50-mm extension cowl. The sampling time and rate are chosen to give a fiber den-
sity of between 100 to 1,300 fibers/mm2 on the filter.
Recommended Sampling Rate ..................................................................................................................... 0.5 to 5.0 liters/minute
(L/min)
Recommended Air Volumes:
Minimum ................................................................................................................................................. 25 L
Maximum ................................................................................................................................................ 2,400 L
141
Analytical Procedure: A portion of the counting. It consists of a circle with a pro-
sample filter is cleared and prepared for as- jected diameter of 100 2 m (area of about
bestos fiber counting by Phase Contrast Mi- 0.00785 mm2) with a crosshair having tic-
croscopy (PCM) at 400X. marks at 3-m intervals in one direction and
Commercial manufacturers and products 5-m in the orthogonal direction. There are
mentioned in this method are for descriptive marks around the periphery of the circle to
use only and do not constitute endorsements demonstrate the proper sizes and shapes of
by USDOL-OSHA. Similar products from fibers. This design is reproduced in figure 1.
other sources can be substituted. The disk is placed in one of the microscope
eyepieces so that the design is superimposed
1. Introduction on the field of view.
This method describes the collection of
1.1. History
airborne asbestos fibers using calibrated
sampling pumps with mixed-cellulose ester Early surveys to determine asbestos expo-
(MCE) filters and analysis by phase contrast sures were conducted using impinger counts
microscopy (PCM). Some terms used are of total dust with the counts expressed as
unique to this method and are defined below: million particles per cubic foot. The British
Asbestos: A term for naturally occurring fi- Asbestos Research Council recommended fil-
brous minerals. Asbestos includes chrysotile, ter membrane counting in 1969. In July 1969,
crocidolite, amosite (cummingtonite- the Bureau of Occupational Safety and
grunerite asbestos), tremolite asbestos, ac- Health published a filter membrane method
tinolite asbestos, anthophyllite asbestos, and for counting asbestos fibers in the United
any of these minerals that have been chemi- States. This method was refined by NIOSH
cally treated and/or altered. The precise and published as P & CAM 239. On May 29,
chemical formulation of each species will 1971, OSHA specified filter membrane sam-
vary with the location from which it was pling with phase contrast counting for eval-
mined. Nominal compositions are listed: uation of asbestos exposures at work sites in
Chrysotile ...... Mg3Si2O5(OH)4 the United States. The use of this technique
Crocidolite ..... Na2Fe32+Fe23+Si8O22(OH)2 was again required by OSHA in 1986. Phase
Amosite ......... (Mg,Fe)7Si8O22(OH)2
Tremolite-ac- Ca2(Mg,Fe)5Si8O22(OH)2
contrast microscopy has continued to be the
tinolite. method of choice for the measurement of oc-
Anthophyllite (Mg,Fe)7Si8O22(OH)2 cupational exposure to asbestos.
Asbestos Fiber: A fiber of asbestos which 1.2. Principle
meets the criteria specified below for a fiber.
Aspect Ratio: The ratio of the length of a Air is drawn through a MCE filter to cap-
fiber to its diameter (e.g. 3:1, 5:1 aspect ra- ture airborne asbestos fibers. A wedge shaped
tios). portion of the filter is removed, placed on a
Cleavage Fragments: Mineral particles glass microscope slide and made transparent.
formed by comminution of minerals, espe- A measured area (field) is viewed by PCM.
cially those characterized by parallel sides All the fibers meeting defined criteria for as-
and a moderate aspect ratio (usually less bestos are counted and considered a measure
than 20:1). of the airborne asbestos concentration.
Detection Limit: The number of fibers nec-
1.3. Advantages and Disadvantages
essary to be 95% certain that the result is
greater than zero. There are four main advantages of PCM
Differential Counting: The term applied to over other methods:
the practice of excluding certain kinds of fi- (1) The technique is specific for fibers.
bers from the fiber count because they do Phase contrast is a fiber counting technique
not appear to be asbestos. which excludes non-fibrous particles from
Fiber: A particle that is 5 m or longer, the analysis.
with a length-to-width ratio of 3 to 1 or (2) The technique is inexpensive and does
longer. not require specialized knowledge to carry
Field: The area within the graticule circle out the analysis for total fiber counts.
that is superimposed on the microscope (3) The analysis is quick and can be per-
image. formed on-site for rapid determination of air
Set: The samples which are taken, sub- concentrations of asbestos fibers.
mitted to the laboratory, analyzed, and for (4) The technique has continuity with his-
which, interim or final result reports are torical epidemiological studies so that esti-
generated. mates of expected disease can be inferred
Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite: The from long-term determinations of asbestos
non-asbestos form of these minerals which exposures.
meet the definition of a fiber. It includes any The main disadvantage of PCM is that it
of these minerals that have been chemically does not positively identify asbestos fibers.
treated and/or altered. Other fibers which are not asbestos may be
Walton-Beckett Graticule: An eyepiece grati- included in the count unless differential
cule specifically designed for asbestos fiber counting is performed. This requires a great
142
deal of experience to adequately differen- This value was compared with CV vs. count
tiate asbestos from non-asbestos fibers. Posi- curves. The count at which CV = 0.61 for
tive identification of asbestos must be per- Leidel-Busch counting statistics (8.9.) or for
formed by polarized light or electron micros- an OSHA Salt Lake Technical Center
copy techniques. A further disadvantage of (OSHA-SLTC) CV curve (see appendix A for
PCM is that the smallest visible fibers are further information) was 4.4 fibers or 3.9 fi-
about 0.2 m in diameter while the finest as- bers per 100 fields, respectively. Although a
bestos fibers may be as small as 0.02 m in lower detection limit of 4 fibers per 100 fields
diameter. For some exposures, substantially is supported by the OSHA-SLTC data, both
more fibers may be present than are actually data sets support the 4.5 fibers per 100 fields
counted. value.
1.4. Workplace Exposure 3. Method PerformancePrecision and
Asbestos is used by the construction indus- Accuracy
try in such products as shingles, floor tiles, Precision is dependent upon the total num-
asbestos cement, roofing felts, insulation ber of fibers counted and the uniformity of
and acoustical products. Non-construction the fiber distribution on the filter. A general
uses include brakes, clutch facings, paper, rule is to count at least 20 and not more than
paints, plastics, and fabrics. One of the most 100 fields. The count is discontinued when 100
significant exposures in the workplace is the fibers are counted, provided that 20 fields
removal and encapsulation of asbestos in have already been counted. Counting more
schools, public buildings, and homes. Many than 100 fibers results in only a small gain in
workers have the potential to be exposed to precision. As the total count drops below 10
asbestos during these operations. fibers, an accelerated loss of precision is
About 95% of the asbestos in commercial noted.
use in the United States is chrysotile. Cro- At this time, there is no known method to
cidolite and amosite make up most of the re- determine the absolute accuracy of the as-
mainder. Anthophyllite and tremolite or ac- bestos analysis. Results of samples prepared
tinolite are likely to be encountered as con- through the Proficiency Analytical Testing
taminants in various industrial products. (PAT) Program and analyzed by the OSHA-
SLTC showed no significant bias when com-
1.5. Physical Properties
pared to PAT reference values. The PAT
Asbestos fiber possesses a high tensile samples were analyzed from 1987 to 1989
strength along its axis, is chemically inert, (N=36) and the concentration range was from
non-combustible, and heat resistant. It has a 120 to 1,300 fibers/mm2.
high electrical resistance and good sound ab-
sorbing properties. It can be weaved into ca- 4. Interferences
bles, fabrics or other textiles, and also mat- Fibrous substances, if present, may inter-
ted into asbestos papers, felts, or mats. fere with asbestos analysis.
2. Range and Detection Limit Some common fibers are:
fiberglass
2.1. The ideal counting range on the filter anhydrate
is 100 to 1,300 fibers/mm2. With a Walton-
plant fibers
Beckett graticule this range is equivalent to
perlite veins
0.8 to 10 fibers/field. Using NIOSH counting
gypsum
statistics, a count of 0.8 fibers/field would
some synthetic fibers
give an approximate coefficient of variation
membrane structures
(CV) of 0.13.
sponge spicules
2.2. The detection limit for this method is
diatoms
4.0 fibers per 100 fields or 5.5 fibers/mm2. This
microorganism
was determined using an equation to esti-
mate the maximum CV possible at a specific wollastonite
concentration (95% confidence) and a Lower The use of electron microscopy or optical
Control Limit of zero. The CV value was tests such as polarized light, and dispersion
then used to determine a corresponding con- staining may be used to differentiate these
centration from historical CV vs fiber rela- materials from asbestos when necessary.
tionships. As an example:
5. Sampling
Lower Control Limit (95% Confidence) =
AC1.645(CV)(AC) 5.1. Equipment
Where: 5.1.1. Sample assembly (The assembly is
AC = Estimate of the airborne fiber con- shown in figure 3). Conductive filter holder
centration (fibers/cc) Setting the Lower consisting of a 25-mm diameter, 3-piece cas-
Control Limit = 0 and solving for CV: sette having a 50-mm long electrically con-
0 = AC1.645(CV)(AC) ductive extension cowl. Backup pad, 25-mm,
CV = 0.61 cellulose. Membrane filter, mixed-cellulose
143
ester (MCE), 25-mm, plain, white, 0.4 to 1.2- Pump Flow Rate Corrections at the end of
m pore size. this appendix.
NOTES: (a) DO NOT RE-USE CASSETTES. 5.2.6. Connect each pump to the base of
(b) Fully conductive cassettes are required each sampling cassette with flexible tubing.
to reduce fiber loss to the sides of the cas- Remove the end cap of each cassette and
sette due to electrostatic attraction. take each air sample open face. Assure that
(c) Purchase filters which have been se- each sample cassette is held open side down
lected by the manufacturer for asbestos in the employees breathing zone during
counting or analyze representative filters for sampling. The distance from the nose/mouth
fiber background before use. Discard the fil- of the employee to the cassette should be
ter lot if more than 4 fibers/100 fields are about 10 cm. Secure the cassette on the col-
found. lar or lapel of the employee using spring
(d) To decrease the possibility of contami- clips or other similar devices.
nation, the sampling system (filter-backup 5.2.7. A suggested minimum air volume
pad-cassette) for asbestos is usually when sampling to determine TWA compli-
preassembled by the manufacturer. ance is 25 L. For Excursion Limit (30 min
sampling time) evaluations, a minimum air
(e) Other cassettes, such as the Bell-
volume of 48 L is recommended.
mouth, may be used within the limits of
5.2.8. The most significant problem when
their validation.
sampling for asbestos is overloading the fil-
5.1.2. Gel bands for sealing cassettes. ter with non-asbestos dust. Suggested max-
5.1.3. Sampling pump. imum air sample volumes for specific envi-
Each pump must be a battery operated, ronments are:
self-contained unit small enough to be
placed on the monitored employee and not Environment Air vol. (L)
interfere with the work being performed. The Asbestos removal operations (visible dust) ....... 100
pump must be capable of sampling at the col- Asbestos removal operations (little dust) ........... 240
lection rate for the required sampling time. Office environments ........................................... 400 to
5.1.4. Flexible tubing, 6-mm bore. 2,400
5.1.5. Pump calibration.
Stopwatch and bubble tube/burette or elec- Caution: Do not overload the filter with
tronic meter. dust. High levels of non-fibrous dust par-
ticles may obscure fibers on the filter and
5.2. Sampling Procedure lower the count or make counting impos-
sible. If more than about 25 to 30% of the
5.2.1. Seal the point where the base and field area is obscured with dust, the result
cowl of each cassette meet with a gel band or may be biased low. Smaller air volumes may
tape. be necessary when there is excessive non-as-
5.2.2. Charge the pumps completely before bestos dust in the air.
beginning. While sampling, observe the filter with a
5.2.3. Connect each pump to a calibration small flashlight. If there is a visible layer of
cassette with an appropriate length of 6-mm dust on the filter, stop sampling, remove and
bore plastic tubing. Do not use luer connec- seal the cassette, and replace with a new
torsthe type of cassette specified above has sampling assembly. The total dust loading
built-in adapters. should not exceed 1 mg.
5.2.4. Select an appropriate flow rate for 5.2.9. Blank samples are used to determine
the situation being monitored. The sampling if any contamination has occurred during
flow rate must be between 0.5 and 5.0 L/min sample handling. Prepare two blanks for the
for personal sampling and is commonly set first 1 to 20 samples. For sets containing
between 1 and 2 L/min. Always choose a flow greater than 20 samples, prepare blanks as
rate that will not produce overloaded filters. 10% of the samples. Handle blank samples in
5.2.5. Calibrate each sampling pump before the same manner as air samples with one ex-
and after sampling with a calibration cas- ception: Do not draw any air through the
sette in-line (Note: This calibration cassette blank samples. Open the blank cassette in
should be from the same lot of cassettes used the place where the sample cassettes are
for sampling). Use a primary standard (e.g. mounted on the employee. Hold it open for
bubble burette) to calibrate each pump. If about 30 seconds. Close and seal the cassette
possible, calibrate at the sampling site. appropriately. Store blanks for shipment
NOTE: If sampling site calibration is not with the sample cassettes.
possible, environmental influences may af- 5.2.10. Immediately after sampling, close
fect the flow rate. The extent is dependent and seal each cassette with the base and
on the type of pump used. Consult with the plastic plugs. Do not touch or puncture the
pump manufacturer to determine dependence filter membrane as this will invalidate the
on environmental influences. If the pump is analysis.
affected by temperature and pressure 5.2.11 Attach and secure a sample seal
changes, correct the flow rate by using the around each sample cassette in such a way
formula shown in the section Sampling as to assure that the end cap and base plugs
144
cannot be removed without destroying the 6.2.8. Phase-shift test slide, mark II (Avail-
seal. Tape the ends of the seal together since able from PTR optics Ltd., and also
the seal is not long enough to be wrapped McCrone).
end-to-end. Also wrap tape around the cas- 6.2.9. Precleaned glass slides, 25 mm75
sette at each joint to keep the seal secure. mm. One end can be frosted for convenience
in writing sample numbers, etc., or paste-on
5.3. Sample Shipment labels can be used.
5.3.1. Send the samples to the laboratory 6.2.10. Cover glass #112.
6.2.11. Scalpel (#10, curved blade).
with paperwork requesting asbestos analysis.
6.2.12. Fine tipped forceps.
List any known fibrous interferences present
6.2.13. Aluminum block for clearing filter
during sampling on the paperwork. Also,
(see appendix D and figure 4).
note the workplace operation(s) sampled.
6.2.14. Automatic adjustable pipette, 100- to
5.3.2. Secure and handle the samples in 500-L.
such that they will not rattle during ship- 6.2.15. Micropipette, 5 L.
ment nor be exposed to static electricity. Do
not ship samples in expanded polystyrene 6.3. Reagents
peanuts, vermiculite, paper shreds, or excel-
sior. Tape sample cassettes to sheet bubbles 6.3.1. Acetone (HPLC grade).
and place in a container that will cushion 6.3.2. Triacetin (glycerol triacetate).
the samples in such a manner that they will 6.3.3. Lacquer or nail polish.
not rattle. 6.4. Standard Preparation
5.3.3. To avoid the possibility of sample
contamination, always ship bulk samples in A way to prepare standard asbestos sam-
separate mailing containers. ples of known concentration has not been de-
veloped. It is possible to prepare replicate
6. Analysis samples of nearly equal concentration. This
has been performed through the PAT pro-
6.1. Safety Precautions gram. These asbestos samples are distributed
6.1.1. Acetone is extremely flammable and by the AIHA to participating laboratories.
precautions must be taken not to ignite it. Since only about one-fourth of a 25-mm
Avoid using large containers or quantities of sample membrane is required for an asbestos
acetone. Transfer the solvent in a ventilated count, any PAT sample can serve as a
laboratory hood. Do not use acetone near standard for replicate counting.
any open flame. For generation of acetone 6.5. Sample Mounting
vapor, use a spark free heat source.
6.1.2. Any asbestos spills should be cleaned NOTE: See Safety Precautions in Section
up immediately to prevent dispersal of fi- 6.1. before proceeding. The objective is to
bers. Prudence should be exercised to avoid produce samples with a smooth (non-grainy)
contamination of laboratory facilities or ex- background in a medium with a refractive
posure of personnel to asbestos. Asbestos index of approximately 1.46. The technique
spills should be cleaned up with wet methods below collapses the filter for easier focusing
and/or a High Efficiency Particulate-Air and produces permanent mounts which are
(HEPA) filtered vacuum. useful for quality control and interlabora-
Caution: Do not use a vacuum without a tory comparison.
HEPA filterIt will disperse fine asbestos fi- An aluminum block or similar device is re-
bers in the air. quired for sample preparation.
6.5.1. Heat the aluminum block to about 70
6.2. Equipment C. The hot block should not be used on any
surface that can be damaged by either the
6.2.1. Phase contrast microscope with bin- heat or from exposure to acetone.
ocular or trinocular head. 6.5.2. Ensure that the glass slides and cover
6.2.2. Widefield or Huygenian 10X eyepieces glasses are free of dust and fibers.
(NOTE: The eyepiece containing the grati- 6.5.3. Remove the top plug to prevent a
cule must be a focusing eyepiece. Use a 40X vacuum when the cassette is opened. Clean
phase objective with a numerical aperture of the outside of the cassette if necessary. Cut
0.65 to 0.75). the seal and/or tape on the cassette with a
6.2.3. Kohler illumination (if possible) with razor blade. Very carefully separate the base
green or blue filter. from the extension cowl, leaving the filter
6.2.4. Walton-Beckett Graticule, type G22 and backup pad in the base.
with 100 2 m projected diameter. 6.5.4. With a rocking motion cut a tri-
6.2.5. Mechanical stage. A rotating me- angular wedge from the filter using the scal-
chanical stage is convenient for use with po- pel. This wedge should be one-sixth to one-
larized light. fourth of the filter. Grasp the filter wedge
6.2.6. Phase telescope. with the forceps on the perimeter of the fil-
6.2.7. Stage micrometer with 0.01-mm sub- ter which was clamped between the cassette
divisions. pieces. DO NOT TOUCH the filter with your
145
finger. Place the filter on the glass slide 6.6.2. Counting Fibers
sample side up. Static electricity will usu- (1) Place the prepared sample slide on the
ally keep the filter on the slide until it is mechanical stage of the microscope. Position
cleared. the center of the wedge under the objective
6.5.5. Place the tip of the micropipette con- lens and focus upon the sample.
taining about 200 L acetone into the alu- (2) Start counting from one end of the
minum block. Insert the glass slide into the wedge and progress along a radial line to the
receiving slot in the aluminum block. Inject other end (count in either direction from pe-
the acetone into the block with slow, steady rimeter to wedge tip). Select fields ran-
pressure on the plunger while holding the pi- domly, without looking into the eyepieces,
pette firmly in place. Wait 3 to 5 seconds for by slightly advancing the slide in one direc-
the filter to clear, then remove the pipette tion with the mechanical stage control.
and slide from the aluminum block. (3) Continually scan over a range of focal
6.5.6. Immediately (less than 30 seconds) planes (generally the upper 10 to 15 m of the
place 2.5 to 3.5 L of triacetin on the filter filter surface) with the fine focus control
(NOTE: Waiting longer than 30 seconds will during each field count. Spend at least 5 to
result in increased index of refraction and 15 seconds per field.
decreased contrast between the fibers and (4) Most samples will contain asbestos fi-
the preparation. This may also lead to sepa- bers with fiber diameters less than 1 m.
Look carefully for faint fiber images. The
ration of the cover slip from the slide).
small diameter fibers will be very hard to
6.5.7. Lower a cover slip gently onto the fil-
see. However, they are an important con-
ter at a slight angle to reduce the possibility tribution to the total count.
of forming air bubbles. If more than 30 sec- (5) Count only fibers equal to or longer
onds have elapsed between acetone exposure than 5 m. Measure the length of curved fi-
and triacetin application, glue the edges of bers along the curve.
the cover slip to the slide with lacquer or (6) Count fibers which have a length to
nail polish. width ratio of 3:1 or greater.
6.5.8. If clearing is slow, warm the slide for (7) Count all the fibers in at least 20 fields.
15 min on a hot plate having a surface tem- Continue counting until either 100 fibers are
perature of about 50 C to hasten clearing. counted or 100 fields have been viewed;
The top of the hot block can be used if the whichever occurs first. Count all the fibers
slide is not heated too long. in the final field.
6.5.9. Counting may proceed immediately (8) Fibers lying entirely within the bound-
after clearing and mounting are completed. ary of the Walton-Beckett graticule field
shall receive a count of 1. Fibers crossing the
6.6. Sample Analysis boundary once, having one end within the
circle shall receive a count of 12. Do not
Completely align the microscope according count any fiber that crosses the graticule
to the manufacturers instructions. Then, boundary more than once. Reject and do not
align the microscope using the following count any other fibers even though they may
general alignment routine at the beginning be visible outside the graticule area. If a
of every counting session and more often if fiber touches the circle, it is considered to
necessary. cross the line.
(9) Count bundles of fibers as one fiber un-
6.6.1. Alignment less individual fibers can be clearly identi-
(1) Clean all optical surfaces. Even a small fied and each individual fiber is clearly not
amount of dirt can significantly degrade the connected to another counted fiber. See fig-
image. ure 1 for counting conventions.
(10) Record the number of fibers in each
(2) Rough focus the objective on a sample.
field in a consistent way such that filter
(3) Close down the field iris so that it is non-uniformity can be assessed.
visible in the field of view. Focus the image (11) Regularly check phase ring alignment.
of the iris with the condenser focus. Center (12) When an agglomerate (mass of mate-
the image of the iris in the field of view. rial) covers more than 25% of the field of
(4) Install the phase telescope and focus on view, reject the field and select another. Do
the phase rings. Critically center the rings. not include it in the number of fields count-
Misalignment of the rings results in astig- ed.
matism which will degrade the image. (13) Perform a blind recount of 1 in every
(5) Place the phase-shift test slide on the 10 filter wedges (slides). Re-label the slides
microscope stage and focus on the lines. The using a person other than the original
analyst must see line set 3 and should see at counter.
least parts of 4 and 5 but, not see line set 6
or 6. A microscope/microscopist combination 6.7. Fiber Identification
which does not pass this test may not be As previously mentioned in Section 1.3.,
used. PCM does not provide positive confirmation
146
of asbestos fibers. Alternate differential
counting techniques should be used if dis- FB BFB
crimination is desirable. Differential count- ECA
ing may include primary discrimination
AC = FL BFL
based on morphology, polarized light anal-
ysis of fibers, or modification of PCM data 1000 FR T MFA
by Scanning Electron or Transmission Elec- Where:
tron Microscopy. AC = Airborne fiber concentration
A great deal of experience is required to FB = Total number of fibers greater than 5
routinely and correctly perform differential m counted
counting. It is discouraged unless it is le- FL = Total number of fields counted on the
gally necessary. Then, only if a fiber is obvi- filter
ously not asbestos should it be excluded from BFB = Total number of fibers greater than 5
the count. Further discussion of this tech- m counted in the blank
nique can be found in reference 8.10. BFL = Total number of fields counted on the
If there is a question whether a fiber is as- blank
bestos or not, follow the rule: ECA = Effective collecting area of filter (385
mm2 nominal for a 25-mm filter.)
WHEN IN DOUBT, COUNT.
FR = Pump flow rate (L/min)
6.8. Analytical RecommendationsQuality MFA = Microscope count field area (mm2 ).
This is 0.00785 mm2 for a Walton-Beckett
Control System
Graticule.
6.8.1. All individuals performing asbestos T = Sample collection time (min)
analysis must have taken the NIOSH course 1,000 = Conversion of L to cc
for sampling and evaluating airborne asbes- NOTE: The collection area of a filter is sel-
tos or an equivalent course. dom equal to 385 mm2. It is appropriate for
6.8.2. Each laboratory engaged in asbestos laboratories to routinely monitor the exact
counting shall set up a slide trading arrange- diameter using an inside micrometer. The
ment with at least two other laboratories in collection area is calculated according to the
order to compare performance and eliminate formula:
inbreeding of error. The slide exchange oc- Area = (d/2) 2
curs at least semiannually. The round robin
7.2. Short-cut Calculation
results shall be posted where all analysts can
view individual analysts results. Since a given analyst always has the same
6.8.3. Each laboratory engaged in asbestos interpupillary distance, the number of fields
counting shall participate in the Proficiency per filter for a particular analyst will remain
Analytical Testing Program, the Asbestos constant for a given size filter. The field size
Analyst Registry or equivalent. for that analyst is constant (i.e. the analyst
is using an assigned microscope and is not
6.8.4. Each analyst shall select and count
changing the reticle).
prepared slides from a slide bank. These For example, if the exposed area of the fil-
are quality assurance counts. The slide bank ter is always 385 mm2 and the size of the field
shall be prepared using uniformly distributed is always 0.00785 mm2, the number of fields
samples taken from the workload. Fiber den- per filter will always be 49,000. In addition it
sities should cover the entire range routinely is necessary to convert liters of air to cc.
analyzed by the laboratory. These slides are These three constants can then be combined
counted blind by all counters to establish an such that ECA/(1,000MFA) = 49. The pre-
original standard deviation. This historical vious equation simplifies to:
distribution is compared with the quality as-
surance counts. A counter must have 95% of FB BFB
all quality control samples counted within 49
three standard deviations of the historical FL BFL
mean. This count is then integrated into a AC =
new historical mean and standard deviation FR T
for the slide.
The analyses done by the counters to es- 7.3. Recount Calculations
tablish the slide bank may be used for an in- As mentioned in step 13 of Section 6.6.2., a
terim quality control program if the data are blind recount of 10% of the slides is per-
treated in a proper statistical fashion. formed. In all cases, differences will be ob-
served between the first and second counts of
7. Calculations the same filter wedge. Most of these dif-
ferences will be due to chance alone, that is,
ER10AU94.028</MATH>
7.1. Calculate the estimated airborne asbes-

due to the random variability (precision) of
tos fiber concentration on the filter sample the count method. Statistical recount cri-
using the following formula: teria enables one to decide whether observed
147
ER10AU94.027</MATH>
differences can be explained due to chance 157A). National Institute for Occupational
alone or are probably due to systematic dif- Safety and Health, Cincinnati, OH,
ferences between analysts, microscopes, or 1977.pp.239123921.
other biasing factors. 8.5. Asbestos, Code of Federal Regulations
The following recount criterion is for a 29 CFR 1910.1001. 1971.
pair of counts that estimate AC in fibers/cc. 8.6. Occupational Exposure to Asbestos,
The criterion is given at the type-I error Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite. Final
level. That is, there is 5% maximum risk Rule, FEDERAL REGISTER 51: 119 (20 June
that we will reject a pair of counts for the 1986). pp.2261222790.
reason that one might be biased, when the 8.7. Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and
large observed difference is really due to Actinolite, Code of Federal Regulations
chance. 1910.1001. 1988. pp 711752.
Reject a pair of counts if: 8.8. Criteria for a Recommended Standard
Occupational Exposure to Asbestos (DHEW/
AC 2 AC1 > 2.78 NIOSH Pub. No. HSM 7210267), National In-
stitute for Occupational Safety and Health
NIOSH, Cincinnati, OH, 1972. pp. III1III24.
( )
AC AVG CVFB 8.9. Leidel, N.A., Bayer, S.G., Zumwalde,
R.D., Busch, K.A., USPHS/NIOSH Membrane
Where: Filter Method for Evaluating Airborne Asbestos
AC1 = lower estimated airborne fiber con- Fibers (DHEW/NIOSH Pub. No. 79127). Na-
centration tional Institute for Occupational Safety and
AC2 = higher estimated airborne fiber con- Health, Cincinnati, OH, 1979.
centration 8.10. Dixon, W.C., Applications of Optical Mi-
ACavg = average of the two concentration es- croscopy in Analysis of Asbestos and Quartz,
timates Analytical Techniques in Occupational
CVFB = CV for the average of the two con- Health Chemistry, edited by D.D. Dollberg
centration estimates and A.W. Verstuyft. Wash. D.C.: American
Chemical Society, (ACS Symposium Series
If a pair of counts are rejected by this cri- 120) 1980. pp. 1341.
terion then, recount the rest of the filters in
the submitted set. Apply the test and reject Quality Control
any other pairs failing the test. Rejection
shall include a memo to the industrial hy- The OSHA asbestos regulations require
gienist stating that the sample failed a sta- each laboratory to establish a quality con-
tistical test for homogeneity and the true air trol program. The following is presented as
concentration may be significantly different an example of how the OSHA-SLTC con-
than the reported value. structed its internal CV curve as part of
meeting this requirement. Data is from 395
7.4. Reporting Results samples collected during OSHA compliance
inspections and analyzed from October 1980
Report results to the industrial hygienist
through April 1986.
as fibers/cc. Use two significant figures. If
multiple analyses are performed on a sam- Each sample was counted by 2 to 5 dif-
ple, an average of the results is to be re- ferent counters independently of one an-
ported unless any of the results can be re- other. The standard deviation and the CV
jected for cause. statistic was calculated for each sample.
This data was then plotted on a graph of CV
8. References vs. fibers/mm2. A least squares regression
was performed using the following equation:
8.1. Dreesen, W.C., et al, U.S. Public Health
Service: A Study of Asbestosis in the Asbestos CV = antilog10[A(log10(x))2+B(log10(x))+C]
Textile Industry, (Public Health Bulletin No. Where:
241), US Treasury Dept., Washington, DC, x = the number of fibers/mm2
1938.
Application of least squares gave:
8.2. Asbestos Research Council: The Measure-
ment of Airborne Asbestos Dust by the Mem- A = 0.182205
brane Filter Method (Technical Note), Asbes- B = 0.973343
tos Research Council, Rockdale, Lancashire, C = 0.327499
Great Britain, 1969. Using these values, the equation becomes:
8.3. Bayer, S.G., Zumwalde, R.D., Brown, CV = antilog10[0.182205(log10 (x))20.973343(log
T.A., Equipment and Procedure for Mounting
10(x))+0.327499]
Millipore Filters and Counting Asbestos Fibers
by Phase Contrast Microscopy, Bureau of Oc- Sampling Pump Flow Rate Corrections
cupational Health, U.S. Dept. of Health, Edu-
cation and Welfare, Cincinnati,OH,1969. This correction is used if a difference
8.4. NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods, greater than 5% in ambient temperature and/
2nd ed., Vol. 1 (DHEW/NIOSH Pub. No. 77 or pressure is noted between calibration and
148
ER29JN95.001</MATH>
sampling sites and the pump does not com- (6) Let D=100 m. Calculate the circle di-
pensate for the differences. ameter, dc (mm), for the Walton-Beckett
graticule and specify the diameter when
making a purchase:
P T
Q act = Q cal cal act AL D
Pact Tcal dc =
PL
Where:
Example: If PL=108 m, AL=2.93 mm and
Qact = actual flow rate D=100 m, then,
Qcal = calibrated flow rate (if a rotameter was
used, the rotameter value) 2.93 100
Pcal = uncorrected air pressure at calibration dc = = 2.71mm
Pact = uncorrected air pressure at sampling
site
108
Tact = temperature at sampling site (K) (7) Each eyepiece-objective-reticle com-
Tcal = temperature at calibration (K) bination on the microscope must be cali-
brated. Should any of the three be changed
Walton-Beckett Graticule (by zoom adjustment, disassembly, replace-
When ordering the Graticule for asbestos ment, etc.), the combination must be recali-
counting, specify the exact disc diameter brated. Calibration may change if interpupil-
needed to fit the ocular of the microscope lary distance is changed.
and the diameter (mm) of the circular count- Measure the field diameter, D (acceptable
ing area. Instructions for measuring the di- range: 100 2 m) with a stage micrometer
mensions necessary are listed: upon receipt of the graticule from the manu-
(1) Insert any available graticule into the facturer. Determine the field area (mm2).
focusing eyepiece and focus so that the grati- Field Area= (D/2)2
cule lines are sharp and clear. If D=100 m=0.1 mm, then
(2) Align the microscope.
Field Area=(0.1 mm/2)2=0.00785 mm2
(3) Place a stage micrometer on the micro-
scope object stage and focus the microscope The Graticule is available from: Graticules
on the graduated lines. Ltd., Morley Road, Tonbridge TN9 IRN,
(4) Measure the magnified grid length, PL Kent, England (Telephone 01144732359061).
(m), using the stage micrometer. Also available from PTR Optics Ltd., 145
(5) Remove the graticule from the micro- Newton Street, Waltham, MA 02154 [tele-
scope and measure its actual grid length, AL phone (617) 8916000] or McCrone Accessories
(mm). This can be accomplished by using a and Components, 2506 S. Michigan Ave., Chi-
mechanical stage fitted with verniers, or a cago, IL 60616 [phone (312) 8427100]. The grat-
jewelers loupe with a direct reading scale. icule is custom made for each microscope.
ER10AU94.032</GPH>
ER10AU94.031</MATH>
149
ER10AU94.030</MATH>
COUNTS FOR THE FIBERS IN THE FIGURE

Structure No. Count Explanation
1 to 6 .................................... 1 Single fibers all contained within the circle.

7 ............................................
12 Fiber crosses circle once.
8 ............................................ 0 Fiber too short.
9 ............................................ 2 Two crossing fibers.
10 .......................................... 0 Fiber outside graticule.
11 .......................................... 0 Fiber crosses graticule twice.
12 .......................................... 12 Although split, fiber only crosses once.
150
ER10au94.008</GPH>
APPENDIX C TO 1915.1001QUALITATIVE AND fortable respirator from a selection includ-
QUANTITATIVE FIT TESTING PROCEDURES. ing respirators of various sizes from different
MANDATORY manufacturers. The selection shall include
at least five sizes of elastomeric half
Qualitative Fit Test Protocols facepieces, from at least two manufacturers.
I. ISOAMYL ACETATE PROTOCOL 2. The selection process shall be conducted
in a room separate from the fit-test chamber
A. Odor threshold screening. 1. Three 1- to prevent odor fatigue. Prior to the selec-
liter glass jars with metal lids (e.g. Mason or tion process, the test subject shall be shown
Bell jars) are required. how to put on a respirator, how it should be
2. Odor-free water (e.g. distilled or spring positioned on the face, how to set strap ten-
water) at approximately 25 C shall be used sion and how to determine a comfortable
for the solutions. respirator. A mirror shall be available to as-
3. The isoamyl acetate (IAA) (also known sist the subject in evaluating the fit and po-
as isopentyl acetate) stock solution is pre- sitioning of the respirator. This instruction
pared by adding 1 cc of pure IAA to 800 cc of may not constitute the subjects formal
odor free water in a 1-liter jar and shaking training on respirator use, as it is only a re-
for 30 seconds. This solution shall be pre- view.
pared new at least weekly. 3. The test subject should understand that
4. The screening test shall be conducted in the employee is being asked to select the res-
a room separate from the room used for ac- pirator which provides the most comfortable
tual fit testing. The two rooms shall be well fit. Each respirator represents a different
ventilated but shall not be connected to the size and shape and, if fit properly and used
same recirculating ventilation system. properly will provide adequate protection.
5. The odor test solution is prepared in a
4. The test subject holds each facepiece up
second jar by placing 0.4 cc of the stock solu-
to the face and eliminates those which obvi-
tion into 500 cc of odor free water using a
ously do not give a comfortable fit. Nor-
clean dropper or pipette. Shake for 30 sec-
mally, selection will begin with a half-mask
onds and allow to stand for two to three min-
and if a good fit cannot be found, the subject
utes so that the IAA concentration above the
will be asked to test the full facepiece res-
liquid may reach equilibrium. This solution
pirators. (A small percentage of users will
may be used for only one day.
not be able to wear any half-mask.)
6. A test blank is prepared in a third jar by
adding 500 cc of odor free water. 5. The more comfortable facepieces are
7. The odor test and test blank jars shall be noted; the most comfortable mask is donned
labelled 1 and 2 for jar identification. If the and worn at least five minutes to assess com-
labels are put on the lids they can be periodi- fort. All donning and adjustments of the
cally peeled, dried off and switched to main- facepiece shall be performed by the test sub-
tain the integrity of the test. ject without assistance from the test con-
8. The following instructions shall be typed ductor or other person. Assistance in assess-
on a card and placed on the table in front of ing comfort can be given by discussing the
the two test jars (i.e. 1 and 2): The purpose points in #6 below. If the test subject is not
of this test is to determine if you can smell familiar with using a particular respirator,
banana oil at a low concentration. The two the test subject shall be directed to don the
bottles in front of you contain water. One of mask several times and to adjust the straps
these bottles also contains a small amount each time to become adept at setting proper
of banana oil. Be sure the covers are on tension on the straps.
tight, then shake each bottle for two sec- 6. Assessment of comfort shall include re-
onds. Unscrew the lid of each bottle, one at viewing the following points with the test
a time, and sniff at the mouth of the bottle. subject and allowing the test subject ade-
Indicate to the test conductor which bottle quate time to determine the comfort of the
contains banana oil. respirator:
9. The mixtures used in the IAA odor de- Positioning of mask on nose.
tection test shall be prepared in an area sep- Room for eye protection.
arate from where the test is performed, in Room to talk.
order to prevent olfactory fatigue in the sub- Positioning mask on face and cheeks.
ject. 7. The following criteria shall be used to
10. If the test subject is unable to correctly help determine the adequacy of the res-
identify the jar containing the odor test so- pirator fit:
lution, the IAA qualitative fit test may not Chin properly placed.
be used. Strap tension.
11. If the test subject correctly identifies Fit across nose bridge.
the jar containing the odor test solution, the Distance from nose to chin.
test subject may proceed to respirator selec- Tendency to slip.
tion and fit testing. Self-observation in mirror.
B. Respirator Selection. 1. The test subject 8. The test subject shall conduct the con-
shall be allowed to pick the most com- ventional negative and positive-pressure fit
151
checks (e.g. see ANSI Z88.21980). Before con- Rainbow Passage
ducting the negative- or positive-pressure
When the sunlight strikes raindrops in the
test the subject shall be told to seat the air, they act like a prism and form a rain-
mask by rapidly moving the head from side- bow. The rainbow is a division of white light
to-side and up and down, while taking a few into many beautiful colors. These take the
deep breaths. shape of a long round arch, with its path
9. The test subject is now ready for fit test- high above, and its two ends apparently be-
ing. yond the horizon. There is, according to leg-
10. After passing the fit test, the test sub- end, a boiling pot of gold at one end. People
ject shall be questioned again regarding the look, but no one ever finds it. When a man
comfort of the respirator. If it has become looks for something beyond reach, his
uncomfortable, another model of respirator friends say he is looking for the pot of gold
shall be tried. at the end of the rainbow.
11. The employee shall be given the oppor- 5. Each test subject shall wear the res-
tunity to select a different facepiece and be pirator for at a least 10 minutes before start-
retested if the chosen facepiece becomes ining the fit test.
creasingly uncomfortable at any time. 6. Upon entering the test chamber, the test
C. Fit test. 1. The fit test chamber shall be subject shall be given a 6 inch by 5 inch piece
of paper towel or other porous absorbent sin-
similar to a clear 55 gal drum liner sus-
gle ply material, folded in half and wetted
pended inverted over a 2 foot diameter
with three-quarters of one cc of pure IAA.
frame, so that the top of the chamber is
The test subject shall hang the wet towel on
about 6 inches above the test subjects head. the hook at the top of the chamber.
The inside top center of the chamber shall 7. Allow two minutes for the IAA test con-
have a small hook attached. centration to be reached before starting the
2. Each respirator used for the fitting and fit-test exercises. This would be an appro-
fit testing shall be equipped with organic priate time to talk with the test subject, to
vapor cartridges or offer protection against explain the fit test, the importance of co-
organic vapors. The cartridges or masks operation, the purpose for the head exercises,
shall be changed at least weekly. or to demonstrate some of the exercises.
3. After selecting, donning, and properly 8. Each exercise described in #4 above shall
adjusting a respirator, the test subject shall be performed for at least one minute.
wear it to the fit testing room. This room 9. If at any time during the test, the sub-
shall be separate from the room used for ject detects the banana-like odor of IAA, the
odor threshold screening and respirator se- test has failed. The subject shall quickly exit
lection, and shall be well ventilated, as by an from the test chamber and leave the test
exhaust fan or lab hood, to prevent general area to avoid olfactory fatigue.
room contamination. 10. If the test is failed, the subject shall re-
4. A copy of the following test exercises turn to the selection room and remove the
respirator, repeat the odor sensitivity test,
and rainbow passage shall be taped to the in-
select and put on another respirator, return
side of the test chamber:
to the test chamber, and again begin the pro-
Test Exercises cedure described in the c(4) through c(8)
above. The process continues until a res-
i. Breathe normally. pirator that fits well has been found. Should
ii. Breathe deeply. Be certain breaths are the odor sensitivity test be failed, the sub-
deep and regular. ject shall wait about 5 minutes before re-
iii. Turn head all the way from one side to testing. Odor sensitivity will usually have
the other. Inhale on each side. Be certain returned by this time.
movement is complete. Do not bump the res- 11. If a person cannot pass the fit test de-
pirator against the shoulders. scribed above wearing a half-mask respirator
iv. Nod head up-and-down. Inhale when from the available selection, full facepiece
head is in the full up position (looking to- models must be used.
12. When a respirator is found that passes
ward ceiling). Be certain motions are com-
the test, the subject breaks the faceseal and
plete and made about every second. Do not
takes a breath before exiting the chamber.
bump the respirator on the chest.
This is to assure that the reason the test
v. Talking. Talk aloud and slowly for sev- subject is not smelling the IAA is the good
eral minutes. The following paragraph is fit of the respirator facepiece seal and not ol-
called the Rainbow Passage. Reading it will factory fatigue.
result in a wide range of facial movements, 13. When the test subject leaves the cham-
and thus be useful to satisfy this require- ber, the subject shall remove the saturated
ment. Alternative passages which serve the towel and return it to the person conducting
same purpose may also be used. the test. To keep the area from becoming
vi. Jogging in place. contaminated, the used towels shall be kept
vii. Breathe normally. in a self-sealing bag so there is no significant
152
IAA concentration buildup in the test cham- respirator shall be equipped with a particu-
ber during subsequent tests. late filter.
14. At least two facepieces shall be selected B. Taste Threshold Screening
for the IAA test protocol. The test subject 1. An enclosure about head and shoulders
shall be given the opportunity to wear them shall be used for threshold screening (to de-
for one week to choose the one which is more termine if the individual can taste sac-
comfortable to wear. charin) and for fit testing. The enclosure
15. Persons who have successfully passed shall be approximately 12 inches in diameter
this fit test with a half-mask respirator may by 14 inches tall with at least the front clear
be assigned the use of the test respirator in to allow free movement of the head when a
atmospheres with up to 10 times the PEL of respirator is worn.
airborne asbestos. In atmospheres greater 2. The test enclosure shall have a three-
than 10 times, and less than 100 times the quarter inch hole in front of the test sub-
PEL (up to 100 ppm), the subject must pass jects nose and mouth area to accommodate
the IAA test using a full face negative pres- the nebulizer nozzle.
sure respirator. (The concentration of the 3. The entire screening and testing proce-
1AA inside the test chamber must be in- dure shall be explained to the test subject
creased by ten times for QLFT of the full prior to conducting the screening test.
facepiece.) 4. During the threshold screening test, the
16. The test shall not be conducted if there test subject shall don the test enclosure and
is any hair growth between the skin the face- breathe with open mouth with tongue ex-
piece sealing surface. tended.
17. If hair growth or apparel interfere with 5. Using a DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation
a satisfactory fit, then they shall be altered Medication Nebulizer or equivalent, the test
or removed so as to eliminate interference conductor shall spray the threshold check
and allow a satisfactory fit. If a satisfactory solution into the enclosure. This nebulizer
fit is still not attained, the test subject must shall be clearly marked to distinguish it
use a positive-pressure respirator such as from the fit test solution nebulizer.
powered air-purifying respirators, supplied 6. The threshold check solution consists of
air respirator, or self-contained breathing 0.83 grams of sodium saccharin, USP in
apparatus. water. It can be prepared by putting 1 cc of
18. If a test subject exhibits difficulty in the test solution (see C 7 below) in 100 cc of
breathing during the tests, she or he shall be water.
referred to a physician trained in respirator 7. To produce the aerosol, the nebulizer
diseases or pulmonary medicine to deter- bulb is firmly squeezed so that it collapses
mine whether the test subject can wear a completely, then is released and allowed to
respirator while performing her or his duties. fully expand.
19. Qualitative fit testing shall be repeated 8. Ten squeezes of the nebulizer bulb are re-
at least every six months. peated rapidly and then the test subject is
20. In addition, because the sealing of the asked whether the saccharin can be tasted.
respirator may be affected, qualitative fit 9. If the first response is negative, ten
testing shall be repeated immediately when more squeezes of the nebulizer bulb are re-
the test subject has a: peated rapidly and the test subject is again
(1) Weight change of 20 pounds or more, asked whether the saccharin can be tasted.
(2) Significant facial scarring in the area of 10. If the second response is negative ten
the facepiece seal, more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the
(3) Significant dental changes; i.e.; mul- test subject is again asked whether the sac-
tiple extractions without prothesis, or ac- charin can be tasted.
quiring dentures, 11. The test conductor will take note of the
(4) Reconstructive or cosmetic surgery, or number of squeezes required to elicit a taste
(5) Any other condition that may interfere response.
with facepiece sealing. 12. If the saccharin is not tasted after 30
D. Recordkeeping. A summary of all test re- squeezes (Step 10), the saccharin fit test can-
sults shall be maintained in each office for 3 not be performed on the test subject.
years. The summary shall include: 13. If a taste response is elicited, the test
(1) Name of test subject. subject shall be asked to take note of the
(2) Date of testing. taste for reference in the fit test.
(3) Name of the test conductor. 14. Correct use of the nebulizer means that
(4) Respirators selected (indicate manufac- approximately 1 cc of liquid is used at a time
turer, model, size and approval number). in the nebulizer body.
(5) Testing agent. 15. The nebulizer shall be thoroughly
rinsed in water, shaken dry, and refilled at
II. SACCHARIN SOLUTION AEROSOL PROTOCOL
least every four hours.
A. Respirator selection. Respirators shall be C. Fit test. 1. The test subject shall don and
selected as described in section IB (res- adjust the respirator without the assistance
pirator selection) above, except that each from any person.
153
2. The fit test uses the same enclosure de- looks for something beyond his reach, his
scribed in IIB above. friends say he is looking for the pot of gold
3. Each test subject shall wear the res- at the end of the rainbow.
pirator for a least 10 minutes before starting 11. At the beginning of each exercise, the
the fit test. aerosol concentration shall be replenished
4. The test subject shall don the enclosure using one-half the number of squeezes as ini-
while wearing the respirator selected in sec- tially described in C9.
tion IB above. This respirator shall be prop- 12. The test subject shall indicate to the
erly adjusted and equipped with a particu- test conductor if at any time during the fit
late filter. test the taste of saccharin is detected.
5. The test subject may not eat, drink (ex- 13. If the saccharin is detected the fit is
cept plain water), or chew gum for 15 min- deemed unsatisfactory and a different res-
utes before the test. pirator shall be tried.
6. A second DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation 14. At least two facepieces shall be selected
Medication Nebulizer is used to spray the fit by the IAA test protocol. The test subject
test solution into the enclosure. This shall be given the opportunity to wear them
nebulizer shall be clearly marked to distin- for one week to choose the one which is more
guish it from the screening test solution comfortable to wear.
nebulizer. 15. Successful completion of the test pro-
7. The fit test solution is prepared by add- tocol shall allow the use of the half mask
ing 83 grams of sodium saccharin to 100 cc of tested respirator in contaminated
warm water. atmospheres up to 10 times the PEL of asbes-
8. As before, the test subject shall breathe tos. In other words this protocol may be used
with mouth open and tongue extended. to assign protection factors no higher than
9. The nebulizer is inserted into the hole in ten.
the front of the enclosure and the fit test so- 16. The test shall not be conducted if there
lution is sprayed into the enclosure using is any hair growth between the skin and the
the same technique as for the taste threshold facepiece sealing surface.
screening and the same number of squeezes 17. If hair growth or apparel interfere with
required to elicit a taste response in the a satisfactory fit, then they shall be altered
screening. (See B8 through B10 above). or removed so as to eliminate interference
10. After generation of the aerosol read the and allow a satisfactory fit. If a satisfactory
following instructions to the test subject. fit is still not attained, the test subject must
The test subject shall perform the exercises use a positive-pressure respirator such as
for one minute each. powered air-purifying respirators, supplied
i. Breathe normally. air respirator, or self-contained breathing
ii. Breathe deeply. Be certain breaths are apparatus.
deep and regular. 18. If a test subject exhibits difficulty in
iii. Turn head all the way from one side to breathing during the tests, she or he shall be
the other. Be certain movement is complete. referred to a physician trained in respirator
Inhale on each side. Do not bump the res- diseases or pulmonary medicine to deter-
pirator against the shoulders. mine whether the test subject can wear a
iv. Nod head up-and-down. Be certain mo- respirator while performing her or his duties.
tions are complete. Inhale when head is in 19. Qualitative fit testing shall be repeated
the full up position (when looking toward at least every six months.
the ceiling). Do not to bump the respirator 20. In addition, because the sealing of the
on the chest. respirator may be affected, qualitative fit
v. Talking. Talk aloud and slowly for sev- testing shall be repeated immediately when
eral minutes. The following paragraph is the test subject has a:
called the Rainbow Passage. Reading it will (1) Weight change of 20 pounds or more,
result in a wide range of facial movements, (2) Significant facial scarring in the area of
and thus be useful to satisfy this require- the facepiece seal,
ment. Alternative passages which serve the (3) Significant dental changes; i.e.; mul-
same purpose may also be used. tiple extractions without prothesis, or ac-
vi. Jogging in place. quiring dentures,
vii. Breathe normally. (4) Reconstructive or cosmetic surgery, or
Rainbow Passage (5) Any other condition that may interfere
with facepiece sealing.
When the sunlight strikes raindrops in the D. Recordkeeping. A summary of all test re-
air, they act like a prism and form a rain- sults shall be maintained in each office for 3
bow. The rainbow is a division of white light years. The summary shall include:
into many beautiful colors. These take the (1) Name of test subject
shape of a long round arch, with its path (2) Date of testing.
high above, and its two ends apparently be- (3) Name of test conductor.
yond the horizon. There is, according to leg- (4) Respirators selected (indicate manufac-
end, a boiling pot of gold at one end. People turer, model, size and approval number).
look, but no one ever finds it. When a man (5) Testing agent.
154
III. Irritant Fume Protocol Rainbow Passage
A. Respirator selection. Respirators shall be When the sunlight strikes raindrops in the
selected as described in section IB above, ex- air, they act like a prism and form a rain-
cept that each respirator shall be equipped bow. The rainbow is a division of white light
with a combination of high-efficiency and into many beautiful colors. These take the
acid-gas cartridges. shape of a long round arch, with its path
B. Fit test. 1. The test subject shall be al- high above, and its two end apparently be-
lowed to smell a weak concentration of the yond the horizon. There is, according to leg-
end, a boiling pot of gold at one end. People
irritant smoke to familiarize the subject
look, but no one ever finds it. When a man
with the characteristic odor.
looks for something beyond his reach, his
2. The test subject shall properly don the friends say he is looking for the pot of gold
respirator selected as above, and wear it for at the end of the rainbow.
at least 10 minutes before starting the fit vi. Jogging in Place.
test. vii. Breathe normally.
3. The test conductor shall review this pro- 9. The test subject shall indicate to the
tocol with the test subject before testing. test conductor if the irritant smoke is de-
4. The test subject shall perform the con- tected. If smoke is detected, the test con-
ventional positive pressure and negative ductor shall stop the test. In this case, the
pressure fit checks (see ANSI Z88.2 1980). tested respirator is rejected and another res-
Failure of either check shall be cause to se- pirator shall be selected.
lect an alternate respirator. 10. Each test subject passing the smoke
5. Break both ends of a ventilation smoke test (i.e. without detecting the smoke) shall
tube containing stannic oxychloride, such as be given a sensitivity check of smoke from
the MSA part #5645, or equivalent. Attach a the same tube to determine if the test sub-
short length of tubing to one end of the ject reacts to the smoke. Failure to evoke a
smoke tube. Attach the other end of the response shall void the fit test.
smoke tube to a low pressure air pump set to 11. Steps B4, B9, B10 of this fit test pro-
tocol shall be performed in a location with
deliver 200 milliliters per minute.
exhaust ventilation sufficient to prevent
6. Advise the test subject that the smoke
general contamination of the testing area by
can be irritating to the eyes and instruct the the test agents.
subject to keep the eyes closed while the test 12. At least two facepieces shall be selected
is performed. by the IAA test protocol. The test subject
7. The test conductor shall direct the shall be given the opportunity to wear them
stream of irritant smoke from the tube to- for one week to choose the one which is more
wards the faceseal area of the test subject. comfortable to wear.
The person conducting the test shall begin 13. Respirators successfully tested by the
with the tube at least 12 inches from the protocol may be used in contaminated
facepiece and gradually move to within one atmospheres up to ten times the PEL of as-
inch, moving around the whole perimeter of bestos.
the mask. 14. The test shall not be conducted if there
8. The test subject shall be instructed to do is any hair growth between the skin and the
the following exercises while the respirator facepiece sealing surface.
is being challenged by the smoke. Each exer- 15. If hair growth or apparel interfere with
cise shall be performed for one minute. a satisfactory fit, then they shall be altered
i. Breathe normally. or removed so as to eliminate interference
ii. Breathe deeply. Be certain breaths are and allow a satisfactory fit. If a satisfactory
deep and regular. fit is still not attained, the test subject must
use a positive-pressure respirator such as
iii. Turn head all the way from one side to
powered air-purifying respirators, supplied
the other. Be certain movement is complete.
air respirator, or self-contained breathing
Inhale on each side. Do not bump the res-
apparatus.
pirator against the shoulders.
16. If a test subject exhibits difficulty in
iv. Nod head up-and-down. Be certain mo- breathing during the tests, she or he shall be
tions are complete and made every second. referred to a physician trained in respirator
Inhale when head is in the full up position diseases or pulmonary medicine to deter-
(looking toward ceiling). Do not bump the mine whether the test subject can wear a
respirator against the chest. respirator while performing her or his duties.
v. Talking. Talk aloud and slowly for sev- 17. Qualitative fit testing shall be repeated
eral minutes. The following paragraph is at least every six months.
called the Rainbow Passage. Reading it will 18. In addition, because the sealing of the
result in a wide range of facial movements, respirator may be affected, qualitative fit
and thus be useful to satisfy this require- testing shall be repeated immediately when
ment. Alternative passages which serve the the test subject has a:
same purpose may also be used. (1) Weight change of 20 pounds or more,
155
(2) Significant facial scarring in the area of lated from the ambient air yet uniform in
the facepiece seal, concentration throughout the chamber.
(3) Significant dental changes; i.e.; mul- c. When testing air-purifying respirators,
tiple extractions without prothesis, or ac- the normal filter or cartridge element shall
quiring dentures, be replaced with a high-efficiency particular
(4) Reconstructive or cosmetic surgery, or filter supplied by the same manufacturer.
(5) Any other condition that may interfere d. The sampling instrument shall be se-
with facepiece sealing. lected so that a strip chart record may be
D. Recordkeeping. A summary of all test re- made of the test showing the rise and fall of
sults shall be maintained in each office for 3 challenge agent concentration with each in-
years. The summary shall include: spiration and expiration at fit factors of at
(1) Name of test subject least 2,000.
(2) Date of testing. e. The combination of substitute air-puri-
(3) Name of test conductor. fying elements (if any), challenge agent, and
(4) Respirators selected (indicate manufac- challenge agent concentration in the test
turer, model, size and approval number). chamber shall be such that the test subject
(5) Testing agent is not exposed in excess of PEL to the chal-
lenge agent at any time during the testing
Quantitative Fit Test Procedures process.
f. The sampling port on the test specimen
1. General respirator shall be placed and constructed so
a. The method applies to negative-pressure that there is no detectable leak around the
non-powered air-purifying respirators only. port, a free air flow is allowed into the sam-
b. The employer shall assign one individual pling line at all times and so there is no in-
who shall assume the full responsibility for terference with the fit or performance of the
implementing the respirator quantitative fit respirator.
test program. g. The test chamber and test set-up shall
permit the person administering the test to
2. Definition observe one test subject inside the chamber
during the test.
a. Quantitative Fit Test means the h. The equipment generating the challenge
measurement of the effectiveness of a res- atmosphere shall maintain the concentra-
pirator seal in excluding the ambient atmos- tion of challenge agent constant within a 10
phere. The test is performed by dividing the percent variation for the duration of the
measured concentration of challenge agent test.
in a test chamber by the measured con- i. The time lag (interval between an event
centration of the challenge agent inside the and its being recorded on the strip chart) of
respirator facepiece when the normal air pu- the instrumentation may not exceed 2 sec-
rifying element has been replaced by an es- onds.
sentially perfect purifying element. j. The tubing for the test chamber atmos-
b. Challenge Agent means the air con- phere and for the respirator sampling port
taminant introduced into a test chamber so shall be the same diameter, length and mate-
that its concentration inside and outside the rial. It shall be kept as short as possible. The
respirator may be compared. smallest diameter tubing recommended by
c. Test Subject means the person wear- the manufacturer shall be used.
ing the respirator for quantitative fit test- k. The exhaust flow from the test chamber
ing. shall pass through a high-efficiency filter be-
d. Normal Standing Position means fore release to the room.
standing erect and straight with arms down l. When sodium chloride aerosol is used,
along the sides and looking straight ahead. the relative humidity inside the test cham-
e. Fit Factor means the ratio of chal- ber shall not exceed 50 percent.
lenge agent concentration outside with re-
spect to the inside of a respirator inlet cov- 4. Procedural Requirements
ering (facepiece or enclosure). a. The fitting of half-mask respirators
3. Apparatus should be started with those having multiple
sizes and a variety of interchangeable car-
a. Instrumentation. Corn oil, sodium chlo- tridges and canisters such as the MSA Comfo
ride or other appropriate aerosol generation, II-M, Norton M, Survivair M, A-O M, or
dilution, and measurement systems shall be Scott-M. Use either of the tests outlined
used for quantitative fit test. below to assure that the facepiece is properly
b. Test chamber. The test chamber shall be adjusted.
large enough to permit all test subjects to (1) Positive pressure test. With the exhaust
freely perform all required exercises without port(s) blocked, the negative pressure of
distributing the challenge agent concentra- slight inhalation should remain constant for
tion or the measurement apparatus. The test several seconds.
chamber shall be equipped and constructed (2) Negative pressure test. With the intake
so that the challenge agent is effectively iso- port(s) blocked, the negative pressure slight
156
inhalation should remain constant for sev- breathing for at least one minute pausing so
eral seconds. as not to hyperventilate.
b. After a facepiece is adjusted, the test c. Turning head side to side (SS). Standing in
subject shall wear the facepiece for at least place the subject shall slowly turn his/her
5 minutes before conducting a qualitative head from side between the extreme posi-
test by using either of the methods described tions to each side. The head shall be held at
below and using the exercise regime de- each extreme position for at least 5 seconds.
scribed in 5.a., b., c., d. and e. Perform for at least three complete cycles.
(1) Isoamyl acetate test. When using organic
vapor cartridges, the test subject who can d. Moving head up and down (UD). Standing
smell the odor should be unable to detect the in place, the subject shall slowly move his/
odor of isoamyl acetate squirted into the air her head up and down between the extreme
near the most vulnerable portions of the position straight up and the extreme posi-
facepiece seal. In a location which is sepa- tion straight down. The head shall be held at
rated from the test area, the test subject each extreme position for at least 5 seconds.
shall be instructed to close her/his eyes dur- Perform for at least three complete cycles.
ing the test period. A combination cartridge e. Reading (R). The subject shall read out
or canister with organic vapor and high-effi- slowly and loud so as to be heard clearly by
ciency filters shall be used when available the test conductor or monitor. The test sub-
for the particular mask being tested. The ject shall read the rainbow passage at the
test subject shall be given an opportunity to end of this section.
smell the odor of isoamyl acetate before the f. Grimace (G). The test subject shall grim-
test is conducted. ace, smile, frown, and generally contort the
(2) Irritant fume test. When using high-effi- face using the facial muscles. Continue for at
ciency filters, the test subject should be un-
least 15 seconds.
able to detect the odor of irritant fume
(stannic chloride or titanium tetrachloride g. Bend over and touch toes (B). The test
ventilation smoke tubes) squirted into the subject shall bend at the waist and touch
air near the most vulnerable portions of the toes and return to upright position. Repeat
facepiece seal. The test subject shall be infor at least 30 seconds.
structed to close her/his eyes during the test h. Jogging in place (J). The test subject
period. shall perform jog in place for at least 30 sec-
c. The test subject may enter the quan- onds.
titative testing chamber only if she or he has i. Normal Breathing (NB). Same as exercise
obtained a satisfactory fit as stated in 4.b. of a.
this appendix.
d. Before the subject enters the test cham- Rainbow Passage
ber, a reasonably stable challenge agent con-
centration shall be measured in the test When the sunlight strikes raindrops in the
chamber. air, they act like a prism and form a rain-
e. Immediately after the subject enters the bow. The rainbow is a division of white light
test chamber, the challenge agent concentra- into many beautiful colors. These take the
tion inside the respirator shall be measured shape of a long round arch, with its path
to ensure that the peak penetration does not high above, and its two ends apparently be-
exceed 5 percent for a half-mask and 1 per- yond the horizon. There is, according to leg-
cent for a full facepiece. end, a boiling pot of gold at one end. People
f. A stable challenge agent concentration look, but no one ever finds it. When a man
shall be obtained prior to the actual start of looks for something beyond reach, his
testing. friends say he is looking for the pot of gold
1. Respirator restraining straps may not be at the end of the rainbow.
over-tightened for testing. The straps shall
be adjusted by the wearer to give a reason- 6. Test Termination.
ably comfortable fit typical of normal use.
The test shall be terminated whenever any
5. Exercise Regime. single peak penetration exceeds 5 percent for
Prior to entering the test chamber, the half-masks and 1 percent for full facepieces.
test subject shall be given complete instruc- The test subject may be refitted and re-
tions as to her/his part in the test proce- tested. If two of the three required tests are
dures. The test subject shall perform the fol- terminated, the fit shall be deemed inad-
lowing exercises, in the order given, for each equate. (See paragraph 4.h)
independent test. 6. The test shall be terminated whenever
a. Normal Breathing (NB). In the normal any single peak penetration exceeds 5 per-
standing position, without talking, the sub- cent for half-masks and 1 percent for full
ject shall breathe normally for at least one facepieces. The test subject may be refitted
minute. and retested. If two the three required tests
b. Deep Breathing (DB). In the normal are terminated, the fit shall be deemed inad-
standing position the subject shall do deep equate. (See paragraph 4.h.).
157
7. Calculation of Fit Factors (3) Protection factors obtained through
each manufacturer, model and approval
a. The fit factor determined by the quan-
number of respirator tested.
titative fit test equals the average con-
centration inside the respirator. (4) Name and signature of the person that
b. The average test chamber concentration conducted the test.
is the arithmetic average of the test cham- f. Filters used for qualitative or quan-
ber concentration at the beginning and of titative fit testing shall be replaced weekly,
the end of the test. whenever increased breathing resistance is
c. The average peak concentration of the encountered, or when the test agent has al-
challenge agent inside the respirator shall be tered the integrity of the filter media. Or-
the arithmetic average peak concentrations ganic vapor cartridges/canisters shall be re-
for each of the nine exercises of the test placed daily or sooner if there is any indica-
which are computed as the arithmetic aver- tion of breakthrough by the test agent.
age of the peak concentrations found for 10. In addition, because the sealing of the
each breath during the exercise. respirator may be affected, quantitative fit
d. The average peak concentration for an testing shall be repeated immediately when
exercise may be determined graphically if the test subject has a:
there is not a great variation in the peak (1) Weight change of 20 pounds or more,
concentrations during a single exercise. (2) Significant facial scarring in the area of
the facepiece seal,
8. Interpretation of Test Results. (3) Significant dental changes; i.e.; mul-
The fit factor measured by the quan- tiple extractions without prothesis, or ac-
titative fit testing shall be the lowest of the quiring dentures,
three protection factors resulting from three (4) Reconstructive or cosmetic surgery, or
independent tests. (5) Any other condition that may interfere
with facepiece sealing.
9. Other Requirements
a. The test subject shall not be permitted 11. Recordkeeping
to wear a half-mask or full facepiece mask if A summary of all test results shall be
the minimum fit factor of 100 or 1,000, respec- maintained in for 3 years. The summary
tively, cannot be obtained. If hair growth or shall include:
apparel interfere with a satisfactory fit, then (1) Name of test subject
they shall be altered or removed so as to (2) Date of testing.
eliminate interference and allow a satisfac- (3) Name of the test conductor.
tory fit. If a satisfactory fit is still not at- (4) Fit factors obtained from every res-
tained, the test subject must use a positive-
pirator tested (indicate manufacturer,
pressure respirator such as powered air-puri-
model, size and approval number).
fying respirators, supplied air respirator, or
self-contained breathing apparatus. APPENDIX D TO 1915.1001MEDICAL
b. The test shall not be conducted if there QUESTIONNAIRES. MANDATORY
is any hair growth between the skin and the
facepiece sealing surface. This mandatory appendix contains the
c. If a test subject exhibits difficulty in medical questionnaires that must be admin-
breathing during the tests, she or he shall be istered to all employees who are exposed to
referred to a physician trained in respirator asbestos, tremolite, anthophyllite, actino-
diseases or pulmonary medicine to deter- lite, or a combination of these minerals
mine whether the test subject can wear a above the permissible exposure limit (0.1 f/
respirator while performing her or his duties. cc), and who will therefore be included in
d. The test subject shall be given the op- their employers medical surveillance pro-
portunity to wear the assigned respirator for gram. Part 1 of the appendix contains the
one week. If the respirator does not provide Initial Medical Questionnaire, which must be
a satisfactory fit during actual use, the test obtained for all new hires who will be cov-
subject may request another QNFT which ered by the medical surveillance require-
shall be performed immediately. ments. Part 2 includes the abbreviated Peri-
e. A respirator fit factor card shall be odical Medical Questionnaire, which must be
issued to the test subject with the following administered to all employees who are pro-
information: vided periodic medical examinations under
(1) Name the medical surveillance provisions of the
(2) Date of fit test. standard.
158
159
ER10AU94.009</GPH>
160
ER10AU94.010</GPH>
161
ER10AU94.011</GPH>
162
ER10AU94.012</GPH>
163
ER10AU94.013</GPH>
164
ER10AU94.014</GPH>
165
ER10AU94.015</GPH>
166
ER10AU94.016</GPH>
167
ER10AU94.017</GPH>
168
ER10AU94.018</GPH>
169
ER10AU94.019</GPH>
170
ER10AU94.020</GPH>
171
ER10AU94.021</GPH>
ER10AU94.023</GPH>
172
ER10AU94.022</GPH>
APPENDIX E TO 1915.1001INTERPRETATION sions governing the construction and testing
AND CLASSIFICATION OF CHEST ROENTGENO- of negative pressure enclosures. The first
GRAMS. MANDATORY category includes the requirement for use of
wet methods, HEPA vacuums, and imme-
(a) Chest roentgenograms shall be inter-
preted and classified in accordance with a diate bagging of waste; Class I work must
professionally accepted classification system conform to the following provisions:
and recorded on an interpretation form fol- oversight by competent person
lowing the format of the CDC/NIOSH (M) 2.8 use of critical barriers over all openings
form. As a minimum, the content within the to work area
bold lines of this form (items 1 through 4) isolation of HVAC systems
shall be included. This form is not to be sub- use of impermeable dropcloths and cov-
mitted to NIOSH. erage of all objects within regulated areas
(b) Roentgenograms shall be interpreted In addition, more specific requirements for
and classified only by a B-reader, a board eli- NPEs include:
gible/certified radiologist, or an experienced maintenance of 0.02 inches water gauge
physician with known expertise in within enclosure
pneumoconioses. manometric measurements
(c) All interpreters, whenever interpreting air movement away from employees per-
chest roentgenograms made under this sec- forming removal work
tion, shall have immediately available for smoke testing or equivalent for detection
reference a complete set of the ILO-U/C of leaks and air direction
International Classification of Radiographs deactivation of electrical circuits, if not
for Pneumoconioses, 1980. provided with ground-fault circuit inter-
rupters.
APPENDIX F TO 1915.1001WORK PRACTICES
AND ENGINEERING CONTROLS FOR CLASS I Planning the Project
ASBESTOS OPERATIONS NON-MANDATORY The standard requires that an exposure as-
This is a non-mandatory appendix to the sessment be conducted before the asbestos
asbestos standards for construction and for job is begun 1915.1001(f)(1). Information
shipyards. It describes criteria and proce- needed for that assessment, includes data re-
dures for erecting and using negative pres- lating to prior similar jobs, as applied to the
sure enclosures for Class I Asbestos Work, specific variables of the current job. The in-
when NPEs are used as an allowable control formation needed to conduct the assessment
method to comply with paragraph (g)(5) (i) of will be useful in planning the project, and in
this section. Many small and variable details complying with any reporting requirements
are involved in the erection of a negative under this standard, when significant
pressure enclosure. OSHA and most partici- changes are being made to a control system
pants in the rulemaking agreed that only the listed in the standard, [see paragraph (k) of
major, more performance oriented criteria this section], as well as those of USEPA (40
should be made mandatory. These criteria CFR part 61, subpart M). Thus, although the
are set out in paragraph (g) of this section. standard does not explicitly require the prep-
In addition, this appendix includes these aration of a written asbestos removal plan,
mandatory specifications and procedures in the usual constituents of such a plan, i.e., a
its guidelines in order to make this appendix description of the enclosure, the equipment,
coherent and helpful. The mandatory nature and the procedures to be used throughout the
of the criteria which appear in the regu- project, must be determined before the en-
latory text is not changed because they are closure can be erected. The following infor-
included in this non-mandatory appendix. mation should be included in the planning of
Similarly, the additional criteria and proce- the system:
dures included as guidelines in the appendix, A physical description of the work area;
do not become mandatory because manda- A description of the approximate amount
tory criteria are also included in these com- of material to be removed;
prehensive guidelines. A schedule for turning off and sealing ex-
In addition, none of the criteria, both man- isting ventilation systems;
datory and recommended, are meant to Personnel hygiene procedures;
specify or imply the need for use of patented A description of personal protective equip-
or licensed methods or equipment. Rec- ment and clothing to worn by employees;
ommended specifications included in this at- A description of the local exhaust ventila-
tachment should not discourage the use of tion systems to be used and how they are to
creative alternatives which can be shown to be tested;
reliably achieve the objectives of negative- A description of work practices to be ob-
pressure enclosures. served by employees;
Requirements included in this appendix, An air monitoring plan;
cover general provisions to be followed in all A description of the method to be used to
asbestos jobs, provisions which must be fol- transport waste material; and
lowed for all Class I asbestos jobs, and provi- The location of the dump site.
173
Materials and Equipment Necessary for Asbestos See paragraphs (h) and (i) of this section
Removal for appropriate respiratory protection and
protective clothing.
Although individual asbestos removal See paragraph (k) of this section for re-
projects vary in terms of the equipment required signs and labels.
quired to accomplish the removal of the ma-
terials, some equipment and materials are Preparing the Work Area
common to most asbestos removal oper-
Disabling HVAC Systems: The power to
ations.
the heating, ventilation, and air condi-
Plastic sheeting used to protect horizontal tioning systems that service the restricted
surfaces, seal HVAC openings or to seal area must be deactivated and locked off. All
vertical openings and ceilings should have a ducts, grills, access ports, windows and vents
minimum thickness of 6 mils. Tape or other must be sealed off with two layers of plastic
adhesive used to attach plastic sheeting to prevent entrainment of contaminated air.
should be of sufficient adhesive strength to Operating HVAC Systems in the Restricted
support the weight of the material plus all Area: If components of a HVAC system lo-
stresses encountered during the entire dura- cated in the restricted area are connected to
tion of the project without becoming de- a system that will service another zone dur-
tached from the surface. ing the project, the portion of the duct in the
Other equipment and materials which restricted area must be sealed and pressur-
should be available at the beginning of each ized. Necessary precautions include caulking
project are: the duct joints, covering all cracks and open-
HEPA Filtered Vacuum is essential for ings with two layers of sheeting, and pres-
cleaning the work area after the asbestos has surizing the duct throughout the duration of
been removed. It should have a long hose ca- the project by restricting the return air flow.
pable of reaching out-of-the-way places, such The power to the fan supplying the positive
as areas above ceiling tiles, behind pipes, pressure should be locked on to prevent
etc. pressure loss.
Portable air ventilation systems in- Sealing Elevators: If an elevator shaft is
stalled to provide the negative air pressure located in the restricted area, it should be ei-
and air removal from the enclosure must be ther shut down or isolated by sealing with
equipped with a HEPA filter. The number two layers of plastic sheeting. The sheeting
and capacity of units required to ventilate should provide enough slack to accommo-
date the pressure changes in the shaft with-
an enclosure depend on the size of the area
out breaking the air-tight seal.
to be ventilated. The filters for these sys-
Removing Mobile Objects: All movable ob-
tems should be designed in such a manner
jects should be cleaned and removed from
that they can be replaced when the air flow
the work area before an enclosure is con-
volume is reduced by the build-up of dust in
structed unless moving the objects creates a
the filtration material. Pressure monitoring
hazard. Mobile objects will be assumed to be
devices with alarms and strip chart recorders
contaminated and should be either cleaned
attached to each system to indicate the pres-
with amended water and a HEPA vacuum
sure differential and the loss due to dust
and then removed from the area or wrapped
buildup on the filter are recommended. and then disposed of as hazardous waste.
Water sprayers should be used to keep the Cleaning and Sealing Surfaces: After
asbestos material as saturated as possible cleaning with water and a HEPA vacuum,
during removal; the sprayers will provide a surfaces of stationary objects should be cov-
fine mist that minimizes the impact of the ered with two layers of plastic sheeting. The
spray on the material. sheeting should be secured with duct tape or
Water used to saturate the asbestos con- an equivalent method to provide a tight seal
taining material can be amended by adding around the object.
at least 15 milliliters (14 ounce) of wetting Bagging Waste: In addition to the require-
agent in 1 liter (1 pint) of water. An exam- ment for immediate bagging of waste for dis-
ple of a wetting agent is a 50/50 mixture of posal, it is further recommended that the
polyoxyethylene ether and waste material be double-bagged and sealed
polyoxyethylene polyglycol ester. in plastic bags designed for asbestos disposal.
Backup power supplies are recommended, The bags should be stored in a waste storage
especially for ventilation systems. area that can be controlled by the workers
Shower and bath water should be with conducting the removal. Filters removed
mixed hot and cold water faucets. Water from air handling units and rubbish removed
that has been used to clean personnel or from the area are to be bagged and handled
equipment should either be filtered or be as hazardous waste.
collected and discarded as asbestos waste.
Constructing the Enclosure
Soap and shampoo should be provided to
aid in removing dust from the workers The enclosure should be constructed to
skin and hair. provide an air-tight seal around ducts and
174
openings into existing ventilation systems and power cables from powered air-purifying
and around penetrations for electrical con- respirators (PAPRs) will be disconnected
duits, telephone wires, water lines, drain just prior to entering the shower room.
pipes, etc. Enclosures should be both airtight
and watertight except for those openings de- Establishing Negative Pressure Within the
signed to provide entry and/or air flow con- Enclosure
trol. Negative Pressure: Air is to be drawn into
Size: An enclosure should be the minimum the enclosure under all anticipated condi-
volume to encompass all of the working sur- tions and exhausted through a HEPA filter
faces yet allow unencumbered movement by for 24 hours a day during the entire duration
the worker(s), provide unrestricted air flow
of the project.
past the worker(s), and ensure walking sur-
Air Flow Tests: Air flow patterns will be
faces can be kept free of tripping hazards.
checked before removal operations begin, at
Shape: The enclosure may be any shape
least once per operating shift and any time
that optimizes the flow of ventilation air
there is a question regarding the integrity of
past the worker(s).
the enclosure. The primary test for air flow
Structural Integrity: The walls, ceilings
and floors must be supported in such a man- is to trace air currents with smoke tubes or
ner that portions of the enclosure will not other visual methods. Flow checks are made
fall down during normal use. at each opening and at each doorway to dem-
Openings: It is not necessary that the onstrate that air is being drawn into the en-
structure be airtight; openings may be de- closure and at each workers position to
signed to direct air flow. Such openings show that air is being drawn away from the
should be located at a distance from active breathing zone.
removal operations. They should be designed Monitoring Pressure Within the Enclosure:
to draw air into the enclosure under all an- After the initial air flow patterns have been
ticipated circumstances. In the event that checked, the static pressure must be mon-
negative pressure is lost, they should be itored within the enclosure. Monitoring may
fitted with either HEPA filters to trap dust be made using manometers, pressure gauges,
or automatic trap doors that prevent dust or combinations of these devices. It is rec-
from escaping the enclosure. Openings for ommended that they be attached to alarms
exits should be controlled by an airlock or a and strip chart recorders at points identified
vestibule. by the design engineer.
Barrier Supports: Frames should be con- Corrective Actions: If the manometers or
structed to support all unsupported spans of pressure gauges demonstrate a reduction in
sheeting. pressure differential below the required
Sheeting: Walls, barriers, ceilings, and level, work should cease and the reason for
floors should be lined with two layers of the change investigated and appropriate
plastic sheeting having a thickness of at changes made. The air flow patterns should
least 6 mil. be retested before work begins again.
Seams: Seams in the sheeting material Pressure Differential: The design param-
should be minimized to reduce the possibili- eters for static pressure differentials be-
ties of accidental rips and tears in the adhe- tween the inside and outside of enclosures
sive or connections. All seams in the sheet- typically range from 0.02 to 0.10 inches of
ing should overlap, be staggered and not be water gauge, depending on conditions. All
located at corners or wall-to- floor joints. zones inside the enclosure must have less
Areas Within an Enclosure: Each enclosure pressure than the ambient pressure outside
consists of a work area, a decontamination of the enclosure (0.02 inches water gauge
area, and waste storage area. The work area differential). Design specifications for the
where the asbestos removal operations occur differential vary according to the size, con-
should be separated from both the waste figuration, and shape of the enclosure as well
storage area and the contamination control as ambient and mechanical air pressure con-
area by physical curtains, doors, and/or air- ditions around the enclosure.
flow patterns that force any airborne con- Air Flow Patterns: The flow of air past
tamination back into the work area. each worker shall be enhanced by posi-
See paragraph (j) of 1915.1001 for require- tioning the intakes and exhaust ports to re-
ments for hygiene facilities. move contaminated air from the workers
During egress from the work area, each breathing zone, by positioning HEPA vacu-
worker should step into the equipment room, um cleaners to draw air from the workers
clean tools and equipment, and remove gross breathing zone, by forcing relatively
contamination from clothing by wet clean- uncontaminated air past the worker toward
ing and HEPA vacuuming. Before entering an exhaust port, or by using a combination
the shower area, foot coverings, head cov- of methods to reduce the workers exposure.
erings, hand coverings, and coveralls are re- Air Handling Unit Exhaust: The exhaust
moved and placed in impervious bags for dis- plume from air handling units should be lo-
posal or cleaning. Airline connections from cated away from adjacent personnel and in-
airline respirators with HEPA disconnects takes for HVAC systems.
175
Air Flow Volume: The air flow volume after removal; the material must remain
(cubic meters per minute) exhausted (re- saturated until the waste container is sealed.
moved) from the workplace must exceed the Waste material with sharp points or cor-
amount of makeup air supplied to the enclo- ners must be placed in hard air-tight con-
sure. The rate of air exhausted from the en- tainers rather than bags.
closure should be designed to maintain a Whenever possible, large components
negative pressure in the enclosure and air should be sealed in plastic sheeting and re-
movement past each worker. The volume of moved intact.
air flow removed from the enclosure should Bags or containers of waste will be moved
replace the volume of the container at every to the waste holding area, washed, and
5 to 15 minutes. Air flow volume will need to wrapped in a bag with the appropriate labels.
be relatively high for large enclosures, enclo-
sures with awkward shapes, enclosures with Cleaning the Work Area
multiple openings, and operations employing Surfaces within the work area should be
several workers in the enclosure. kept free of visible dust and debris to the ex-
Air Flow Velocity: At each opening, the air tent feasible. Whenever visible dust appears
flow velocity must visibly drag air into on surfaces, the surfaces within the enclo-
the enclosure. The velocity of air flow within sure must be cleaned by wiping with a wet
the enclosure must be adequate to remove sponge, brush, or cloth and then vacuumed
airborne contamination from each workers with a HEPA vacuum.
breathing zone without disturbing the asbes- All surfaces within the enclosure should be
tos-containing material on surfaces. cleaned before the exhaust ventilation sys-
Airlocks: Airlocks are mechanisms on tem is deactivated and the enclosure is dis-
doors and curtains that control the air flow assembled. An approved encapsulant may be
patterns in the doorways. If air flow occurs, sprayed onto areas after the visible dust has
the patterns through doorways must be such been removed.
that the air flows toward the inside of the
enclosure. Sometimes vestibules, double APPENDIX G TO 1915.1001 [RESERVED]
doors, or double curtains are used to prevent APPENDIX H TO 1915.1001SUBSTANCE TECH-
air movement through the doorways. To use NICAL INFORMATION FOR ASBESTOS. NON-
a vestibule, a worker enters a chamber by MANDATORY
opening the door or curtain and then closing
the entry before opening the exit door or I. Substance Identification
curtain.
A. Substance: Asbestos is the name of a
Airlocks should be located between the
class of magnesium-silicate minerals that
equipment room and shower room, between
occur in fibrous form. Minerals that are in-
the shower room and the clean room, and be-
cluded in this group are chrysotile, crocid-
tween the waste storage area and the outside
olite, amosite, anthophyllite asbestos,
of the enclosure. The air flow between adja-
tremolite asbestos, and actinolite asbestos.
cent rooms must be checked using smoke
B. Asbestos is and was used in the manu-
tubes or other visual tests to ensure the flow
facture of heat-resistant clothing, auto-
patterns draw air toward the work area with-
motive brake and clutch linings, and a vari-
out producing eddies.
ety of building materials including floor
Monitoring for Airborne Concentrations tiles, roofing felts, ceiling tiles, asbestos-ce-
ment pipe and sheet, and fire-resistant
In addition to the breathing zone samples drywall. Asbestos is also present in pipe and
taken as outlined in paragraph (f) of boiler insulation materials and in sprayed-on
1915.1001 , samples of air should be taken to materials located on beams, in crawlspaces,
demonstrate the integrity of the enclosure, and between walls.
the cleanliness of the clean room and shower C. The potential for an asbestos-containing
area, and the effectiveness of the HEPA fil- product to release breathable fibers depends
ter. If the clean room is shown to be con- largely on its degree of friability. Friable
taminated, the room must be relocated to an means that the material can be crumbled
uncontaminated area. with hand pressure and is therefore likely to
Samples taken near the exhaust of port- emit fibers. The fibrous fluffy sprayed-on
able ventilation systems must be done with materials used for fireproofing, insulation,
care. or sound proofing are considered to be fri-
able, and they readily release airborne fibers
General Work Practices
if disturbed. Materials such as vinyl-asbestos
Preventing dust dispersion is the primary floor tile or roofing felt are considered non-
means of controlling the spread of asbestos friable if intact and generally do not emit
within the enclosure. Whenever practical, airborne fibers unless subjected to sanding,
the point of removal should be isolated, en- sawing and other aggressive operations. As-
closed, covered, or shielded from the workers bestoscement pipe or sheet can emit air-
in the area. Waste asbestos containing mate- borne fibers if the materials are cut or
rials must be bagged during or immediately sawed, or if they are broken.
176
D. Permissible exposure: Exposure to air- B. Empty shipping bags can be flattened
borne asbestos fibers may not exceed 0.1 fi- under exhaust hoods and packed into air-
bers per cubic centimeter of air (0.1 f/cc) tight containers for disposal. Empty ship-
averaged over the 8-hour workday, and 1 ping drums are difficult to clean and should
fiber per cubic centimeter of air (1.0 f/cc) be sealed.
averaged over a 30 minute work period. C. Vacuum bags or disposable paper filters
II. Health Hazard Data should not be cleaned, but should be sprayed
with a fine water mist and placed into a la-
A. Asbestos can cause disabling respiratory beled waste container.
disease and various types of cancers if the fi- D. Process waste and housekeeping waste
bers are inhaled. Inhaling or ingesting fibers should be wetted with water or a mixture of
from contaminated clothing or skin can also
water and surfactant prior to packaging in
result in these diseases. The symptoms of
disposable containers.
these diseases generally do not appear for 20
or more years after initial exposure. E. Asbestos-containing material that is re-
B. Exposure to asbestos has been shown to moved from buildings must be disposed of in
cause lung cancer, mesothelioma, and cancer leak-tight 6-mil plastic bags, plastic-lined
of the stomach and colon. Mesothelioma is a cardboard containers, or plastic-lined metal
rare cancer of the thin membrane lining of containers. These wastes, which are removed
the chest and abdomen. Symptoms of meso- while wet, should be sealed in containers be-
thelioma include shortness of breath, pain in fore they dry out to minimize the release of
the walls of the chest, and/or abdominal asbestos fibers during handling.
pain.
V. Access to Information
III. Respirators and Protective Clothing
A. Each year, your employer is required to
A. Respirators: You are required to wear a inform you of the information contained in
respirator when performing tasks that result this standard and appendices for asbestos. In
in asbestos exposure that exceeds the per- addition, your employer must instruct you
missible exposure limit (PEL) of 0.1 f/cc and in the proper work practices for handling as-
when performing certain designated oper-
bestos-containing materials, and the correct
ations. Air-purifying respirators equipped
use of protective equipment.
with a high-efficiency particulate air
(HEPA) filter can be used where airborne as- B. Your employer is required to determine
bestos fiber concentrations do not exceed 1.0 whether you are being exposed to asbestos.
f/cc; otherwise, more protective respirators Your employer must treat exposure to ther-
such as air-supplied, positive-pressure, full mal system insulation and sprayed-on and
facepiece respirators must be used. Dispos- troweled-on surfacing material as asbestos
able respirators or dust masks are not per- exposure, unless results of laboratory anal-
mitted to be used for asbestos work. For ef- ysis show that the material does not contain
fective protection, respirators must fit your asbestos. You or your representative has the
face and head snugly. Your employer is re- right to observe employee measurements and
quired to conduct a fit test when you are to record the results obtained. Your em-
first assigned a respirator and every 6 ployer is required to inform you of your ex-
months thereafter. Respirators should not be posure, and, if you are exposed above the per-
loosened or removed in work situations missible exposure limit, he or she is required
where their use is required. to inform you of the actions that are being
B. Protective Clothing: You are required to taken to reduce your exposure to within the
wear protective clothing in work areas where permissible limit.
asbestos fiber concentrations exceed the per- C. Your employer is required to keep
missible exposure limit (PEL) of 0.1 f/cc. records of your exposures and medical ex-
IV. Disposal Procedures and Clean-up aminations. These exposure records must be
kept for at least thirty (30) years. Medical
A. Wastes that are generated by processes records must be kept for the period of your
where asbestos is present include: employment plus thirty (30) years.
1. Empty asbestos shipping containers. D. Your employer is required to release
2. Process wastes such as cuttings, trim-
your exposure and medical records to your
mings, or reject materials.
physician or designated representative upon
3. Housekeeping waste from wet-sweeping
your written request.
or HEPA-vacuuming.
4. Asbestos fireproofing or insulating mate- APPENDIX I TO 1915.1001MEDICAL SURVEIL-
rial that is removed from buildings.
LANCE GUIDELINES FOR ASBESTOS, NON-
5. Asbestos-containing building products
MANDATORY
removed during building renovation or dem-
olition. I. Route of Entry
6. Contaminated disposable protective
clothing. Inhalation, ingestion.
177
II. Toxicology this appears to be a highly individualized
characteristic. In severe cases, death may be
Clinical evidence of the adverse effects as-
caused by respiratory or cardiac failure.
sociated with exposure to asbestos is present
in the form of several well- conducted epide- IV. Surveillance and Preventive Considerations
miological studies of occupationally exposed
workers, family contacts of workers, and As noted above, exposure to asbestos have
persons living near asbestos mines. These been linked to an increased risk of lung can-
studies have shown a definite association be- cer, mesothelioma, gastrointestinal cancer,
tween exposure to asbestos and an increased and asbestosis among occupationally ex-
incidence of lung cancer, pleural and peri- posed workers. Adequate screening tests to
toneal mesothelioma, gastrointestinal can- determine an employees potential for devel-
cer, and asbestosis. The latter is a disabling oping serious chronic diseases, such as a can-
fibrotic lung disease that is caused only by cer, from exposure to asbestos do not pres-
exposure to asbestos. Exposure to asbestos ently exist. However, some tests, particu-
has also been associated with an increased larly chest X-rays and pulmonary function
incidence of esophageal, kidney, laryngeal, tests, may indicate that an employee has
pharyngeal, and buccal cavity cancers. As been overexposed to asbestos increasing his
with other known chronic occupational dis- or her risk of developing exposure related
eases, disease associated with asbestos gen- chronic diseases. It is important for the phy-
erally appears about 20 years following the sician to become familiar with the operating
first occurrence of exposure: There are no conditions in which occupational exposure to
known acute effects associated with expo- asbestos is likely to occur. This is particu-
sure to asbestos. larly important in evaluating medical and
Epidemiological studies indicate that the work histories and in conducting physical
risk of lung cancer among exposed workers examinations. When an active employee has
who smoke cigarettes is greatly increased been identified as having been overexposed
over the risk of lung cancer among non-ex- to asbestos measures taken by the employer
posed smokers or exposed nonsmokers. These to eliminate or mitigate further exposure
studies suggest that cessation of smoking should also lower the risk of serious long-
will reduce the risk of lung cancer for a per- term consequences.
son exposed to asbestos but will not reduce it The employer is required to institute a
to the same level of risk as that existing for medical surveillance program for all employ-
an exposed worker who has never smoked. ees who are or will be exposed to asbestos at
or above the permissible exposure limits (0.1
III. Signs and Symptoms of Exposure Related fiber per cubic centimeter of air) for 30 or
Disease more days per year and for all employees
who are assigned to wear a negative-pressure
The signs and symptoms of lung cancer or respirator. All examinations and procedures
gastrointestinal cancer induced by exposure must be performed by or under the super-
to asbestos are not unique, except that a vision of licensed physician at a reasonable
chest X-ray of an exposed patient with lung time and place, and at no cost to the em-
cancer may show pleural plaques, pleural ployee.
calcification, or pleural fibrosis. Symptoms Although broad latitude is given to the
characteristic of mesothelioma include physician in prescribing specific tests to be
shortness of breath, pain in the walls of the included in the medical surveillance pro-
chest, or abdominal pain. Mesothelioma has gram, OSHA requires inclusion of the fol-
a much longer latency period compared with lowing elements in the routine examination,
lung cancer (40 years versus 1520 years), and (i) Medical and work histories with special
mesothelioma is therefore more likely to be emphasis directed to symptoms of the res-
found among workers who were first exposed piratory system, cardiovascular system, and
to asbestos at an early age. Mesothelioma is digestive tract.
always fatal. (ii) Completion of the respiratory disease
Asbestosis is pulmonary fibrosis caused by questionnaire contained in appendix D to
the accumulation of asbestos fibers in the this section.
lungs. Symptoms include shortness of (iii) A physical examination including a
breath, coughing, fatigue, and vague feelings chest roentgenogram and pulmonary func-
of sickness. When the fibrosis worsens, short- tion test that include measurement of the
ness of breath occurs even at rest. The diag- employees forced vital capacity (FYC) and
nosis of asbestosis is based on a history of forced expiratory volume at one second
exposure to asbestos, the presence of charac- (FEV1).
teristics radiologic changes, end-inspiratory (iv) Any laboratory or other test that the
crackles (rales), and other clinical features examining physician deems by sound med-
of fibrosing lung disease. Pleural plaques and ical practice to be necessary.
thickening are observed on X-rays taken The employer is required to make the pre-
during the early sates of the disease. Asbes- scribed tests available at least annually to
tosis is often a progressive disease even in those employees covered; more often than
the absence of continued exposure, although specified if recommended by the examining
178
physician; and upon termination of employ- bers (physicians, scientists, and laypersons)
ment. in 55 state and regional groups. AHA pro-
The employer is required to provide the duces a variety of publications and audio-
physician with the following information: A visual materials about the effects of smok-
copy of this standard and appendices; a de- ing on the heart. AHA also has developed a
scription of the employees duties as they re- guidebook for incorporating a weight-control
late to asbestos exposure; the employees component into smoking cessation pro-
representative level of exposure to asbestos; grams.
a description of any personal protective and 4. American Lung Association, 1740 Broad-
respiratory equipment used; and information way, New York, New York 10019, (212) 245
from previous medical examinations of the 8000.
affected employee that is not otherwise A voluntary organization of 7,500 members
available to the physician. Making this in- (physicians, nurses, and laypersons), the
formation available to the physician will aid American Lung Association (ALA) conducted
in the evaluation of the employees health in numerous public information programs
relation to assigned duties and fitness to about the health effects of smoking. ALA
wear personal protective equipment, if re- has 59 state and 85 local units. The organiza-
quired. tion actively supports legislation and infor-
The employer is required to obtain a writ- mation campaigns for non-smokers rights
ten opinion from the examining physician and provides help for smokers who want to
containing the results of the medical exam- quit, for example, through Freedom From
ination; the physicians opinion as to wheth- Smoking, a self-help smoking cessation
er the employee has any detected medical program.
conditions that would place the employee at 5. Office on Smoking and Health, U.S. De-
an increased risk of exposure-related disease; partment of Health and Human Services 5600
any recommended limitations on the em- Fishers Lane, Park Building, Room 110,
ployee or on the use of personal protective Rockville, Maryland 20857.
equipment; and a statement that the em- The Office on Smoking and Health (OSHA)
ployee has been informed by the physician of is the Department of Health and Human
the results of the medical examination and Services lead agency in smoking control.
of any medical conditions related to asbestos OSHA has sponsored distribution of publica-
exposure that require further explanation or tions on smoking-related topics, such as free
treatment. This written opinion must not re- flyers on relapse after initial quitting, help-
veal specific findings or diagnoses unrelated ing a friend or family member quit smoking,
to exposure to asbestos, and a copy of the the health hazards of smoking, and the ef-
opinion must be provided to the affected em- fects of parental smoking on teenagers.
ployee. *In Hawaii, on Oahu call 5241234 (call col-
APPENDIX J TO 1915.1001SMOKING CES- lect from neighboring islands),
SATION PROGRAM INFORMATION FOR ASBES-
Spanish-speaking staff members are avail-
TOSNON-MANDATORY
able during daytime hours to callers from
the following areas: California, Florida,
The following organizations provide smok- Georgia, Illinois, New Jersey (area code 201),
ing cessation information. New York, and Texas. Consult your local
1. The National Cancer Institute operates a telephone directory for listings of local chap-
toll-free Cancer Information Service (CIS) ters.
with trained personnel to help you. Call 1
8004CANCER* to reach the CIS office serv- APPENDIX K TO 1915.1001POLARIZED LIGHT
ing your area, or write: Office of Cancer MICROSCOPY OF ASBESTOSNON-MANDATORY
Communications, National Cancer Institute, Method number: ID191
National Institutes of Health, Building 31, Matrix: Bulk
Room 10A24, Bethesda, Maryland 20892.
2. American Cancer Society, 3340 Peachtree Collection Procedure
Road, N.E., Atlanta, Georgia 30026, (404) 320
3333. Collect approximately 1 to 2 grams of each
The American Cancer Society (ACS) is a type of material and place into separate 20
voluntary organization composed of 58 divi- mL scintillation vials.
sions and 3,100 local units. Through The
Analytical Procedure
Great American Smokeout in November,
the annual Cancer Crusade in April, and nu- A portion of each separate phase is ana-
merous educational materials, ACS helps lyzed by gross examination, phase-polar ex-
people learn about the health hazards of amination, and central stop dispersion mi-
smoking and become successful ex-smokers. croscopy.
3. American Heart Association, 7320 Green- Commercial manufacturers and products
ville Avenue, Dallas, Texas 75231, (214) 750 mentioned in this method are for descriptive
5300. use only and do not constitute endorsements
The American Heart Association (AHA) is by USDOL-OSHA. Similar products from
a voluntary organization with 130,000 mem- other sources may be substituted.
179
1. Introduction the visibility of very small particles and par-
ticles with very low intrinsic contrast.
This method describes the collection and
Phase Contrast Microscope: A microscope
analysis of asbestos bulk materials by light
configured with a phase mask pair to create
microscopy techniques including phase-
phase contrast. The technique which uses
polar illumination and central-stop disper-
this is called Phase Contrast Microscopy
sion microscopy. Some terms unique to as-
(PCM).
bestos analysis are defined below:
Phase-Polar Analysis: This is the use of po-
Amphibole: A family of minerals whose
larized light in a phase contrast microscope.
crystals are formed by long, thin units which
It is used to see the same size fibers that are
have two thin ribbons of double chain sili-
visible in air filter analysis. Although fibers
cate with a brucite ribbon in between. The
finer than 1 m are visible, analysis of these
shape of each unit is similar to an I beam.
is inferred from analysis of larger bundles
Minerals important in asbestos analysis in-
that are usually present.
clude cummingtonite-grunerite, crocidolite,
Phase-Polar Microscope: The phase-polar
tremolite- actinolite and anthophyllite.
microscope is a phase contrast microscope
Asbestos: A term for naturally occurring fi-
which has an analyzer, a polarizer, a first
brous minerals. Asbestos includes chrysotile,
order red plate and a rotating phase con-
cummingtonite-grunerite asbestos (amosite),
denser all in place so that the polarized light
anthophyllite asbestos, tremolite asbestos,
image is enhanced by phase contrast.
crocidolite, actinolite asbestos and any of
Sealing Encapsulant: This is a product
these minerals which have been chemically
which can be applied, preferably by spraying,
treated or altered. The precise chemical for-
onto an asbestos surface which will seal the
mulation of each species varies with the lo-
surface so that fibers cannot be released.
cation from which it was mined. Nominal
Serpentine: A mineral family consisting of
compositions are listed: minerals with the general composition
Chrysotile...............................Mg3 Si2 O5(OH)4 Mg3(Si2O5(OH)4 having the magnesium in
Crocidolite (Riebeckite asbestos) brucite layer over a silicate layer. Minerals
......................... Na2Fe32+Fe23+Si8O22(OH)2 important in asbestos analysis included in
Cummingtonite-Grunerite asbestos this family are chrysotile, lizardite,
(Amosite) ..................(Mg,Fe)7 Si8O22(OH)2 antigorite.
Tremolite-Actinolite asbestos
............................. Ca2(Mg,Fe)5Si8O22(OH)2 1.1. History
Anthophyllite asbestos ...(Mg,Fe)7 Si8O22(OH)2
Light microscopy has been used for well
Asbestos Fiber: A fiber of asbestos meeting over 100 years for the determination of min-
the criteria for a fiber. (See section 3.5.) eral species. This analysis is carried out
Aspect Ratio: The ratio of the length of a using specialized polarizing microscopes as
fiber to its diameter usually defined as well as bright field microscopes. The identi-
length : width, e.g. 3:1. fication of minerals is an on-going process
Brucite: A sheet mineral with the composi- with many new minerals described each
tion Mg(OH)2. year. The first recorded use of asbestos was
Central Stop Dispersion Staining (microscope): in Finland about 2500 B.C. where the mate-
This is a dark field microscope technique rial was used in the mud wattle for the wood-
that images particles using only light re- en huts the people lived in as well as
fracted by the particle, excluding light that strengthening for pottery. Adverse health as-
travels through the particle unrefracted. pects of the mineral were noted nearly 2000
This is usually accomplished with a McCrone years ago when Pliny the Younger wrote
objective or other arrangement which places about the poor health of slaves in the asbes-
a circular stop with apparent aperture equal tos mines. Although known to be injurious
to the objective aperture in the back focal for centuries, the first modern references to
plane of the microscope. its toxicity were by the British Labor
Cleavage Fragments: Mineral particles Inspectorate when it banned asbestos dust
formed by the comminution of minerals, es- from the workplace in 1898. Asbestosis cases
pecially those characterized by relatively were described in the literature after the
parallel sides and moderate aspect ratio. turn of the century. Cancer was first sus-
Differential Counting: The term applied to pected in the mid 1930s and a causal link to
the practice of excluding certain kinds of fi- mesothelioma was made in 1965. Because of
bers from a phase contrast asbestos count the public concern for worker and public
because they are not asbestos. safety with the use of this material, several
Fiber: A particle longer than or equal to 5 different types of analysis were applied to
m with a length to width ratio greater than the determination of asbestos content. Light
or equal to 3:1. This may include cleavage microscopy requires a great deal of experi-
fragments. (see section 3.5 of this appendix). ence and craft. Attempts were made to apply
Phase Contrast: Contrast obtained in the less subjective methods to the analysis. X-
microscope by causing light scattered by ray diffraction was partially successful in
small particles to destructively interfere determining the mineral types but was un-
with unscattered light, thereby enhancing able to separate out the fibrous portions
180
from the non-fibrous portions. Also, the min- tions. Each major direction of the crystal
imum detection limit for asbestos analysis presents a different regularity. Light pho-
by X-ray diffraction (XRD) is about 1%. Dif- tons travelling in each of these main direc-
ferential Thermal Analysis (DTA) was no tions will encounter different electrical
more successful. These provide useful cor- neighborhoods, affecting the path and time
roborating information when the presence of of travel. The techniques outlined in this
asbestos has been shown by microscopy; method use the fact that light traveling
however, neither can determine the dif- through fibers or crystals in different direc-
ference between fibrous and non-fibrous min- tions will behave differently, but predict-
erals when both habits are present. The same ably. The behavior of the light as it travels
is true of Infrared Absorption (IR). through a crystal can be measured and com-
When electron microscopy was applied to pared with known or determined values to
asbestos analysis, hundreds of fibers were identify the mineral species. Usually, Polar-
discovered present too small to be visible in ized Light Microscopy (PLM) is performed
any light microscope. There are two dif- with strain-free objectives on a bright-field
ferent types of electron microscope used for microscope platform. This would limit the
asbestos analysis: Scanning Electron Micro- resolution of the microscope to about 0.4 m.
scope (SEM) and Transmission Electron Mi- Because OSHA requires the counting and
croscope (TEM). Scanning Electron Micros- identification of fibers visible in phase con-
copy is useful in identifying minerals. The trast, the phase contrast platform is used to
SEM can provide two of the three pieces of visualize the fibers with the polarizing ele-
information required to identify fibers by ments added into the light path. Polarized
electron microscopy: morphology and chem- light methods cannot identify fibers finer
istry. The third is structure as determined than about 1m in diameter even though
by Selected Area Electron Diffraction they are visible. The finest fibers are usually
SAED which is performed in the TEM. Al- identified by inference from the presence of
though the resolution of the SEM is suffi- larger, identifiable fiber bundles. When fibers
cient for very fine fibers to be seen, accuracy are present, but not identifiable by light mi-
of chemical analysis that can be performed croscopy, use either SEM or TEM to deter-
on the fibers varies with fiber diameter in fi- mine the fiber identity.
bers of less than 0.2 m diameter. The TEM 1.3. Advantages and Disadvantages
is a powerful tool to identify fibers too small
to be resolved by light microscopy and The advantages of light microcopy are:
should be used in conjunction with this (a) Basic identification of the materials
method when necessary. The TEM can pro- was first performed by light microscopy and
vide all three pieces of information required gross analysis. This provides a large base of
for fiber identification. Most fibers thicker published information against which to
than 1 m can adequately be defined in the check analysis and analytical technique.
light microscope. The light microscope re- (b) The analysis is specific to fibers. The
mains as the best instrument for the deter- minerals present can exist in asbestiform, fi-
mination of mineral type. This is because brous, prismatic, or massive varieties all at
the minerals under investigation were first the same time. Therefore, bulk methods of
described analytically with the light micro- analysis such as X-ray diffraction, IR anal-
scope. It is inexpensive and gives positive ysis, DTA, etc. are inappropriate where the
identification for most samples analyzed. material is not known to be fibrous.
Further, when optical techniques are inad- (c) The analysis is quick, requires little
equate, there is ample indication that alter- preparation time, and can be performed on-
native techniques should be used for com- site if a suitably equipped microscope is
available.
plete identification of the sample.
The disadvantages are:
1.2. Principle (a) Even using phase-polar illumination,
not all the fibers present may be seen. This
Minerals consist of atoms that may be ar- is a problem for very low asbestos concentra-
ranged in random order or in a regular ar- tions where agglomerations or large bundles
rangement. Amorphous materials have of fibers may not be present to allow identi-
atoms in random order while crystalline ma- fication by inference.
terials have long range order. Many mate- (b) The method requires a great degree of
rials are transparent to light, at least for sophistication on the part of the
small particles or for thin sections. The microscopist. An analyst is only as useful as
properties of these materials can be inves- his mental catalog of images. Therefore, a
tigated by the effect that the material has microscopists accuracy is enhanced by expe-
on light passing through it. The six asbestos rience. The mineralogical training of the an-
minerals are all crystalline with particular alyst is very important. It is the basis on
properties that have been identified and cat- which subjective decisions are made.
aloged. These six minerals are anisotropic. (c) The method uses only a tiny amount of
They have a regular array of atoms, but the material for analysis. This may lead to sam-
arrangement is not the same in all direc- pling bias and false results (high or low).
181
This is especially true if the sample is se- In the serpentine family, the only common
verely inhomogeneous. fibrous mineral is chrysotile. Occasionally,
(d) Fibers may be bound in a matrix and the mineral antigorite occurs in a fibril
not distinguishable as fibers so identifica- habit with morphology similar to the
tion cannot be made. amphiboles. The amphibole minerals consist
of a score of different minerals of which only
1.4. Method Performance five are regulated by federal standard:
1.4.1. This method can be used for deter- amosite, crocidolite, anthophyllite asbestos,
mination of asbestos content from 0 to 100% tremolite asbestos and actinolite asbestos.
asbestos. The detection limit has not been These are the only amphibole minerals that
adequately determined, although for selected have been commercially exploited for their
samples, the limit is very low, depending on fibrous properties; however, the rest can and
the number of particles examined. For most- do occur occasionally in asbestiform habit.
ly homogeneous, finely divided samples, with In addition to the related mineral inter-
no difficult fibrous interferences, the detec- ferences, other minerals common in building
tion limit is below 1%. For inhomogeneous material may present a problem for some
samples (most samples), the detection limit microscopists: gypsum, anhydrite, brucite,
remains undefined. NIST has conducted pro- quartz fibers, talc fibers or ribbons, wollas-
ficiency testing of laboratories on a national tonite, perlite, attapulgite, etc. Other fi-
scale. Although each round is reported sta- brous materials commonly present in work-
places are: fiberglass, mineral wool, ceramic
tistically with an average, control limits,
wool, refractory ceramic fibers, kevlar,
etc., the results indicate a difficulty in es-
nomex, synthetic fibers, graphite or carbon
tablishing precision especially in the low
fibers, cellulose (paper or wood) fibers, metal
concentration range. It is suspected that
fibers, etc.
there is significant bias in the low range es-
Matrix embedding material can sometimes
pecially near 1%. EPA tried to remedy this
be a negative interference. The analyst may
by requiring a mandatory point counting
not be able to easily extract the fibers from
scheme for samples less than 10%. The point
the matrix in order to use the method.
counting procedure is tedious, and may in- Where possible, remove the matrix before
troduce significant biases of its own. It has the analysis, taking careful note of the loss
not been incorporated into this method. of weight. Some common matrix materials
1.4.2. The precision and accuracy of the are: vinyl, rubber, tar, paint, plant fiber, ce-
quantitation tests performed in this method ment, and epoxy. A further negative inter-
are unknown. Concentrations are easier to ference is that the asbestos fibers themselves
determine in commercial products where as- may be either too small to be seen in Phase
bestos was deliberately added because the contrast Microscopy (PCM) or of a very low
amount is usually more than a few percent. fibrous quality, having the appearance of
An analysts results can be calibrated plant fibers. The analysts ability to deal
against the known amounts added by the with these materials increases with experi-
manufacturer. For geological samples, the ence.
degree of homogeneity affects the precision.
1.4.3. The performance of the method is an- 1.6. Uses and Occupational Exposure
alyst dependent. The analyst must choose
Asbestos is ubiquitous in the environment.
carefully and not necessarily randomly the
More than 40% of the land area of the United
portions for analysis to assure that detection
States is composed of minerals which may
of asbestos occurs when it is present. For
contain asbestos. Fortunately, the actual
this reason, the analyst must have adequate
formation of great amounts of asbestos is
training in sample preparation, and experi-
relatively rare. Nonetheless, there are loca-
ence in the location and identification of as-
tions in which environmental exposure can
bestos in samples. This is usually accom- be severe such as in the Serpentine Hills of
plished through substantial on-the-job train- California.
ing as well as formal education in min- There are thousands of uses for asbestos in
eralogy and microscopy. industry and the home. Asbestos abatement
1.5. Interferences workers are the most current segment of the
population to have occupational exposure to
Any material which is long, thin, and great amounts of asbestos. If the material is
small enough to be viewed under the micro- undisturbed, there is no exposure. Exposure
scope can be considered an interference for occurs when the asbestos-containing mate-
asbestos. There are literally hundreds of rial is abraded or otherwise disturbed during
interferences in workplaces. The techniques maintenance operations or some other activ-
described in this method are normally suffi- ity. Approximately 95% of the asbestos in
cient to eliminate the interferences. An ana- place in the United States is chrysotile.
lysts success in eliminating the inter- Amosite and crocidolite make up nearly
ferences depends on proper training. all the difference. Tremolite and
Asbestos minerals belong to two mineral anthophyllite make up a very small percent-
families: the serpentines and the amphiboles. age. Tremolite is found in extremely small
182
amounts in certain chrysotile deposits. Ac- sure to collect samples from all layers and
tinolite exposure is probably greatest from phases of material. If possible, make sepa-
environmental sources, but has been identi- rate samples of each different phase of the
fied in vermiculite containing, sprayed-on material. This will aid in determining the
insulating materials which may have been actual hazard. DO NOT USE ENVELOPES,
certified as asbestos-free. PLASTIC OR PAPER BAGS OF ANY KIND TO
COLLECT SAMPLES. The use of plastic bags
1.7. Physical and Chemical Properties presents a contamination hazard to labora-
The nominal chemical compositions for tory personnel and to other samples. When
the asbestos minerals were given in Section these containers are opened, a bellows effect
1. Compared to cleavage fragments of the blows fibers out of the container onto every-
same minerals, asbestiform fibers possess a thing, including the person opening the con-
high tensile strength along the fiber axis. tainer.
They are chemically inert, non-combustible, If a cork-borer type sampler is available,
and heat resistant. Except for chrysotile, push the tube through the material all the
they are insoluble in Hydrochloric acid way, so that all layers of material are sam-
(HCl). Chrysotile is slightly soluble in HCl. pled. Some samplers are intended to be dis-
Asbestos has high electrical resistance and posable. These should be capped and sent to
good sound absorbing characteristics. It can the laboratory. If a non-disposable cork
be woven into cables, fabrics or other tex- borer is used, empty the contents into a scin-
tiles, or matted into papers, felts, and mats. tillation vial and send to the laboratory.
Vigorously and completely clean the cork
1.8. Toxicology (This Section is for Informa- borer between samples.
tion Only and Should Not Be Taken as
OSHA Policy) 2.4 Shipment
Possible physiologic results of respiratory Samples packed in glass vials must not
exposure to asbestos are mesothelioma of the touch or they might break in shipment.
pleura or peritoneum, interstitial fibrosis, (a) Seal the samples with a sample seal
asbestosis, pneumoconiosis, or respiratory over the end to guard against tampering and
cancer. The possible consequences of asbes- to identify the sample.
tos exposure are detailed in the NIOSH Cri- (b) Package the bulk samples in separate
teria Document or in the OSHA Asbestos packages from the air samples. They may
Standards 29 CFR 1910.1001 and 29 CFR cross-contaminate each other and will inval-
1926.1101 and 29 CFR 1915.1001. idate the results of the air samples.
2. Sampling Procedure (c) Include identifying paperwork with the
samples, but not in contact with the sus-
2.1. Equipment for Sampling pected asbestos.
(d) To maintain sample accountability,
(a) Tube or cork borer sampling device
ship the samples by certified mail, overnight
(b) Knife
express, or hand carry them to the labora-
(c) 20 mL scintillation vial or similar vial
tory.
(d) Sealing encapsulant
2.2. Safety Precautions 3. Analysis
Asbestos is a known carcinogen. Take care The analysis of asbestos samples can be di-
when sampling. While in an asbestos-con- vided into two major parts: sample prepara-
taining atmosphere, a properly selected and tion and microscopy. Because of the different
fit-tested respirator should be worn. Take asbestos uses that may be encountered by
samples in a manner to cause the least the analyst, each sample may need different
amount of dust. Follow these general guide- preparation steps. The choices are outlined
lines: below. There are several different tests that
(a) Do not make unnecessary dust. are performed to identify the asbestos spe-
(b) Take only a small amount (1 to 2 g). cies and determine the percentage. They will
(c) Tightly close the sample container. be explained below.
(d) Use encapsulant to seal the spot where
the sample was taken, if necessary. 3.1. Safety
(a) Do not create unnecessary dust. Handle
2.3. Sampling procedure the samples in HEPA-filter equipped hoods.
Samples of any suspect material should be If samples are received in bags, envelopes or
taken from an inconspicuous place. Where other inappropriate container, open them
the material is to remain, seal the sampling only in a hood having a face velocity at or
wound with an encapsulant to eliminate the greater than 100 fpm. Transfer a small
potential for exposure from the sample site. amount to a scintillation vial and only han-
Microscopy requires only a few milligrams of dle the smaller amount.
material. The amount that will fill a 20 mL (b) Open samples in a hood, never in the
scintillation vial is more than adequate. Be open lab area.
183
(c) Index of refraction oils can be toxic. (u) Ruby mortar and pestle
Take care not to get this material on the
skin. Wash immediately with soap and water 3.3. Sample Pre-Preparation
if this happens. Sample preparation begins with pre-prepa-
(d) Samples that have been heated in the ration which may include chemical reduc-
muffle furnace or the drying oven may be tion of the matrix, heating the sample to
hot. Handle them with tongs until they are dryness or heating in the muffle furnace. The
cool enough to handle. end result is a sample which has been re-
(e) Some of the solvents used, such as THF duced to a powder that is sufficiently fine to
(tetrahydrofuran), are toxic and should only fit under the cover slip. Analyze different
be handled in an appropriate fume hood and phases of samples separately, e.g., tile and
according to instructions given in the Mate- the tile mastic should be analyzed separately
rial Safety Data Sheet (MSDS). as the mastic may contain asbestos while
the tile may not.
3.2. Equipment
(a) Phase contrast microscope with 10x, 16x (a) Wet Samples
and 40x objectives, 10x wide-field eyepieces, Samples with a high water content will not
G22 Walton-Beckett graticule, Whipple give the proper dispersion colors and must be
disk, polarizer, analyzer and first order red dried prior to sample mounting. Remove the
or gypsum plate, 100 Watt illuminator, rotat- lid of the scintillation vial, place the bottle
ing position condenser with oversize phase in the drying oven and heat at 100 C to dry-
rings, central stop dispersion objective, ness (usually about 2 h). Samples which are
Kohler illumination and a rotating not submitted to the lab in glass must be re-
mechanicalstage. (See figure 1). moved and placed in glass vials or aluminum
(b) Stereo microscope with reflected light weighing pans before placing them in the
illumination, transmitted light illumina- drying oven.
tion, polarizer, analyzer and first order red
or gypsum plate, and rotating stage. (b) Samples With Organic Interference
(c) Negative pressure hood for the stereo Muffle Furnace
microscope These may include samples with tar as a
(d) Muffle furnace capable of 600 C matrix, vinyl asbestos tile, or any other or-
(e) Drying oven capable of 50150 C ganic that can be reduced by heating. Re-
(f) Aluminum specimen pans move the sample from the vial and weigh in
(g) Tongs for handling samples in the fur- a balance to determine the weight of the sub-
nace mitted portion. Place the sample in a muffle
(h) High dispersion index of refraction oils furnace at 500 C for 1 to 2 h or until all obvi-
(Special for dispersion staining.) ous organic material has been removed. Re-
n = 1.550 trieve, cool and weigh again to determine
n = 1.585 the weight loss on ignition. This is necessary
n = 1.590 to determine the asbestos content of the sub-
n = 1.605 mitted sample, because the analyst will be
n = 1.620 looking at a reduced sample.
n = 1.670 NOTES: Heating above 600 C will cause the
n = 1.680 sample to undergo a structural change
n = 1.690 which, given sufficient time, will convert the
chrysotile to forsterite. Heating even at
(i) A set of index of refraction oils from lower temperatures for 1 to 2 h may have a
about n=1.350 to n=2.000 in n=0.005 incre- measurable effect on the optical properties
ments. (Standard for Becke line analysis.) of the minerals. If the analyst is unsure of
(j) Glass slides with painted or frosted ends what to expect, a sample of standard asbes-
13 inches 1mm thick, precleaned. tos should be heated to the same tempera-
(k) Cover Slips 2222 mm, #112 ture for the same length of time so that it
(l) Paper clips or dissection needles can be examined for the proper interpreta-
(m) Hand grinder tion.
(n) Scalpel with both #10 and #11 blades
(o) 0.1 molar HCl (c) Samples With Organic InterferenceTHF
(p) Decalcifying solution (Baxter Scientific
Vinyl asbestos tile is the most common
Products) Ethylenediaminetetraacetic Acid,
material treated with this solvent, although,
Tetrasodium ..........................................0.7 g/l substances containing tar will sometimes
Sodium Potassium Tartrate .........8.0 mg/liter yield to this treatment. Select a portion of
Hydrochloric Acid ..........................99.2 g/liter the material and then grind it up if possible.
Sodium Tartrate.............................0.14 g/liter Weigh the sample and place it in a test tube.
(q) Tetrahydrofuran (THF) Add sufficient THF to dissolve the organic
(r) Hotplate capable of 60 C matrix. This is usually about 4 to 5 mL. Re-
(s) Balance member, THF is highly flammable. Filter the
(t) Hacksaw blade remaining material through a tared silver
184
membrane, dry and weigh to determine how fine, less sample may be appropriate. For
much is left after the solvent extraction. non-powder samples such as fiber mats, for-
Further process the sample to remove car- ceps should be used to transfer a small
bonate or mount directly. amount of material to the slide. Stir the ma-
terial in the medium on the slide, spreading
(d) Samples With Carbonate Interference it out and making the preparation as uni-
Carbonate material is often found on fibers form as possible. Place a cover-slip on the
and sometimes must be removed in order to preparation by gently lowering onto the
perform dispersion microscopy. Weigh out a slide and allowing it to fall trapdoor fash-
portion of the material and place it in a test ion on the preparation to push out any bub-
tube. Add a sufficient amount of 0.1 M HCl or bles. Press gently on the cover slip to even
decalcifying solution in the tube to react all out the distribution of particulate on the
the carbonate as evidenced by gas formation; slide. If there is insufficient mounting oil on
i.e., when the gas bubbles stop, add a little the slide, one or two drops may be placed
more solution. If no more gas forms, the re- near the edge of the coverslip on the slide.
action is complete. Filter the material out Capillary action will draw the necessary
through a tared silver membrane, dry and amount of liquid into the preparation. Re-
weigh to determine the weight lost. move excess oil with the point of a labora-
tory wiper.
3.4. Sample Preparation Treat at least two different areas of each
Samples must be prepared so that accurate phase in this fashion. Choose representative
determination can be made of the asbestos areas of the sample. It may be useful to se-
type and amount present. The following lect particular areas or fibers for analysis.
steps are carried out in the low-flow hood (a This is useful to identify asbestos in severely
low-flow hood has less than 50 fpm flow): inhomogeneous samples.
(1) If the sample has large lumps, is hard, When it is determined that amphiboles
or cannot be made to lie under a cover slip, may be present, repeat the above process
the grain size must be reduced. Place a small using the appropriate high- dispersion oils
amount between two slides and grind the until an identification is made or all six as-
material between them or grind a small bestos minerals have been ruled out. Note
amount in a clean mortar and pestle. The that percent determination must be done in
choice of whether to use an alumina, ruby, the index medium 1.550 because amphiboles
or diamond mortar depends on the hardness tend to disappear in their matching medi-
of the material. Impact damage can alter the ums.
asbestos mineral if too much mechanical
shock occurs. (Freezer mills can completely 3.5. Analytical procedure
destroy the observable crystallinity of asbes-
NOTE: This method presumes some knowl-
tos and should not be used). For some sam-
edge of mineralogy and optical petrography.
ples, a portion of material can be shaved off
with a scalpel, ground off with a hand grind- The analysis consists of three parts: The
er or hack saw blade. determination of whether there is asbestos
The preparation tools should either be dis- present, what type is present and the deter-
posable or cleaned thoroughly. Use vigorous mination of how much is present. The gen-
scrubbing to loosen the fibers during the eral flow of the analysis is:
washing. Rinse the implements with copious (1) Gross examination.
amounts of water and air-dry in a dust-free (2) Examination under polarized light on
environment. the stereo microscope.
(2) If the sample is powder or has been re- (3) Examination by phase-polar illumina-
duced as in 1) above, it is ready to mount. tion on the compound phase microscope.
Place a glass slide on a piece of optical tis- (4) Determination of species by dispersion
sue and write the identification on the paint- stain. Examination by Becke line analysis
ed or frosted end. Place two drops of index of may also be used; however, this is usually
refraction medium n=1.550 on the slide. (The more cumbersome for asbestos determina-
medium n=1.550 is chosen because it is the tion.
matching index for chrysotile. Dip the end of (5) Difficult samples may need to be ana-
a clean paper-clip or dissecting needle into lyzed by SEM or TEM, or the results from
the droplet of refraction medium on the slide those techniques combined with light mi-
to moisten it. Then dip the probe into the croscopy for a definitive identification. Iden-
powder sample. Transfer what sticks on the tification of a particle as asbestos requires
probe to the slide. The material on the end of that it be asbestiform. Description of par-
the probe should have a diameter of about 3 ticles should follow the suggestion of Camp-
mm for a good mount. If the material is very bell. (Figure 1)
185
For the purpose of regulation, the mineral the gross appearance of wood. Fibers are eas-
must be one of the six minerals covered and ily parted from it. Asbestos fibers are very
must be in the asbestos growth habit. Large long compared with their widths. The fibers
specimen samples of asbestos generally have
186
ER10AU94.024</GPH>
have a very high tensile strength as dem- described above. Two preparations of the
onstrated by bending without breaking. As- same phase in the same index medium can be
bestos fibers exist in bundles that are easily made side-by-side on the same glass for con-
parted, show longitudinal fine structure and venience. Examine with the polarizing stereo
may be tufted at the ends showing bundle microscope. Estimate the percentage of as-
of sticks morphology. In the microscope bestos based on the amount of birefringent
some of these properties may not be observ- fiber present.
able. Amphiboles do not always show stri- (3) Examine the slides on the phase-polar
ations along their length even when they are microscopes at magnifications of 160 and
asbestos. Neither will they always show tuft- 400. Note the morphology of the fibers.
ing. They generally do not show a curved na- Long, thin, very straight fibers with little
ture except for very long fibers. Asbestos and curvature are indicative of fibers from the
asbestiform minerals are usually character- amphibole family. Curved, wavy fibers are
ized in groups by extremely high aspect ra- usually indicative of chrysotile. Estimate
tios (greater than 100:1). While aspect ratio the percentage of asbestos on the phase-polar
analysis is useful for characterizing popu- microscope under conditions of crossed
lations of fibers, it cannot be used to identify polars and a gypsum plate. Fibers smaller
individual fibers of intermediate to short as- than 1.0 m in thickness must be identified
pect ratio. Observation of many fibers is by inference to the presence of larger, identi-
often necessary to determine whether a sam- fiable fibers and morphology. If no larger fi-
ple consists of cleavage fragments or of as- bers are visible, electron microscopy should
bestos fibers. be performed. At this point, only a tentative
Most cleavage fragments of the asbestos identification can be made. Full identifica-
minerals are easily distinguishable from true tion must be made with dispersion micros-
asbestos fibers. This is because true cleavage copy. Details of the tests are included in the
fragments usually have larger diameters appendices.
than 1 m. Internal structure of particles (4) Once fibers have been determined to be
larger than this usually shows them to have present, they must be identified. Adjust the
no internal fibrillar structure. In addition, microscope for dispersion mode and observe
cleavage fragments of the monoclinic the fibers. The microscope has a rotating
amphiboles show inclined extinction under stage, one polarizing element, and a system
crossed polars with no compensator. Asbes- for generating dark-field dispersion micros-
tos fibers usually show extinction at zero de- copy (see Section 4.6. of this appendix). Align
grees or ambiguous extinction if any at all. a fiber with its length parallel to the polar-
Morphologically, the larger cleavage frag- izer and note the color of the Becke lines.
ments are obvious by their blunt or stepped Rotate the stage to bring the fiber length
ends showing prismatic habit. Also, they perpendicular to the polarizer and note the
tend to be acicular rather than filiform. color. Repeat this process for every fiber or
Where the particles are less than 1 m in fiber bundle examined. The colors must be
diameter and have an aspect ratio greater consistent with the colors generated by
than or equal to 3:1, it is recommended that standard asbestos reference materials for a
the sample be analyzed by SEM or TEM if positive identification. In n=1.550,
there is any question whether the fibers are amphiboles will generally show a yellow to
cleavage fragments or asbestiform particles. straw-yellow color indicating that the fiber
Care must be taken when analyzing by indices of refraction are higher than the liq-
electron microscopy because the inter- uid. If long, thin fibers are noted and the col-
ferences are different from those in light mi- ors are yellow, prepare further slides as
croscopy and may structurally be very simi- above in the suggested matching liquids list-
lar to asbestos. The classic interference is ed below:
between anthophyllite and biopyribole or in-
termediate fiber. Use the same morpho- Type of asbestos Index of refraction
logical clues for electron microscopy as are
Chrysotile ............................... n=1.550.
used for light microscopy, e.g. fibril split-
Amosite .................................. n=1.670 or 1.680.
ting, internal longitudinal striation, fraying, Crocidolite .............................. n=1.690.
curvature, etc. Anthophyllite .......................... n=1.605 and 1.620.
(1) Gross examination: Tremolite ................................ n=1.605 and 1.620.
Examine the sample, preferably in the Actinolite ................................ n=1.620.
glass vial. Determine the presence of any ob-
vious fibrous component. Estimate a per- Where more than one liquid is suggested,
centage based on previous experience and the first is preferred; however, in some cases
current observation. Determine whether any this liquid will not give good dispersion
pre-preparation is necessary. Determine the color. Take care to avoid interferences in the
number of phases present. This step may be other liquid; e.g., wollastonite in n=1.620 will
carried out or augmented by observation at give the same colors as tremolite. In n=1.605
6 to 40 under a stereo microscope. wollastonite will appear yellow in all direc-
(2) After performing any necessary pre- tions. Wollastonite may be determined under
preparation, prepare slides of each phase as crossed polars as it will change from blue to
187
yellow as it is rotated along its fiber axis by Step 1. 60% remains after heating at 550 C
tapping on the cover slip. Asbestos minerals for 1 h.
will not change in this way. Step 2. 30% of the residue of step 1 remains
Determination of the angle of extinction after dissolution of carbonate in 0.1 m HCl.
may, when present, aid in the determination Step 3. Microvisual estimation determines
of anthophyllite from tremolite. True asbes- that 5% of the sample is chrysotile asbes-
tos fibers usually have 0 extinction or am- tos.
biguous extinction, while cleavage fragments The reported result is:
have more definite extinction. R = (Microvisual result in percent)(Fraction
Continue analysis until both preparations remaining after step 2)(Fraction remain-
have been examined and all present species ing of original sample after step 1)
of asbestos are identified. If there are no fi- R = (5)(.30)(.60) = 0.9%
bers present, or there is less than 0.1% (8) Report the percent and type of asbestos
present, end the analysis with the minimum present. For samples where asbestos was
number of slides (2). identified, but is less than 1.0%, report As-
(5) Some fibers have a coating on them bestos present, less than 1.0%. There must
which makes dispersion microscopy very dif- have been at least two observed fibers or
ficult or impossible. Becke line analysis or fiber bundles in the two preparations to be
electron microscopy may be performed in reported as present. For samples where as-
those cases. Determine the percentage by bestos was not seen, report as None De-
light microscopy. TEM analysis tends to tected.
overestimate the actual percentage present.
(6) Percentage determination is an esti- 4. Auxiliary Information
mate of occluded area, tempered by gross ob- Because of the subjective nature of asbes-
servation. Gross observation information is tos analysis, certain concepts and procedures
used to make sure that the high magnifica- need to be discussed in more depth. This in-
tion microscopy does not greatly over- or formation will help the analyst understand
under-estimate the amount of fiber present. why some of the procedures are carried out
This part of the analysis requires a great the way they are.
deal of experience. Satisfactory models for
asbestos content analysis have not yet been 4.1. Light
developed, although some models based on
Light is electromagnetic energy. It travels
metallurgical grain-size determination have
from its source in packets called quanta. It
found some utility. Estimation is more eas-
is instructive to consider light as a plane
ily handled in situations where the grain
wave. The light has a direction of travel.
sizes visible at about 160 are about the same
Perpendicular to this and mutually perpen-
and the sample is relatively homogeneous.
dicular to each other, are two vector compo-
View all of the area under the cover slip to nents. One is the magnetic vector and the
make the percentage determination. View other is the electric vector. We shall only be
the fields while moving the stage, paying at- concerned with the electric vector. In this
tention to the clumps of material. These are description, the interaction of the vector and
not usually the best areas to perform disper- the mineral will describe all the observable
sion microscopy because of the interference phenomena. From a light source such a mi-
from other materials. But, they are the areas croscope illuminator, light travels in all dif-
most likely to represent the accurate per- ferent direction from the filament.
centage in the sample. Small amounts of as- In any given direction away from the fila-
bestos require slower scanning and more fre- ment, the electric vector is perpendicular to
quent analysis of individual fields. the direction of travel of a light ray. While
Report the area occluded by asbestos as perpendicular, its orientation is random
the concentration. This estimate does not about the travel axis. If the electric vectors
generally take into consideration the dif- from all the light rays were lined up by pass-
ference in density of the different species ing the light through a filter that would only
present in the sample. For most samples this let light rays with electric vectors oriented
is adequate. Simulation studies with similar in one direction pass, the light would then be
materials must be carried out to apply POLARIZED.
microvisual estimation for that purpose and Polarized light interacts with matter in
is beyond the scope of this procedure. the direction of the electric vector. This is
(7) Where successive concentrations have the polarization direction. Using this prop-
been made by chemical or physical means, erty it is possible to use polarized light to
the amount reported is the percentage of the probe different materials and identify them
material in the as submitted or original by how they interact with light. The speed of
state. The percentage determined by micros- light in a vacuum is a constant at about
copy is multiplied by the fractions remain- 2.9910 8 m/s. When light travels in different
ing after pre-preparation steps to give the materials such as air, water, minerals or oil,
percentage in the original sample. For exam- it does not travel at this speed. It travels
ple: slower. This slowing is a function of both the
188
material through which the light is traveling fast. The remainder of the asbestos min-
and the wavelength or frequency of the light. erals have the g axis along the fiber length.
In general, the more dense the material, the They are called length-slow. This orienta-
slower the light travels. Also, generally, the tion to fiber length is used to aid in the iden-
higher the frequency, the slower the light tification of asbestos.
will travel. The ratio of the speed of light in
a vacuum to that in a material is called the 4.3. Polarized Light Technique
index of refraction (n). It is usually meas-
Polarized light microscopy as described in
ured at 589 nm (the sodium D line). If white
light (light containing all the visible wave- this section uses the phase-polar microscope
lengths) travels through a material, rays of described in Section 3.2. A phase contrast
longer wavelengths will travel faster than microscope is fitted with two polarizing ele-
those of shorter wavelengths, this separation ments, one below and one above the sample.
is called dispersion. Dispersion is used as an The polarizers have their polarization direc-
identifier of materials as described in Sec- tions at right angles to each other. Depend-
tion 4.6. ing on the tests performed, there may be a
compensator between these two polarizing
4.2. Material Properties elements. Light emerging from a polarizing
element has its electric vector pointing in
Materials are either amorphous or crys-
the polarization direction of the element.
talline. The difference between these two de-
The light will not be subsequently trans-
scriptions depends on the positions of the
mitted through a second element set at a
atoms in them. The atoms in amorphous ma-
terials are randomly arranged with no long right angle to the first element. Unless the
range order. An example of an amorphous light is altered as it passes from one element
material is glass. The atoms in crystalline to the other, there is no transmission of
materials, on the other hand, are in regular light.
arrays and have long range order. Most of
4.4. Angle of Extinction
the atoms can be found in highly predictable
locations. Examples of crystalline material Crystals which have different crystal regu-
are salt, gold, and the asbestos minerals. larity in two or three main directions are
It is beyond the scope of this method to de- said to be anisotropic. They have a different
scribe the different types of crystalline ma- index of refraction in each of the main direc-
terials that can be found, or the full descrip- tions. When such a crystal is inserted be-
tion of the classes into which they can fall. tween the crossed polars, the field of view is
However, some general crystallography is no longer dark but shows the crystal in
provided below to give a foundation to the color. The color depends on the properties of
procedures described. the crystal. The light acts as if it travels
With the exception of anthophyllite, all through the crystal along the optical axes. If
the asbestos minerals belong to the a crystal optical axis were lined up along one
monoclinic crystal type. The unit cell is the of the polarizing directions (either the polar-
basic repeating unit of the crystal and for izer or the analyzer) the light would appear
monoclinic crystals can be described as hav- to travel only in that direction, and it would
ing three unequal sides, two 90 angles and blink out or go dark. The difference in de-
one angle not equal to 90. The orthorhombic grees between the fiber direction and the
group, of which anthophyllite is a member
angle at which it blinks out is called the
has three unequal sides and three 90 angles.
angle of extinction. When this angle can be
The unequal sides are a consequence of the
measured, it is useful in identifying the min-
complexity of fitting the different atoms
eral. The procedure for measuring the angle
into the unit cell. Although the atoms are in
of extinction is to first identify the polariza-
a regular array, that array is not symmet-
rical in all directions. There is long range tion direction in the microscope. A commer-
order in the three major directions of the cial alignment slide can be used to establish
crystal. However, the order is different in the polarization directions or use
each of the three directions. This has the ef- anthophyllite or another suitable mineral.
fect that the index of refraction is different This mineral has a zero degree angle of ex-
in each of the three directions. Using polar- tinction and will go dark to extinction as it
ized light, we can investigate the index of re- aligns with the polarization directions. When
fraction in each of the directions and iden- a fiber of anthophyllite has gone to extinc-
tify the mineral or material under investigation, align the eyepiece reticle or graticule
tion. The indices a, b, and g are used to iden- with the fiber so that there is a visual cue as
tify the lowest, middle, and highest index of to the direction of polarization in the field of
refraction respectively. The x direction, as- view. Tape or otherwise secure the eyepiece
sociated with a is called the fast axis. Con- in this position so it will not shift.
versely, the z direction is associated with g After the polarization direction has been
and is the slow direction. Crocidolite has a identified in the field of view, move the par-
along the fiber length making it length- ticle of interest to the center of the field of
189
view and align it with the polarization direc- used for this test is a gypsum plate of known
tion. For fibers, align the fiber along this di- thickness and birefringence. Such a compen-
rection. Note the angular reading of the ro- sator when oriented at 45 to the polarizer di-
tating stage. Looking at the particle, rotate rection, provides a retardation of 530 nm of
the stage until the fiber goes dark or blinks the 530 nm wavelength color. This enhances
out. Again note the reading of the stage. the red color and gives the background a
The difference in the first reading and the characteristic red to red-magenta color. If
second is an angle of extinction. this full-wave compensator is in place
The angle measured may vary as the ori- when the asbestos preparation is inserted
entation of the fiber changes about its long into the light train, the colors seen on the fi-
axis. Tables of mineralogical data usually re- bers are quite different. Gypsum, like asbes-
port the maximum angle of extinction. As- tos has a fast axis and a slow axis. When a
bestos forming minerals, when they exhibit fiber is aligned with its fast axis in the same
an angle of extinction, usually do show an direction as the fast axis of the gypsum
angle of extinction close to the reported plate, the ray vibrating in the slow direction
maximum, or as appropriate depending on is retarded by both the asbestos and the gyp-
the substitution chemistry. sum. This results in a higher retardation
than would be present for either of the two
4.5. Crossed Polars With Compensator
minerals. The color seen is a second order
When the optical axes of a crystal are not blue. When the fiber is rotated 90 using the
lined up along one of the polarizing direc- rotating stage, the slow direction of the fiber
tions (either the polarizer or the analyzer) is now aligned with the fast direction of the
part of the light travels along one axis and gypsum and the fast direction of the fiber is
part travels along the other visible axis. This aligned with the slow direction of the gyp-
is characteristic of birefringent materials. sum. Thus, one ray vibrates faster in the fast
The color depends on the difference of the direction of the gypsum, and slower in the
two visible indices of refraction and the slow direction of the fiber; the other ray will
thickness of the crystal. The maximum dif- vibrate slower in the slow direction of the
ference available is the difference between gypsum and faster in the fast direction of
the a and the g axes. This maximum dif- the fiber. In this case, the effect is subtrac-
ference is usually tabulated as the tive and the color seen is a first order yel-
birefringence of the crystal. low. As long as the fiber thickness does not
For this test, align the fiber at 45 to the add appreciably to the color, the same basic
polarization directions in order to maximize colors will be seen for all asbestos types ex-
the contribution to each of the optical axes. cept crocidolite. In crocidolite the colors
The colors seen are called retardation colors. will be weaker, may be in the opposite direc-
They arise from the recombination of light tions, and will be altered by the blue absorp-
which has traveled through the two separate tion color natural to crocidolite. Hundreds of
directions of the crystal. One of the rays is other materials will give the same colors as
retarded behind the other since the light in asbestos, and therefore, this test is not defin-
that direction travels slower. On recombina- itive for asbestos. The test is useful in dis-
tion, some of the colors which make up criminating against fiberglass or other
white light are enhanced by constructive in- amorphous fibers such as some synthetic fi-
terference and some are suppressed by de- bers. Certain synthetic fibers will show re-
structive interference. The result is a color tardation colors different than asbestos;
dependent on the difference between the in- however, there are some forms of poly-
dices and the thickness of the crystal. The ethylene and aramid which will show mor-
proper colors, thicknesses, and retardations phology and retardation colors similar to as-
are shown on a Michel-Levy chart. The three bestos minerals. This test must be supple-
items, retardation, thickness and mented with a positive identification test
birefringence are related by the following re- when birefringent fibers are present which
lationship: can not be excluded by morphology. This
R = t(n) test is relatively ineffective for use on fibers
R = retardation, t = crystal thickness in m, less than 1 m in diameter. For positive con-
and firmation TEM or SEM should be used if no
, = indices of refraction. larger bundles or fibers are visible.
Examination of the equation for asbestos
4.6. Dispersion Staining
minerals reveals that the visible colors for
almost all common asbestos minerals and Dispersion microscopy or dispersion stain-
fiber sizes are shades of gray and black. The ing is the method of choice for the identi-
eye is relatively poor at discriminating dif- fication of asbestos in bulk materials. Becke
ferent shades of gray. It is very good at dis- line analysis is used by some laboratories
criminating different colors. In order to and yields the same results as does disper-
compensate for the low retardation, a com- sion staining for asbestos and can be used in
pensator is added to the light train between lieu of dispersion staining. Dispersion stain-
the polarization elements. The compensator ing is performed on the same platform as the
190
phase-polar analysis with the analyzer and note the color. Both colors must be con-
compensator removed. One polarizing ele- sistent with standard asbestos minerals in
ment remains to define the direction of the the correct direction for a positive identi-
light so that the different indices of refrac- fication of asbestos. If only one of the colors
tion of the fibers may be separately deter- is correct while the other is not, the identi-
mined. Dispersion microscopy is a dark-field fication is not positive. If the colors in both
technique when used for asbestos. Particles directions are bluish-white, the analyst has
are imaged with scattered light. Light which chosen a matching index oil which is higher
is unscattered is blocked from reaching the than the correct matching oil, e.g. the ana-
eye either by the back field image mask in a lyst has used n = 1.620 where chrysotile is
McCrone objective or a back field image present. The next lower oil (Section 3.5.)
mask in the phase condenser. The most con- should be used to prepare another specimen.
venient method is to use the rotating phase If the color in both directions is yellow-
condenser to move an oversized phase ring white to straw-yellow-white, this indicates
into place. The ideal size for this ring is for that the index of the oil is lower than the
the central disk to be just larger than the index of the fiber, e.g. the preparation is in
objective entry aperture as viewed in the n = 1.550 while anthophyllite is present. Se-
back focal plane. The larger the disk, the lect the next higher oil (Section 3.5.) and pre-
less scattered light reaches the eye. This will pare another slide. Continue in this fashion
have the effect of diminishing the intensity until a positive identification of all asbestos
of dispersion color and will shift the actual species present has been made or all possible
color seen. The colors seen vary even on mi- asbestos species have been ruled out by nega-
croscopes from the same manufacturer. This tive results in this test. Certain plant fibers
is due to the different bands of wavelength can have similar dispersion colors as asbes-
exclusion by different mask sizes. The mask tos. Take care to note and evaluate the mor-
may either reside in the condenser or in the phology of the fibers or remove the plant fi-
objective back focal plane. It is imperative bers in pre-preparation. Coating material on
that the analyst determine by experimen- the fibers such as carbonate or vinyl may de-
tation with asbestos standards what the ap- stroy the dispersion color. Usually, there
propriate colors should be for each asbestos will be some outcropping of fiber which will
type. The colors depend also on the tempera- show the colors sufficient for identification.
ture of the preparation and the exact chem- When this is not the case, treat the sample
istry of the asbestos. Therefore, some slight as described in Section 3.3. and then perform
differences from the standards should be al- dispersion staining. Some samples will yield
lowed. This is not a serious problem for com- to Becke line analysis if they are coated or
mercial asbestos uses. This technique is used electron microscopy can be used for identi-
for identification of the indices of refraction fication.
for fibers by recognition of color. There is no
direct numerical readout of the index of re- 5. References
fraction. Correlation of color to actual index 5.1. Crane, D.T., Asbestos in Air, OSHA
of refraction is possible by referral to pub- method ID160, Revised November 1992.
lished conversion tables. This is not nec- 5.2. Ford, W.E., Danas Textbook of Min-
essary for the analysis of asbestos. Recogni- eralogy; Fourth Ed.; John Wiley and Son,
tion of appropriate colors along with the New York, 1950, p. vii.
proper morphology are deemed sufficient to 5.3. Selikoff,.I.J., Lee, D.H.K., Asbestos and
identify the commercial asbestos minerals. Disease, Academic Press, New York, 1978, pp.
Other techniques including SEM, TEM, and 3, 20.
XRD may be required to provide additional 5.4. Women Inspectors of Factories. Annual
information in order to identify other types Report for 1898, H.M. Statistical Office, Lon-
of asbestos. don, p. 170 (1898).
Make a preparation in the suspected 5.5. Selikoff,.I.J., Lee, D.H.K., Asbestos and
matching high dispersion oil, e.g., n=1.550 for Disease, Academic Press, New York, 1978, pp.
chrysotile. Perform the preliminary tests to 26, 30.
determine whether the fibers are 5.6. Campbell, W.J., et al, Selected Silicate
birefringent or not. Take note of the mor- Minerals and Their Asbestiform Varieties,
phological character. Wavy fibers are indic- United States Department of the Interior,
ative of chrysotile while long, straight, thin, Bureau of Mines, Information Circular 8751,
frayed fibers are indicative of amphibole as- 1977.
bestos. This can aid in the selection of the 5.7. Asbestos, Code of Federal Regulations,
appropriate matching oil. The microscope is 29 CFR 1910.1001 and 29 CFR 1926.58.
set up and the polarization direction is noted 5.8. National Emission Standards for Haz-
as in Section 4.4. Align a fiber with the po- ardous Air Pollutants; Asbestos NESHAP Revi-
larization direction. Note the color. This is sion, FEDERAL REGISTER, Vol. 55, No. 224, 20
the color parallel to the polarizer. Then ro- November 1990, p. 48410.
tate the fiber rotating the stage 90 so that 5.9. Ross, M. The Asbestos Minerals: Defini-
the polarization direction is across the fiber. tions, Description, Modes of Formation, Phys-
This is the perpendicular position. Again ical and Chemical Properties and Health Risk to
191
the Mining Community, Nation Bureau of pair, and assembly operations. The employer
Standards Special Publication, Washington, shall institute engineering controls and
D.C., 1977. work practices using either the method set
5.10. Lilis, R., Fibrous Zeolites and En- forth in paragraph [A] or paragraph [B] of
demic Mesothelioma in Cappadocia, Turkey, this appendix, or any other method which
J. Occ Medicine, 1981, 23, (8) ,548550. the employer can demonstrate to be equiva-
5.11. Occupational Exposure to Asbestos lent in terms of reducing employee exposure
1972, U.S. Department of Health Education to asbestos as defined and which meets the
and Welfare, Public Health Service, Center requirements described in paragraph [C] of
for Disease Control, National Institute for this appendix, for those facilities in which no
Occupational Safety and Health, HSM72 more than 5 pairs of brakes or 5 clutches are
10267. inspected, disassembled, reassembled and/or
5.12. Campbell,W.J., et al, Relationship of repaired per week, the method set forth in
Mineral Habit to Size Characteristics for paragraph [D] of this appendix may be used:
Tremolite Fragments and Fibers, United States
Department of the Interior, Bureau of Mines, [A] Negative Pressure Enclosure/HEPA Vacuum
Information Circular 8367, 1979. System Method
5.13. Mefford, D., DCM Laboratory, Denver,
(1) The brake and clutch inspection, dis-
private communication, July 1987.
assembly, repair, and assembly operations
5.14. Deer, W.A., Howie, R.A., Zussman, J.,
shall be enclosed to cover and contain the
Rock Forming Minerals, Longman, Thetford,
clutch or brake assembly and to prevent the
UK, 1974.
5.15. Kerr, P.F., Optical Mineralogy; Third release of asbestos fibers into the workers
Ed. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1959. breathing zone.
5.16. Veblen, D.R. (Ed.), Amphiboles and (2) The enclosure shall be sealed tightly
Other Hydrous PyribolesMineralogy, Reviews and thoroughly inspected for leaks before
in Mineralogy, Vol 9A, Michigan, 1982, pp 1 work begins on brake and clutch inspection,
102. disassembly, repair, and assembly.
5.17. Dixon, W.C., Applications of Optical Mi- (3) The enclosure shall be such that the
croscopy in the Analysis of Asbestos and worker can clearly see the operation and
Quartz, ACS Symposium Series, No. 120, Ana- shall provide impermeable sleeves through
lytical Techniques in Occupational Health which the worker can handle the brake and
Chemistry, 1979. clutch inspection, disassembly, repair and
5.18. Polarized Light Microscopy, McCrone assembly. The integrity of the sleeves and
Research Institute, Chicago, 1976. ports shall be examined before work begins.
5.19. Asbestos Identification, McCrone Re- (4) A HEPA-filtered vacuum shall be em-
search Institute, G & G printers, Chicago, ployed to maintain the enclosure under neg-
1987. ative pressure throughout the operation.
5.20. McCrone, W.C., Calculation of Refrac- Compressed-air may be used to remove as-
tive Indices from Dispersion Staining Data, bestos fibers or particles from the enclosure.
The Microscope, No 37, Chicago, 1989. (5) The HEPA vacuum shall be used first to
5.21. Levadie, B. (Ed.), Asbestos and Other loosen the asbestos containing residue from
Health Related Silicates, ASTM Technical the brake and clutch parts and then to evac-
Publication 834, ASTM, Philadelphia 1982. uate the loosened asbestos containing mate-
5.22. Steel, E. and Wylie, A., Riordan, P.H. rial from the enclosure and capture the ma-
(Ed.), Mineralogical Characteristics of As- terial in the vacuum filter.
bestos, Geology of Asbestos Deposits, pp. 93101, (6) The vacuums filter, when full, shall be
SME-AIME, 1981. first wetted with a fine mist of water, then
5.23. Zussman, J., The Mineralogy of Asbes- removed and placed immediately in an im-
tos, Asbestos: Properties, Applications and Haz- permeable container, labeled according to
ards, pp. 4567 Wiley, 1979. paragraph (k)(8) of this section and disposed
of according to paragraph (l) of this section.
APPENDIX L TO 1915.1001WORK PRACTICES (7) Any spills or releases of asbestos con-
AND ENGINEERING CONTROLS FOR AUTO- taining waste material from inside of the en-
MOTIVE BRAKE AND CLUTCH INSPECTION, DIS- closure or vacuum hose or vacuum filter
ASSEMBLY, REPAIR AND ASSEMBLYMANDA- shall be immediately cleaned up and dis-
TORY posed of according to paragraph (l) of the
This mandatory appendix specifies engi- section.
neering controls and work practices that
[B] Low Pressure/Wet Cleaning Method
must be implemented by the employer dur-
ing automotive brake and clutch inspection, (1) A catch basin shall be placed under the
disassembly, repair, and assembly oper- brake assembly, positioned to avoid splashes
ations. Proper use of these engineering con- and spills.
trols and work practices by trained employ- (2) The reservoir shall contain water con-
ees will reduce employees asbestos exposure taining an organic solvent or wetting agent.
below the permissible exposure level during The flow of liquid shall be controlled such
clutch and brake inspection, disassembly, re- that the brake assembly is gently flooded to
192
prevent the asbestos-containing brake dust (4) The use of dry brushing during the wet
from becoming airborne. method operations is prohibited.
(3) The aqueous solution shall be allowed [59 FR 41080, Aug. 10, 1994, as amended at 60
to flow between the brake drum and brake FR 33344, June 28, 1995; 60 FR 3398733995,
support before the drum is removed. June 29, 1995; 60 FR 36044, July 13, 1995; 60 FR
(4) After removing the brake drum, the 50412, Sept. 29, 1995; 61 FR 43457, Aug. 23, 1996;
wheel hub and back of the brake assembly 63 FR 35137, June 29, 1998; 67 FR 44545, 44546,
shall be thoroughly wetted to suppress dust. July 3, 2002; 70 FR 1143, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR
(5) The brake support plate, brake shoes 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50191, Aug. 24, 2006]
and brake components used to attach the
brake shoes shall be thoroughly washed be- 1915.1002 Coal tar pitch volatiles; in-
fore removing the old shoes. terpretation of term.
(6) In systems using filters, the filters, NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship-
when full, shall be first wetted with a fine yard employment under this section are
mist of water, then removed and placed im- identical to those set forth at 1910.1002 of
mediately in an impermeable container, la- this chapter.
beled according to paragraph (k)(8) of this
[61 FR 31430, June 20, 1996]
section and disposed of according to para-
graph (l) of this section. 1915.1003 13 carcinogens (4
(7) Any spills of asbestos-containing aque- Nitrobiphenyl, etc.).
ous solution or any asbestos-containing
waste material shall be cleaned up imme- NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship-
diately and disposed of according to para- yard employment under this section are
graph (l) of this section. identical to those set forth at 1910.1003 of
this chapter.
(8) The use of dry brushing during low pres-
sure/wet cleaning operations is prohibited. [61 FR 31430, June 20, 1996]
[C] Equivalent Methods 1915.1004 alpha-Naphthylamine.

An equivalent method is one which has suf- NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship-
ficient written detail so that it can be repro- yard employment under this section are
duced and has been demonstrated that the identical to those set forth at 1910.1003 of
exposures resulting from the equivalent this chapter.
method are equal to or less than the expo- [61 FR 31430, June 20, 1996]
sures which would result from the use of the
method described in paragraph [A] of this ap- 1915.1005 [Reserved]
pendix. For purposes of making this com-
parison, the employer shall assume that ex- 1915.1006 Methyl chloromethyl ether.
posures resulting from the use of the method
NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship-
described in paragraph [A] of this appendix
shall not exceed 0.016 f/cc, as measured by identical to those set forth at 1910.1003 of
the OSHA reference method and as averaged this chapter.
over at least 18 personal samples.
[61 FR 31430, June 20, 1996]
[D] Wet Method
1915.1007 3,3-Dichlorobenzidiene
(1) A spray bottle, hose nozzle, or other im- (and its salts).
plement capable of delivering a fine mist of
water or amended water or other delivery NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship-
system capable of delivering water at low yard employment under this section are
pressure, shall be used to first thoroughly identical to those set forth at 1910.1003 of
wet the brake and clutch parts. Brake and this chapter.
clutch components shall then be wiped clean [61 FR 31430, June 20, 1996]
with a cloth.
(2) The cloth shall be placed in an imper- 1915.1008 bis-Chloromethyl ether.
meable container, labelled according to para- NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship-
graph (k)(8) of this section and then disposed yard employment under this section are
of according to paragraph (l) of this section, identical to those set forth at 1910.1003 of
or the cloth shall be laundered in a way to this chapter.
prevent the release of asbestos fibers in ex-
cess of 0.1 fiber per cubic centimeter of air. [61 FR 31430, June 20, 1996]
(3) Any spills of solvent or any asbestos
containing waste material shall be cleaned 1915.1009 beta-Naphthylamine.
up immediately according to paragraph (l) of NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship-
this section. yard employment under this section are
193
identical to those set forth at 1910.1003 of identical to those set forth at 1910.1017 of
this chapter. this chapter.
[61 FR 31430, June 20, 1996] [61 FR 31430, June 20, 1996]
1915.1010 Benzidine. 1915.1018 Inorganic arsenic.

NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship- NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship-
yard employment under this section are yard employment under this section are
identical to those set forth at 1910.1003 of identical to those set forth at 1910.1018 of
this chapter. this chapter.
[61 FR 31430, June 20, 1996] [61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
1915.1011 4-Aminodiphenyl. 1915.1020 Access to employee expo-

NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship- sure and medical records.
yard employment under this section are NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship-
identical to those set forth at 1910.1003 of yard employment under this section are
this chapter. identical to those set forth at 1910.1020 of
[61 FR 31430, June 20, 1996] this chapter.
[61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
1915.1012 Ethyleneimine.
NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship- 1915.1025 Lead.
yard employment under this section are NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship-
identical to those set forth at 1910.1003 of yard employment under this section are
this chapter. identical to those set forth at 1910.1025 of
[61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
1915.1013 beta-Propiolactone.
NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship- 1915.1026 Chromium (VI).
(a) Scope. (1) This standard applies to
identical to those set forth at 1910.1003 of
this chapter. occupational exposures to chromium
(VI) in all forms and compounds in
[61 FR 31430, June 20, 1996] shipyards, marine terminals, and
longshoring, except:
1915.1014 2-Acetylaminofluorene.
(2) Exposures that occur in the appli-
NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship- cation of pesticides regulated by the
yard employment under this section are Environmental Protection Agency or
identical to those set forth at 1910.1003 of another Federal government agency
this chapter.
(e.g., the treatment of wood with pre-
[61 FR 31430, June 20, 1996] servatives);
(3) Exposures to portland cement; or
1915.1015 4-
Dimethylaminoazobenzene. (4) Where the employer has objective
data demonstrating that a material
NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship- containing chromium or a specific
yard employment under this section are process, operation, or activity involv-
ing chromium cannot release dusts,
this chapter.
fumes, or mists of chromium (VI) in
[61 FR 31430, June 20, 1996] concentrations at or above 0.5 gm/m3
as an 8-hour time-weighted average
1915.1016 N-Nitrosodimethylamine. (TWA) under any expected conditions
NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship- of use.
yard employment under this section are (b) Definitions. For the purposes of
identical to those set forth at 1910.1003 of this section the following definitions
this chapter. apply:
[61 FR 31430, June 20, 1996] Action level means a concentration of
airborne chromium (VI) of 2.5
1915.1017 Vinyl chloride. micrograms per cubic meter of air (2.5
NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship- gm/m3) calculated as an 8-hour time-
yard employment under this section are weighted average (TWA).
194
Assistant Secretary means the Assist- pendently provide or be delegated the

ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- responsibility to provide some or all of
tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart- the particular health care services re-
ment of Labor, or designee. quired by paragraph (i) of this section.
Chromium (VI) [hexavalent chromium This section means this 1915.1026
or Cr(VI)] means chromium with a va- chromium (VI) standard.
lence of positive six, in any form and in (c) Permissible exposure limit (PEL).
any compound. The employer shall ensure that no em-
Director means the Director of the ployee is exposed to an airborne con-
National Institute for Occupational centration of chromium (VI) in excess
Safety and Health (NIOSH), U.S. De- of 5 micrograms per cubic meter of air
partment of Health and Human Serv- (5 gm/m3), calculated as an 8-hour
ices, or designee. time-weighted average (TWA).
Emergency means any occurrence (d) Exposure determination(1) Gen-
that results, or is likely to result, in an eral. Each employer who has a work-
uncontrolled release of chromium (VI). place or work operation covered by this
If an incidental release of chromium section shall determine the 8-hour
(VI) can be controlled at the time of re- TWA exposure for each employee ex-
lease by employees in the immediate posed to chromium (VI). This deter-
release area, or by maintenance per- mination shall be made in accordance
sonnel, it is not an emergency. with either paragraph (d)(2) or para-
Employee exposure means the expo- graph (d)(3) of this section.
sure to airborne chromium (VI) that (2) Scheduled monitoring option. (i) The
would occur if the employee were not employer shall perform initial moni-
using a respirator. toring to determine the 8-hour TWA
High-efficiency particulate air [HEPA] exposure for each employee on the
filter means a filter that is at least 99.97 basis of a sufficient number of personal
percent efficient in removing mono-dis- breathing zone air samples to accu-
persed particles of 0.3 micrometers in rately characterize full shift exposure
diameter or larger. on each shift, for each job classifica-
Historical monitoring data means data tion, in each work area. Where an em-
from chromium (VI) monitoring con- ployer does representative sampling in-
ducted prior to May 30, 2006, obtained stead of sampling all employees in
during work operations conducted order to meet this requirement, the
under workplace conditions closely re- employer shall sample the employee(s)
sembling the processes, types of mate- expected to have the highest chromium
rial, control methods, work practices, (VI) exposures.
and environmental conditions in the (ii) If initial monitoring indicates
employers current operations. that employee exposures are below the
Objective data means information action level, the employer may dis-
such as air monitoring data from in- continue monitoring for those employ-
dustry-wide surveys or calculations ees whose exposures are represented by
based on the composition or chemical such monitoring.
and physical properties of a substance (iii) If monitoring reveals employee
demonstrating the employee exposure exposures to be at or above the action
to chromium (VI) associated with a level, the employer shall perform peri-
particular product or material or a spe- odic monitoring at least every six
cific process, operation, or activity. months.
The data must reflect workplace condi- (iv) If monitoring reveals employee
tions closely resembling the processes, exposures to be above the PEL, the em-
types of material, control methods, ployer shall perform periodic moni-
work practices, and environmental toring at least every three months.
conditions in the employers current (v) If periodic monitoring indicates
operations. that employee exposures are below the
Physician or other licensed health care action level, and the result is con-
professional [PLHCP] is an individual firmed by the result of another moni-
whose legally permitted scope of prac- toring taken at least seven days later,
tice (i.e., license, registration, or cer- the employer may discontinue the
tification) allows him or her to inde- monitoring for those employees whose
195
exposures are represented by such mon- (ii) When observation of monitoring

itoring. requires entry into an area where the
(vi) The employer shall perform addi- use of protective clothing or equipment
tional monitoring when there has been is required, the employer shall provide
any change in the production process, the observer with clothing and equip-
raw materials, equipment, personnel, ment and shall assure that the ob-
work practices, or control methods server uses such clothing and equip-
that may result in new or additional ment and complies with all other appli-
exposures to chromium (VI), or when cable safety and health procedures.
the employer has any reason to believe (e) Methods of compliance(1) Engi-
that new or additional exposures have neering and work practice controls. (i)
occurred. Except as permitted in paragraph
(3) Performance-oriented option. The (e)(1)(ii) of this section, the employer
employer shall determine the 8-hour shall use engineering and work prac-
TWA exposure for each employee on tice controls to reduce and maintain
the basis of any combination of air employee exposure to chromium (VI)
monitoring data, historical monitoring to or below the PEL unless the em-
data, or objective data sufficient to ac- ployer can demonstrate that such con-
curately characterize employee expo- trols are not feasible. Wherever fea-
sure to chromium (VI). sible engineering and work practice
controls are not sufficient to reduce
(4) Employee notification of determina-
employee exposure to or below the
tion results. (i) Where the exposure de-
PEL, the employer shall use them to
termination indicates that employee
reduce employee exposure to the lowest
exposure exceeds the PEL, as soon as
levels achievable, and shall supplement
possible but not more than 5 working
them by the use of respiratory protec-
days later the employer shall either
tion that complies with the require-
post the results in an appropriate loca-
ments of paragraph (f) of this section.
tion that is accessible to all affected
(ii) Where the employer can dem-
employees or shall notify each affected
onstrate that a process or task does
employee individually in writing of the
not result in any employee exposure to
results. chromium (VI) above the PEL for 30 or
(ii) Whenever the exposure deter- more days per year (12 consecutive
mination indicates that employee ex- months), the requirement to imple-
posure is above the PEL, the employer ment engineering and work practice
shall describe in the written notifica- controls to achieve the PEL does not
tion the corrective action being taken apply to that process or task.
to reduce employee exposure to or (2) Prohibition of rotation. The em-
below the PEL. ployer shall not rotate employees to
(5) Accuracy of measurement. Where different jobs to achieve compliance
air monitoring is performed to comply with the PEL.
with the requirements of this section, (f) Respiratory protection(1) General.
the employer shall use a method of The employer shall provide respiratory
monitoring and analysis that can protection for employees during:
measure chromium (VI) to within an (i) Periods necessary to install or im-
accuracy of plus or minus 25 percent plement feasible engineering and work
(25%) and can produce accurate meas- practice controls;
urements to within a statistical con- (ii) Work operations, such as mainte-
fidence level of 95 percent for airborne nance and repair activities, for which
concentrations at or above the action engineering and work practice controls
level. are not feasible;
(6) Observation of monitoring. (i) (iii) Work operations for which an
Where air monitoring is performed to employer has implemented all feasible
comply with the requirements of this engineering and work practice controls
section, the employer shall provide af- and such controls are not sufficient to
fected employees or their designated reduce exposures to or below the PEL;
representatives an opportunity to ob- (iv) Work operations where employ-
serve any monitoring of employee ex- ees are exposed above the PEL for
posure to chromium (VI). fewer than 30 days per year, and the
196
employer has elected not to implement disperses chromium (VI) into the air or
engineering and work practice controls onto an employees body.
to achieve the PEL; or (iii) The employer shall inform any
(v) Emergencies. person who launders or cleans protec-
(2) Respiratory protection program. tive clothing or equipment contami-
Where respirator use is required by this nated with chromium (VI) of the poten-
section, the employer shall institute a tially harmful effects of exposure to
respiratory protection program in ac- chromium (VI) and that the clothing
cordance with 29 CFR 1910.134. and equipment should be laundered or
(g) Protective work clothing and equip- cleaned in a manner that minimizes
ment(1) Provision and use. Where a skin or eye contact with chromium
hazard is present or is likely to be (VI) and effectively prevents the re-
present from skin or eye contact with lease of airborne chromium (VI) in ex-
chromium (VI), the employer shall process of the PEL.
vide appropriate personal protective (h) Hygiene areas and practices(1)
clothing and equipment at no cost to General. Where protective clothing and
employees, and shall ensure that em- equipment is required, the employer
ployees use such clothing and equip- shall provide change rooms in conform-
ment. ance with 29 CFR 1910.141. Where skin
contact with chromium (VI) occurs,
(2) Removal and storage. (i) The em-
the employer shall provide washing fa-
ployer shall ensure that employees re-
cilities in conformance with 29 CFR
move all protective clothing and equip-
1915.97. Eating and drinking areas pro-
ment contaminated with chromium
vided by the employer shall also be in
(VI) at the end of the work shift or at
conformance with 1915.97.
the completion of their tasks involving
(2) Change rooms. The employer shall
chromium (VI) exposure, whichever
assure that change rooms are equipped
comes first.
with separate storage facilities for pro-
(ii) The employer shall ensure that tective clothing and equipment and for
no employee removes chromium (VI)- street clothes, and that these facilities
contaminated protective clothing or prevent cross-contamination.
equipment from the workplace, except (3) Washing facilities. (i) The employer
for those employees whose job it is to shall provide readily accessible wash-
launder, clean, maintain, or dispose of ing facilities capable of removing chro-
such clothing or equipment. mium (VI) from the skin, and shall en-
(iii) When contaminated protective sure that affected employees use these
clothing or equipment is removed for facilities when necessary.
laundering, cleaning, maintenance, or (ii) The employer shall ensure that
disposal, the employer shall ensure employees who have skin contact with
that it is stored and transported in chromium (VI) wash their hands and
sealed, impermeable bags or other faces at the end of the work shift and
closed, impermeable containers. prior to eating, drinking, smoking,
(iv) Bags or containers of contami- chewing tobacco or gum, applying cos-
nated protective clothing or equipment metics, or using the toilet.
that are removed from change rooms (4) Eating and drinking areas. (i)
for laundering, cleaning, maintenance, Whenever the employer allows employ-
or disposal shall be labeled in accord- ees to consume food or beverages at a
ance with the requirements of the Haz- worksite where chromium (VI) is
ard Communication Standard, 29 CFR present, the employer shall ensure that
1910.1200. eating and drinking areas and surfaces
(3) Cleaning and replacement. (i) The are maintained as free as practicable of
employer shall clean, launder, repair chromium (VI).
and replace all protective clothing and (ii) The employer shall ensure that
equipment required by this section as employees do not enter eating and
needed to maintain its effectiveness. drinking areas with protective work
(ii) The employer shall prohibit the clothing or equipment unless surface
removal of chromium (VI) from protec- chromium (VI) has been removed from
tive clothing and equipment by blow- the clothing and equipment by meth-
ing, shaking, or any other means that ods that do not disperse chromium (VI)
197
into the air or onto an employees (VI); any history of respiratory system
body. dysfunction; any history of asthma,
(5) Prohibited activities. The employer dermatitis, skin ulceration, or nasal
shall ensure that employees do not eat, septum perforation; and smoking sta-
drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or tus and history;
apply cosmetics in areas where skin or (ii) A physical examination of the
eye contact with chromium (VI) oc- skin and respiratory tract; and
curs; or carry the products associated (iii) Any additional tests deemed ap-
with these activities, or store such propriate by the examining PLHCP.
products in these areas. (4) Information provided to the PLHCP.
(i) Medical surveillance(1) General. (i) The employer shall ensure that the ex-
The employer shall make medical sur-
amining PLHCP has a copy of this
veillance available at no cost to the
standard, and shall provide the fol-
employee, and at a reasonable time and
lowing information:
place, for all employees:
(A) Who are or may be occupation- (i) A description of the affected em-
ally exposed to chromium (VI) at or ployees former, current, and antici-
above the action level for 30 or more pated duties as they relate to the em-
days a year; ployees occupational exposure to chro-
(B) Experiencing signs or symptoms mium (VI);
of the adverse health effects associated (ii) The employees former, current,
with chromium (VI) exposure; or and anticipated levels of occupational
(C) Exposed in an emergency. exposure to chromium (VI);
(ii) The employer shall assure that (iii) A description of any personal
all medical examinations and proce- protective equipment used or to be
dures required by this section are per- used by the employee, including when
formed by or under the supervision of a and for how long the employee has used
PLHCP. that equipment; and
(2) Frequency. The employer shall (iv) Information from records of em-
provide a medical examination: ployment-related medical examina-
(i) Within 30 days after initial assign- tions previously provided to the af-
ment, unless the employee has received fected employee, currently within the
a chromium (VI) related medical exam- control of the employer.
ination that meets the requirements of (5) PLHCPs written medical opinion.
this paragraph within the last twelve (i) The employer shall obtain a written
months; medical opinion from the PLHCP,
(ii) Annually; within 30 days for each medical exam-
(iii) Within 30 days after a PLHCPs ination performed on each employee,
written medical opinion recommends which contains:
an additional examination;
(A) The PLHCPs opinion as to
(iv) Whenever an employee shows
whether the employee has any detected
signs or symptoms of the adverse
medical condition(s) that would place
health effects associated with chro-
the employee at increased risk of ma-
mium (VI) exposure;
terial impairment to health from fur-
(v) Within 30 days after exposure dur-
ing an emergency which results in an ther exposure to chromium (VI);
uncontrolled release of chromium (VI); (B) Any recommended limitations
or upon the employees exposure to chro-
(vi) At the termination of employ- mium (VI) or upon the use of personal
ment, unless the last examination that protective equipment such as res-
satisfied the requirements of paragraph pirators;
(i) of this section was less than six (C) A statement that the PLHCP has
months prior to the date of termi- explained to the employee the results
nation. of the medical examination, including
(3) Contents of examination. A medical any medical conditions related to chro-
examination consists of: mium (VI) exposure that require fur-
(i) A medical and work history, with ther evaluation or treatment, and any
emphasis on: past, present, and antici- special provisions for use of protective
pated future exposure to chromium clothing or equipment.
198
(ii) The PLHCP shall not reveal to accurate record of the historical moni-
the employer specific findings or diag- toring data relied upon.
noses unrelated to occupational expo- (ii) The record shall include informa-
sure to chromium (VI). tion that reflects the following condi-
(iii) The employer shall provide a tions:
copy of the PLHCPs written medical (A) The data were collected using
opinion to the examined employee methods that meet the accuracy re-
within two weeks after receiving it. quirements of paragraph (d)(5) of this
(j) Communication of chromium (VI) section;
hazards to employees(1) General. In ad- (B) The processes and work practices
dition to the requirements of the Haz- that were in use when the historical
ard Communication Standard, 29 CFR monitoring data were obtained are es-
1910.1200, employers shall comply with sentially the same as those to be used
the following requirements. during the job for which exposure is
(2) Employee information and training. being determined;
(i) The employer shall ensure that each (C) The characteristics of the chro-
employee can demonstrate knowledge mium (VI) containing material being
of at least the following: handled when the historical moni-
(A) The contents of this section; and toring data were obtained are the same
(B) The purpose and a description of as those on the job for which exposure
the medical surveillance program re- is being determined;
quired by paragraph (i) of this section. (D) Environmental conditions pre-
(ii) The employer shall make a copy vailing when the historical monitoring
of this section readily available with- data were obtained are the same as
out cost to all affected employees. those on the job for which exposure is
being determined; and
(k) Recordkeeping(1) Air monitoring
(E) Other data relevant to the oper-
data. (i) The employer shall maintain
ations, materials, processing, or em-
an accurate record of all air moni-
ployee exposures covered by the excep-
toring conducted to comply with the
tion.
requirements of this section.
(ii) This record shall include at least
historical exposure records are main-
the following information:
tained and made available in accord-
(A) The date of measurement for each ance with 29 CFR 1910.1020.
sample taken; (3) Objective data. (i) The employer
(B) The operation involving exposure shall maintain an accurate record of
to chromium (VI) that is being mon- all objective data relied upon to com-
itored; ply with the requirements of this sec-
(C) Sampling and analytical methods tion.
used and evidence of their accuracy; (ii) This record shall include at least
(D) Number, duration, and the results the following information:
of samples taken; (A) The chromium containing mate-
(E) Type of personal protective rial in question;
equipment, such as respirators worn; (B) The source of the objective data;
and (C) The testing protocol and results
(F) Name, social security number, of testing, or analysis of the material
and job classification of all employees for the release of chromium (VI);
represented by the monitoring, indi- (D) A description of the process, oper-
cating which employees were actually ation, or activity and how the data
monitored. support the determination; and
(iii) The employer shall ensure that (E) Other data relevant to the proc-
exposure records are maintained and ess, operation, activity, material, or
made available in accordance with 29 employee exposures.
CFR 1910.1020. (iii) The employer shall ensure that
(2) Historical monitoring data. (i) objective data are maintained and
Where the employer has relied on his- made available in accordance with 29
torical monitoring data to determine CFR 1910.1020.
exposure to chromium (VI), the em- (4) Medical surveillance. (i) The em-
ployer shall establish and maintain an ployer shall establish and maintain an
199
accurate record for each employee cov- identical to those set forth at 1910.1044 of
ered by medical surveillance under this chapter.
paragraph (i) of this section. [61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
(ii) The record shall include the fol-
lowing information about the em- 1915.1045 Acrylonitrile.
ployee:
(A) Name and social security number; yard employment under this section are
(B) A copy of the PLHCPs written identical to those set forth at 1910.1045 of
opinions; this chapter.
(C) A copy of the information pro-
[61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
vided to the PLHCP as required by
paragraph (i)(4) of this section. 1915.1047 Ethylene oxide.
medical records are maintained and NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship-
made available in accordance with 29 yard employment under this section are
CFR 1910.1020.
this chapter.
(l) Dates. (1) For employers with 20 or
more employees, all obligations of this [61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
section, except engineering controls re-
quired by paragraph (e) of this section, 1915.1048 Formaldehyde.
commence November 27, 2006. NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship-
(2) For employers with 19 or fewer yard employment under this section are
employees, all obligations of this sec- identical to those set forth at 1910.1048 of
tion, except engineering controls re- this chapter.
quired by paragraph (e) of this section, [61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
commence May 30, 2007.
(3) For all employers, engineering 1915.1050 Methylenedianiline.
controls required by paragraph (e) of
this section shall be implemented no
later than May 31, 2010. identical to those set forth at 1910.1050 of
[71 FR 10378, Feb. 28, 2006] this chapter.
[61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
1915.1027 Cadmium.
NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship- 1915.1052 Methylene chloride.
this chapter.
identical to those set forth at 29 CFR
[61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996] 1910.1052.
[62 FR 1619, Jan. 10, 1997]
1915.1028 Benzene.
NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship- 1915.1200 Hazard communication.
identical to those set forth at 1910.1028 of NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship-
this chapter. yard employment under this section are
1915.1030 Bloodborne pathogens. [61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
NOTE: The requirements applicable to ship- 1915.1450 Occupational exposure to

yard employment under this section are hazardous chemicals in labora-
identical to those set forth at 1910.1030 of tories.
this chapter.
[61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
1915.1044 1,2-dibromo-3-
this chapter.
chloropropane.
[61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
200

Shipyard Safety PDF

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Shipyard Safety PDF

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt.

(2) Except as provided in paragraph occasion that OSHA intends to either

Subparts QY [Reserved] ers Compensation Act, as amended (33

deemed to be the responsibilities of the ations, conversions, installations,

welding, burning or other fire or spark reference in the corresponding sections

29 CFR citation OMB con- Assistant Secretary means the Assist-

Inert or inerted atmosphere means an (2) The concentration of flammable

shall be insulated. Staging shall be (14) All employees doing exterior

Subpart DWelding, Cutting and (3) When sufficient ventilation can-

burners shall be protected in the same piratory protective equipment shall be

splices whose insulating quality is containing the circuit conductor or

supports, taut wire or fiber rope of ade- 1915.72 Ladders.

1915.74 Access to vessels. imum height of approximately 33

(2) When the ventilation ducts re- Subpart FGeneral Working

(2) Temporary lights shall be safe working pressure of the vessels

as provided in 1915.51(c)(3), or when an 1915.97 Health and sanitation.

TABLE E1DIMENSIONS AND SPACING OF WOOD INDEPENDENT-POLE SCAFFOLD MEMBERS

TABLE E2SPECIFICATIONS FOR SIDE RAILS OF LADDERS

TABLE E3SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF HORSES

inches inches inches

2 x 10 1 58 x 9 12 2 x 12 158 x 1112 3x8 2 58 x 7 1 2 3 x 10 2 58 x 9 1 2 3 x 12 258 x 1112

6 ..................................... 256 309 526 667 807

TABLE G1MANILA ROPE

lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs.

TABLE G1MANILA ROPEContinued

lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs.

Rope diameter Vertical Choker

Two-leg bridle or basket hitch

Vertical 60 bridle 45 bridle 30 bridle

Two-leg bridle or basket hitch

Vertical 60 bridle 45 bridle 30 bridle

Rope diameter Vertical Choker

114 ........................................... 12 11 9.8 9.2 8.3 7.4

Two-leg bridle or basket hitch

Vertical 60 bridle 45 bridle 30 bridle

Two-leg bridle or basket hitch

Vertical 60 bridle 45 bridle 30 bridle

118 ............................... 21 19 17 18 16 14 15 13 12 10 9.5 8.4

114 ............................... 25 22 20 21 19 17 17 16 14 12 11 9.8

TABLE G6NUMBER AND SPACING OF U-BOLT TABLE G8ALLOY STEEL CHAIN

Number of clips Min- Nominal size chain stock Single 60 45 30

TABLE G7WROUGHT IRON CHAIN TABLE G9MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE WEAR AT

connecting other components of a per- personal fall protection equipment, and

(ii) What PPE is necessary; employee uses appropriate eye or face

TABLE I1FILTER LENSES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST RADIANT ENERGYContinued

Air carbon .......................................... (Light) ............................................... Less than ......................................... 10

FILTER LENSES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST RADIANT ENERGY

Z89.l1986, Personnel ProtectionPro- (c) Electrical protective devices. The

employees to reach safety in the event (7) On suspended scaffolds or similar

EYE AND FACE PROTECTION SELECTION CHART

EYE AND FACE PROTECTION SELECTION CHARTContinued

Irritating mists ................ Special-purpose goggles.

1915.164 Ships propulsion machin- accessories, the employer shall ensure

(d) A certification record of such ex- Subpart LElectrical Machinery

as vessels, vessel sections, fabricating 1915.504 Fire watches.

an organization is expected to use the ployer must evacuate all employees

(x) The means of communication des- Contract employeran employer, such

and responsibilities of shipyard fire- Inertingthe displacement of the at-

Abate; see Temephos.

Acrylonitrile; see 1915.1045 ...................... 107131

Butadiene (1,3-Butadiene); see 29 CFR

2-Chloroethanol; see Ethylene chlorohydrin.

p-Dichlorobenzene ....................................... 106467 75 450